ذدà،±ل                >  ‏ے	            \   †-         ˆ-     ‏ےےے    *-  +-  ,-  --  .-  /-  0-  1-  2-  3-  4-  5-  6-  7-  8-  9-  :-  ;-  <-  =-  >-  ?-  @-  A-  B-  C-  D-  E-  F-  G-  H-  I-  J-  K-  L-  M-  N-  O-  P-  Q-  R-  S-  T-  U-  V-  W-  X-  Y-  Z-  [-  \-  ]-  ^-  _-  `-  a-  b-  c-  d-  e-  f-  g-  h-  i-  j-  k-  l-  m-  n-  o-  p-  q-  r-  s-  t-  u-  v-  w-  x-  y-  z-  {-  |-  }-  ~-  -  €-  پ-  ‚-  ƒ-  „-  …-  ےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےےى¥ء #`	  ً؟             ڑ7V  bjbj\.\.                  	 4XV >D >D ب؟F                             ےے         ےے         ےے                 ¤     ¤      ¤  ¤      ¤      ¤      ¤      ¤             ب  ô  @à      @à      @à      @à  ô
  4ë  ¬  ¼      2¶ ¶   ى	     ى	     ى	     ى	     ى	     ا
     ا
     ا
     ½j    ؟j     ؟j     ؟j     ؟j     ؟j     ؟j $   è¶ h  P¹ ‚   مj 	K                  ¤      ف                     ا
     ا
     ف     ف     مj             ¤      ¤      ى	             ى	 غ   ىµ    ص     ص     ص     ف   ¤      ى	     ¤      ى	     ½j             ص                                                     ف     ½j             ص             ص     ¤      ¤                                                              ص     ى	     à	     ‘e$ا        @à      û ع  ص             ٌ جU  ¶ 0   2¶     ص     ز¹     ص     ز¹     ص                                                                             ز¹             ¤      ص    ا
 ئ  چ D  ص     ر   ص                                   ا
     ا
     ا
     مj     مj                                     ص                                     ا
     ا
     ا
     2¶     ف     ف     ف     ف             ¼      ¼      ¼  „إ  @à      ¼      ¼      ¼      @à      ¸  ¤   \  h   ؤ     ¤      ¤      ¤      ¤      ¤      ¤      ےےےے                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       %>"<%% -GREEK-ENGLISH   LEXICONOF   THENEW TESTAMENTBEING QLtstamtntiTRANSLATED  REVISED AND  ENLARGEDBYJOSEPH HENRY THAYER, D.D.HON.   LITT.D.   DUBLINLATE BtTSSEY PROFESSOR OF NEW TESTAMENT  CRITICISM AND  INTERPMSTATIOK IK THE DIVINITY SCHOOL OF HARVARD UNIVERSITYFOURTH EDITIONEDINBURGH T.   &   T.   CLAEK    3 8   GEOEGE   STEEET[All rights reserved^Fourth Edition   ....      Printed   1901Eeprinted 1905, 1908, 1914, 1930 and 1951PRINTED IN GREAT  BRITAIH BYMOEKISON    AND    GIBB   LIMITEDFORT.   &   T.   CLARK,   EDINBURGHNEW  YORK :  CHARLES  SCRIBNER's  SONSPREFACE.''TN3WABDS the close of the year 1862, the "Arnoldische Buchhandlung" in Leipzig JL published the First Part of a Greek-Latin Lexicon of the New Testament, prepared, upon the basis of the " Clavis Novi Testamenti Philologica" of C. G. Wilke (second edition, 2 vols. 1851), by Professor C. L. Wilibald Ghimm of Jena. In his Prospectus Professor Grimm announced it as his purpose not only (in accordance with the improvements in classical lexicography embodied in the Paris edition of Stephen's Thesaurus and in the fifth edition of Passow's Dictionary edited by Eost and his coadjutors) to exhibit the historical growth of a word's significations and accordingly in selecting his vouchers for New Testament usage to show at what time and in what class of writers a given word became .current, but also duly to notice the usage of the Septuagint and of the Old Testament Apocrypha, and especially to produce a Lexicon which should correspond to the present condition of textual criticism, of exegesis, and of biblical theology. He devoted more than seven years to his task. The successive Parts of his work received, as they appeared, the outspoken commendation of scholars diverging as widely in their views as Hupfeld and Hengstenberg; and since its completion in 1868 it has been generally acknowledged to be by far the best Lexicon of the New Testament extant.An arrangement was early made with Professor Grimm and his publisher to reproduce the book in English, and an announcement of the same was given in the Bibliotheca Sacra for October 1864 (p. 886). The work of translating was promptly begun; but it was protracted by engrossing professional duties, and in particular by the necessity — as it seemed — of preparing the authorized translation of Ltinemann's edition of Winer's New Testament Grammar, which was followed by a translation of the New Testament Grammar of Alexander Buttmann. Meantime a new edition of Professor Grimm's work was called for. To the typographical accuracy of this edition liberal contributions were made from this side the water. It appeared in its completed form in 1879. " Admirable ", " unequalled ", " invaluable ", are some of the epithets it elicited from eminent judges in England; while as representing the estimate of the book by competent critics in Germany a few sentences may be quoted from Professor Schurer's review of it in the Theologische Literaturzeitung for January 5, 1878: "The use of Professor Grimm's book for years has convinced me that it is not only unquestionably the best among existing New Testament Lexicons, but that, apart from all comparisons, it is a workVI                                                               PREFACE.of the highest intrinsic merit, and one which is admirably adapted to initiate a learner into an acquaintance with the language of the New Testament. It ought to be regarded by every student as one of the first and most necessary requisites for the study of the New Testament, and consequently for the study of Theology in general."Both Professor Grimm and his publisher courteously gave me permission to make such changes in his work as might in my judgment the better adapt it to the needs of English-speaking students. But the emphatic commendation it called out from all quarters, in a strain similar to the specimens just given, determined me to dismiss the thought of issuing a new book prepared on my predecessor's as a basis, and — alike in justice to him and for the satisfaction of students — to reproduce his second edition in its integrity (with only the silent correction of obvious oversights), and to introduce my additions in such a form as should render them distinguishable-at once from Professor Grimm's work. (See [] in the list of " Explanations and Abbreviations" given below.) This decision has occasionally imposed on me some reserve and entailed some embarrassments. But notwithstanding all minor drawbacks the procedure will, I am sure, commend itself in the end, not only on the score of justice to the independent claims and responsibility of both authors, but also on account of the increased assurance (or, at least, the broader outlook) thus afforded the student respecting debatable matters, — whether of philology, of criticism, or of interpretation.Some of the leading objects with the editor in his work of revision were stated in connection with a few specimen pages privately printed and circulated in 1881, and may here be repeated in substance as follows: to verify all references (biblical, classical, and — so far as practicable — modern); to note more generally the extra-biblical usage of words; to give the derivation of words in cases where it is agreed upon by the best etymologists and is of interest to the general student; to render complete the enumeration of (representative) verbal forms actually found in the New Testament (and exclude all others); to append to every verb a list of those of its compounds which occur in the Greek Testament; to supply the New Testament passages accidentally omitted in words marked at the end with an asterisk; to note more fully the variations in the Greek text of current editions; to introduce brief discussions of New Testament synonyms; to give the more noteworthy renderings not only of the "Authorized Version" but also of the Eevised New Testament; to multiply cross references; references to grammatical works, both sacred (Winer, Buttmann, Green, etc.) and classical (Ktihner, Krttger, Jelf, Donaldson, Goodwin, etc.); also to the best English and American Commentaries (Lightfoot, Ellicott, Westcott, Alford, Morison, Beet, Hackett, Alexander, The Speaker's Commentary, The New Testament Commentary, etc.), as well as to the latest exegetical works that have appeared on the Continent (Weiss, Heinrici, Keil, Godet, Oltramare, etc.); and to the recent Bible Dictionaries and Cyclopaedias (Smith, Alexander's Kitto, McClintock and Strong, the completed Eiehm, the new Herzog, etc.), besides the various Lives of Christ and of the Apostle Paul.Eespecting a few of these specifications an additional remark or two may be in place:One of the most prominent and persistent embarrassments encountered by the New Testament lexicographer is occasioned by the diversity of readings in the current editions of the Greek text.   A slight change in the form or even in the punctuation of a passage mayPREFACE.                                                              VIIentail a change in its construction, and consequently in its classification in the Lexicon. In the absence of an acknowledged consensus of scholars in favor of any one of the extant printed texts to the exclusion of its rivals, it is incumbent on any Lexicon which aspires after general currency to reckon alike with them all. Professor Grimm originally took account of the text of the ' Eeceptus', together with that of Griesbach, of Lachmann, and of Tischendorf. In his second edition, he made occasional reference also to the readings of Tregelles. In the present work not only have the textual statements of Grimm's second edition undergone thorough revision (see, for example, " Griesbach " in the list of " Explanations and Abbreviations "), but the readings (whether in the text or the margin) of the editions of Tregelles and of Westcott and Hort have also been carefully noted.Again: the frequent reference, in the discussion of synonymous terms, to the distinctions holding in classic usage (as they are laid down by Schmidt in his voluminous work) must not be regarded as designed to modify the definitions given in the several articles. On the contrary, the exposition of classic usage is often intended merely to serve as a standard of comparison by which the direction and degree of a word's change in meaning can be measured. When so employed, the information given will often start suggestions alike interesting and instructive.On points of etymology the statements of Professor Grimm have been allowed to stand, although, in form at least, they often fail to accord with modern philological methods. But they have been supplemented by references to the works of Curtius and Fick, or even more frequently, perhaps, to the Etymological Dictionary of Vanicek, as the most compendious digest of the views of specialists. The meaning of radical words and of the component parts of compounds is added, except when it is indubitably suggested by the derivative, or when such words may be found in their proper place in the Lexicon.The nature and use of the New Testament writings require that the lexicographer should not be hampered by a too rigid adherence to the rules of scientific lexicography. A student often wants to know not so much the inherent meaning of a word as the particular sense it bears in a given context or discussion: — or, to state the same truth from another point of view, the lexicographer often cannot assign a particular New Testament reference to one or another of the acknowledged significations of a word without indicating his exposition of the passage in which the reference occurs. In such a case he is compelled to assume, at least to some extent, the functions of the exegete, although he can and should refrain from rehearsing the general arguments which support the interpretation adopted, as well as from arraying the objections to opposing interpretations.Professor Grimm, in his Preface, with reason calls attention to the labor he has expended upon the explanation of doctrinal terms, while yet guarding himself against encroaching upon the province of the dogmatic theologian. In this particular the editor has endeavored to enter into his labors. Any one who consults such articles as ahov, atanoos, /?a<nA«'a. rov Otov etc., SiVaios and its cognates, Sofa, eArn's, fun;, ftWros, 0eos, Koa-fios, Kvptos, irio-TK, TTveC/to, crdpi, a-o^ta, a-ut^ta and its cognates, vlbs rov avdpunmv, vLos tov Ocov, Xpurros, and the like, will find, it is believed, all the materials needed for a complete exposition of the biblical contents of those terms. On the comparatively few points respecting which doctrinal opinions still differ, references have beenTill             .                                          PREFACE.added to representative discussions on both sides, or to authors whose views may be regarded as supplementing or correcting those of Professor Grimm.Convenience often prescribes that the archaeological or historical facts requisite to the understanding of a passage be given the student on the spot, even though he be referred for fuller information to the works specially devoted to such topics. In this particular, too, the editor has been guided by the example of his predecessor; yet with the constant exercise of self-restraint lest the book be encumbered with unnecessary material, and be robbed of that succinctness which is one of the distinctive excellences of the original.In making his supplementary references and remarks the editor has been governed at different times by different considerations, corresponding to the different classes for whose use the Lexicon is designed. Primarily, indeed, it is intended to satisfy the needs and to guide the researches of the average student; although the specialist will often find it serviceable, and on the other hand the beginner will find that he has not been forgotten. Accordingly, a caveat must be entered against the hasty inference that the mention of a different interpretation from that given by Professor Grimm always and of necessity implies dissent from him. It may be intended merely to inform the student that the meaning of the passage is still in debate. And the particular works selected for reference have been chosen — now because they seem best suited to supplement the statements or references of the origi-' nal; now because they furnish the most copious references to other discussions of the same topic; now because they are familiar works or those to which a student can readily get access; now, again, because unfamiliar and likely otherwise to escape him altogether.It is in deference, also, to the wants of the ordinary student that the references to grammatical works — particularly Winer and Buttmann — have been greatly multiplied. The expert can easily train his eye to run over them ; and yet even for him they may have their use, not only as giving him the opinion of eminent philologists on a passage in question, but also as continually recalling his attention to those philological considerations on which the decision of exegetical questions must mainly rest.Moreover, in the case of a literature so limited in compass as the New Testament, it seems undesirable that even a beginner should be subjected to the inconvenience, expense, and especially the loss of facility, incident to a change of text-books. He will accordingly find that not only have his wants been heeded in the body of the Lexicon, but that at the close of the Appendix a list of verbal forms has been added especially for his benefit. The other portions of the Appendix will furnish students interested in the history of the New Testament vocabulary, or investigating questions—whether of criticism, authorship, or biblical theology — which involve its word-lists, with fuller and more trustworthy collections than can be found elsewhere.Should I attempt, in conclusion, to record the names of all those who during the many years in which this work has been preparing have encouraged or assisted me by word or pen, by counsel or book, the list would be a long one. Express acknowledgments, however, must be made to George B. Jewett, D.D., of Salem and to Professor "W. W. Eaton now of Middlebury College, Vermont.     The former has verified and re-verified all the biblical and classicalPREFACE.                                                              IXreferences, besides noting in the main the various readings of the critical texts, and rendering valuable aid in correcting many of the proofs; the latter has gathered the passages omitted from words marked with a final asterisk, completed and corrected the enumeration of verbal forms, catalogued the compound verbs, had an eye to matters of etymology and accentuation, and in many other particulars given the work the benefit of his conscientious and scholarly labor. To these names one other would be added were it longer written on earth. Had the lamented Dr. Abbot been spared to make good his generous offer to read the final proofs, every user of the book would doubtless have had occasion to thank him. He did, however, go through the manuscript and add with his own hand the variant verse-notation, in accordance with the results of investigation subsequently given to the learned world in his Excursus on the subject published in the First Part of the Prolegomena to Tischendorf's Editio Octava Critica Major.To Dr. Caspar Kene Gregory of Leipzig (now Professor-elect at Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore) my thanks are due for the privilege of using the sheets of the Prolegomena just named in advance of their publication; and to the Delegates of the Clarendon Press, Oxford, for a similar courtesy in the case of the Seventh Edition of Liddell and Scott's Lexicon.No one can have a keener sense than the editor has of the shortcomings of the present volume. But he is convinced that whatever supersedes it must be the joint product of several laborers, having at their command larger resources than he has enjoyed, and ampler leisure than falls to the lot of the average teacher. Meantime, may the present work so approve itself to students of the Sacred Volume as to enlist their co-operation with him in ridding it of every remaining blemish— iva 6 Xoyog tov icupiov Tp&xxi Ka' So£a£i/T(u.J. H. THAYER.Cambridge, Massachusetts.Dec. 25, 1885.In issuing this "Corrected Edition" opportunity has been taken not only to revise the supplementary pages (725 sq.), but to add in the body of the work (as circumstances permitted) an occasional reference to special monographs on Biblical topics which have been published during the last three years, as well as to the Fourth Volume of Schmidt's Synonymik (1886), and also to works which (like Meisterhans) have appeared in an improved edition. The Third edition (1888) of Grimm, however, has yielded little new material; and Dr. Hatch's " Essays in Biblical Greek " comes to hand too late to permit references to its valuable discussions of words to be inserted.To the correspondents, both in England and this country, who have called my attention to errata, I beg to express my thanks; and I would earnestly ask all who use the book to send me similar favors in time to come : — dreXh oi8h> ovSevosApril 10, 1889.LIST  OF ANCIENT  AUTHORSQUOTED   OR   REFERRED   TO   IN   THE   LEXICON.K. B. In the preparation of this list, free use has been made of the lists in the Lexicons of Liddell and Scott and of Sophocles, also of Freund's Trienninm Philologicum (1874) vols. i. and ii., of Smith's Dictionary of Greek and Roman Biography, of Smith and Wace's Dictionary of Christian Biography, of Engelmann's Bibliotheca Scriptorum Classicorum (8th ed. 1880), and of other current works of reference.   An asterisk (*) before a date denotes birth, an obelisk (t) death.Achilles Tatius.......Acts of Paul and Thecla, of Pilate, of Thomas, of Peter and Paid, of Barnabas, etc., at the earliest from   ...Aelian...........Aeschines  ..........        345Abschtlus.........*525, t456Aesop1...........        570Aetius...........Agathabchides........     117?Alcaettb Mytilenaetjs.....        610Alciphkon..........Alcman...........        610Alexander Apheodisiensis   .   .   .Alexis...........        350Ambrose, Bp. of Milan......Ammianus Mabcellinus     .... Ammonius, the grammarian ....Anacbeon2..........        530Anaxandbides.......        350Anaximander.........        580Andocides..........        405AntIphanes.........        380Antiphon..........        412Antoninus, M. Aurelitts   ....Apollodorus of Athens.....        140Afollonius Dyscolus.....Apollonius Rhodius......        200Appian.........- .   .Appuleius..........Aquila (translator of the O. T.)    .   .Aratus...........        270Archilochus.........        700Abchimedes, the mathematician   .    .        250 Akchttas..........c. 400A.D.500?2d cent, on c. 180c. 500200? 200374t c. 400 390tl80140150 160(2d cent, (under i      Hulriu.)1 But the current Fables are not his; on the History of Greek Fable, Bee Rutherford, Babrins, Introd. ch. ii.* Only a few fragments of the odes ascribed to him are genuine.B.C.           A.D.Aretaeus..........                  80?Aristaenetus........                 4503Aristeas1..........        270Aristides, P. Aelius.....                 160Aristophanes........*444, t380Aristophanes, the grammarian    .   .   .   200Aristotle.........*384, t322Arrian (pupil and friend of Epictetns)                 *c. 100Artemidorus   Daldianus    (oneiro-critica)...........                 160Athanasius.........                 t373Athenaeus, the grammarian    .   .   .                228Athenagoras of Athens.....                 177?Augustine, Bp. of Hippo.....                t430Ausonius, Decimus Magnus    ...                 t c. 390Babrius (see Rutherford, Babrius, Intr.ch. i.)........(some say 50?)   c. 225Barnabas, Epistle written     ....                 c. 100 ?Baruch, Apocryphal Book of ....                  c. 75 ?Basilica, the 2.........                 c. 900Basil the Great, Bp. of Caesarea    .                t379Basil of Selencia........                450Bel and the Dragon.......2d cent. ?Bion............        200Caesar, Gaius Julius    .   .    tMarch 15,44Callimachus..........   260Canons and Constitutions, Apostolic .    .                 Mana^hcw.Capitolinus, Julius (one of the " Hist.August, scriptores sex")     ....                 c. 310Cebes ............        399Cedbenus..........                 10501  But his letter is spurious; see Body, De Bibl. text. orig. 1. i. j A. Kurz, Arist. ep. etc. (Bern 1872).2  The law-book of the Byzantine Empire, founded upon the work of Justinian and consisting of sixty books.   It was begun under the emperor Basil of Macedonia (t886), completed under his sob Leo, and revised in 945 under Gonstantine Porphyrogenitus; (ed. Heimbaeh, 6 vols. 1833-70}Ancient Authors.XIIAncient Authors.Rb        A.D.Cblsus, A. Cornelius, the medicalwriter...........                20Chares...........        320Chariton..........               450 ?Chrysippus of Tyana (in Athenaeus)                ? Chrysostom, Dio, the orator, see Dio Otcya. Chbysostom, John, Bp. of Constantinople ...........                 t407Ciceko..........tDec. 7,43Clemens, Alexandrinus.....                200Clemens Romanus, Epistle written   .                93-97Cleomedes..........                100?CoLUMELLA  ..........                   50CONSTANTINITS         PORPHYROGENITUS,emperor from........               911-959Constitutiones apostolicae......                  m ana m cent.Cratinus..........       t423Critias...........        411Ctesias...........        401Curtius...........                  50Cyprian...........                  t257Cyril of Alexandria......                  t444Cyril of Jerusalem   .......                  f386Demooritus.........        430Demosthenes........*385, t322Dexippus, the historian.....                  c. 270Didymus of Alexandria    .....                  c. 395Dio Cassius.........                  200Dio Chrysostom.......                  100Diocles...........        470DlODORUS  SlCULUS.......           40Diogenes Laertius......                  c. 200DlOGNETUS, Epistle to......                  2d or 3d centDionysius Pseudo-Areopagita   .              %                                    5 0 0   ?  D i o n y s i u s   o f   H a l i c a r n a s s u s   . . . .                     3 0  D i o n y s i u s   P e r i e g e t e s . . . . .                                     3 0 0 ?  D l O S C O R I D E S . . . . . . . . .                                     1 0 0 ?  D i p h i l u s . . . . . . . . . .                 3 0 0  E c c l e s i a s t i c u s     ( W i s d o m     o f     J e s u s     t h e  S o n   o f   S i r a c h ;   G r k .   t r a n s . )     .   .    . c. 132?Ennius...........      tl69Enoch, Book of.......2d cent, onEphrem Syrus........                c. 375Epichakmus.........        480Epictetus..........                100Epicurus.........*342, t27OEpiMENIDES..........        600Epiphanius, Bp. of Salamis  ....                       t403Eratosthenes.........t c. 196Esdras, First Booh of( Vulgate Third) 1st cent. ?Esdras, Second Book of( Vulgate Fourth)                1st cent. ?Esther, Additions to......2d cent. ?Etymologicum Magnum    .......                              1000?EuBULUS...........        350Euclid...........        300Eupolis...........        429Euripides.........*480, t406Eusebius, Bp. of Csesareax   .   .   .   .                t c. 340 Eustathius of Constantinople, grammarian ...........                   11601 Called Pampblli (as friend of the martyr Pamphilus).B.C.         A.D. Euthymius Zigabenus or Zigadenus(Zygadenus).........                1100Florus, Julius........               c. 125Galen............                 #131, tc. 197Gellius,  Aulus   (author of  NoctesAtticae)..........                 150Genesius..........                 950Geoponica (20 bks. on agriculture compiled by Cassianus Bassus) ....                 c. 925 Gekmanus    of    Constantinople,   theyounger..........                 c. 1230Gorgias of Leontini.......        430Gregory of Nazianzus......                 t390Gregory of Nyssa.......                 f395Harpocration  (lexicon  to the   TenAttic Orators)........                 350?Hecataecs..........        510Hegesippus (quoted in Eusebius) .   .               c. 175Heliodorus, Bp. of Tricca in Thessaly               390 ?Heraclides Ponticus (but the Alleg.Homer, are spurious)......        390Heraclitus.........         500Hermas...........                140*Hermippus..........         432Hermogenes.........                 170Hero Alexandrinus......       250Herodian, the grammarian  ....                 160Herodian, the historian.....                 t240Herodotus......... *484, t408Hesiod...........850?Hesychius of Alexandria, the lexicographer   ...........                 600?Hierocxes..........                 450Hieronymus, see Jerome.Himerius..........                 360Hippocrates.........        430Hippolytus.........               225Hipponax..........        540Hirtius (the continuator of Caesar'sCommentaries)........        t43Homer...........900?Horapollo, grammarian.....               400!Horace...........         t8Hyperides..........       t322Ignatius...........               c. 110Irenaeus, Bp. of Lyons.....                178Isaeus............        370Isidokus Hispalensis, Bp. of Seville               f636Isocrates........."436, t338Jamblichus..........               300Jeremiah, Ep. of (6th ch. of Baruch)                     1st cent ?Jerome (Sophronius (?) Eusebius Hie-ronymus)..........                t420Joannes Damascenus......                730Joannes Moschus.......                f620Josephus..........                75Judith .   .'..........175-100Julian, Roman emperor from    .   .   .               361-363Justinian, Roman emperor from   .   .                527-565Justin, the historian......                150?Justin Martyr........                150Juvenal...........                100Ancient Authors.XIIIAncient Authors.B.C.           A.D.Lactantius.........,                  310Lampridius, the historian.....                  310Leo ' Philosophus', emperor ....                  886Libanius, the rhetorician.....                  350Litt............         *59    tl7LoNGINUS..........                250Long us...........                400?Lucan, the epic poet......                t65Lucian of Samosata, the satirist    .   .                 160 ?Lucilius, the Roman satirist     .    .   .      f 103 LtrcBETitrs, the Eoman poet ....        t55Lycophbon..........    e. 270Lycubgus of Athens, the orator   .   .      t329Ltncbus...........       300Ltsias, the Athenian orator, openedhis school..........        410Ltsippus...........        434Macabius..........                 c. 350Maccabees, First Book of    .   .   .   .     105-63 ?Maccabees, Second Book of.....c. 75 ?Maccabees, Third Book of.....                c. 40 ?Maccabees, Fourth Book of .   .   .   .   1st. cent ?Machon...........        280Macrobius .   .   .'.......                 420Malalas, John, the annalist    .   .   .                 600 ?Manasses, Prayer of......1st cent, ?Manetho, the Egyptian priest   .   .   .       300Makcion...........                 140Maximus Ttbius.......        150Mela, Pomponius, the Eoman geographer ...........                 45Meleageb, the founder of the epigram, anthologies.......          60Melito, Bp. of Sardis......                c. 175Menandeb, the poet.......        325Menander, the Byzantine historian   .                583Mimnermus, the poet   ......    c. 600Moekis, the "Atticist" and lexicographer  ...........                2d cent.Mosohion..........                 110?Moschus..........        200Mhsonius Rufus.......                 66Nemesius..........                400?Nepos...........*90, t24NlCANDER..........        160?Nicephorus, patriarch of Constantinople...........                 t828Nicephorus Bryennius, the historian ............               tll37Nicephorus Gregoras, Byzantine historian    ...........                 tl359Nicetas Acominatbs (also Choniates), Byzantine historian......                 1200Nicodemus, Gospel of, see Ads of PilateNicolaus Damascenes.....         14Nicomachus Gerasenus.....                50Nilus, the pupil and friend of JohnChrysostom.........                420Nonnus of Panopolis in Upper Egypt, the poet..........                500 ?Numenius of Apameia, the philosopher (as quoted by Origen) ....                 c. 150B.C            A.D.Numenius (as quoted by Athen.)   .   .    c. 350 Ocellus Lucanus   .......     400?Oecumenius, Bp. of Tricca  ....                   950 ?Olympiodorus, the Neo-Platonic philosopher    ..........                   525Oppian of Anazarbus in Cilicia (auth.of the SiAifVTMd).......                 180 ?Oppian of Apameia in Syria (auth. ofthe Kvvriy(Tiled)........                210?Origen...........                 tc. 254Orosius Paulus........                415Orphica, the..........                 ?Ovid............                 f 17Palaephatus .........            ?Papias, Bp. of Hierapolis, first half of                2d cent.Pausanias..........                 160Petrus Alexandrinus.....                T311Phalaris, spurious epistles of   ...                 1Phavorinds, Vabinus1.....Philemon, Comicus......       330Philo............                39Philodemus.........          50Philostbatus.........                 237Phocylidbs.........        540Pseudo-Phocylides   (in   the   Sibyl.Orac.,q.v.).........                1st cent. 1Photius (Patriarch of Constantinople)                 850Phrynichcs, the grammarian   .   .   .                 180Phylabchus.........        210Pindar   .   . *521 (4 yrs. after Aeschylus), t441 Plato, Comicus, contemporary of Aristophanes ..........       427Plato, the philosopher.....*427, t347Plautus...........      tl84Pliny the elder, the naturalist   .   .   .                 t79Pliny the younger, the nephew andadopted son of the preceding   ...                 fH3Plotinus, the philosopher     ....                 t27OPlutabch..........                 tl20Pollux, author of the ovofiaariKov .    .                 180Polyaenus, author of the crrpaTi\yl\-fiara............                   163Polybius..........       tl22Polycarp..........                   tlS5,Feb.23Pobphyry, pupil of Plotinus ....                   270Posidipfus..........        280Posiponius, philosopher (teacher  of Cicero and Pompey)   ...:..           78Pboclus, philosopher......                   450Pbopebtius.........*48, tl6Protevangelium Jacobi......                 2d cent.Psalter of Solomon........63-48?Psellus the younger, philosopher .   .                 1050Ptolemy, the geographer.....                 160Pythagobas.........         531Quintilian,   rhetorieian,   teacher  ofPliny the younger.......               t95Quintus Smybnaeus......                380?1 The Latin name of tlie Italian Guarino Faworino, who died A. d. 1537, and was the author of a Greek Lexicon eompiled mainly from Sui'das, Hesychius, Harpooration, Eustathius, and Pluyni-ohus.   1st ed. Rome, 1523, and often elsewhere liAncient Authors.Ancient Authors.B.C.         A.D.Sallust   ..........*86, t35Sapientia (Sal.), see Wisdom of Solomon.Sappho...........        610Seneca, L. Annaeus, the philosopher(son of the rhetorician).....                  J65Septuagint, Greek translation of O.T. c. 280-150Sexttjs Emfiricus.......                 225 ?SibyUine Oracles, of various dates, ranging perhaps from     .......         170    loll. 4U.MB1Silius Italicus, poet......                 tlOlSimonides of AmorgOB, " Iambo-graphus"..........        693Simonides of Ceos (author of the epitaph on the Spartans that fell at Thermopylae)........        525Simplicius, the commentator on Aristotle and Epictetus......                 500Sirach, see Ecclesiasticus.Socrates 'Scholasticus', of Constantinople, historian......   .                439Socbatbs (in Stobaeus).....Solinus, surnamed Polyhistor   .    .   .               300 ?Solomon, Psalms of, see Psalter etc.Solomon, Wisdom of, see Wisdom etc.Solon, the lawgiver and poet....        594Song of the Three Children ....   2d cent. ?Sophocles.........*496, t406Sophbonius of Damascus.....                638SoTADES...........             1Sozomen, historian.......                450Statius, the Roman poet.....                t96Stobaeus, i. e. John of Stobi in Macedonia (compiler of Anthol.)     .    .    .                500?Stkabo, the geographer.....         *66    t24Stkaton, epigrammatist.....                1501Stratus, comic poet......        407Suetonius, the  historian, friend  ofPliny the younger.......               tl60Suidas, the lexicographer.....                1100?Susanna..........1st cent. ?Stmmachus (translator of the O. T.into Greek).........                200 ?Synesius,   pagan    philosopher    andbishop of Ptolemais......                410Tacitus...........                tc. 117Tatian...........                c. 160Teaching of the Twelve Apostles    ...                               2dcent. ?Terence ......   .....       t]59B.C.          A.D.Tertcllian.........               t220?Testaments of the Twelve Patriarchs .   .               c. 125 ?Theages...........           1Themistics..........               355Theocritus.........       280Theodohet..........               420Theodorus Metochita.....                1300Theodotion (translator of O. T. intoGreek) before........                160Theognis..........        540Theophilus, Bp. of Antioch ....                180Theophrastub, pupil and successor ofAristotle..........        322Theophtlact, Abp. of Bulgaria   .   .                1078Theophtlact Simocatta    ....               610Thomas Magistbr, lexicographer andgrammarian.........                1310Thuctdidbs.........        423Tibullus..........        tl8Timaeus, the historian of Sicily     .   .        260 Timaeus the Sophist, author of Lexiconto Plato..........               250?Timaeus of Locri, Pythagorean philosopher    ..........     375?Timon, the " Sillographus " or satirist .    c 279Timocubs..........       350Tobit............c. 200?Trtphioporus, a versifier     ....                 400 ?Tzetzes, Byzantine grammarian andpoet............                 1150Valerius Maximcs......                 30Varro, " vir  Komanorum eruditissi-mus" (Quintil.)........        t26Vegbtius, on the art of war ....                 4201Vergil   ...........        tl9Vitruvius, the only Roman writer onarchitecture.........          30Vopiscus, historian (cf. Capitolinus) .                  c. 310Wisdom of Solomon   (abbr. Sap.)    .  . c. 100 ? Xbnophanes, founder of the Eleaticphilosophy.........        540Xenophon  .   .   .   . ..,     (Anabasis)        401XenophOn of Ephesus, romancer   .   .                   400 ?Zeno of Citium   ........        290Zenodotus, first librarian at Alexandria ............        280Zonaras, the chronicler     .....                   1118Zosimus, Roman historian      ....                   420LIST OF BOOKSREFERRED TO MERELY BY THEIR AUTHOR'S NAME OR BY SOME EXTREMEABRIDGMENT OF THE TITLE.Albert! = Joannes Alberti, Observationes Philologicae in sacros Novi Foederis Libros.   Lugd. Bat., 1725.Aristotle: when pages are cited, *the reference is to the edition of the Berlin Academy (edited by Bekker and Brandis; index by Bonitz) 5 vols. 4to, 1831-1870. Of the Ehetoric, Sandys's edition of Cope (3 vols., Cambridge, 1877) has been used.Baumlein = W. Baumlein, Untersuchungen fiber griechi-sche Partikeln.    Stuttgart, 1861.B.D. = Br. "William Smith's Dictionary of the Bible, 3 vols. London, 1860-64. The American.edition (4 vols., N. Y. 1868-1870), revised and edited by Professors Eackett and Abbot, has been the edition used, and is occasionally referred to by the abbreviation " Am. ed."BB. DD. = Bible Dictionaries: — comprising especially the work just named, and the third edition of Kitto's Cyclopaedia of Biblical Literature, edited by Dr. W. L. Alexander: 3 vols., Edinburgh, 1870.Bnhdy. = G. Bernhardy, Wissenschaftliche Syntax der Griechischen Sprache.   Berlin, 1829.B. = Alexander Buttmann, Grammar of the New Testament Greek. (Authorized Translation with numerous Additions and Corrections by the Author: Andover, 1873.) Unless otherwise indicated, the reference is to the page of the translation, with the corresponding page of the German original added in a parenthesis.Bttm. Ausf. Spr. or Sprchl. = Philipp Buttmann, Ausfiihr-liche Griechische Sprachlehre. (2d ed., 1st vol. 1830, 2d vol. 1839.)Bttm. Gram. = Philipp Buttmann'g Griechische Gram-matik. The edition used (though not the latest) is the twenty-first (edited by Alexander Buttmann: Berlin, 1863). Its sections agree with those of the eighteenth edition, translated by Dr. Robinson and published by Harper & Brothers, 1851. When the page is given, the translation is referred to.Bttm. Lexil. = Philipp Buttmann's Lexilogus u. s. w. (1st vol. 2d ed. and 2d vol. Berlin, 1825.) The work was translated and edited by J. R. Fishlake, and issued in one volume by John Murray, London, 1836."Bible Educator" = a collection (with the preceding name) of miscellaneous papers on biblical topics by various writers under the editorship of Rev: Professor E. H.Plumptre, and published in 4 vols. (without date) by Cassell, Petter, and Galpin.Chandler = Henry W. Chandler, A. Practical Introductionia Greek Accentuation. Second edition, revised: Oxford, 1881.Cremer = Hermann Cremer, Biblisch-theologisches Worter-buch der Neutestamentlichen Gracitat. ' Third greatly enlarged and improved Edition': Gotha, 1883. Of the 'Fourth enlarged and improved Edition' nine parts (comprising nearly two thirds of the work) have come to hand, and are occasionally referred to. A translation of the second German edition was published in. 1878 by the Messrs. Clark.Curtius = Georg Curtius, Grundztige der Griechischen Ety-mologie. Fifth edition, with the co-operation of Ernst Windisch: Leipzig, 1879.Diet, of Antiq. = Dictionary of Greek and Roman Antiquities. Edited by Dr. William Smith. Second edition: Boston and London, 1869, also 1873.Diet, of Biog. = Dictionary of Greek and Roman Biography and Mythology. Edited by Dr. William Smith. 3 vols. Boston and London, 1849.Diet, of Chris. Antiq. = A Dictionary of Christian Antiquities, being a Continuation of the Dictionary of the Bible. Edited by Dr. William Smith and Professor Samuel Cheetham.    2 vols. 1875-1880.Diet, of Chris. Biog. = A Dictionary of Christian Biography, Literature, Sects and Doctrines; etc. Edited by Dr. William Smith and Professor Henry Wace: vol. i. 1877; vol. ii. 1880; vol. iii. 1882; (not yet complete).Diet, of Geogr. = Dictionary of Greek and Roman Geography.   Edited by Dr. William Smith.   2 vols. 1854-1857.Edersheim = Alfred Edersheim, The Life and Times of Jeaus the Messiah. 2 vols. Second edition, stereotyped London and New York, 1884.Eisner = J. Eisner, Observationes sacrae in Nori Foederis libros etc.   2 vols., Traj. ad Rhen. 1720, 1728.Etym. Magn. = the Etymologicum Magnum (see List of Ancient Authors, etc.) Gaisford's edition (1 vol. folio, Oxford, 1848) has been used.Fick = August Pick, Vergleichendes WSrterhnch der Ih-dogermanischen Sprachen. Third edition. 4 vols. Got-tingen, 1874-1876.List of Books.XVIList of Books.Gottling = Carl Goettling, Allgemeine Lehre vom Accent der griechischen Sprache.    Jena, 1835.Goodwin = W. W. Goodwin, Syntax of the Moods and Tenses of the Greek Verb. 4th edition revised. Boston-and Cambridge, 1871.Graecus Venetus = the Greek version of the Pentateuch, Prov., Ruth, Canticles, Eccl., Lam., Dan., according to a unique MS. in the Library of St. Mark's, Venice; edited by O. v. Gebhardt.   Lips. 1875, 8vo pp. 592.Green =Thomas Sheldon Green, A Treatise on the Grammar of the New Testament etc. etc. A new Edition. London, Samuel Bagster and Sons, 1862.Also, by the same author," Critical Notes on the New Testament, supplementary to his Treatise on the Grammar of the New Testament Dialect." London, Samuel Bagster and Sons, 1867.Hamburger=/. Hamburger, Real-Encyclopadie f iir Bibel und Talmud.    Strelitz.   First Part 1870; Second Part 1883.Herm. ad Vig., see Vig. ed. Ilerm.Herzog = Real-Encyklopadie fur Protestantische Theologie und Kirche. Edited by Herzog. 21 vols. with index, 1854-1868.Herzog 2 or ed. 2 = a second edition of the above (edited by Herzogt, Plittt,and Hauck), begun in 1877 and not yet complete.llesych. = Hesychius (see List of Ancient Authors, etc.) The edition used is that of M. Schmidt (5 vols. Jena, 1858-1868).Jelf = W. E. Jelf, A Grammar of the Greek Language. Third edition. Oxford and London, 2 vols. 1861. (Subsequent editions have been issued, but without, it is believed, material alteration.)Kautzsch = E. Kautzsch, Grammatik des Biblisch-Arama-ischen.    Leipzig, 1884.Keim = Theodor Keitn, Geschichte Jesu von Nazara u. s. w. 3 vols.    Zurich, 1867-1872.Klotz ad Devar. = Matthaeus Devarius, Liber de Graecae Linguae Particulis, ed. R. Klotz, Lips., vol. i. 1835, vol. ii. sect. 1, 1840, vol. ii. sect. 2, 1842.Krebs, Observv. = J. T. Krebsii Observationes in Nov. Test. e Flavio Josepho.   Lips. 1755.Kruger = K. W. Kriiger, Griechische Sprachlehre fur Schu-len.    Fourth improved and enlarged edition, 1861 sq.Kypke, Observv. = G. D. Kypke, Observationes sacrae in Novi Foederis libros ex auctoribus potissimum Graecis et antiquitatibus.    2 vols. Wratisl. 1755.L. and S. = Lidded and Scott, Greek-English Lexicon etc. Seventh edition, 1883.Lob, ad Phryn., see Phryn. ed. Lob.Loesner = C. F. Loesneri Observationes ad Novum Test, e Philone Alexandrine   Lips. 1777.Lghtft. = Dr. John Lightfoot, the learned Hebraist of the 17th century.Bp. Lghtft. = J. B. Lightfoot, D.D., Bishop of Durham; the 8th edition of his commentary on the Epistle to the Gala-tians is the one referred to, the 7th edition of his commentary on Philippians, the 7th edition of his commentary on Colossians and Philemon.Lipsius = K. H. A. Lipsius, Grammatische Untersuchungen iiber die Biblische Gracitat (edited by Prof. R. A. Lip-aius, the author's son).    Leipzig, 1863.Matthiae = August Matthia, Ausfiihrlich Griechische Grammatik.   Third edition, 3 Pts., Leipz. 1835.McC. and S = McClintock and Strong's Cyclopaedia of Biblical, Theological, and Ecclesiastical Literature. 10 vols. 1867-1881; with Supplement, vol. i. (1885), vol. ii. with Addenda (1887). New York : Harper and Brothers.Meisterhans = K. Meisterhans, Grammatik der Attischen Inschriften.   Berlin, 1885.    (2d edition, 1888.)Mullach = /''. W. A. Mullach, Grammatik der Griechischen Vulgarsprache u. s. w.   Berlin, 1856.Munthe = C. F. Munthe, Observationes philolog. in aacros Nov. Test, libros ex Diod. Sic. collectae etc. (Hafn. et Lips. 1755.)Palairet = E. Palairet, Observationes philol.-crit. in sacros Novi Foederis libros etc.    Lugd. Bat. 1752.Pape= W. Pape, Griechisch-Deutsches Handworterbuch. Second edition. 2 vols. Brunswick, 1866. A continuation of the preceding work is the " Worterbuch der Griechischen Eigennamen." Third edition, edited by G. E. Ben-seler.    1863-1870.Passow = Franz Passow's Handworterbuch der Griechischen Sprache as re-edited by Rost, Palm, and others. Leipz. 1841-1857.Phryn. ed. Lob. = Phrynichi Eclogae Nominum et Verbo-rum Atticorum etc. as edited by C. A. Lobeck. Leipzig, 1820.    (Cf. Rutherford.)Poll. = Pollux (see List of Ancient Authors, etc.) The edition used is that published at Amsterdam, 1 vol. folio, 1706. (The most serviceable is that of William Dindorf, 5 vols. 8vo, Leipzig, 1824.)Pss. of Sol. = Psalter of Solomon; see List of Ancient Authors, etc.Raphel = G. Raphelii annotationes in Sacram Scripturam ... ex Xen., Polyb., Arrian., et Herodoto collectae. 2 vols.   Lugd. Bat. 1747.Riddell, Platonic Idioms=A Digest of Idioms given as an Appendix to " The Apology of Plato " as edited by th6 Rev. James Riddell, M. A.; Oxford, 1867.Riehm (or Eiehm, HWB.) = Handworterbuch des Biblischen Altertums u. s. w. edited by Professor Edward C. A. Riehm in nineteen parts (2 vols.) 1875-1884.Rutherford, New Phryn. = The New Phrynichus, being a revised text of the Ecloga of the Grammarian Phrynichus, etc., by W. Gunion Rutherford.    London, 1881.Schaff-Herzog = A Religious Encyclopaedia etc. by Philip Schaff and associates. 3 vols. 1882-1884. Funk and Wagnalls, New York.    Revised edition, 1887.SchenkeL (or Schenkd, BL.) = Bibel-Lexikon u. s. w. edited by Professor Daniel Schenkel.  5 vols.  Leipz. 1869-1875.Schmidt = J. H. Heinrich Schmidt, Synonymik der Griechischen Sprache.  4 vols.    Leipz.    1876, 1878, 1879, 1886.Schottgen = Christiani Schoettgenii Horae Hebraicae et Tal-mudicae etc.   2 vols.   Dresden and Leipzig, 1733, 1742.Schiirer = Emil Schiirer, Lehrbuch der Neutestamentlichen Zeitgeschichte. Leipzig, 1874. The " Second Part" of a new and revised edition has already appeared under the title of Geschichte des Judischen Volkes im Zeitalter Jesu Christi, and to this new edition (for the portion of the original work which it covers) the references have been made, although for convenience the title of the first edition has been retained. An English translation is appearing at Edinburgh (T. and T. Clark).Scrivener, F. H. A.: -•— A Plain Introduction to the Criticism of the New Testament etc. Third Edition. Cambridge and London, 1883.List of Books.zvnList of Books.Bezae Codex Cantabrigiensis etc. Cambridge and London, 1864.A Full Collation of the Codex Sinaiticus with the Received Text of the New Testament etc. Second Edition, Revised.   Cambridge and London, 1867.Six Lectures on the Text of the New Testament etc. Cambridge and London, 1875.Sept. = the translation of the Old Testament into Greek known as the Septuagint. Unless otherwise stated, the sixth edition of Tischendorf's text (edited by Nestle) is referred to; 2 vols. (with supplement), Leipzig, 1880. The double verse-notation occasionally given in the Apocryphal books has reference to the edition of the Apocrypha and select Pseudepigrapha by 0. F. Fritzsche; Leipzig, 1871. Readings peculiar to the Complutensian, Aldine, Vatican, or Alexandrian form of the text are marked respectively by an appended Comp., Aid., Vat., Alex. * For the first two the testimony of the edition of Lambert Bos, Franck. 1709, has been relied on.The abbreviations Aq., Symm., Theod. or Theodot, appended to a reference to the O. T. denote respectively the Greek versions ascribed to Aquila, Symmachus, and Theodotion ; see List of Ancient Authors, etc." Lag." designates the text as edited by Paul Lagarde, of which the first half appeared at Gottingen in 1883. Soph. = E. A. Sophocles, Greek Lexicon of the Roman and Byzantine Periods (from B.C. 146 to ajd. 1100.) Boston : Little, Brown & Co. 1870. The forerunner (once or twice referred to) of the above work bears the title " A Glossary of Later and Byzantine Greek. Forming vol. vii. (new series) of the Memoirs of the American Academy."   Cambridge, 1860.Steph. Thes. = the " Thesaurus Graecae Linguae " of Henry Stephen as edited by Hase and the Dindorfs. 8 vols. Paris, 1831-1865. Occasionally the London (Valpy's) edition (1816-1826) of the same work has been referred to. Suid. = Su'idas (see List of Ancient Authors, etc.) Gaisf ord'sedition (2 vols. folio, Oxford, 1834) has been followed. 'Teaching' = The Teaching of the Twelve Apostles (Ai-Saxb tuv SiiSetca dirooToAow.)    The edition of Harnack ,(in Gebhardt and Harnack's Texte und Untersuchungen u. s. w. Second vol., Pts. i. and ii., Leipzig 1884) has been followed, together with his division of the chapters into verses.Thiersch=Friedrich Thiersch, Griechische Grammatik u. s. w. Third edition.   Leipzig, 1826.Trench = Abp. R. C. Trench's Synonyms of the New Testament.   Ninth edition, improved.   London, 1880.Vanicek = Alois Vanicek, Griechisch-Lateinisches Etymolo-gisches Worterbuch.   2 vols. Leipz. 1877.By the same author is " Fremdworter im Griechischen nnd Lateinischen."   Leipzig, 1878.Veitch= William Veitch, Greek Verbs irregular and ae-fective, etc.   New Edition.    Oxford, 1879.Vig. ed. Herm. = Vigeri de praecipuis Graecae dictionis Idiotismis. Edited by G. Hermann. Fourth edition. Leipzig, 1834. A meagre abridgment and translation by Rev. John Seager was published at London in 1828.Vulg. = the translation into Latin known as the Vulgate. Professor Tischendorf's edition (Leipzig, 1864) has been followed.Wetst. or Wetstein = J. J. Wetstein's Novum Testamen-tum Graecum etc.   2 vols. folio.   Amsterdam, 1751,1752.W. = G. B. Winer, Grammar of the Idiom of the New Testament etc. Revised and Authorized Translation of the seventh (German) edition of the original, edited by Liine-mann; Andover, 1883. Unless otherwise indicated, it is referred to by pages, the corresponding page of the original being added in a parenthesis. When Dr. Moulton's translation of the sixth German edition is referred to, that fact is stated.Win. RWB. = G. B. Winer, Biblisches Realworterbuch u. s. w. Third edition. 2 vols., Leipzig and New York, 1849.Win. De verb. Comp. etc. = G. B. Winer, De verborum cum praepositionibus compositorum in Novo Testamento usu.   Five academic programs; Leipzig, 1843.Other titles, it is believed, are so fully given as to be easily verifiableEXPLANATIONS AND  ABBREVIATIONS.As respects Punctuation—it should be noticed, that since only those verbal forms (or their representatives) are given in the Lexicon which actually occur in the Greek Testament, it becomes necessary to distinguish between a form of the Present Tense which is in use, and one which is given merely to secure for a verb its place in the alphabet. This is done by putting a semi-colon after a Present which actually occurs, and a colon after a Present which is a mere alphabetic locum tenens.Further: a punctuation-mark inserted before a classic voucher or a reference to the Old Testament (whether such voucher or reference be included in a parenthesis or not) (ndicates that said voucher or reference applies to other passages, definitions, etc., besides the one which it immediately follows. The same principle governs the insertion or the omission of a comma after such abbreviations as "absol.", "pass.", etc.A hyphen has been placed between the component parts of Greek compounds only in case each separate part is in actual use; otherwise the hyphen is omitted[ ] Brackets have been used to mark additions by the American editor. To avoid, however, a complexity which might prove to the reader confusing, they have been occasionally dispensed with when the editorial additions serve only to complete a statement already made in part by Professor Grimm (as, in enumerating the forms of verbs, the readings of the critical editors, the verbs compounded with trty which observe assimilation, etc. etc.) ; but in no instance have they been intentionally omitted where the omission might seem to attribute to Professor Grimm an opinion for which he is not responsible.* An asterisk at the close of an article indicates that all the . instances of the word's occurrence in the New Testament are noticed in the article. Of the 5594 words composing the vocabulary of the New Testament 5300 are marked with an asterisk. To this extent, therefore, the present work may serve as a concordance as well as a lexicon.A superior * or * or • etc. appended to a verse-numeral designates the first, second, third, etc., occurrence of a given word or construction in that verse. The same letters appended to a page-numeral designate respectively the first, second, third, columns of that page. A small a. b. c. etc. after a page-numeral designates the subdivision of the page.,The various forms of the Greek Text referred to are represented by the following abbreviations: R or Rec. = what is commonly known as the Textus Recep-tus. Dr. F .   H .   A .   S c r i v e n e r ' s   l a s t   e d i t i o n   ( C a m b r i d g e   a n d   L o n d o n   1 8 7 7 )   h a s   b e e n   t a k e n   a s   t h e   s t a n d a r d . 1   T o   d e s i g n a t e   a   p a r t i c u l a r   f o r m   o f   t h i s   "   P r o t e a n   t e x t "   a n   a b b r e v i a t i o n   h a s   b e e n   a p p e n d e d   i n   s u p e r i o r   t y p e ;   a s ,   " '  %  f o r   E l z e v i r ,   " '   f o r   S t e p h e n ,   b "   f o r   B e z a ,   « * »   for Erasmus. G or Grsb. = the Greek text of Griesbach as given in his manual edition, 2 vols., Leipzig, 1805. Owing to a disregard of the signs by which Griesbach indicated his judgment respecting the various degrees of probability belonging to different readings, he is cited not infrequently, even in critical works, as supporting readings which he expressly questioned, but was not quite ready to expel from the text.L or Lchm. = Lachmann's Greek text as given in his larger edition, 2 vols., Berlin, 1842 and 1850. "When the text of his smaller or stereotyped edition (Berlin, 1831) is referred to, the abbreviation "min." or " ster." is added to his initial. T or Tdf. = the  text  of  Tischendorf's "Editio OctavaCritica Major" (Leipzig, 1869-1872). TrorTreg. = "The Greek New Testament" etc. by S. P.Tregelles (London, 1857-1879).WH = " The New Testament in the Original Greek. The Text Revised by Brooke Foss Westcott D.D. and Fen-ton John Anthony Hort D.D. Cambridge and London, Macmillan and Co. 1881."KC = "Novum Testamentum adFidem Codicis Vaticani" as edited by Professors Kuenen and Cobet (Leyden, I860).The textual variations noticed are of course mainly those which affect the individual word or construction under discussion. Where an extended passage or entire section is textually debatable (as, for example, Mk. xvi. 9-20; Jn. v. 3 fin.-4; vii. 53 fin. — viii. 11), that fact is assumed to be known, or at least it is not stated under every word containedAs respects the ntimbeking of the verses —the edition of Robert Stephen, in 2 vols. 16°, Geneva 1551, has been1 Respecting the edition issued by the Bible Society, which w«a followed by Professor Grimm, see Carl Bertheere in the Theolo-gische LVteraturzettung for 1877, No. 5, pp. 103-106.ExplanationsXIXAbbreviations.followed as the standard (as it is in the critical editions of Tregelles, Westcott and Hort, etc.). Variations from this standard are indicated by subjoining the variant verse-numeral within marks of parenthesis. The similar addition in the case of references to the Old Testament indicates the variation between the Hebrew notation and the Greek.In quotations from the English Bible — A. V. = the current or so-called " Authorized Version " ; H. V. = the Kevised New Testament of 1881.   But when a rendering is ascribed to the former version it may be assumed to be retained also in the latter, unless the contrary be expressly stated.    A translation preceded by R. V. is found in the Revision only.A.  S. = Anglo-Saxon. Abp. = Archbishop, absol. = absolutely.ace. or accus. = accusative.ace. to = according to.ad 1. or ad loc. = at or on the passage.al. = others or elsewhere.al. al. = others otherwise.Aid. = the Aldine text of the Septuagint (see Sept. in Listof Books). Alex. = the Alexandrian text of the Septuagiut (see Sept.in List of Books), ap. = (quoted) in App. = Appendix, appos. = apposition.Aqi = Aquila (see Sept. in List of Books). art. = article, augm. = augment, auth. or author. = author or authorities.B. or Bttm. see List of Books.B. D. or BB. DD. see List of Books, betw. = between. Bibl. = Biblical. Bp. = Bishop.br. = brackets or enclose in brackets, c. before a date = about. Cantabr. = Cambridge cf. = compare, ch. = chapter, cl. = clause.cod., codd. = manuscript, manuscripts. Com., Comm. = commentary, commentaries, comp. = compound, compounded, etc. compar. = comparative.Comp. or Compl. = the Complutensian text of the Septuagint (see Sept. in List of Books), contr. = contracted, contract, dim. or dimin. = diminutive. dir. disc. = direct discourse, e. g. = for example, •sp. = especially.ex., exx. = example, examples.exc. = except.excrpt. = an excerpt or extract.fin. or ad fin. = at or near the end.G or Grsb. = Griesbach's Greek text (see above).Graec. Ven. = Graecus Venetus (see List of Books).i. e. = that is.ib. or ibid.=in the same place.indir. disc. = indirect discourse.init. or ad init. = at or near the beginning.in 1. or in loc. = in or on the passage.i. q. = the same as, or equivalent to.KC = Kuenen and Cobet's edition of the Vatican text (seeabove).L orLchm. = Lachmann's Greek text (see above). L. and S. =Liddell and Scott (see List of Books). 1. or lib. = book.1. c, 11. cc. = passage cited, passages cited. Lag. = Lagarde's edition of the Septuagint (see Sept. inList of Books), mrg. =the marginal reading (of a critical edition of theGreek Testament). Opp. = Works, opp. to = opposed to.paral. = the parallel accounts (in the Synoptic Gospels). Pt. or pt. = part. q. v. = which see.R or Rec. = the common Greek text (see above). r. = root.rel. or relat. = relative, sc. = namely, to wit. Skr. = Sanskrit, sq., sqq. = following.Steph. = Stephanus's Thesaurus (see List of Books). Stud. u. Krit. =the Studien und Kritiken, a leading German Theological Quarterly. s. v. = under the word. Symm. = Symmachus, translator of the Old Testament intoGreek (see Sept. in the List of Books). T or Tdf. = Tischendorf's Greek text (see above). Theod. or Theodot. = Theodotion (see Sept. in the List ofBooks).Tr or Treg. = Tregelles's Greek text (see above), n. i. = as below, u. s. = as above. v. = see.var. = variant or variants (various readings). Vat. = the Vatican Greek text (see above, and Sept. in theList of Books).Vulg. = the Vulgate (see List of Books). w.=with (especially before abbreviated names of cases), writ. = writer, writers, writings. WH= Westcott and Hort's Greek text (see above).Other abbreviations will, it is hoped, explain themselves.NEW  TESTAMENT  LEXICON.A, a,A, o, SX+o, rS, the first letter of th e   G r e e k   a l p h a b e t ,   o p e n i n g   t h e   s e r i e s   w h i c h   t h e   l e t t e r   <  %>   c l o s e s .   H e n c e   t h e   e x p r e s s i o n   i y &   t l p t   t 6   A   [ L T T r W H   S K ( p a ]   x m   t o   Q   [ * a   L   W H ] ,   R e v .   i .   8 ,   1 1   R e c ,   w h i c h   i s   e x p l a i n e d   b y   t h e   a p p e n d e d   w o r d s   f )   a p x h   ^   T ^   *  %& < « ,   x x i .   6 ,   a n d   b y   t h e   f u r t h e r   a d d i t i o n   6   i r paros koI 6 co-xarog, xxii. 13. On the meaning of the phrase cf. Rev. xi. 17; Is. xli. 4; xliv. 6; xlviii. 12; [esp. B. D. Am. ed. p. 73].          A,when prefixed to words as an inseparable syllable, is1.  privative (artprfiKov), like the Lat. in-, the Eng. un~, giving a negative sense to the word to which it is prefixed, as aj3ap)jr; or signifying what is contrary to it, as otn/ios, arifioa; before vowels generally iv-, as avairmt.2.  copulative (adpourriK&v), akin to the particle apa [cf. Curtius § 598], indicating community and fellowship, as in A8e\<p6s, aicokovSos.   Hence it is       3. intensive (eViToruoSi'), strengthening the force of terms, like the Lat. con in composition; as arcvifa fr. arevq? [yet cf. W. 100 (95)].   This use, however, is doubted or denied now by many [e. g. Lob. Path. Element, i.  84 sq.].   Cf. Kiihner i. 741, § 339 Anm. 5; [Jelf §242 8]; Bttm. Gram. § 120 Anm. 11; [Donaldson, Gram. p. 334; New Crat. §§ 185, 213; L. and 8. s. v.].*'Aopuv, indecl. prop, name (6 'hapi>v, -Stvos in Joseph.),pHK (fr. the unused Hebr. radical "in«,— Syr.]^fl!|libidinosus, lascivus, — [enlightened, Fiirstj ace. to Dietrich wealthy, or fluent, like ID^S], ace. to Philo, de ebriet. § 32, fr. 171 mountain and equiv. to opawfe), Aaron, the brother of Moses, the first high-priest of the Israelites and the head of the whole sacerdotal order: Lk. i. 5; Acts vii. 40; Heb. v.4; vii. 11; ix. 4.*'AfiaSSuv, indecl., jftaK, 1. ruin, destruction, (fr. na« to perish), Job xxxi. 12. 2. the place of destruction i. q. Orcus, joined with Vlttrf, Job xxvi. 6; Prov. xv. 11. 3. as a proper name it is given to the angel-prince of the infernal regions, the minister of death and author of havoc on earth, and is rendered in Greek by 'AttoAXuW Destroyer, Rev. ix. 11.* •&, (fi&pat weight), without weight, light; trop. not burdensome: a/Sapi} ifiiv ipavrbv irr)pr)<ra I have avoided burdening you with expense on my account, 2 Co. xi. 9; see 1 Th. ii. 9, cf. 6. (Fr. Aristot. down.)*'Appa [WH -/3a], Hebr. 38 father, in the Chald. emphatic state, K3S i. e. 6 warrip, a customary tide of God in prayer. Whenever it occurs in the N. T. (Mk. xiv. 86; Ro. viii. 15; Gal. iv. 6) it has the Greek interpretation subjoined to it; this is apparently to be explained by the fact that the Chaldee *GK, through frequent use in prayer, gradually acquired the nature of a most sacred proper name, to which the Greek-speaking Jews added the appellative from their own tongue.*"Apc\ [WH "A/3. (see their Intr. § 408)], indecl. prop, name (in Joseph, [e. g. antt. 1, 2, 1] "A|3eXoj, -ov), S30 (breath, vanity), Abel, the second son born to Adam (Gen. iv. 2 sqq.), so called from his short life and sudden death [cf. B. D. Am. ed. p. 5], (Job vii. 16; Ps. xxxix. 6) : Mt. xxiii. 35;  Lk. xi. 51; Heb. xi. 4; xii. 24.*'AfJid, indecl. prop, name (Joseph, antt. 7, 10, 3; 8, 10, 1 6 'Afilas [W. § 6,1 m.], -a), rV3« and m;3K (my father is Jehovah), Abia [or Abijah, cf. B. D. s.v.], 1. a king of Judah, son of Rehpboam: Mt. i. 7 (1 K. xiv. 31; xv. 1). 2. a priest, the head of a sacerdotal family, from whom, when David divided the priests into twenty-four classes (1 Chr. xxiv. 10), the class Abia, the eighth in order, took its name: Lk. i. 5.*'Apuffiop, indecl. prop, name (though in Joseph, antt. 6, 14, 6 'AfiidBapos, -ov), 1JV3S (father of abundance), Abiathar, a certain Hebrew high-priest: Mk. ii. 26,— where he is by mistake confounded with Ahimelech his father (1 S. xxi. 1 sqq.) ; [yet cf. 1 S. xxii. 20 with 1 Chr. xviii. 16; xxiv. 6, 31; also 2 S. xv. 24-29; 1 K. ii. 26, 27 with 2 S. viii. 17; 1 Chr. xxiv. 6, 31. It would seem that double names were esp. common in the case of priests (cf. 1 Mace. ii. 1-5; Joseph, vit §§ 1, 2) and that father and son often bore the same name (cf. Lk. i. 5, 59; Joseph. 1. c. and antt. 20, 9, 1). See Me-Clellan adloc. and B. D. Am. ed. p. 7].* [WH 'A/3«A. (see s. v. «)], -ijs, {,, (sc. xFh the district belonging to the city AbUa), Abilene, the name of a region lying between Lebanon and Hermon towards Phoenicia, 18 miles distant fr o m   D a m a s c u s   a n d   3 7   [ a o c .   t o   t h e   B i n .   A n t o n .   3 8 ]   f r o m   H e l i o p o l i s :   L k .   i i i .   1 .   C f .   A v a - a v i a s   [ a n d   B .   D .   s .   v . ] . »  ' A p i o v ' 8 ,   6 ,   i n d e c l .   p r o p ,   n a m e ,   " l l i r r i K   ( f a t h e r   o f   t h e   J e w s   [ a L   o f   g l o r y ] ) ,   A b i u d ,   s o n   o f   Z o r o b a b e l   o r   Z e r u b - b a b e l :   M t .   i .   1 3 . *   %A P p a < i | A   [ R e d ' 'Afip.; cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 106] (Joseph. 'Afipapos, -ov), Drn38 (father of a multitude, cf. Gen. xvii. 5), Abraham, the renowned founder of the Jewish nation: Mt. i. 1 sq.; xxii. 32; Lk. xix. 9; Jn. viii. 33; Acts iii. 25 ; Heb. vii. 1 sqq., and elsewhere. He is extolled by the apostle Paul as a pattern of faith, Ko. iv. 1 sqq. 17 sqq.; Gal. iii. 6 (cf. Heb. xi. 8), on which account all believers in Christ hare a claim to the title sons or posterity of Abraham, Gal. iii. 7, 29; cf. Bo. iv. 11.d-fWo-os, in classic Greek an adj., -of, -ov, (fr. 6 ftv<rrr6s i. q. fiv86s), bottomless (so perhaps in Sap. x. 19), unbounded (ttXovtos 3pvo~o-os, AeschyL Sept. (931) 950). In the Scriptures ij afivo-o-os (Sept. for oVlPi) so. x&pa, the pit, the immeasurable depth,' the abyss. Hence of ' the deep' sea: Gen. i. 2; vii. 11; Deut, viii. 7; Sir. i. 3; xvi. 18, etc.; of Orcus (a very deep gulf or chasm in the lowest parts of the earth: Ps. lxx. (lxxi.) 21 Ac rS>v dfivo--<ra>» rfjs yrjs, Eur. Phoen. 1632 (1605) raprdpov Sfivo-a-a xdcpMra, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 20, 5 afivtTo-wv dve^i^viaarra KkifuxTa, ibid. 59, 3 6 f'mfiXeirav iv rais dfiv<r<rois, of God; [Act. Thorn. 32 6 ttji; &/3v<r<rov rod raprdpov oIk&v, of the dragon]), both as the common receptacle of the dead, Bo. x. 7, and especially as the abode of demons, Lk. viii. 31; Rev. ix. 1 sq. 11; xL 7; xvii. 8; xx. 1,3. Among prof, auth. used as a subst. only by Diog. Laert. 4, (5,) 27 KarfjK-des els p.e\awav HKovreios afivatrov. Cf. Knapp, Scripta var. Arg. p. 554 sq.; [/. G. Midler, Philo's Lehre von der Weltschopfung, p. 173 sq.; B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Deep].*"A-yafJos [on the breathing see WH. Intr. § 408], -ov, 6, the name of a Christian prophet, Agabus: Acts xi. 28; xxi. 10.    (Perhaps from 3J;? to love [cf. B. D. s. v.].)*AyaSoEpycu, S>; (fr. the unused EPTC2 —- equiv. to epSa>, ipydiftptu — and dya66v); to be dyadoepy6s, beneficent (towards the poor, the needy) : 1 Tim. vi. 18 [A. V. do good]. Cf. dyadovpyew. Found besides only in eccl. writ., but in the sense to do well, act rightly*d-yaOo-TTOieu, S>; 1 aor. inf. dyadoiroirjo-ai.; (fr. dyado->ro«fc) ; 1. to do good, do something which profits others: Mk. iii. 4 [Tdf. dyad6v noirjtrai; Lk. vi. 9]; to show one's self beneficent, Acts xiv. 17 Kec.; nvd, to do some one a favor, to benefit, Lk. vi. 33, 35, (equiv. to yQ'TX, Zeph. i. 12; Num. x. 32; Tob. xii. 13, etc.). 2. to do well, do right: 1 Pet. ii. 15, 20 (opp. to afiaprdvai); iii. 6, 17; 3 Jn. 11. (Not found in secular authors, except in a few of the later in an astrological sense, to furnish a good omen.)*dyaOomuta [WH -irot/a (see I,»)], -at, f), a course of right action, well-doing: iv dyadowoitq, 1 Pet. iv. 19 i. q. dyadoirotovms acting uprightly [cf. xii. Patr. Jos. § 18};'                                                                       dya0O9if we read here with L Ti- mrg. iv dyadunoitats we must understand it of single acts of rectitude [cf. W. § 27, 3; B. § 123, 2]. (In eccl. writ. dyadm. denotes beneficence.)*AyaSoirouSs, -6v, acting rightly, doing well: 1 Pet. ii. 14. [Sir. xliL 14; Plut. de Is. et Osir. § 42.]*aya06s, -f), -6v, (akin to ctya/xai to wonder at, think highly of, dyaaros admirable, as explained by Plato, Crat. p. 412 c. [al. al.; cf. Donaldson, New Crat. § 323]), in general denotes "perfectus, . . . qui habet in se ac facit omnia quae habere et facere debet pro notione nominis, officio ac lege" (Irmisch ad Hdian. 1, 4, p. 134), excelling in any respect, distinguished, good. It can be predicated of persons, things, conditions, qualities and affections of the soul, deeds, times and seasons. To this general signif. can be traced back all those senses which the word gathers fr. the connection in which it stands; X.ofa good constitution or nature: yij, Lk. viii. 8; devSpov, Mt. vii. 18, in sense equiv. to 'fertile soil,' 'a fruitful tree,' (Xen. oec. 16, 7 yrj dyaBfj,. • .yi) kokt;, an. 2,4, 22 x&>pat traXXjjc k. dyaBSjt oiaijc). In Lk. viii. 15 dyatii) KapSia corresponds to the fig. expression " good ground ", and denotes a soul in* clined to goodness, and accordingly eager to learn saving truth and ready to bear the fruits (na/mobs dya8ois, Jas. iii. 17) of a Christian life. 2. useful, salutary: 86o-is dya&r) (joined to Sapijpa reXnov) a gift which is truly a gift, salutary, Jas. i. 17; bofiara dyada, Mt. vii. 11; evroKfj dy. a commandment profitable to those who keep it, Ro. vii. 12, ace. to a Grk. scholium equiv. to fir t6 (rvjMpfpov tlar^oupivt), hence the question in vs. 13: ro oSv dyadov ipjol yeyove ddvaros; dy. pepis the 'good par t , '   w h i c h   i n s u r e s   s a l v a t i o n   t o   h i m   w h o   c h o o s e s   i t ,   L k .   x .   4 2 ;   t p y o v   d y .   ( d i f f e r e n t l y   i n   R o .   i i .   7 ,   e t c . )   t h e   s a v i n g   w o r k   o f   G o d ,   i .   e .   s u b s t a n t i a l l y ,   t h e   C h r i s t i a n   l i f e ,   d u e   t o   d i v i n e   e f f i c i e n c y ,   P h i l .   i .   6   [ c f .   t h e   C o m m .   a d   l o c . ] ;   e l s   d y a d o v   f o r   g o o d ,   t o   a d v a n t a g e ,   R o .   v i i i .   2 8   ( S i r .   v i i .   1 3 ;   n d v r a   r o i s   ¬ v o - e / 3 e a r i   e l s   d y a d a ,   .   .   .   r o i s   a p a p -  %f a \ o i s   e l s   K a x d ,   S i r .   x x x i x .   2 7 ;   t o   k o k o v   .   .   .   y i y v e r a i   e l s   d y a d o v ,   T h e o g n i s   1 6 2 )   ;   g o o d   f o r ,   s u i t e d   t o   s o m e t h i n g :   T r p o r   o l K o b o p . { , v ,   E p h .   i v .   2 9   [ c f .   W .   3 6 3   ( 3 4 0 ) ]  (Xen. mem. 4, 6,10). 3. of the feeling awakened by what is good,pleasant, agreeable, joyful, happy: Tjfiepai dy- 1 Pet. iii. 10 (Ps. xxxiii. (xxxiv.) 13; Sir. xiv. 14; 1 Mace. x. 55) ; Anw, 2 Th. ii. 16 Quueapla eXiris, Tit. ii. 18) ; avvel8t]<rK, a peaceful conscience, i. q. consciousness of rectitude, Acts xxiii. 1; 1 Tim. i. 5, 19; 1 Pet. iii. 16; reconciled to God, vs. 21. 4. excellent, distinguished: so rj dyadSv, Jn. i. 46 (47).           5. upright, honorable:Mt. xii. 34 ; xix. 16 ; Lk. vi. 45; Acts xi. 24 ; 1 Pet. iii. 11, etc.; wovrjpol k. dyadol, Mt. v. 45; xxii. 10; dyad. «ii Straw?, Lk. xxiii. 50; napbla dyadrj k. xaXq, Lk. viii. 15 (see KdXor, b.); fulfilling the duty or service demanded, dov\e dyaOi k. more, Mt. xxv. 21, 23; upright, free from guile, particularly from a desire to corrupt the people, Jn. vii. 12; pre-eminently of God, as consum-mately and essentially good, Mt. xix. 17 (Mk. x. 18; Lk. xviii. 19) ; dy. dt)travp6s in Mt. xii. 35; Lk. vi. 45ayaOovpyea)denotes the soul considered as the repository of pure thoughts which are brought forth in speech; itiarts ay. the fidelity due from a servant to his master, Tit. ii. 10 [WH mrg. om.]; on dyad- fpyov, ay. epya, see tpyov. In a narrower sense, benevolent, kind, generous: Mt. xx. 15; 1 Pet. ii. 18; pveia, 1 Th. iii. 6 (cf. 2 Mace. vii. 20) ; beneficent (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 4; 2)0, Jer. xxxiii. 11; Ps. xxxiv. 9; Cic. nat. deor. 2, 25, 64 " optimus i. e. beneficentissimus"), Ro. v. 7, where the meaning is, Hardly for an innocent man does one encounter death; for if he even dares hazard his life for another, he does so for a benefactor (one from whom he has received favors); cf. W. 117 (111); [Gifford in the Speaker's Com. p. 123]. The neuter used substantively denotes 1. a good thing, convenience, advantage, and in partic. a. in the plur., external goods, riches: Lk. i. 53; xii. 18 sq. (Sir. xiv. 4; Sap. vii. 11) ; rh ayatid aov comforts and delights which thy .wealth procured for thee in abundance, Lk. xvi. 25 (opp. to Kcutd, as in Sir. xi. 14) ; outward and inward good things, Gal. vi. 6, cf. Wieseler ad loc. b. the benefits of the Messianic kingdom : Bo. x. 15; ra /tc'XXovra ay. Heb. ix. 11; x. 1. 2. what is upright, honorable, and acceptable to God: Ro. xii. 2; ipya(«r6ai tA ay. Ro. ii. 10; Eph. iv. 28; irpavcreiv, Ro. ix. 11; [2 Co. v. 10]; 8i6Ktiv, 1 Th. v. 15; /u/iri-trSai, 8 Jn. 11; KoKK&aOai ra try. Ro. xii. 9; rt fit ipwrips mp\ toS ayaBov, Mt. xix. 17 G L T Tr WH, where the word expresses the general idea of right. Spec, what is salutary, suited to the course of human affairs: in the phrase bi&Kovos tls t6 ay. Ro. xiii. 4; of rendering service, Gal. vi. 10; Ro. xii. 21; tA dy. a-ov the favor thou conferrest, Philem. 14.[" It is to be regarded as a peculiarity in the usage of the Sept. that 31D good is predominantly [t] rendered by Kak6s. ... The translator of Gen. uses iya84s only in the neut., good, goods, and this has been to a degree the model for the other translators. ... In the Greek O. T., where ol Slxatoi is the technical designation of the pious, ol hya8o( or $ i.yaS6s does not occur in so general a sense. The iviip i.yaS6s is peculiar only to the Prov. (xiii. 22, 24; xv. 3); cf. besides the solitary instance in 1 Kings ii. 32. Thus even in the usage of the O. T. we are reminded of Christ's words, Mk. x. 18, obSeU ityaBbs el ph tTs i 9eis. In the O. T. the term 'righteous ' makes reference rather to a covenant and to one's relation to a positive standard; &ya96s would express the absolute idea of moral goodness" (Zezschwitz, Profangraec. u. bibl. Sprachgeist, Leipz. 1859, p. 60). Cf. Tittm. p. 19. On the comparison of &yut)6s see B. 27 (24).]d-yaeovpYc'oi, S>; Acts xiv. 17 L T Tr WH for R ayaBo-voi&. ,.The contracted form is the rarer [cf. WH. App. p. 145], see dyaSoepytw; but cf. Kwcovpyos, Ifpovpyeco*6.yaQaa~vvT\, -i;r, f/, [on its formation see W. 95 (90); WH. App. p. 152], found only in bibl. and eccl. writ., uprightness of heart and life, [A. V. goodness]: 2 Th. i. 11; Gal. v. 22 (unless here it denote kindness, beneficence); Ro. xv. 14; Eph. v. 9. [Cf. Trench § lxiii.; Ellic. and Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. 1. c] •&-ya\Xido|iai, see dyaKKida.d-yaXXCao-is, -tas, 17, (dyaXXma), not used by prof. writ. bat often by the Sept.; exultation, extreme joy: Lk. i.3                                                              wyairdta14, 44; Acts ii. 46; Jude 24. Heb. i. 9 (fr. Ps. xliv. (xiv.) 8) oil of gladness with which persons were anointed at feasts (Ps. xxiii. 5), and which the writer, alluding to the inaugural ceremony of anointing, uses as an emblem of the divine power and majesty to which the Son of God has been exalted.*A/yaMuio), S>, and -ao/tai, (but the act. is not used exc. in Lk. i. 47 [jjyoXAuura], in Rev. xix. 7 [dyaX-\iancv] L T Tr WH [and in 1 Pet. L 8 WH Tr mrg. (dyaT&.ia.Te), cf. WH. App. p. 169]) ; 1 aor. qyaXXwcrd-jujv, and (with a mid. signif.) fryaXXiddrju (Jn. v. 35; Rec. T)yaKKwur6t)v); a word of Hellenistic coinage (fr. dydXXo/uu to rejoice, glory [yet cf. B. 51 (45)]), often in Sept. (for S'J, yhpr, Jjn, \OW), to exult, rejoice exceedingly: Mt.v. 12; Lk.x.21; Acts ii. 26; xvi. 84; 1 Pet. i. 8; iv. 13; ev ran, 1 Pet. i. 6, dat. of the thing in which the joy originates [cf. W. § 33 a.; B. 185 (160)]; but Jn. v. 35 means,' to rejoice while his light shone' [i. e. in (the midst of) etc.]. iiri nvi, Lk. i. 47; foil, by iva, Jn. viii. 56 that he should see, rejoiced because it had been promised him that he should see. This divine promise was fulfilled to him at length in paradise; cf. W. 389 (318); B. 289 (206). On this word see Gelpke in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1849, p. 645 sq.*d-yaiios, -ov, (yapos), unmarried: 1 Co. vii. 8, 32; used even of women, 1 Co. vii. 11,34 (Eur. Hel. 690 [and elsewhere]), where the Grks. commonly said avav&pos*dyavaKTt'u, -S>; 1 aor. r/yavaKTrjO-a; (asn-Xeovcxrc'u comes fr. irkocveKTTjs, and this fr. irkiov and ?x«>, so'through »t conjectural dyavaKTrjs fr. Syav and &xpiiuu to feel pain, grieve, [al. al.]); to be indignant, moved with indignation: Mt.xxi. 15; xxvi.8; Mk.x. 14; xiv.4; mplnvos [cf. W. §33 a.], Mt. xx. 24; Mk. x. 41; foil, by 5n, Lk. xiii. 14.    (From Hdt. down.)*ayavrfucTTjcris, -ear, 17, indignation: 2 Co. vii. 11. [(From Plat, on.)] *ayawiM, -&; [impf. rrydiravj ; fut. dyarrqaa; 1 aor. rryd-nrjo-a; pf. act. [1 pers. plur. riymrfiKafiep 1 Jn. iv. 10 WH txt.], ptcp. rjyamjKas (2 Tim. iv. 8); Pass., [pres. dya-7T»jU<u] ; pf. ptcp. riyairrmevot; 1 fut. dyamj^o-o/wu; (akin to Syapai [Fick, Pt. iv. 12; see dyados, init.]); to love, to be full of good-will and exhibit the same: Lk. vii. 47; 1 Jn. iv. 7 sq.; with ace. of the p e r s o n, to have a preference for, wish well to, regard the welfare of: Mt. v. 48 sqq.; xix. 19; Lk.vii. 5; Jn. xi. 5; Ro. xiii. 8; 2 Co. xi. 11; xii. 15; Gal. v. 14; Eph. v. 25, 28; 1 Pet. i. 22, and elsewhere; often in 1 Ep. of Jn. of the love of Christians towards one another; of the benevolence which God, in providing salvation for men, has exhibited by sending his Son to them and giving him up to death, Jn. iii. 16; Ro. viii. 37; 2 Th. ii. 16 ; 1 Jn. iv. 11, 19; [noteworthy is Jude 1 L T Tr WH rots iv 6e$ narpl rryairrijuvois; see iv, I. 4, and cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. iii. 12]; of the love which led Christ, in procuring human salvation, to undergo sufferings and death, Gal. ii. 20; Eph. v. 2; of the love with which God regards Christ, Jn. iii. 35; [v. 20 L mrg.]; x. 17; xv. 9; Eph. i. 6. When used of love to a master, God or Christ, the wordinvolves the idea of affectionate reverence, prompt obedience, grateful recognition gf-henefits received: Mt. vi. 24; xxii. 37; Ro. viii. 28; ^CoTuTih viii. 3; Jas. i. 12; 1 Pet. i. 8; 1 Jn. iv. 10, 20, ancl elsewhere. With an ace. of the thing dyawdca denotes to take pleasure in the thing, prize it above other things, be unwilling to abandon it or do without it: SiKauMrvvtjv, Heb. i. 9 (i. e. steadfastly to cleave to); ttjv 86£ai>, Jn. xii. 43; njv irpa>Toica9ftSplav, Lk. xi. 43; t6 crkotos and to <f>ios, Jn. iii. 19; top KdVpop, 1 Jn. ii. 15 ; roi> vvv alava, 2 Tim. iv. 10, — both which last phrases signify to set the heart on earthly advantages and joys; r^i» ^nixv" "tow, Rev. xii. 11; £<j>t]v, 1 Pet. iii. 10 (to derive pleasure from life, render it agreeable to himself) ; to welcome with desire, long for : njv firicpdveuiv avrov, 2 Tim. iv. 8 (Sap. i. 1; vi. 13; Sir. iv. 12, etc.; so of a person: tjyairfjBri, Sap. iv. 10, cf. Grimm ad loc). Concerning the unique proof of love which Jesus gave the apostles by washing their feet, it is said r)yd7n)<rt» airovs, Jn. xiii. 1, cf. Liicke or Meyer ad loc. [but al. take jjyajr. here more comprehensively, see Weiss's Mey., Godet, Westcott, Keil]. The combination dyam\v dyanav rtva occurs, when a relative intervenes, in Jn. xvii. 26-; Eph. ii. 4, (2 S. xiii. 15 where to futros t cfit&ijo'ev avrrfv is contrasted; cf. Gen. xhx. 25 fi\$yri<rf «re fiXoyiau; Ps. Sal. xvii. 35 [in cod. Pseude-pig. Vet. Test. ed. Fabric, i. p. 966; Libri Apocr. etc., ed. Fritzsche, p. 588] $6gav Ijv- e86£<urcv avrqv); cf. W. § 32, 2; [B. 148 sq. (129)]; Grimm on 1 Mace. ii. 54.On the difference betw. dyemda and <j>ikf<o, see <j>i\(a>. Cf. dydirr), 1 fin.&Y&1TI), i/s, ff, a purely bibl. and eccl. word (for Wyt-tenbach, following Reiske's conjecture, long ago restored Ay(mr)cra>v in place of dydmjs, &v in Flut. sympos. quaestt. 7, 6, 3 [vol. viii. p. 835 ed. Reiske]). Prof, auth. fr. [Aristot.], Plut. on used dydrnjais. " The Sept. use oyamj for rnnK, Cant. ii. 4, 5, 7; iii. 5, 10; v. 8; vii. 6; viii. 4, 6, 7; [" It is noticeable that the word first makes its appearance as a current term in the Song of Sol.; — certainly no undesigned evidence respects ing the idea which the Alex, translators had of the love in this Song" {Zezschwitz, Profangraec. u. bibl. Sprachgeist, p. 63)]; Jer. ii. 2; Eccl. ix. 1, 6; [2 S. xiii. 15]. It occurs besides in Sap. iii. 9; vi. 19. In Philo and Joseph. I do not remember to have met with it. Nor is it found in the N. T. in Acts, Mk., or Jas.; it occurs only once in Mt. and Lk., twice in Heb. and Rev., but frequently in the writings of Paul, John, Peter, Jude " {Bretschn. Lex. s. v.); [Philo, deus immut. § 14].In signification it follows the verb dyairdat; consequently it denotes 1. affection, good-will, love, benevolence: Jn. xv. 13; Ro. xiii. 10; 1 Jn. iv. 18. Of the love of men to men; esp. of that love of Christians towards Christians which is enjoined and prompted by their religion, whether the love be viewed as in the soul or as expressed: Mt. xxiv. 12; 1 Co. xiii. 1-4, 8 ; xiv. I; 2 Co. ii. 4; Gal. v. 6 ; Philem. 5, 7; 1 Tim. i. 6; Heb. vi. 10; x. 24; Jn. xiii. 35; 1 Jn. iv. 7; Rev. ii. 4,19, etc.   Of the love of men towards God: !j dydirr)rov 6tov (obj. gen. [W. 185 (175)]), Lk. xi. 42; Jn. v. 42; 1 Jn. ii. 15 (tov irarp6i) ; iii. 17; iv. 12; v. 3. Of the love of God towards men: Ro. v. 8 ; viii. 39; 2 Co. xiii. 13(14). Of the love of God towards Christ: Jn. xv. 10; xvii. 26. Of the love of Christ towards men: Jn. xv. 9 sq.; 2 Co. v. 14; Ro. viii. 35; Eph. iii. 19. In construction : dy. t's rtva, 2 Co. ii. 8 [?]; Eph. i. 15 [L WH om. Tr mrg. br. -rip aydjnjv]; rg «f fyuw iv rjy.lv i. e. love going forth from your soul and taking up its abode as it were in ours, i. q. your love to us, 2 Co. viii. 7 [W. 198 (181 sq.); B. 329 (288)]; mff v/iav i. e. is present with (embraces) you, 1 Co. xvi. 24; ptff r]jiSiv i. e. seen among us, 1 Jn. iv. 17. Phrases: ex*1" ayditip t's rum, 2 Co. ii. 4 ; Col. i. 4 [L T Tr, but WH br.]; 1 Pet. iv. 8; dydirrju $i86vat to give a proof of love, 1 Jn. iii. 1 ; dyanav dydirrjv nvd, Jn. xvii. 26; Eph. ii. 4 (v. in dyanda, sub fin.); ay. rov imtifiarot i. e. enkindled by the Holy Spirit, Ro. xv. 80; 6 vios rrjs dydm/r the Son who is the object of love, i. q. dyanryrdt, Col. i. 13 (W. 287 (222); [B. 162 (141)]) ; 6 6t6s ir,s ay. the author of love, 2 Co. xiii. 11; kottos rrfs ay. troublesome service, toil, undertaken from love, 1 Th. i. 3 ; dy. rtjs dXtjOfias love which embraces the truth, 2 Th. ii. 10 ; 6 6e6s dyami iarlv God is wholly love, his nature is summed up in love, 1 Jn. iv. 8, 16; (jjCXrma dydnTji a kiss as a sign among Christians of mutual affection, 1 Pet. v. 14; fiia rt)v dy- that love may have opportunity of influencing thee ('in order to give scope to the power of love' De W., Wies.), Philem. 9, cf. 14; h dydirj) lovingly, in an affectionate spirit, 1 Co. iv. 21; on love as a basis [al. in love as the sphere or element], Eph. iv. 15 (where iv dy. is to be connected not with dXq&vovrcr but with ai(-r)o-a>pcv), vs. 16; c£ dyamjc influenced by love, Phil. i. 17 (16) ; koto, dydirrjv in a manner befitting love, Ro. xiv. 15. Love is mentioned together with faith and hope in 1 Co. xiii. 13; 1 Th. i. 3; v. 8; Col. i. 4 sq.; Heb. x. 22-24. On the words dydin), dyemav, cf. Gelpke in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1849, p. 646 sq.; on the idea and nature of Christian love see Kostlin, Lehrbgr. des Ev. Joh. etc. p. 248 sqq., 332 sqq.; Rilckert, Theologie, ii. 452 sqq.; Lipsius, Paulin. Rechtfertigungsl. p. 188 sqq.; [Reuss, Thdol. Chr£t. livr. vii. chap. 18].          2.  Plur. dydirat, S>v,agapae, love-feasts, feasts expressing and fostering mutual love which used to be held by Christians before the celebration of the Lord's supper, and at which the poorer Christians mingled with the wealthier and partook in common with the rest of food provided at the expense of the wealthy: Jude 12 (and in 2 Pet. ii. 13 L Tr txt. WH mrg.), cf. 1 Co. xi. 17 sqq.; Acts ii. 42, 46 ; xx. 7; Tertull. Apol. c. 89, and ad Martyr, c. 3; Cypr. ad Quirin. 8, 3; Drescher, De vet. christ. Agapis. Giess. 1824; Mangold in Schenkel i. 58 sq.; [B. D. s. v. Love-Feasts; Diet, of Christ. Antiq. s. v. Agapae; more fully in McC. and S. s. v. Agape].4"yainpr6s, -ij, -6v, (dyanda), beloved, esteemed, dear, favorite; (opp. to ix6p6s, Ro. xi. 28) : 6 vlos fiov (rov Oeov) 6 dyawqr6t, of Jesus, the Messiah, Mt. iii.  17¥Ayap[here WH mrg. take 6 Ay. absol., connecting it with what follows] j xii. 18; xvii. 5 ; Mk. i. 11; is. 7; Lk. ( iii. 22; ix. 35 (where L mrg. T Tr WH 6 iicXfXeyufvos); 2 Pet. i. 17, cf. Mk. xii. 6; Lk. xx. 13; [cf. Ascensio Isa. (ed. Dillmann) vii. 23 sq.; viii. 18, 25, etc.]. dya-mtrol Oeod [W. 194 (182 sq.) ; B. 190 (165)] is applied to Christians as being reconciled to God and judged by him to be worthy of eternal life: Ro. i. 7, cf. xi. 28; 1 Th. i. 4; Col. iii. 12, (Sept., Ps. lix. (lx.) 7; cvii. (cviii.) 7; cxxvi. (cxxvii.) 2, dyainfroi <rov and avrov, of pious Israelites). But Christians, bound together by mutual love, are dyarnjroi also to one another (Philem. 16; 1 Tim. vi. 2); hence they are dignified with this epithet very often in tender address, both indirect (Ro. xvi. 5, 8; Col. iv. 14; Eph. vi. 21, etc.) and direct (Ro. xii. 19 ; 1 Co. iv. 14 ; [Philem. 2 Rec] ; Heb. vi. 9; Jas. i. 16; 1 Pet. ii. 11; 2 Pet. iii. 1; [1 Jn. ii. 7 G L T Tr WH], etc.). Generally foil, by the gen.; once by the dat. ayair. 17/10', 1 Th. ii. 8 [yet cf. W. § 31, 2; B. 190 (165)]. ayarnirbs iv Kvpia beloved in the fellowship of Christ, equiv. to dear fellow-Christian, Ro. xvi. 8. [Not used in the Fourth Gospel or the Rev. In class. Grk. fr. Horn. II. 6, 401 on; cf. Cope on Aristot. rhet. 1, 7, 41.]"Avap [WH'Ay. (see their Intr. § 408)], 7, indecl., (in Joseph. 'Aydpa, -ijr), "^JfJ (flight), Hagar, a bondmaid of Abraham, and by him the mother of Ishmael (Gen. xvi.) : Gal. iv. 24, [25 L txt. T om. Tr br.]. Since the Arabians according to Paul (who had formerly dwelt among them, Gal. i. 17) called the rocky Mt. Sinai by a name similar in sound to "UH ( **"--i. e. rock), the apostle in the passage referred*to employs the name Hagar allegorically to denote the servile sense of fear with which the Mosaic economy imbued its subjects. [Cf. B. D. Am. ed. pp. 978, 2366 note'; Bp. Lghtft.'s remarks appended to his Com. on Gal. Lc.]*AyYoprfo," fut. dyyapevtrw; 1 aor. rfyyapetxra ; to employ a courier, despatch a mounted messenger. A word of Persian origin [used by Menander, Sicyon. 4], but adopted also into Lat. (Vulg. angariare). 'Ayyapoi were public couriers (tabellarii), stationed by appointment of the king of Persia at fixed localities, with horses ready for use, in order to transmit royal messages from one to another and so convey them the more speedily to their destination. See Hdt. 8, 98 [and Rawlinson's note]; Xen. Cyr. 8, 6, 17 (9); cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. s. v. r^iVt; [B. D. s. v. Angareuo; Vanilek, Fremd-wdrter s. v. ayyapos~\. These couriers had authority to press into their service, in case of need, horses, vessels, even men they met, [cf. Joseph, antt. 13, 2, 3]. Hence dyyaptveiv raid denotes to compel one to go a journey, to bear a burden, or to perform any other service: Mt. v. 41 (oorir ae dyyaptitret iuKiov tv i. e. whoever shall compel thee to go one mile); xxvii. 32 (r/yydpcvo-av iva Spy i. e. they forced him to carry), so Mk. xv. 21.*&Yyctov, -ov, to, (i. q. tA iyyoi), a vessel, receptacle : Mt. xiii. 48 [R G L]; xxv. 4.   (From Hdt. down.) * -at, $, (SyytXog), a message, announcement, thing announced; precept declared, 1 Jn. i. 5 (where Rec. has inayyiKla) [cf. Is. xxviii. 9]; iii. 11. [From Horn, down.] *&niKk»; [1 aor. $yy«Xa, Jn. iv. 51 T (for dirr/yy. R G L Tr br. ) ] ;   ( S y y e X o s )   ;   t o   a n n o u n c e :   d y y e X X o v a - a ,   J n .   x x .   1 8   L   T   T r   W H ,   f o r   R   G   d n a y y i X X .   [ F r o m   H o r n ,   d o w n .   C o m p .   :   d v - ,   a n - - ,   8 1 - ,   i g - ,   i n - ,   r r p o t i t - ,   k o t - ,    %n p o - K a . T - , 7 r a p - a y y t W u . ~ \ *  a y y t X o s ,   - o v ,   6 ,   1 .   a   m e s s e n g e r ,   e n v o y ,   o n e   w h o   i s   s e n t :   M t .   x i .   1 0 ;   L k .   v i i .   24, 27; ix. 52; Mk. i. 2; Jas. ii. 25. [Fr. Horn, down.] 2. In the Scriptures, both of the Old Test, and of the New, one of that host of heavenly spirits that, according alike to Jewish and Christian opinion, wait upon the monarch of the universe, and are sent by him to earth, now to execute his purposes (Mt. iv. 6, 11; xxviii. 2; Mk. i. 13; Lk. xvi. ?2; xxii. 43 [L br. WH reject the pass.]; Acts vii. 35; xii. 23; Gal. iii. 19, cf. Heb. i. 14), now to make them known to men (Lk. i. 11, 26; ii. 9 sqq.; Acts x. 3 ; xxvii. 23; Mt. i. 20; ii. 13 ; xxviii. 5 ; Jn. xx. 12 sq.); hence the frequent expressions ayytXos (angel, messenger of Ood, ytho) and SyyeXot icvplov or Syy. tov 6tov. They are subject not only to God but also to Christ (Heb. i. 4 sqq.; 1 Pet. iii. 22, cf. Eph. i. 21; Gal. iv. 14), who is described as hereafter to return to judgment surrounded by a multitude of them as servants and attendants: Mt. xiii. 41, 49; xvi. 27; xxiv. 31; xxv. 31; 2 Th. i. 7, cf. Jude 14. Single angels have the charge of separate elements; as fire, Rev. xiv. 18; waters, Rev. xvi. 5, cf. vii. 1 sq.; Jn. v. 4 [R L]. Respecting the ayyeXos ttjs djivanrov, Rev. ix. 11, see yAfia88av, 3. Guardian angels of individuals are mentioned in Mt. xviii. 10; Acts xii. 15. «The angels of the churches' in Rev. i. 20; ii. 1, 8,12,18; iii. 1, 7,14 are not their presbyters or bishops, but heavenly spirits who exercise such a superintendence and guardianship over them that whatever in their assemblies is worthy of praise or of censure is counted to the praise or the blame of their angels also, as though the latter infused their spirit into the assemblies; cf. De Wette, Diisterdieck, [Alford,] on Rev. i. 20, and Liicke, Einl. in d. Offenb. d. Johan. ii. p. 429 sq. ed. 2; [Bp. Lghtft. on Philip, p. 199 sq.]. Sia roiis dyyiXovt that she may show reverence for the angels, invisibly present in the religious assemblies of Christians, and not displease them, 1 Co. xi. 10. axpdrj dyyiXois in 1 Tim. iii. 16 is probably to be explained neither of angels to whom Christ exhibited himself in heaven, nor of demons triumphed over .by him in the nether world, but of the apostles, his messengers, to whom he appeared after his resurrection. This appellation, which is certainly extraordinary, is easily understood from the nature of the hymn from which the passage i<pavep&6ri. .. iv 86$n seems to have been taken; cf. W. 639 sq. (594), [for other interpretations see Ellic. ad loc.]. In Jn. i. 51 (52) angels are employed, by a beautiful image borrowed from Gen. xxviii. 12, to represent the divine power that will aid Jesus in the dischargeof his Messianic office, and the signal proofs to appear in his history of a divine superintendence. Certain of tie angels have proved faithless to the trust committed to them by God, and have given themselves up to sin, Jude 6; 2 Pet. ii. 4 (Enoch c. vi. etc., cf. Gen. vi. 2), and now obey the devil, Mt. xxv. 41; Rev. xii. 7, cf. 1 Co. vi. 8 [yet on this last passage cf. Meyer; he and others maintain that Syy. without an epithet or limitation never in the N. T. signifies other than good angels]. Hence cfyyeXos SarSv is trop. used in 2 Co. xii. 7 to denote a grievous bodily malady sent by Satan. See Sat'fuov; [Soph. Lex. s. v. SyyeKos; and for the literature on the whole subject B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Angels, — and to the reff. there given add G. L. Hahn, Theol. des N. T., i. pp. 260-384; Delitzsch in Riehm s. v. Engel; Kilbel in Herzog ed. 2, ibid.].4yy°s> •*»*! t<5, (plur. Syyri), i. q. dyyeTov q. v.: Mt. xiii. 48 T Tr WH. (From Horn, down; [cf. Rutherford, Kew Phryn. p. 23].) *&y«, (properly impv. of 3ya>), come! come now! used, as it often is in the classics (W. 516 (481)), even when more than one is addressed: Jas. iv. 13; v. 1.*&7c\t), -ijs, ij, (Sy<o to drive), a herd: Mt. viii. 30 sqq.; Mk. v. 11, 13; Lk. viii. 82 sq.   (From Horn, down.) *&YcycaX6yT)Tos, -ov, 6, (yeveaXoyea>), of whose descent there is no account (in the 0. T.), [R. V. without genealogy"} : Heb. vii. 3 (vs. 6 /uj ytveaKoyoifxtvos). Nowhere found in prof, auth.*&7«rfjs, -tos (-out), S, f/, (yevos), opp. to tvytvf\s, of no family, a man of base birth, a man of no name or reputation ; often used by prof, writ., also in the secondary sense ignoble, cowardly, mean, base. In the N. T. only in 1 Co. i. 28, rck aycvrj toB Koapov i. e. those who among men are held of no account; on the use of a neut. adj. in ref. to persons, see W. 178 (167) ; [B. 122 (107)].*d-yid^u; 1 aor. fryiao-a; Pass., [pres. dyid^ofiat]; pf. fryi-aa-fixu; 1 aor. jjytdp-ftjv; a word for which the Greeks use iylfctv, but very freq. in bibl. (as equiv. to Efap, EPIBn) and eccl. writ.; to make &yiov, render or declare sacred or holy, consecrate. Hence it denotes 1. to render or acknowledge to be venerable, to hallow : to Svopa rov Oeov, Mt. vi. 9 (so of God, Is. xxix. 23; Ezek. xx. 41; xxxviii. 23 ; Sir. xxxiii. (xxxvi.) 4); [Lk. xi. 2] ; rbv Xpio-Tov, 1 Pet. iii. 15 (R G deov).          Since the stampof sacredness passes over from the holiness of God to whatever has any connection with God, dytd£cu> denotes 2. to separate from things profane and dedicate to God, to consecrate and so render inviolable; a. things (nav irpardroKov, ra dp<rcvuta, Deut. xv. 19; ripipav, Ex. xx. 8; o'kox, 2 Chr. vii. 16, etc.) : rbv xpwrov, Mt. xxiii. 17; rbBapov, vs. 19; o-kwos, 2 Tim. ii. 21. b. persons. So Christ is said by undergoing death to consecrate himself to God, whose will he in that way fulfils, Jn. xvii. 19; God is said dyida-ai Christ, i. e. to have selected him for his service (cf. dcpopi£>u>, Gal. i. 15) by having committed to him the office of Messiah, Jn. x. 36, cf. Jer. i. 5; Sir. xxxvi. 12 [«'£ airav rryiaxre, Kai n-pot airbv v, of his selection of men for the priesthood] ; xlv.4; xlix. 7.          Since only what is pure and withoutblemish can be devoted and offered to God (Lev. xxii. 20; Deut. xv. 21; xvii. 1), dyidfo) signifies 3. to purify, (dn-0 rau axaBapat&v is added in Lev. xvi. 19; 2 S. xi. 4) ; and a. to cleanse externally (irpbs t^w T?jr o-apubs KaflapoVjpra), to purify levitically: Heb. ix. 13; 1 Tim. iv. 5f*-)x~to~pvrify by expiation, free from the guilt of siniN^Co. vi. llS Eph. v. 26; Heb. x. 10,14, 29; xiii. 12; ii. Ufsqw^ to 1^3, Ex. xxix. 83, 36); cf. Pfieiderer, Paulinismus, p. 840 sqq., [Eng. trans, ii. 68 sq.]. o. to purify internally by reformation of soul: Jn. xvii. 17,19 (through knowledge of the truth, cf. Jn. viii. 32); 1 Th. v. 23 ; 1 Co. i. 2 (ev Xpurrq 'Iijtrov in the fellowship of Christ, the Holy One); Ro. xv. 16 (iv nveifMTi dytij) imbued with the Holy Spirit, the divine source of holiness); Jude 1 (L T Tr WH qyamjfwVois [q. v.j); Rev. xxii. 11. In general, Christians are called fiyiaa-ufvoi [cf. Deut. xxxiii. 8], as those who, freed from the impurity of wickedness, have been brought near to God by their faith and sanctity, Acts xx. 32; xxvi. 18. In 1 Co. vii. 14 iytafcoSai is used in a peculiar sense of those who, although not Christians themselves, are yet, by marriage with a Christian, withdrawn from the contamination of heathen impiety and brought under the saving influence of the Holy Spirit displaying itself among Christians; cf. Neander ad loc.*d-yiao-(i6s, -ov, 6, a word used only by bibl. and eccl. writ, (for in Diod. 4, 39; Dion. Hal. 1, 21, &yi<Tjx6i is the more correct reading), signifying 1. consecration, purification, rb ayiageiv. 2. the effect of consecration: sanctification of heart and life, 1 Co. i. 30 (Christ is he to whom we are indebted for sanctification) ; 1 Th. iv. 7 ; Ro. vi. 19, 22 ; 1 Tim. ii. 15; Heb. xii. 14; Ayiao-pbs nvtifMToi sanctification wrought by the Holy Spirit, 2 Th. ii. 13; 1 Pet. i. 2. It is opposed to lust in 1 Th. iv. 8 sq. (It is used in a ritual sense, Judg. xvii. 3 [Alex.]; Ezek. xlv. 4; [Am. ii. 11] ; Sir. vii. 31, etc.) [On its use in the N. T. cf. Ellic. on 1 Th. iv. 8; iii. 18.]*£yio$, -a, -ov, (fr. to S.yos religious awe, reverence; &£<o, &£oiuu, to venerate, revere, esp. the gods, parents, [Curtius § 118]), rare in prof, auth.; very frequent in the sacred writ.; in the Sept. for BftiP; 1. properly reverend, worthy of veneration : rd ovojia rov 6eov, Lk. i. 49; God, on account of his incomparable majesty, Rev. iv. 8 (Is. vi. 3, etc.), i. q. evbogos. Hence used a. of things which on account of some connection with God possess a certain distinction and claim to reverence, as places sacred to God which are not to be profaned, Acts vii. 33; toVos Syios the temple, Mt. xxiv. 15 (on which pass, see pbeXvypa, c); Acts vi. 13; xxi. 28; the holy land or Palestine, 2 Mace. i. 29; ii. 18; to ayiop and rh S.yui [W. 177 (167)] the temple, Heb. ix. 1, 24 (cf. Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 2, p. 477 sq.) ; spec, that part of the temple or tabernacle which is called 'the holy place' (KftDD, Ezek. xxxvii. 28; xlv. 18), Heb. ix. 2 [here Rec? reads Ayi'a]; Syta dyiW [W. 246 (231), cf. Ex. xxix. 87; xxx. 10, etc.] the most hallowed portion of the temple, 'the holy of holies,' (Ex. xxvi. 38 [cf. Joseph.ayiovantt. 3, 6, 4]), Heb. ix. 8, in ref. to which the simple ra ayux is also used: Heb. ix. 8, 25; x. 19; xiii. 11; fig. of heaven, Heb. viii. 2; ix. 8, 12 ; x. 19; iyia itoKk Jerusalem, on account of the temple there, Mt. iv. 5; xxvii. 53; Kev. xi. 2 ; xxi. 2; xxii. 19, (Is. xlviii. 2; Neh. xi. 1,18 [Compl.], etc.) ; to Spos to &yu>v, because Christ's transfiguration occurred there, 2 Pet. i. 18; ri (6tov) iyia Siafljmj i. e. which is the more sacred because made by God himself, Lk. i. 72; to ayiov, that worshipful offspring of divine power, Lk. i. 35; the blessing of the gospel, Mt. vii. 6; ayiarrdrri m'ortr, faith (q u a e creditor i.e. the o b j e c t of faith) which came from God and is therefore to be heeded most sacredly, Jude 20; in the same sense iyia tVroAij, 2 Pet. ii. 21; ickjjo-is iyia, because it is the invitation of God and claims us as his, 2 Tim. i. 9 ; Syiai ypacpai (to /3ij3Xt'a ra ayia, 1 Mace. xii. 9), which came from God and contain his words, Ro. i. 2. b. of persons whose services God employs; as for example, apostles, Eph. iii. 5 ; angels, 1 Th. iii. 13 ; Mt. xxv. 31 [Rec] ; Rev. xiv. 10 ; Jude 14; prophets, Acts iii. 21; Lk. i. 70, (Sap. xi. 1); (o<) 5y«oi (tov) 6cov SvOptmoi, 2 Pet. i. 21 [R G L Tr txt.]; worthies of the O. T. accepted by God for their piety, Mt. xxvii. 52 ; 1 Pet. iii. 5.          2. set apart for God,to be, as it were, exclusively his; foil, by a gen. or dat.: to Kvpla, Lk. ii. 23; tov 6eov (i. q. «'kX«t6s tov 6(ov) of Christ, Mk. i. 24; Lk. iv. 34, and ace. to the true reading in Jn. vi. 69, cf. x. 36 ; he is called also 6 ayios n-air tov deov, Acts iv. 80, and simply o Syios, 1 Jn. ii. 20. Just as the Israelites claimed for themselves the title oi ayi.oi, because God selected them from the other nations to lead a life acceptable to him and rejoice in his favor and protection (Dan. vii. 18, 22 ; 2 Esdr. viii. 28), so this appellation is very often in the N. T. transferred to Christians, as those whom God has selected cic tov Koa/iov (Jn. xvii. 14, 16), that under the influence of the Holy Spirit they may be rendered, through holiness,' partakers of salvation in the kingdom of God : 1 Pet. ii. 9 (Ex. xix. 6), cf. vs. 5 ; Acts ix. 13, 32, 41; xxvi. 10; Ro. i. 7; viii. 27; xii. 13; xvi. 15; 1 Co. vi. 1, 2; Phil. iv. 21 sq.; Col. i. 12; Heb. vi. 10; Jude 3 ; Rev. v. 8, etc.; [cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Saints]. 3. of sacrifices and offerings; prepared for God with solemn rite, pure, clean, (opp. to duddapros) : 1 Co. vii. 14, (cf. Eph. v. 3) ; connected with S/juoftos, Eph. i. 4 ; v. 27 ; Col. i. 22; airapxn, Ro. xi. 16 ; dvaia, Ro. xii. 1. Hence 4. in a moral sense, pure, sinless, upright, holy : 1 Pet. i. 16 (Lev. xix. 2 ; xi. 44) ; 1 Co. vii. 34; Sikoios k. ayios, of John the Baptist, Mk. vi. 20 ; ayios k. SUaios, of Christ, Acts iii. 14; distinctively of him, Rev. iii. 7; vi. 10; of God pre-eminently, 1 Pet. i. 15; Jn. xvii. 11 ; Syiai dvaarpotpai, 2 Pet. iii. 11 ; vofios and ivToKfi, i. e. containing nothing exceptionable, Ro. vii. 12; {pikrjfia, such a kiss as is a sign of the purest love, 1 Th. v. 26 ; 1 Co. xvi. 20 ; 2 Co. xiii. 12 ; Ro. xvi. 16. On the phrase to ayiov nvevfia and to irvevpa to ayiov, see Trvcvua, 4 a. Cf. Diestel, Die Heiligkeit Gottes, in Jahrbb. f. deutsch. Theol. iv. p. 1 sqq.; [BaudissintStud. z. Semitisch. Religionsgesch. Heft ii. p. 3 sqq.; Delitzsch in Herzog ed. 2, v. 714 sqq.; esp.] Cremer, Worterbuch, 4te Aufl. p. 32 sqq. [trans, of 2d ed. p. 34 sqq.; Oehler in Herzog xix. 618 sqq.; Zezschwitz, Pro-fangracitat u. s. w. p. 15 sqq.; Trench § lxxxviii.; Campbell, Dissertations, diss. vi., pt. iv.; esp. Schmidt ch. 181].a7u5rt)s, -jjtos, fj, sanctity, in a moral sense; holiness: 2 Co. i. 12 L T Tr WE; Heb. xii. 10. (Besides only in 2 Mace. xv. 2; [cf. W. 25, and on words of this termination Lob. ad Phryn. p. 350].) *dyuta-ivr) [on the a> see reff. in dyaduwvt], init.], -ijt, ij, a word unknown to prof. auth. [B. 73 (64)]; 1. (God's incomparable) majesty, (joined to neyaXoirptmia, Ps. xcv. (xcvi.) 6, cf. cxliv. (cxlv.) 5) : nvtvfia &ytaaivijs a spirit to which belongs ayiao-vprj, not equiv. to n-iw/ia fiyiov, but the divine [?] spiritual nature in Christ as contrasted with his odpg, Ro. i. 4 ; cf. Riickert ad loc., and Zeller in his Theol. Jahrbb. for 1842, p. 486 sqq.; [yet cf. Mey. ad loc.; Gifford (in the Speaker's Com.). Most commentators (cf. e. g. Ellic. on Thess. as below) regard the word as uniformly and only signifying holiness]. 2. moral purity: 1 Th. iii. 13; 2 Co. vii. 1.*&YKdXi), -ijs, {), (ayKt), dyicas [fr. r. ak to bend, curve, cf. Lat. uncus, angulus, Eng. angle, etc.; cf. Curtius § 1; Vanicek p. 2 sq.]), the curve or inner angle of the arm: 8i£ao-0ai els ras dyica\as, Lk. ii. 28. The Greeks also said dyicas Xaftelv, iv dyKaXais irtpitpepctv, etc., see fvay KaXt^bjucu.   [(From Aeschyl. and Hdt. down.)] *AyKurrpov, -ov, to, (fr. an unused dyirifa to angle [see the preceding word]), a fish-hook: Mt. xvii. 27.*a-yxvpa, -as, q, [see ayuaXTj], an anchoi----[ancient anchors resembled modern in form: were of iron, provided with a stock, and with two teeth-like extremities often but by no means always without flukes; see Roschach in Daremberg and Saglio's Diet, des Antiq. (1873) p. 267; Guhl and Koner p. 258] : plirreiv to cast (Lat. jacere), Acts xxvii. 29 ; ixreivuv, vs. 30; mpiaipeiv, vs. 40. Figuratively, any slay or safeguard: as hope, Heb. vi. 19; Eur. Hec. 78 (80) ; Heliod. vii. p. 352 (350).*ayva^os, -ov, 6, ij, (ywBrTo) to dress or full cloth, cf. &p£ad)os), unmilled, unfulled,undressed: Mt.ix. 16^Mk; ^uTglT^Cf. Moeris s. v. aKvawrov; Thom. Mag. p. 12,14Tf*iyveta [WH dyvia (see I, t)], -ay, ^, (iyveito), purity, sinlessness of life : 1 Tim. iv. 12; v. 2. (Of a Nazirite, Num. vi. 2, 21.)    [From Soph. O. T. 864 down.] *d-yv(£<»; 1 aor. tjyviaa; pf. ptcp. act. i)yvu<a>s', pass. ijyKicr/xevoy; 1 aor.pass.iyyviV0ijj>[W. 252(237)]; (iyvos); to purify; 1. ceremonially: ijunrrov, Jo. xi. 55 (to cleanse themselves from levitical pollution by means of prayers, abstinence, washings, sacrifices); the pass, has a reflexive force, to take upon one's self a purification, Acts xxi. 24, 26; xxiv. 18 (T-tn, Num. vi. 8), and is used of Nazirites or those who had taken upon themselves a temp o r a r y   o r   a   l i f e - l o n g   v o w   t o   a b s t a i n   f r o m   w i n e   a n d   a l l   k i n d s   o f   i n t o x i c a t i n g   d r i n k ,   f r o m   e v e r y   d e f i l e m e n t   a n d   f r o m   s h a v i n g   t h e   h e a d   [ c f .   B B .   D D .   s .   v .   N a z a r i t e ] .   2 .   m o r a l l y :   r a s   x a p S i a t ,   J a s .   i v .   8 ;   T a s   V " > X " r >   *   ^ e t l   *  %  2 2 ;   i a v r a v ,   1   J n .   i i i .   3 .       ( S o p h . ,  Eur., Plut., aL)# 8aypavXea -ov, 6, purification, lustration, [Dion. Hal. 3, 22, i. p. 469,13; Plut. de defect, orac. 15]: Acts xxi. 26 (equiv. to "i.y, Num. vi. 5), Naziritic; see <tyw'£a>, 1.*fryvoca (rNO [cf. ytvaacneco]), -co, [impv. dyvoeka 1 Co. xiv. 38 R G Tr txt. WH mrg.]; impf. rjyvoow; 1 aor. r/yvor/tra; [Pass., pres. dyvooip&t, ptcp. ayvoovpcvos; fr. Horn, down]; a. to be ignorant, not to know: absol., 1 Tim. i. 13; two, ti, Acts xiii. 27 ; xvii. 23; Ro. x. 3; tv tivi (as in [Test. Jos. § 14] Fabricii Pseudepigr. ii. p. 717 [but the reading r/yvoovv e'jrt iracri rovrott is now given here; see Test. xii. Patr. ad fid. cod. Cant, etc., ed. Sinker, Cambr. 1869]), 2 Pet. ii. 12, unless one prefer to resolve the expression thus: tv tovtois, <$ dyvooia-i /SXaer-<t>ruiovvrfs,W. 629 (584), [cf.B. 287 (246jj ; foil, by 6Vt, Ro. ii. 4; vi. 3; vii. 1; 1 Co. xiv. 38 (where the antecedent clause ort ktA. is to be supplied again) ; ov 8i\a> vpas dyvotiv, a phrase often used by Paul, [an emphatic] scitote: foil, by an ace. of the obj., Ro. xi. 25; imp twos, on, 2 Co. i. 8; itcpi ruw, 1 Co. xii. 1; 1 Th. iv. 13; foil, by on, Ro. i. 13; 1 Co. x. 1; in the pass, dyvofhat 'he is not known' i. e. ace. to the context 'he is disregarded,'1 Co. xiv. 38 L T Tr mrg. WH txt.; dyuoovpevot (opp. to firiyivatrKopeuoi) men unknown, obscure, 2 Co. vi. 9; dyvoovpevot ran unknown to one, Gal. i. 22 ; owe dyvotiv to know very well, rt, 2 Co. ii. 11 (Sap. xii. 10).   b. not to understand: rt, Mk. ix. 32; Lk. ix. 45.    c. to err, sin through mistake, spoken mildly of those who are not high-handed or wilful transgressors (Sir. v. 15; 2 Mace. xi. 31) : Heb. v. 2, on which see DeUtzsch.*cvyvATipa, -ror, to, a sin, (strictly, that committed through ignorance or thoughtlessness [A. "V. error]): Heb. ix. 7 (1 Mace. xiii. 39; Tob. iii. 3; Sir. xxiii. 2); cf. dyvoia, c. [and Trench § lxvi.].*dvvoia, -as, f), [fr. Aeschyl. down], want of knowledge, ignorance, esp. of divine things: Acts xvii. 30; 1 Pet. i. 14; such as is inexcusable, Eph. iv. 18 (Sap. xiv. 22); of moral blindness, Acts iii. 17.    [Cf. dyvota>.~]*d-yvos, -q. -ov, (&£op.ai, see ayios) ; 1. exciting reverence, venerable, sacred: nip koI ij irrro&os, 2 Mace. xiii. 8; Eur. El. 812. 2. pure (Eur. Or. 1604 ayvbsyap tlju \eipas, aXK' ov ras (ppevas, Hipp. 316 sq. ayvas . . • \eipas aifiaros (pepeis, X*lPes /*** dyval, (ppljv 8' ?x" ju'ao>ta, ; a. pure from carnality, chaste, modest: Tit. ii. 5; napde vos an unsullied virgin, 2 Co. xi. 2 (4 Mace, xviii. 7). b. pure from every fault, immaculate : 2 Co. vii. 11; Phil. iv. 8 ; 1 Tim. v. 22; 1 Pet. iii. 2; 1 Jn. iii. 3 (of God [yet cf. ctcdvos: 1 b.]); Jas. iii. 17. (From Horn, down, i   [Cf. reff. s. v. ayms, fin.; Westc. on 1 Jn. iii. 3.]*eryv<5rr|s, -jjtos, tj, [ayvos], purity, uprightness of life :2  Co. vi. 6;   in  2 Co. xi. 3  some critical authorities add Kal ttjs dyvorijTos after &7rK6rr]Tos (so L Tr txt., but Tr mrg. TO br.), others read t^s ayvortjTos teal before tfarXor.    Found once in prof, auth., see Boeckh, Corp. Inscrr. i. p. 583 no. 1133 1. 15: cWaiocrvitjc tvticev teat iyvo-avvws, adv.,purely, with, sincerity: Phil. i. 16 (17).* d-yvexrla, -as, fj,   (yvaxns), want of knowledge, ignorance : 1 Pet. ii. 15: 1 Co. xv. 34, (Sap. xiii. 1).*fi-7v<«rrosi -ov, [fr. Horn.-down], unknown: Acts xvii. 23 [cf. B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Altar].*4-yopA, -as, {), (ayeipa, pf. ijyopa, to collect), [fr. Horn. down] ; 1. any collection of men, congregation, assembly. 2. place where assemblies are held; in the N. T. the forum or public place,—where trials are held, Actsxvi. 19; and the citizens resort, Acts xvii. 17; and commodities are exposed for sale, Mk. vii. 4 (dw* dyopds sc. cKdovrcs on returning from the market if they have not washed themselves they eat not; W. § 66, 2 d. note) ; accordingly, the most frequented part of a city or village : Mt. xi. 16, (Lk. vii. 32) ; Mk. vi. 56 ; Mt. xx. 3; xxiii. 7; Mk. xii. 38; [Lk. xi. 43]; xx. 46. [See B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Market.] *dyopcilu ; [impf. tjyopa^ou; fut. dyopdtra]; 1 aor. ijyo-patra; Pass., pf. ptcp. ifyopaapivos; 1 aor. rjyopda&rjv; (dyopd) ; 1. to frequent the market-place. 2. to buy (properly, in the market-place), [Arstph., Xen., al.]; used a. literally: absol., Mt. xxi. 12; Mk. xi. 15; Lk. xix. 45 [not G T Tr WH]; ti, Mt. xiii. 44, 46 ; xiv. 15 and parallel pass., Jn. iv. 8; vi. 5 ; with napa and gen. of the pers. fr. whom, Rev. iii. 18, [Sept., Polyb.]; e(c and gen. of price, Mt. xxvii. 7; simple gen. of price, Mk. vi. 87. b. figuratively: Christ is said to have purchased his disciples i^e^-H^ade them, as it were, his private property, {Xo^vi^^-Lthis is commonly understood of God; but cf. Jn. xvii. 9, 10]; 1 Co. vii. 23 (with gen. of price added; see n/tfi, 1); 2 Pet. ii. 1. He is also said to have bought them for God iv ryMTi airov, by shedding his blood, Rev. v. 9; they, too, are spoken of as purchased diro rijs "fys, Rev. xiv. 3, and dird t5>v dvdpimav, vs. 4, so that they are withdrawn from the earth (and its miseries) and from (wicked) men.    But dyopa£a> does not mean r e d e e m   ( e t - a y o p d f a ) ,   %  a s   i s   c o m m o n l y   B a i d .         [ C o m p .   :   * £ - a y o p d £ a . ~ \  d - y o ' p a t o s   ( r a r e l y   - a m ) ,   - a t e w ,   ( d y o p d ) ,   r e l a t i n g   t o   t h e   m a r k e t - p l a c e ;   1 .   f r e q u e n t i n g   t h e   m a r k e t - p l a c e ,   ( e i t h e r   t r a n s a c t i n g   b u s i n e s s ,   a s   t h e   K a i r r j X o t ,   o r )   s a u n t e r i n g   i d l y ,   ( L a t .   s u b r o s t ranus, subbasilicanus, Germ. Pflastertreter, our loafer) : Acts xvii. 5, (Plat. Prot. 347 c. dyopawi xal tpaiXoi, Arstph. ran. 1015, al.). 2.' of affairs usually transacted in the market-place: dyopa'ioi (sc. tnupai [W. 590 (549)] or cvvohoi [Mey. et al.]) ayovrai, judicial days or assemblies, [A. V. mrg. court-days'], Acts xix. 38 (ras dyopaiovs nwier&u, Strabo 13, p. 982), but many think we ought to read dyopawi here, so G L cf. W. 53 (52); but see [Alf. and Tdf. ad loc.; Lipsius, Gram. Untersuch. p. 26;] Meyer on Acts xvii. 5; Gottling p. 297; [Chandler ed. 1 p. 269].*cvypa, -as, q, [ayw]; 1. a catching, hunting: Lk. v. 4. 2. the thing caught: fj ay pa rav l^Ovav 'the catch or haul of fish' i. e. the fishes taken [A. V. draught], Lk. v. 9.*cV-ypA|i|iaTOs, -ov, [ypafi/M], illiterate, without learning: Acts iv. 13 (i. e. unversed in the learning of the Jewish schools ; cf. Jn. vii. 15 ypafifiara pf/ p.tpa&r)Ka>s)*d-yp-avXe'o, -dj to be an aypavXos (dypos, ai\ij), i. e. to live in the fields, be vtnder the open sky, even by night: Lk. ii. 8, (Strabo p. 301 a.; Plut. Num. 4).*aypevco                                                               9iyptio: 1 aor. rjyptwra; (Sypa); to catch (properly, wild animals, fishes): fig., Mk. xii. 18 tm clvtov dypevo-ao-i \6ytp in order to entrap him by some inconsiderate remark elicited from him in conversation, cf. Lk. xx. 20. (In Anthol. it often denotes to ensnare in the toils of love, captivate; cf. nayi&eva, Mt. xxii. 15; crayrjveva, Lcian. Tim. 25.) *&ypi-cX.<uo $ ,   - o k ,   ( a y p i o s   a n d   e k c u o s   o r   c \ a i a ,   l i k e   a y p i a / i - n t \ o s ) ;   1 .   o f   o r   b e l o n g i n g   t o   t h e   o l e a s t e r ,   o r   w i l d   o l i v e ,    %  ( t n c v r d X ^ v   d y p t e X a i o v ,   A n t h o l .   9 ,   2 3 7 ,   4 ;   [ c f .   L o b .   P a r a - l i p ,   p .   3 7 6 ] ) ;   s p o k e n   o f   a   s c i o n ,   K o .   x i .   1 7 .   2 .   A s   s u b s t .   1 7   a y p u k t u o s   t h e   o l e a s t e r ,   t he wild olive, (opp. to KaWUXaios [cf. Aristot. plant. 1, 6]), also called by the Greeks kotlvos, Ro. xi. 24 ; cf. Fritzsche on Rom. voL ii. 495 sqq. [See B. D. s. v. Olive, and Tristram, Nat. Hist, of the Bible, s. v. Olive. The latter says, p. 377, ' the wild olive must not be confounded with the Oleaster or Oil-tree '.]*ovpios, -a, -ov, (dypis), [fr. Horn, down] ; 1. living or growing in the fields or the woods, used of animals in a state of nature, and of plants which grow without culture: fte\t aypiov wild honey, either that which is deposited by bees in hollow trees, clefts of rocks, on the bare ground (1 S. xiv. 25 [cf. vs. 26]), etc., or more correctly that which distils from certain trees, and is gathered when it has become hard, (Diod. Sic. 19, 94 fin. speaking of the Nabathaean Arabians says <pverai nap' airrols /*«Xi jroXi ro Kakavptvov aypiov, <u xpavrai irora luff vSaros; cf. Suid. andesp. Suicer s. v. dxpls): Mt. iii. 4; Mk. i. 6.         2. fierce, untamed: ni/tara 6a\do-oyjt,Jude 13 (Sap. xiv.l).*'Aypfanras, -a (respecting this gen. see W. § 8, 1 p. 60 (59); B. 20 (18)), 6, see 'Hpi>St]s, (3 and) 4.&yp6?, -oC, 6, [fr. 3.ya>; prop, a drove or driving-place, then, pasturage; cf. Lat. ager, Germ. Acker, Eng. acre; Fick, Pt. i. p. 8];          a. a field, the country: Mt. vi. 28;xxiv. 18; Lk. xv. 15; [Mk. xi. 8 T Tr WH], etc.         b.i. q. Xctyn'ov, a piece ofland, bit oftillage: Actsiv.37; Mk x. 29 ; Mt. xiii. 24, 27, etc. c. ol aypol the farms, country-seats, neighboring hamlets: Mk. v. 14 (opp. to ttoKis) ; vi. 36 ; Lk. ix. 12.   [(From Horn, on.)]dypvirvc'w, -S>; (aypvirvos equiv. to Svnvos); to be sleepless, keep awake, watch, (i. q. yptryopea [see below]) ; [fr. Theognis down] ; trop. to be circumspect, attentive, ready : Mk. xiii. 33; Lk. xxi. 36 ; ets n, to be intent upon a thing, Eph. vi. 18; xnrep twos, to exercise constant vigilance over something (an image drawn from shepherds), Heb. xiii. 17. [Syn. dypvnvetv, ypijyo-pelv, VT/<peiv: "dypvirveiv may be taken to express simply .. . absence of sleep, and, pointedly, the absence of it when due to nature, and thence a wakeful frame of mind as opposed to listlessness; while yprryopeiv (the offspring of eypffyopa) represents a waking state as the effect of some arousing effort... i. e. a more stirring image than the former. The group of synonyms is completed by vrj<peiv, which signifies a state untouched by any slumberous or beclouding influences, and thence, •Hie that is guarded against advances of drowsiness ordryeebewilderment. Thus it becomes a term for wariness (cf. vaxpt Kal pe'nvtur' dmoreiv) against spiritual dangers and beguilements, 1 Pet, v. 8, etc." Green, Crit. Notes on the N. T. (note on Mk. xiii. 38 sq.).]*&YpvirvCa, -at, 17, sleeplessness, watching: 2 Co. vi. 5 ; xi. 27.   [From Hdt. down.]*d-ycn ; impf. f/yov, fut. 8£a; 2 aor. ijyayov, inf. dyayelv, (more rarely 1 aor. ?£a, in irraya 2 Pet. ii. 5); Pass., pres. Ayo/juu; impf. nyop.rjv; 1 aor. faV; 1 fut. 0**7-o-ofiai; [fr. Horn, down]; to drive, lead. 1. properly [A. V. ordinarily, to bring]; a. to lead by laying hold of, and in this way to bring to the point of destination : of an animal, Mt. xxi. 7; Lk. xix. 85 ; Mk. xi. 7 (T Tr WH <pepov<nv) ; [Lk. xix. 80]; nva foil, by els with ace. of place, Lk. iv. 9 [al. refer this to 2 c.]; x. 34; (ijyayov k- elaffyayov els, Lk. xxii. 54); Jn. xviii. 28; Acts vi. 12; ix. 2; xvii. 5 [R G]; xxi. 34; xxii. 5, 24 Rec.; xxiii. 10, 31; fai with ace, Acts xvii. 19; ear, Lk. iv. 29; np6s riva, to persons, Lk. [iv. 40]; xviii. 40; Acts ix. 27; Jn. viii. 8 [Rec.]. b. to lead by accompanying to (into) any place: els, Acts xi. 26 (25); eas, Acts xvii. 15; irp6s Ttva, to persons, Jn. i. 42 (43) ; ix. 13; Acts xxiii. 18; foil, by dat. of pers. to whom, Acts xxi. 16 on which see W. 214 (201) at length, [cf. B. 284 (244)], (1 Mace. vii. 2 &yuv avrovs air if). c. to lead with one's self, attach to one's self as an attendant : nvd, 2 Tim. iv. 11; 1 Th. iv. 14, (Joseph, antt. 10, 9, 6 djrrjpey els Tr/v Aiyunroi' ayav leal 'lepeplav). Some refer Acts xxi. 16 to this head, resolving it ayovres Mvdo-twa nap' $ gepurdwfiev, but incorrectly, see W. [and B.] as above. d. to conduct, bring: nvd, [Lk. xix. 27]; Jn. vii. 45; [xix. 4, 13]; Acts v. 21, 26, [27]; xix. 87; xx. 12; xxv. 6, 23; na\ov, Mk. xi. 2 (where T Tr WH (pepere) ; [Lk. xix. 80, see a. above]; n-a rivi or n run, Mt. xxi. 2 ; Acts xiii. 23 G L T Tr WH. e. to cead away, to a court of justice, magistrate, etc.: simply, Mk. xiii. 11; [Acts xxv- 17] ; em with ace, Mt. x. 18; Lk. xxi. 12 (T Tr WH dnayofievovs); [Lk. xxiii. 1]; Acts [ix. 21]; xviii. 12; (often in Attic) ; \np6s with ace, Jn. xviii. 13 LTTrWH]; to punishment: simply (2 Mace vi. 29; vii. 18, etc.), Jn. xix. 16 Grsb. (R km dnfjyayov, which L T Tr WH have expunged); with telic inf., Lk. xxiii. 82; [foil, by "va, Mk. xv. 20 Lchm.]; iiA a<^ayr)v, Acts viii. 32, (erii 6avarq, Xen. mem. 4, 4, 3 ; an. 1, 6,10). 2. tropically; a. to lead, guide, direct: Jn. x. 16; els perdvowv, Ro. ii. 4. b. to lead through, conduct, to something, become the author of good or of evil to some one : els 86£av, Heb. ii. 10, (els [al. eVi] KoKoKayaOLav, Xen. mem. 1, 6, 14; els Sov\eiav, Dem. p. 213, 28). o. to move, impel, of forces and influences affecting the mind: Lk. iv. 1 (where read ev tji epffiiuf [with L txt. T Tr WH]); nveipari deov Syto-dai, Ro. viii. 14; Gal. v. 18; emBviuais, 2 Tim. iii. 6; simply, urged on by blind impulse, 1 Co. xii. 2 — unless impelled by Satan's influence be preferable, cf. 1 Co. x. 20; Eph. ii. 2; [B. 383 (328) sq.]. 3. to pass a day, keep or celebrate a feast, etc.: rpirrjv t)pipav ayei sc. 6 ijA, Lk. xxiv. 21 [others (see Meyer) supply mrros10or 6 'Irjo-ovs; still others take Syti as impers., one passes, Vulg. tertia dies est; see B. 184 (118)] ; yeveo-iwv dyopk-vuv, Mt. xiv. 6B6; dyopaioi (q. v. 2), Acts xix. 38; often in the O. T. Apocr. (cf. Wahl, Clavis Apocr. s, v. Sya, 3), in Hdt. and Attic -writ. 4. interns, to go, depart, (W. § 38, 1, p. 251 (236) ; [B. 144T(T2T0JIjggS!Eta uijo, Mt. xxvi. 46; Mk. xiv. 42-; Jn. xiv. 81 ;   n - p o s   n v a ,   J n .   x i .   1 5 ;   t t s   w i t h   a c e .   o f   p l a c e ,   M k .   i .   3 8 ;   J n .   x i .   7 ,   ( E p i c t .   d i s s .   3 ,   2 2 ,   5 5   S y u p e v   e V i   t o ~ v   d v O v n a T o v )   ;   [ f o i l ,   b y   t r a ,   J n .   x i .   1 6 .   C o m p .   :   d v - ,   i n - a v - ,   a i r - ,   < r v v - a r r - ,   8 i - ,   c i V - ,   7 r a p - e t o * - ,   « £ - ,   ¬ 7 r - .   k i t - ,   ^ x e r -   7 r a p - ,   i r e p t - - ,   i r p o - ,   n p O G - ,   a w .   f i n - o v v - ,   v w a y a .         S y n .   c f .   S c h m i d t   c h .   1 0 5 . ] *  & - y a > y f j ,   - i j r ,   1 7 ,   ( f r .   a y c o ,   l i k e   e ' 8 w 8 j j   f r .   ? 8 o > ) ;   1 .   p r o p  e r l y ,   a   l e a d i n g .   2 .   f i g u r a t i v e l y ,   a .   t r a n s ,   o   c o n d u c t  i n g ,   t r a i n i n g ,   e d u c a t i o n ,   d i s c i p l i n e .   b .   i n t r a n s .   t h e   l i f e   l e d ,   w a y   o r   c o u r s e  of life (a use which arose from the fuller expression dyarfy tov |3i'ou, in Polyb. 4, 74,1.4; cf. Germ. Lebensfuhrung) : 2 Tim. iii. 10 [R. V. conduct], (Esth. ii." 20 ; 2 Mace. iv. 16; fj e» Xpurrcp dyayfi, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 47, 6; dyvrj dyoayfj, ibid. 48, 1). Often in prof. auth. in all these senses.*,dfciv, -avos, 6, (3yo>); 1. a place of assembly (Horn. H. 7, 298; 18, 376); spec, the place in which the Greeks assembled to celebrate solemn games (as the Pythian, the Olympian) ; hence 2. a contest, of athletes, runners, charioteers. In a fig. sense, a. in the phrase (used by the Greeks, see rpe^co, b.) rpexeu> Tov ay&va, Heb. xii. 1, that is to say 'Amid all hindrances let us exert ourselves to the utmost to attain to the goal of perfection set before the followers of Christ'; any struggle with dangers, annoyances, obstacles, standing in the way of faith, holiness, and a desire to spread the gospel: 1 Th. Jl. 2 ; Phil. i. 30; 1 Tim. vi. 12 ; 2 Tim. iv. 7.          b. intense solicitude, anxiety: nepi nvos, Col.ii. 1 [cf. Enr. Ph. 1350; Polyb. 4, 56,4]. On the ethical use of figures borrowed from the Greek Games cf. Grimm on Sap. iv. 1; \_Howson, Metaphors of St. Paul, Essay iv.; Conyb. and Hows. Life and Epp. of St. Paul, ch. xx.; Me. and S. iii. 733" sq.; BB.DD. s. v. Games].*d-yovta, -ay, fj; 1. i. q. dyav, which see. 2. It is often used, from Dem. (on the Crown p. 236, 19 ?jv 8 $iAnr7ror iv (pofla itai iroXkrj aycovla) down, of severe mental struggles and emotions, agony, anguish: Lk. xxii. 44 [L br. W H   r e j e c t   t h e   p a s s . ] ;   ( 2   M a c e .   i i i .   1 4 ,   1 6   ;   x v .   1 9   ;   J o s e p h ,   a n t t .   1 1 ,   8 , 4   6   d p x i t p t v s   ? j v   i v   a y w v i q   m t   & « )  %        [ C f -   F i e l d ,   O t i u m   N o r v .   i i i .   o n   L k .   1 .   c ]   *  & - y u v ( £ o | M U ;   i m p f .   r f y a v i ^ o p j q v ;   p f .   r j y a v u r p a i ;   a d e p o n .   m i d .   v e r b   [ c f .   W .   2 6 0   ( 2 4 4 ) ] ;   ( d y a v )   ;   1 .   to enter a contest; contend in the gymnastic games: 1 Co. ix. 25. 2. univ. to contend with adversaries, fight: foil; by tva y.{), Jn. xviii. 36. 3. fig. to contend, struggle, with difficulties and dangers antagonistic to the gospel: CoL i. 29; 1 Tim. iv. 10 (L T Tr txt. WH txt.; for Rec. 6vubi^6fie6a) ; ayavigofiai dyava (often used by the Greeks also, esp. the Attic), 1 Tim. vi. 12; 2 Tim. iv. 7. 4. to endeavor with strenuous zeal, strive, to obtain something; foil, by an inf., Lk. xiii. 24 ; \mip nvos tv raisis, 'va, Col. iv. 12.    [Comp. : can-, in-, tear-,vayavL{oiuuy'A8A|i, indecl. prop, name (but in Joseph.'Aba/uts, -ov), D1S (i. e. ace. to Philo, de leg. alleg. i. 29, Opp. i. p. 62 ed. Mang., y^W; ace. to Euseb. Prep. Ev. vii. 8 yrjyfvtit; ace. to Joseph, antt. 1,1, 2 irvppos, with which Gesenius agrees, see his Thesaur. i. p. 25) ; 1. Adam, the first man and the parent of the whole human race: Lk. iii. 88; Ro. v. 14; 1 Co. xv. 22, 45; 1 Tim. ii. 18 sq.; Jude 14. In accordance with the Rabbinic distinction between the former Adam (j^SOn Dl«), the first man, the author of ' all our woe,' and the latter Adam (I'HFISn O"1X), the Messiah, the redeemer, in 1 Co. xv. 45 Jesus Christ is called 6 foyaTos 'ASa/i (see t<rxoros, 1) and contrasted with 6 np&ros avdpomos; Ro. v. 14 6 fieKKwv sc. 'A8dfu [2. one of the ancestors of Jesus: Lk. iii. 88 WH mrg. (cf. 'AVfr).]*&S&iravos, -ov, (ficmdvrj), without expense, requiring no outlay: 1 Co. ix. 18 (Tva dbanavov 6tjo-<o t6 dayyeXtov 'that I may make Christian instruction gratuitous').*'A88C or 'A88« T Tr WH [see WH. App. p. 155, and s.v.ci,i],6, the indecl. prop, name of one of the ancestors of Christ: Lk. iii. 28.*A8eX.<H, -i}*> V> (see d5e\<p6i), [fr. Aeschyl. down], sifter; 1. a,full, own sister (i.e. by birth) : Mt. xix. 29; Lk. x. 39 sq.; Jn. xi. 1, 8, 5; xix. 25; Ro. xvi. 15, etc.; respecting the sisters of Christ, mentioned in Mt. xiii. 56 ; Mk. vi. 3, see d$f~K(p6s, 1. 2. one connected by the tie of the Christian religion: 1 Co. vii. 15; ix. 5; Philem. 2 L T Tr WH; Jas. ii. 15 ; with a subj. gen., a Christian woman especially dear to one, Ro. xvi. 1.&.8e\<|><Ss, -ov, 6, (fr. a copulative and Se\<pis, from the same womb; cf. dydarap), [fr. Horn, down]; X. a brother (whether born of the same two parents, or only of the same father or the same mother): Mt. i. 2; iv. 18, and often. That ' the brethren of Jesus,' Mt. xii. 46, 47 [but WH only in mrg.]; xiii. 55 sq.; Mk. vi. G (in the last two passages also sisters); Lk. viii. 19 s".; Jn. ii. 12; vii. 3; Acts i. 14; Gal. i. 19; 1 Co. ix. 5, are neither sons of Joseph by a wife married before Mary (which is the account in the Apocryphal Gospels [c£ Thilo, Cod. Apocr. N. T. i. 362 sq.]), nor cousins, the children of Alphseus or Cleophas [i. e. Clopas] :md Mary a sister of the mother of Jesus (the current opinion among the doctors of the church since Jerome and Augustine [cf. Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Gal., diss. ii.]\ according to that use of language by which dbek<p6s like the Hebr. nsj denotes any blood-relation or kinsman (Gen. xiv. 16 ;1 S. xx. 29; 2 K. x. 13; 1 Chr. xxiii. 1\ etc.), but own brothers, born after Jesus, is clear principally from Mt. i. 25 [only in R G]; Lk. ii. 7—where, had Mary borne no other children after Jesus, instead of vlbv irparr&roKov, the expression viov itovoyevri would have been used, as well as from Acts i. 14, cf. Jn. vii. 5, where the Lord's brethren are distinguished from the apostles. See further on this point under 'iaKoo/Sot, 8. [Cf. B. D. s. v. Brother; Andrews, Life of our Lord, pp. 104-116; Bib. Sacr.for 1864,pp. 855-869; for 186911pp. 745-758; Laurent, N. T. Studien pp. 158-193; Mc-Clellan, note on Mt. xiii. 55.] 2. according to a Hebr. use of nK (Ex. ii.' 11; iv. 18, etc.), hardly to be met with in prof, auth., having the same national ancestor, belonging to the same people, countryman; so the Jews (as the o-isippa 'A^paafi, viol 'io-pa^X, cf. Acts xiii. 26; [in Deut. xv. 8 opp. to 6 dXXorpios, cf. xvii. 15; xv. 12; Philo de septen. § 9 init.]) are called d8cX(poi: Mt. v. 47; Acts iii. 22 (Deut. xviii. 15) ; vii. 23; xxii. 5; xxviii. 15, 21; Ro. ix. 8; in address, Acts ii. 29 ; iii. 17; xxiii. 1; Heb. vii. 5. 3. just as in Lev. xix. 17 the word nN is used interchangeably with ;n (but, as vss. 16,18 show, in speaking of Israelites), bo in the savings of Christ, Mt. v. 22, 24; vii. 8 sqq., a8ek(pos is used for 6 ttXijo-ioj' to denote (as appears from Lk. x. 29 sqq.) any fellow-man, — as having one and the same father with others, viz. God (Heb; ii. 11), and as descended from the same first ancestor (Acts xvii. 26); cf. Epict. diss. 1,13, 3. 4. a fellow-believer, united to another b% tfaim&ii&ggjecfien;, so mort frequently qf  BS        !*» M *»» but a single family:Mt. xxiii. 8 ; Jn. xxi. 23 ; Acts vi. 3 [Lehm. om.]; ix. 30; xi. 1; Gal. i. 2; 1 Co. v. 11; P,hil. i. 14, etc.; in courteous address, Ro. i. 13 ; vii. 1;                                                                                                                                                                        % %, %   C o . _ ^ L   1 0 ;   1   J n .   i i .   7   R e c ,   a n d   o f t e n   e l s e w h e r e ;   y e t   i n   t h e   p h r a s e o l o g y   o f   J o h n   i t   h a s   r e f e r e n c e   t o   t h e   n e w   l i f e   u n t o   w h i c h   m e n   a r e   b e g o t t e n   a g a i n   b y   t h e   e f f i c i e n c y   o f   a   c o m m o n   f a t h e r ,   e v e n   G o d :   1   J n .   i i .   9   s q q . ;   i i i .   1 0 ,   1 4 ,   e t c . ,   c f .   v .   1 .   5 .   a n   a s s ociate in employment or office: 1 Co. i. 1; 2 Co. i. 1; ii. 13 (12); Eph. vi. 21; Col. i. 1. 6. brethren of Christ is used of, a. his brothers by blood; see 1 above, b. all men: Mt. xxv. 40 [Lchm. br.] ; Heb. ii. 11 sq. [al. refer these exx. to d.] o. apostles: Mt. xxviii. 10: Jn. xx. 17. d. Christians, as those who are destined to be exalted to the same heavenly 8o£a (q. v III. 4 b.) which he enjoys: Ro. viii. 29.aSeX^nis, -ip-os, )), brotherhood; the abstract for the concrete, a band of brothers i. e. of Christians, Christian brethren : 1 Pet. ii. 17; v. 9. (1 Mace. xii. 10, 17, the connection of allied nations; 4 Mace. ix. 23; x. 3, the connection of brothers; Dio Chrys. ii. 137 [ed. Reiske]; often in eccl. writ.) *o-St)Xos, -ov, (8i)Xos), not manifest: Lk. xi. 44; indistinct, uncertain, obscure: <p<ovrj, 1 Co. xiv. 8. (In Grk. auth. fr. Hes. down.) [Cf. 8f)Xos, fin.; Schmidt ch. 130.] *&&i)\6n)$, titos, fj, uncertainty: 1 Tim. vi. 17 jtXoutov u&jXotjjti equiv. to 7rXoui-<p d8qX<p, cf. W. § 34, 3 a. [Polyb., Dion. Hal., Philo.]*dS^Xus, adv., uncertainly: 1 Co. ix. 26 ovtio Tp4x">t us ovk aSrjXas i. e. not uncertain whither; cf. Mey. ad loc.   [(Thuc, al.)] *&8T)|M>vca>, -a>; (fr. the unused dfSyixow, and this fr. a priv. and 8ij/xoc; accordingly uncomfortable, as not at home, cf. Germ, unheimisch, unheimlich; cf. Bttm. Lexil. ii. 136 [Fishlake's trans, p. 29 sq. But Lob. (Pathol. Proleg. p. 238, cf. p. 160) et al. connect it with aSruuov, dSrjo-ai; see Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. ii. 26]) ; to be troubled, distressed:  Mt. xxvi. 87 ;   Mk. xiv. 33;  Phil. ii. 26. °s> and often m(Xen. Hell. 4, 4, 3 d8?)jK>vfj(rai ras prof, auth.)*'AiStp, £8ijs, -ov, 6, (for the older 'Ai8»js, which Horn. uses, and this fr. a priv. and tSetw, not to be seen, [cf. Lob. Path. Element, ii. 6 sq.]); in the classics 1. a prop, name, Hades, Pluto, the god of the lower regions; so in Horn, always. 2. an appellative, Orcus, the nether world, the realm of the dead [cf. Theocr. idyll. 2,159 schol. rt)v tov $8ov Kpovei jrvXijv tovt forty dn-oflamTcu]. In the Sept. the Hebr. VltW is almost always rendered by this word (once by Savaros, 2 S. xxii. 6); it denotes, therefore, in bibl. Grk. Orcus, the infernal regions, a dark (Job x. 21) and dismal place (but cf. yievva and 7rapafi«<ror) in the very depths of the earth (Job xi. 8 ; Is. lvii. 9 ; Am. ix. 2, etc.; see a/3u<T<ro9), the common receptacle of disembodied spirits : Lk. xvi. 23 ; eis aSou sc. 8o/un>, Acts ii. 27, 31, ace. to a very common ellipsis, cf. W. 592 (550) [B. 171 (149)] ; (but L T Tr WH in vs. 27 and T WH in both verses read «s £8i)i> ; so Sept. Ps. xv. (xvi.) 10); irvXat qSov, Mt. xvi. 18 (wv\apo\ a8ot>, Job xxxviii. 17; see m\rf); ttXtis tov q&ov, Rev. i. 18; Hades as a power is personified, 1 Co. xv. 55 (where L T Tr WH read 8&varc for R G ?8ij [cf. Acts ii. 24 Tr mrg.]); Rev. vi. 8; xx. 13 sq. Metaph. f«s $8ov \_Kara-fjatvciv or] Kara/3tj3a£cada( to [go or] be thrust down into the depth of misery and disgrace : Mt. xi. 23 [here L Tr WH Koraj3aiWii']; Lk. x. 15 [here Tr mrg. WH txt. Karaflaiveiv]. [See esp. Boettcher, De Inferis, s. v."Ai8ijs in Grk. index. On the existence and locality of Hades cf. Greswell on the Parables, App. ch. x. vol. v. pt. ii. pp. 261-406; on the doctrinal significance of the word see the BB.DD. and E. R. Craven in Lange on Rev. pp. 364-377.]*a-Sid-Kpiros, -ov, (bianpivu to distinguish); 1. undistinguished and undistinguishable: <pannj, Polyb. 15,12, 9; Xoyos, Lcian. Jup. Trag. 25; for ins, Gen. i. 2 Symm.2.   without dubiousness, ambiguity, or uncertainty (see biaKpivw, Pass, and Mid. 3 [al. without variance, cf. dux-Kpiva, 2]) : fj SvaBeu aocpla, Jas. iii. 17 (Ignat. ad Eph.3, 2 'lijcroOs Xpioros t6 ddiaKpirov r]p.av £iji> [yet al. take the word here i. q. inseparable, cf. Zahn in Patr. Apost. Opp., ed. Gebh., Ham. and Zahn, fasc. ii. p. 7; see also in general Zahn, Ignatius, p. 429 note1; Bp. Lghtft. on Ignat. 1. c.; Soph. Lex.s. v. Used from Hippocr.down.]).*dBidXeiirros, -ov, (8iaXf tiro to intermit, leave oS),uninter-mitted, unceasing: Ro. ix. 2; 2 Tim. i. 3. [Tim. Locr. 98 e.]*dSioXclimos, adv., without intermission, incessantly, assiduously : Ro. i. 9; 1 Th. i. 2 (3); ii. 13; v. 17. [Polyb., Diod., Strabo; 1 Mace. xii. 11.]*&-Sia-<t>6op(a, -as, ij, (fr. abiacpOopos incorrupt, incorruptible; and this from d8ia<jb0«'pci>), incorruptibility, soundness, integrity: of mind, iv rfj SiSacrKaXia, Tit. ii. 7 (L T Tr WH a<p8opiav).   Not found in the classics.*oSiKt'o, -as; [fut. dSiKrjorio]; 1 aor. qfii'iojcra; Pass., [pres. dSucoC/Mii]; 1 aor. rjbiKij8t]v; literally to be aStxoc. 1. absolutely; a. to act unjustly or wickedly, to sin: Rev. xxii. 11; Col. iii. 25. b. to be a criminal, to have violated the laws in some way: Acts xxv. 11, (often sodSi/cr)fj.ain Grk. writ. [cf. W. § 40, 2 c.]). c. to do wrong: 1 Co. vi. 8 ; 2 Co. vii. 12.   d. to do hurt: Rev. ix. 19.      2.transitively; a. ri, to rfo «om« wrong, sin in some respect : Col. iii. 25 (& fjbuojcrt' the wrong which he hath done'). b. two, to wrong some one, act wickedly towards him: Acts vii. 26 sq. (by blows); Mt. xx. 13 (by fraud); 2 Co. vii. 2; pass. dbucfio-Scu to be wronged, 2 Co. vii. 12; Acts vii. 24; mid. a&xotVat to suffer one's self to be wronged, take wrong [W. § 38, 3; cf. Riddell, Platonic Idioms, § 87 sq.]: 1 Co. vi. 7; Ttva ovbev [B. § 131, 10; W. 227 (213)], Acts xxv. 10; Gal. iv. 12; nvd ti, Philem. 18; [dSiicoviupoi \uadbv dbixias (R. V. suffering wrong as the hire of wrong-doing), 2 Pet. ii. 13 TO Tr mrg.]. e. rum, to hurt, damage, harm (in this sense by Greeks of every period): Lk. x., 19; Rev. vi. 6; vii. 2 sq.; ix. 4, 10; xi. 5; pass, ol pij ddiKrjdfj ex tov davarov shall suffer no violence from death, Rev. ii. 11.*&S(KT)|ia, -ror, t6, (d6Wa>), [fr. Hdt. on], a misdeed [ro S&ikov . . . Stop rrpa)(0rj, ddbaipa toriv, Aristot. Eth. Me. 5, 7]: Acts xviii. 14 ; xxiv. 20 ; Rev. xviii. 5.*dSiKfa, -as, f), (abucos), [fr. Hdt. down]; 1. injustice, of a judge : Lk. xviii. 6 ; Ro. ix. 14. 2. unrighteousness of heart and life; a. univ.: Mt. xxiii. 25 Grsb.; Acts viii. 23 (see avvdeo-fios); Ro. i. 18, 29; ii. 8; vi. 13; 2 Tim. ii. 19; opp. to ij d\r)6tut, 1 Co. xiii. 6; 2 Th. ii. 12; opp. to ij btKaioo-vvtj, Ro. iii. 5; Heb. i. 9 Tdf.; owing to the context, the guilt of unrighteousness, 1 Jn. i. 9; dirart) tSjs abiitlas deceit which unrighteousness uses, 2 Th. ii. 10; fuo~06s dbuclas reward (i. e. penalty) due to unrighteousness, 2 Pet. ii. 13 [see doWa, 2 b. fin.]. b. spec, unrighteousness by which others are deceived: Jn. vii. 18 (opp. to d\t]6qs); pa/iavas rijr dbuclas deceitful riches, Lk. xvi. 9 (cf. anon) tov irkairov, Mt. xiii. 22; others think ' riches wrongly acquired'; [others, riches apt to be used unrighteously; cf. vs. 8and Mey. ad loc.]) ; Koo-fios rrjs dSiieuu, a phrase having reference to sins of the tongue, Jas. iii. 6 (cf. mofios, 8); treachery, Lk. xvi. 8 (oikovo/ws tt)s dbueias, [al. take it generally, ' acting unrighteously']). 3. a deed violating law and justice, act of unrighteousness : iracra doWa ipapria tori, 1 Jn. v. 17; ipyarai rrjs dbueias, Lk. xiii. 27; al dSiKiai iniquities, misdeeds, Heb. viii. 12 (fr. Sept. Jer. xxxviii. (xxxi.) 34; cf. Dan. iv. 20 (24)); purdis dbucias reward obtained by wrong-doing, Acts i. 18; 2 Pet. ii. 15; spec, the wrong of depriving another of what is his, 2 Co. xii. 13 (where a favor is ironically called dbtKia).*oSikos, -op, (Siktj), [fr. Hes. down]; descriptive of one who violates or has violated justice;          1. unjust, (ofGod as judge) : Ro. iii. 5; Heb. vi. 10.          2. of onewho breaks God's laws, unrighteous, sinful, (pee dbiKia, 2) : [1 Co. vi. 9]; opp. to bUatos, Mt. v. 45; Acts xxiv. 15 ; 1 Pet. iii. 18 ; opp. to *wrej3fc, 2 Pet. ii. 9 ; in this sense ace. to Jewish speech the Gentiles are called SSikoi, 1 Co. vi. 1 (see &(iapra>\6s, b. /S.). 3. spec, of one who deals fraudulently with others, Lk. xviii. 11; who is false to a trust, Lk. xvi. 10 (opp. to irurros);12dSvparo?deceitful, /wfuavas, ibid. vs. 11 (for other interpretations see dSixia, 2 b.).*dSbcus, adv., unjustly, undeservedly, without fault: vd-trxfiv, 1 Pet ii. 19 [A. V. wrongfully.    (Fr. Hdt. on.)] •'ASptCv, 6, Admin, the indecl. prop, name of one of the ancestors of Jesus: Lk. iii. 33, where Tdf. reads tov 'Abfitlv tov 'Apveifor Rec. tov 'Apa/x (q. v.), [and VVH txt. substitute the same reading for tov 'Afuvabafi tov 'Apd/j. of R G, but in their mrg. 'aSo/i (q. v. 2) for 'Ad/ttiv; on the spelling of the word see their App. p. 155].*&-&5ki|«>s, -ov, (SoKi/ios), [fr. Eur. down], not standing the test, not approved; properly of metals and coin, dpyvpiov, Is. i. 22; Prov. xxv. 4; vo\wt\m, Plat. legg. v. p. 742 a., al.; hence, which does not prove itself to be such as it ought: yfj, of sterile soil, Heb. vi. 8; in a moral sense [A. V. reprobate'], 1 Co. ix. 27; 2 Co. xiii. 5-7; povt, Ro. i. 28; ntpl Tr/v mariv, 2 Tim. iii. 8 ; hence, unfit for something: irpbs vav epyov ayatiov at. Tit. i. 16*a-SoXos, -ov, (dokos), [fr. Pind. down], guileless; of things, unadulterated, pure : of milk, 1 Pet. ii. 2. [Cf. Trench §lvi.]*'A8pa(ivTTT)v6s, -t/,-6v, adj., of Adramyttium fAdpa/ivr-tiov, 'ASpa/ivTTCiov, 'Ahpaupvrciov [also 'Arpafivr., etc., cf. Poppo, Thuc. pt. i. vol. ii. p. 441 sq.; Wetst. on Acts, as below; WH 'A8pa/j.vvrt)v6s, cf. their Intr. § 408 and App. p. 160]), a sea-port of Mysia: Acts xxvii. 2, [modern Edremit, Ydramit, Adramiti, etc.; cf. Me and S. s. v. Adramyttium].*'ASpfas [WH *A8p.], -ov, 6, Adrias, the Adriatic Sea i. e., in a wide sense, the sea between Greece and Italy: Acts xxvii. 27, [cf. B. D. s. v. Adria; Diet, of Grk. & Rom. Geog. s. v. Adriaticum Mare].* t dSpinis [Red* dSp.], -rjros, f), or better (cf. Bum. Ausf. Spr. ii. 417) ASporrjs, -ijror, [on the accent cf. Ebeling, Lex. Horn. s. v.; Chandler §§ 634, 635], (fr. dSpot thick, stout, full-grown, strong, rich [2 K. x. 6,11, etc.]), in Grk. writ, it follows the signif. of the adj. Abpos; once in the N. T.: 2 Co. viii. 20, bountiful collection, great liberality, [R. V. bounty], (a&poavvt), of an abundant harvest, Hes. ipy. 471.) *dSvvarcu, S>: fut. dbvvaTrj<ra; (dbvvaros) ; a. not to have strength, to be weak; always so of persons in classic Grk. b. a thing dbwarei, cannot be done, is impossible ; so only in the Sept. and N. T.: ovk dSvvarqaei irapa t§ 8ea [tov 6tov L mrg. T Tr WH] nav pfj/ia, Lk. i. 37 (Sept. Gen. xviii. 14) [al. retain the act. sense here: from God no word shall be without power, see irapd, I. b. cf. Field, Otium Norv. pars iii. ad loc.]; oiibiv dbwarqarei ifitv, Mt. xvii. 20, (Job xiii. 2).*d-Svvaros,-op, (bvvap.ai), [fr. Hdt. down]; 1. without strength, impotent: rots iroai, Acts xiv. 8; fig. of Christians whose faith is not yet quite firm, Ro. xv. 1 (opp. to bvvaxos). 2. impossible (in contrast with bvvarov) : irapa ran, for (with) any one, Mt. xix. 26 ; Mk. x. 27; Lk. xviii. 27; to dbvv. tov vofiov 'what the law could not do' (this God effected by, etc.; [al. take to dbvv. here as nom. absol., cf. B. 381 (826) ; W. 574 (534) ; Meyer or Gif-aScoford ad loc.]), fio. viii. 3 ;   foil, by ace. with inf., Heb. vi. 4, 18 ; x. 4; by inf., Heb. xi. 6.*4&a (de(8a); common in Grk. of every period; in Sept. for">1ii/; to sing, chant; 1. intrans.: nn, to the praise of any one (Judith xvi. 1 (2)), Eph. v. 19 ; Col. iii. 16, (in both passages of the lyrical emotion of a devout and grateful soul). 2. trans.: fifa Rev. v. 9 ; xiv. 3; xv. 8.*                     .tut, [see alav], adv., [fr. Horn, down], always; 1. perpetually, incessantly: Acts vii. 51; 2 Co. iv.-ll; vi, 10; Tit. i. 12 ; Heb. iii. 10. 2. invariably, at any and every time when according to the circumstances something is or ought to be done again: Mk. xv. 8 [T WH om.] (at every feast) ; 1 Pet. iii. 15 ; 2 Pet. i. 12.*&ct6$, -oO, 6, (like Lat. avis, fr. arjfii on account of its wind-like flight [cf. Curtius § 596]), [fr. Horn, down], in Sept. for "V&l, an eagle: Rev. iv. 7; viii. 18 (Rec. dyyiXov); xii. 14. In Mt. xxiv. 28; Lk. xvii. 87 (as in Job xxxix. 30; Prov. xxx. 17) it is better, since eagles are said seldom or never to go in quest of carrion, to understand with many interpreters either the vultur percnopterus, which resembles an eagle (Plin. h. n. 10, 8 "quarti generis — viz. aquilarum — est percnopterus "), or the vultur barbatus. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Adler; [Tristram, Nat. Hist, of the Eible, p. 172 sqq.]. The meaning of the proverb [cf. exx. in Wetst. on Mt. 1. c] quoted in both passages is, ' where there are sinners (cf. irra/ia), there judgments from heaven will not be wanting '.*&lvfu>«, -ov, (fwftij), Hebr. DSD, unfermented, free from leaven; properly: Sproi, Ex. xxix. 2; Joseph, antt. 3, 6, 6; hence the neut. plur. ra a&pa, JiiXD, unleavened loaves; jj eoprr) rav afti/iav, lYlXSn jn, the (paschal) festival at which for seven days the Israelites were accustomed to eat unleavened bread in commemoration of their exit from Egypt (Ex. xxiii. 15 ; Lev. xxiii. 6), Lk. xxii. 1 ; »j lrpart) (sc. qpepa) twv df. Mt. xxvi. 17; Mk. xiv. 12 ; Lk. xxii. 7 ; at r)pipat, t&v df. Acts xii. 3 ; xx. 6 ; the paschal festival itself is called ra afrfui, Mk. xiv. 1, [cf. 1 Esdr. i. 10,19; W. 176 (166); B. 23 (21)]. Figuratively : Christians, if such as they ought to be, are called afu/xoi i. e. devoid of the leaven of iniquity, free from faults, 1 Co. v. 7; and are admonished (opra{fiv iv dfujiotr elKinpivelas, to keep festival with the unleavened bread of sincerity and truth, vs. 8. (The word occurs twice in prof, auth., viz. Athen. 8, 74 (Sprov) afc/iov, Plat. Tim. p. 74 d. afypos <rap£ flesh not yet quite formed, [add Galen de alim. fac. 1, 2].) *'AJwp, Azor, the indecl. prop, name of one of the ancestors of Christ: Mt. i. 13 sq.*"AgoTos, -ov, rj, li^EfK, Azotus, Ashdod, one of the five chief cities of the Philistines, lying between Ashkelon and Jamnia [i. e. Jabneel] and near the Mediterranean: Acts viii. 40; at present a petty village,Esdud. A succinct history of the city is given by Gesenius, Thesaur. iii. p. 1366; Raumer, Palastina, p. 174; [Alex.'s Kitto or Me. and S. s. v. Ashdod].*di)Sto, -as, i), (fr. dijSijr, and this fr. a priv. and ?/8os pleasure, delight), [ir. Lysip. down];       1. unpleasant-13ness, annoyance.       2.  dislike, hatred: iv dij&a, cod. Catttabr. in Lk. xxiii. 12 for Rec. iv ex^pa.*drfjp, depos, 6, (arjfii, aa>, [cf. ave/ios, init.]), the air (particularly the lower and denser, as distinguished from the higher and rarer 6 al6t)p, cf. Horn. H. 14, 288), the atmospheric region: Acts xxii. 28 ; 1 Th. iv. 17; Rev. ix. 2; xvi. 17; 6 apx<av rift e$ovuias rov a&pos in Eph. ii. 2 signifies ' the ruler of the powers (spirits, see egovo-la 4 c. /3/8.) in the air,' i. e. the devil, the prince of the demons that according to Jewish opinion fill the realm of air (cf. Mey. ad loc.; [B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Air; Stuart in Bib. Sacr. for 1843, p. 139 sq.]). Sometimes indeed, difp denotes a hazy, obscure atmosphere (Horn. H. 17, 6.44 ; 3,881 ; 5, 856, etc.; Polyb. 18, 3, 7), but is nowhere quite eqniv. to o-kAtos,— the sense which many injudiciously assign it in Eph. 1. c. dipa 8epetv (cf. verberat ictibus auras, Verg. Aen. 5, 377, of pugilists who miss their aim) i. e. to contend in vain, 1 Co. ix. 26; eh depa \aktlv (verba vends profundere, Lucr. 4, 929 (932)) 'to speak into the air' i. e. without effect, used of those who speak what is not understood by the hearers, 1 Co. xiv. 9.*dOavacrCa, -as, 17, (dSavaros), immortality: 1 Co. xv. 53 sq.; 1 Tim. vi. 16 where God is described as 0 povos ?X<oi/ ddavao-lav, because he possesses it essentially — 'ck rrjs olictias ovalas, ovk f k 8(Kt]jmitos SXXov, KaBcmtp 01 Xeorot navres ddavaroi' Justin, quaest. et resp. ad orthod. 61 p. 84 ed. Otto.    (In Grk. writ. fr. Plato down.)*d-8i|ufos, -ov, a later form for the ancient and preferable d6ip.i(TTos, (BcpiTos, 6f/iurr6s, 6ep.l(a, 6ifiis law, right), contrary to law and justice, prohibited by law, illicit, criminal: 1 Pet. iv. 8 [here A. V. abominable]; dBifurov iari run with inf., Acts x. 28.*a-Scos, -ov, (Beos), [fr. Pind. down], without God, knowing and worshipping no God, in which sense Ael. v. h. 2, 31 declares Sri juqoVtr r&v fiappapav &8eos; in classic auth. generally slighting the gods, impious, repudiating the gods recognized by the state, in which sense certain Greek philosophers, the Jews (Joseph, c. Ap. 2, 14, 4), and subsequently Christians were called Sdeoi by the heathen (Justin, apol. 1, 13, etc.). In Eph. ii. 12 of one who neither knows nor worships the true God; so of the heathen (cf. 1 Th. iv. 5 ; Gal. iv. 8) ; Clem. Alex, protr. ii. 23 p. 19 Pott, ddeovs . . . ot rbv Svras Sura dtbv riyvor/Kao-i, Philo, leg. ad Gai. § 25 alyxnrruua) dSeorrjs, Hos. iv. 15 Symm. oikos aOetas a house in which idols are worshipped, Ignat. ad Trail. 10 adeoi Tovrforiv &rum>t (of the Docetae); [al. understand Eph. 1. c. passively deserted of God, Vulg. sine Deo; on the various meanings of the word see Mey. (or Ellic.)].*a-e«r|u>«, -ov, (6co-fids:), lawless, [A. V. wicked]; of one who breaks through the restraints of law and gratifies his lusts: 2 Pet. ii. 7; iii. 17. [Sept., Diod., Philo, Joseph., Plut.]*                                              :dBcrcu, -a; fut. dBenjo-a; 1 aor. rideTtjo-a; a word met with first (yet very often) in Sept. and Polyb.; ft. properly, to render SOerov; do away with Berov n L e. something laid down,prescribed, established: bia6r]iajv, Gal.14AWioyfriii. 15, (1 Mace. xi. 36 ; 2 Mace. xiii. 25, etc.) ; ace. to the context, ' to act towards anything as though it were annulled'; hence to deprive a law of force by opinions or acts opposed to it, to transgress it, Mk. vii. 9 ; Heb. x. 28, (Ezek. xxii. 26); niariv, to break one's promise or engagement, 1 Tim. v. 12; (Polyb. 8, 2, 5; 11, 29, 3, al.; Diod. excerpt, [i. e. de virt. et vit.] p. 562, 67). Hence b. to thwart the efficacy of anything, nullify, make void, frustrate : ttjv fiovkiiv too 6eov, Lk. vii. 30 (they rendered inefficacious the saving purpose of God); rij» avveo-tv to render prudent plans of no e&ecpQ Co.' /^"y (Is. xxix. 14 [where Kpv^ra, yet cf. Bos's notej). c. to reject, refuse, slight: ttjv X"Plv T0" 8eox>, Gal. ii. 21 [al. refer this to b.]; of persons: Mk. vi. 26 (by breaking the promise given her) ; Lk. x. 16; Jn. "xii. 48; 1 Th. iv. 8; Jude 8 (for which Kararppove'iv is used in the parallel pass. 2 Pet. ii. 10). [For exx. of the use of this word see Soph. Lex. s. v.] *&8£n|<n.Si -eas, i), (aderca, q. v.; like vovderr/o-is fr. vovSerelv), abolition: Heb. vii. 18; ix. 26 ; (found occasionally in later authors, as Cicero ad Att. 6, 9 ; Diog. Laert. 3, 39, 66; in the grammarians rejection; more frequently in eccl. writ.).*"Afl^vcu, -ov, al, (on the plur. cf. W. 176 (166)), Athens, the most celebrated city of Greece : Acts xvii. 15 sq.; xviii. 1; 1 Th. iii. 1.*'ASqvatos, -am, -aiov, Athenian: Acts xvii. 21 sq.*&9\c<o, -a; [1 aor. subjunc. 3 pers. sing. dOXqoTj]; (&6\os a contest); to engage in a contest, contend in public games (e. g. Olympian, Pythian, Isthmian), with the poniard [?], gauntlet, quoit, in wrestling, running, or any other way: 2 Tim. ii. 5; (often in classic auth. who also use the form affKeiia).    [Comp. : o-vv-a8\ia.~\ *&6\i|<rt$, -tas, fj, contest, combat, (freq. fr. Polyb. down); fig. SSXrjo-is nadtipArav a struggle with sufferings, trials, Heb. x. 32; [of martyrdom, Ign. mart. 4; Clem. mart. 25].*dflpo(i>: pf. pass. ptcp. i)6poio-p£vos; (fr. d8p6os i. q. 8poos [a noisy crowd, noise], with a copulative [see A, o, 2]) ; to collect together, assemble; pass, to be assembled, to convene: Lk. xxiv. 33 L T Tr WH. ([Soph.,] Xen., Plat., Polyb., Plut., al.; O. T. Apocr.; sometimes in Sept. for f3j3.)    [Comp. : «r-, ovv-a8poi£a.~\ *&0v|ii<», -<5; common among the Greeks fr. [Aeschyl.,] Thuc. down; to be adv/j.os (6vpJ>s spirit, courage); to be disheartened, dispirited, broken in spirit: Col. iii. 21. (Sept. 1 S. i. 6 sq., etc.; Judith vii. 22; 1 Mace. iv. 27.)*&0wos [R G Tr], more correctly dflpos (L WH and T [but not in his Sept. There is want of agreement among both the ancient gramm. and modern scholars; cf. Steph. Thes. i. col. 875 c.; Lob. Path. Element, i. 440 sq. (cf. ii. 377); see I, t]), -ov, (6ari [i. e. 8a>u), cf. Etym. Mag. p. 26, 24] punishment), [fr. Plat, down], unpunished, innocent: alpa dd&ov, Mt. xxvii. 4 [Tr mrg. WH txt. bUaiov], (Deut. xxvii. 25 ; 1 S. xix. 5, etc.; 1 Mace. i. 87; 2 Mace. i. 8) ; airo tivos, after the Hebr. ]1? 'f?J ([Num. xxxii. 22; cf. Gen. xxiv. 41; 2 S. iii. 28; W. 197 (185); B. 158 (138)]),' innocent (and therefore far)from,' innocent of, Matt, xxvii. 24 (the guilt of the murder of this innocent man cannot be laid upon me) ; dWA •rijs d/xapnas, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 59, 2 [cf. Num. v. 31]. The Greeks say adaos tivos [both in the sense of free from and unpunished for}.*ctffuos [WH -yios; see their App. p. 154; and I, t], tla, -eiov, (tut, gen. -70s goat, male or female), of a goat, (cf. Kanfados, Imrtioy, v«os, TrpojSdmor, etc.) : Heb. xi. 37.   [From Horn, down.] *at-yioXds, -ou, 6, the shore of the sea, beach, [fr. Horn, down] : Mt. xiii. 2, 48 ; Jn. xxi. 4; Acts xxi. 5 ; xxvii. 89,40. (Many derive the word from Syw/u and SKs, as though equiv. to aicrij, the place where the sea breaks; others fr. dtyts billows and Sks [Curtius § 140; Vanicek p. 83]; others fr. ato-va and cfXs [Schenkl, L. and S., s. v.], the place where the sea rushes forth, bounds forward.) *Atyfamos, -a, -ov, a gentile adjective, Egyptian: Acts vii. 22, 24, 28; xxi. 38 ; Heb. xi. 29.*AtyvnrTos, -ov, 17, [always without the art., B. 87 (76); W. § 18, 5 a.], the proper name of a well-known country, Egypt: Mt. ii. 13 sq.; Acts ii. 10 ; Heb. iii. 16, etc.; more fully yfj A'yvrrros, Acts vii. 36 [not L WH Tr txt.], 40 ; xiii. 17 ; Heb. viii. 9 ; Jude 5, (Ex. v. 12 ; vi. 26, etc.; 1 Mace. i. 19 ; Bar. i. 19 sq., etc.) ; ij yq Atywrroi, Acts vii. 11; Iv Atyvrrrov sc. yfj, Heb. xi. 26 Lchm., but cf. Bleek ad loc.; B. 171 (149); [W. 384 (359)]. In Rev. xi. 8 Afy. is figuratively used for Jerusalem i. e. for the Jewish nation viewed as persecuting Christ and his followers, and so to be likened to the Egyptians in their ancient hostility to the true God and their endeavors to crush his people.atSios, -ov, (for dei'dtos fr. del), eternal, everlasting: (Sap. vii. 26) Ro. i. 20; Jude 6. (Ham. hymn. 29, 3 ; Hes. scut. 310, and fr. Thuc. down in prose; [freq. in Philo, e. g. de profug. § 18 (£<»^ atSios), § 31; de opif. mund. § 2, § 61; de cherub. § 1, § 2, § 3; de post. Cain. § 11 fin.   Syn. see alavios].')*atSws, (-60s) -oCs, if; fr. Horn, down; a sense of shame, modesty : 1 Tim. ii. 9 ; reverence, Heb. xii. 28 (XarpctW 8t$ iuto. albovs icai etXaPfias, but L T Tr WH e£Aa/3«ar Kai Seovs). [Syn. albas, alo-xvvt]: Ammonius distinguishes the words as follows, albws kcu alo-xivn buxptpet, OTt 17 fiiv aibws eariv   ( v r p o i r r )    %n p b s   e x a o r o i / ,   i t s   a e H o f i i v m s   t i s   ? x "   '   a ' 0 " * " 1 " ?   8 *   ' $ '   ° * s   ( K a a r o s   a / i a p r a v   a l o - x v v f T a i ,   i t s   f i r ]   b e o v   r t   i r p a t - a s -   i c a i   a l b e i r a i   p i v   n s   t 6 v   T r a r e p a   "   a l < T \ v v e - r a t   b i   & s   / x c d v o - K C T a i ,   e t c . ,   e t c . ;   a c c o r d i n g l y   a l b .   i s   p r o m i  n e n t l y   o b j e c t i v e   i n  its reference, having regard to others; while alo-x- is subjective, making reference to one's self and one's actions. Cf. Schmidt ch. 140. It is often said that' alb. precedes and prevents the shameful act, alo-x- reflects upon its consequences in the shame it brings with it' (Cope, Aristot. rhet. 5, 6, 1). alb. is the nobler word, alax- t^e stronger; while " aid. would always restrain a good man from an unworthy act, alo-x-would sometimes restrain a bad one." Trench §§ xix. xx.]*At6toi|/, -ottos, 6, (a"8a to burn, and aty [<ty] the face; swarthy), Ethiopian (Hebr. 'ghS)': Acts viii. 27, herealfia15alfioppoeu)the reference is to upper Ethiopia, called Habesh or Abyssinia, a country of Africa adjoining Egypt and including the island Meroe; [see Dillmann in Schenkel i. 285 sqq.; Alex.'s Kitto or Me. and S. s. v. Ethiopia. Cf. Bib. Sacr. for 1866, p. 515].*atjia, -ros, t6, blood, whether of men or of animals; 1. a. simply and generally: Jn. xix. 34; Rev. viii. 7 sq.; xi. 6; xvi. 3 sq. 6 b (on which passages cf. Ex. vii. 20 sqq.) ; xix. 13 ; pvo-ts aifiaros, Mk. v. 25, [(mjyrj ai/i. 29)]; Lk. viii. 43 sq.; Bpopfioi a'lftans, Lk. xxii. 44 [L br. WH reject the pass.]. So also in passages where the eating of blood (and of bloody flesh) is forbidden, Acts xv. 20, 29 ; xxi. 25 ; cf. Lev. iii. 17; vii. 16 (26) ; xvii. 10; see Knobel on Lev. vii. 26 sq.; [Kalisch on Lev., Preliminary Essay § 1] ; Rilckert, Abendmahl, p. 94. b. As it was anciently believed that the blood is the seat of the life (Lev. xvii. 11; [cf. Delitzsch, Bibl. Psychol. pp. 238-247 (Eng. trans, p. 281 sqq.)]), the phrase o-ap£ k. alfia (Oil "lt?3, a common phrase in Rab-binical writers), or in inverse order al/ia *. trdpg, denotes man's living body compounded of flesh and blood, 1 Co. xv. 50 ; Heb. ii. 14, and so hints at the contrast between man and God (or even the more exalted creatures, Eph. vi. 12) as to suggest his feebleness, Eph. vi. 12 (Sir. xiv. 18), which is conspicuous as respects the knowledge of divine things, Gal. i. 16; Mt. xvi. 17. e. Since the first germs of animal life are thought to be in the blood (Sap. vii. 2; Eustath. ad H. 6,211 (ii. 104, 2) rA de eu/utros avri tov tnripitaroc <pao~a> ol vocpol, &s tov owep/iaTos vXtjv t6 aifia *xovTOS)itne 'word serves to denote generation and origin (in the classics also) : Jn. i. 13 (on the plur. cf. W. 177 (166)); Acts xvii. 26 [B G]. d. It is used of those things which by their redness resemble blood: at ora<f>v\i}s the juice of the grape [' the blood of grapes,' Gen. xlix. 11; Deut. xxxii. 14], Sir. xxxix. 26; 1. 15; 1 Mace. vi. 34, etc.; Achill. Tat. ii. 2; reference to this is made in Rev. xiv. 18-20. ili atftet, of the moon, Acts ii. 20 (Joel ii. 31 (iii. 4)), i. q. as ctifca. Rev. vi. 12. 2. blood shed or to be shed by violence (very often also in the classics); a.: Lk. xiii. 1 (the meaning is, whom Pilate had ordered to be massacred while they were sacrificing, so that their blood mingled with the blood [yet cf. W. 623 (579)] of the victims) ; at. dSaov [or bUaiov Tr mrg. WH txt.] the blood of an innocent [or righteous] man viz. to be shed, Mt, xxvii. 4; ck^civ and exxyveiv alpa (EH 1)22', Gen. ix. 6; Is. lix. 7, ete.) to shed blood, slay, Mt. xxiii. 35; Lk. xi. 50; Acts xxii. 20; Ro. iii. 15; Rev. xvi. 6* [here Tdf. al/iara]; hence alfia is used for the bloody death itself: Mt. xxiii. 30, 35; xxvii. 24; Lk. xi. 51; Acts [ii. 19, yet cf. 1 d. above;] xx. 26; Rev. xvii. 6 ; p*xpls <«/lu»-tos unto blood i. e. so as to undergo a bloody death, Heb. xii. 4, (top ainov rrjs . • . pcxPK atfiaros araatas, Heliod. 7, 8) ; rifif) ai/jurrog ' price of blood' i. e. price received for murder, Mt. xxvii. 6; dypot oi/mtos field bought with the price of blood, Mt. xxvii. 8, i. q. xapLov aifiaros, Acts i. 19 — unless in this latter passage we prefer the explanation, which agrees better with thecontext, 'the field dyed with the blood of Judas'; the guilt and punishment of bloodshed, in the following Hebraistic expressions: ev avrrj alfiara (Rec. alfia [so L Tr WH]) evpfdr) i. e. it was discovered that she was guilty of murders, Rev. xviii. 24 (cf. irokis ai/iarav, Ezek. xxiv. 6) ; t6 aifia airrov i<j>' fffias (sc. iXdera) let the penalty of the bloodshed fall on us, Mt. xxvii. 25 ; tq alfia ifimv ort rrjv K&paktjv v/iap (sc. iXfierai) let the guilt of your destruction be reckoned to your own account, Acts xviii. 6 (cf. 2 S. i. 16; Josh. ii. 19, etc.) ; eirdyav rd alpA tivos ewi nva to cause the punishment of a murder to be visited on any one, Acts v. 28 ; inCifrA t6 alfia tivos onro twos ('fl TD 'fl 0^1 t^M, 2 S. iv. 11; Ezek. iii. 18, 20; xxxiii. 8), to exact of any one the penalty for another's death, Lk. xi. 50 ; the same idea is expressed by «8««k t6 alfia tivos, Rev. vi. 10; xix. 2. b. It is used specially of the blood of sacrificial victims having a purifying or expiating power (Lev. xvii. 11): Heb. ix. 7, 12 sq. 18-22, 25; x. 4; xi. 28; xiii. 11. c. Frequent mention is made in the N. T. of the blood of Christ (alfia rov Xpurrov, 1 Co. x. 16; tov Kvpiov, xi. 27; tov dpvlov, Rev. vii. 14; xii. 11, cf. xix. IS) shed on the cross (at tov crravpov, Col. i. 20) for the salvation of many, Mt. xxvi. 28; Mk.' xiv. 24, cf. Lk. xxii. 20; the pledge of redemption, Eph. i. 7 (diro-\vrpacns Sia tov at. avrov; so too in Col. i. 14 Rec.); 1 Pet. i. 19 (see dyopafa, 2 b.) ; having expiatory efficacy, Ro. iii. 25; Heb. ix. 12; by which believers are purified and are cleansed from the guilt of sin, Heb. ix. 14; xii. 24; [xiii. 12]; 1 Jn. i. 7 (cf. 1 Jn. v. 6, 8); Rev. i. 5; vii. 14; 1 Pet. i. 2; are rendered acceptable to God, Ro. v. 9, and find access into the heavenly sanctuary, Heb. x. 19; by which the Gentiles are brought to God and the blessings of his kingdom, Eph. ii. 13, and in general all rational beings on earth and in heaven are reconciled to God, Col. i. 20; with which Christ purchased for himself the church, Acts xx. 28, and gathered it for God, Rev. v. 9. Moreover, since Christ's dying blood served to establish new religious institutions and a new relationship between men and God, it is likened also to a federative or covenant sacrifice : t6 aljia rfis fiiadrjierjs the blood by the shedding of which the covenant should be ratified, Mt. xxvi. 28; Mk. xiv. 24, or has been ratified, Heb. x. 29; xiii. 20 (cf. ix. 20); add, 1 Co. xi. 25; Lk. xxii. 20 [WH reject this pass.] (in both which the meaning is,' this cup containing wine, an emblem of blood, is rendered by the shedding of my blood an emblem of the new covenant'), 1 Co. xi. 27; (cf. Cic. pro Sestio 10, 24 foedus sanguine meo ictum sanciri, Liv. 23, 8 sanguine Hannibalis sanciam Romanum foedus). irivciv to alfia avrov (i. e. of Christ), to appropriate the saving results of Christ's death, Jn. vi. 53 sq. 56.   [ Westcott, Epp. of Jn. p. 84 sq.]*ai|iarcKxv<r(a, -as, fj, (alfia and cKxivo), shedding of blood: Heb. ix. 22.   Several times also in eccl. writ.*alpoppocu, •&; to be al/ioppoos (alfia and pta), to suffer from a flow of blood: Mt. ix. 20. (Sept. Lev. xv. 33, where it means menstrttous. and in medical writ.) •16cupcoAlWas, -ov, 6, Ae'neas, the prop, name of the paralytic cured by Peter: Acts ix. 88 sq.*alv«ns, -ten, q, (atvia), praise r 6vaia alvicrtms (n3J. minn, Lev. vii. 18), Heb." xiii. 15 a thank-offering, [A. V. sacrifice of praise'], presented to God for some benefit received; see $v<ria, b. (alvuns often occurs in Sept., but not in prof, auth.) *ttlWu, -<S; (found in prof. auth. of every age [" only twice in good Attic prose " (where irraiv- napaiv. etc. take its place), Veitch], but esp. freq. in Sept. and the Apocr. of the O. T.; from alvos) ; to praise, extol: rbv 6tm>, Lk. ii. 13, 20; xix. 37; xxiv. 53 [WH om.Tr txt. br.]; Acts ii. 47; iii. 8 sq.; Ro. xv. 11; with dat. of person, t$ $e$, to sing praises in honor of God, Rev. xix. 5 L T Tr WH, as Sept. in 2 Chr. vii. 3 (for h rnin), 1 Chr. xvi. 36; xxiii. 5; Jer. xx. 13 etc. (for *  VjVl) ; [W. § 31, 1 f.; B. 176 (153).   Comp. «r-, irap- -ros, to, (common fr. [Pind. frag. 165 (190),] Aeschyl. down; fr. alvioaojiai or aivlrroitai n to express something obscurely, [fr. aivos, q. v.]); 1. an obscure saying, an enigma, Hebr. fiTTI (Judg. xiv. 18, Sept. 7rpoj3X!)fui). 2. an obscure thing: 1 Co. xiii. 12, where iv alvlyfuxn is not equiv. to alviyfiariKUis i. e. a/iavp&s obscurely, but denotes the object in the discerning of which we are engaged, as fiXemiv £v nvt, Mt. vi. 4; cf. De Wette ad loc.; the apostle has in mind Num. xii. 8 Sept.: ev afiei xai ov 6V aiviyparav. [Al. take iv locally, of the sphere in which we are looking; al. refer the pass, to 1. and take Iv instrumentally.] *atvos, -ov, 6, (often used by the Grk. poets); 1. a saying, proverb. 2. praise, laudatory discourse: Mt. xxi. 16 (Ps. viii. 3) ; Lk. xviii. 43.*Alvtiv, ij, (either a strengthened form of yy_ and equiv. *° jyK, or a Chaldaic plur. i. q. |)ry_ springs; [al. al.]), Aenon, indecl. prop, name, either of a place, or of a fountain, not far from Salim: Jn. iii. 23, [thought to be WSdy Far'ah, running from Mt. Ebal to the Jordan; see Conder in "Pal. Explor. Fund" for July 1874,p.l91 sq.; Tent Work in Palestine, i. 91 sq.; esp. Stevens in Journ. of Exeget. Soc., Dec. 1883, pp. 128-141. Cf. B. D. Am. ed.].*otpto-is, -*<os, fi; 1. (fr. alpew), act of taking, capture : ttjs nroXecos, the storming of a city; in prof. auth. 2. (fr. alpeoitai), choosing, choice, very often in prof, writ.: Sept. Lev. xxii. 18 ; 1 Mace. viii. 80. 3. that which is chosen, a chosen course of thought and action; hence one's chosen opinion, tenet; ace. to the context, an opinion varying from the true exposition of the Christian faith (heresy): 2 Pet. ii. 1 (cf. De Wette ad loc.), and in eccl. writ. [cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.]. 4. a body of men separating themselves from others and following their own tenets [a sect or party]: as the Sad-ducees, Acts v. 17 ; the Pharisees, Acts xv. 5; xxvi. 5; the Christians, Acts xxiv. 5, 14 (in both instances with a suggestion of reproach) ; xxviii. 22, (in Diog. Laert. 1 (13,) 18 sq., al., used of the schools of philosophy). 5. dissensions arising from diversity of opinions and aims: Gal. v. 20 ; 1 Co. xi. 19.   [Cf. Mey. 11. cc.; B.D.Am. ed. s. v. Sects; Burton, Bampt. Lect. for 1829; Campbell, Diss. on the Gospels, diss. ix. pt. iv.] *alpcrCKu : 1 aor. rjpcrioa [Treg. rip., see I, i]; (fr. aipt-r6s, see alpiw); to choose: Mt. xii. 18. (Often in Sept. in O. T Apocr. and in eccl. writ.; the mid. is found in Ctes. Pers. § 9 [cf. Hdt. ed. Schweig. vi. 2, p. 354]. Cf. Sturz, De dial. Maced. etc. p. 144.) •alptTiK6s, -q, -6v, [see a\pka>~]; 1. fitted or able to take or choose a thing ; rare in prof. auth. 2. schismatic,factious, a follower of false doctrine: Tit. iii. 10.*axpia, -a: [thought by some to be akin to aypa, aypia, Xtip, Eng. grip, etc.; cf. Bttm. Lexil. i. 181 — but see Curtius § 117]; to take. In the N. T. in the mid. only: fut. alpr/nopai; 2 aor. t&o/ii/v, but G L T Tr WH WXdfujv, 2 Th. ii. 18, cf. [Tdf. Proleg. p. 123; WH. App. p. 165;] W. § 13, 1 a.; B. 40 (35), see &vipXoiu». init.; [ptcp. eKofuvos, Heb. xi. 25]; to take for one's self, to choose, prefer: Phil. i. 22; 2 Th. ii. 18; paWov folL by inf. with if (common in Attic), Heb. xi. 25. [Comp. : dv-, a<f>-, &-, «£-, KO.8-, irtpi-, irpo-aipca>.] *alfx* (contr. fr. poet, dci'pa) ; fut. apo; 1 aor. Jfpa, inf. Spat, impv apov; pf. Jjpxa (CoL ii. 14); Pass., [pres. aipopaC]; pf. tjpiuu (Jn. xx. 1) ; 1 aor. tjp(hjv; (on the rejection of iota subscr. in these tenses see Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. pp. 413, 439; [W. 47 (46)]); 1 fut. aptMiaopai; [fr. Horn, down]; in the Sept. generally i. q. Ktyj; td lift up, raise. 1. to raise up; a. to raise from the ground, take up: stones, Jn. viii. 59; serpents, Mk. xvi. 18 ; a dead body, Acts xx. 9. b, to raise upwards, elevate, lift up: the hand, Rev. x. 5; the eyes, Jn. xi. 41; the voice, i. e. speak in a loud tone, cry out, Lk. xvii. 13 ; Acts iv. 24, (also in prof, writ.); Tfjv                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                %t y v x h v >   * °   r a i s e   * ^ e   m i n d ,   i -   q -   e x c i t e ,   a f f e c t   s t r o n g l y   ( w i t h   a   s e n s e   o f   f e a r ,   h o p e ,   j o y ,   g r i e f ,   e t c . ) ;   i n   J n .   x .   2 4   t o   h o l d   t h e   m i n d   i n   s u s p e n s e   b e t w e e n   d o u b t   a n d   h o p e ,   c f .   L i i c k e   [ o r   M e y e r ]   a d   l o c .   o .   t o   d r a w   u p :   a   f i s h ,   M t .   x v i i .   2 7   ( a v a e n r a v ,   H a b .   i .  15); o-Ka(pi)v, Acts xxvii. 17; anchors from the bottom of the sea, Acts xxvii. 13, where supply tos dyxvpas; cf. Kuinoel ad loc.; [W. 594 (552) ; B. 146 (127)]. 2. to take upon one's self and carry what has been raised, to bear: ru>a ejrt xflp^", Mt. iv. 6; Lk. iv. 11, (Ps. xc. (xci.) 12); a sick man, Mk. ii. 3 ; fuyw, Mt. xi. 29 (Lam. iii. 27) ; a bed, Mt. ix. 6 ; Mk. ii. 9, 11 sq.; Lk. v. 24 sq.; Jn. v. 8-12; rhv crravpov, Mt. [x. 88 Lchm. mrg.]; xvi. 24; xxvii. 32; Lk. ix. 23; Mk. viii. 34; x. 21 [in R Lbr.]; xv. 21; [XWov,] Rev. xviii. 21; to carry with one, [A. V.,ta£e]: Mk. vi. 8; Lk. ix. 3 ; xxii. 36. Both of these ideas are expressed in class. Grk. by the mid. a"peo-6cu. 3. to bear away what has been raised, carry off; a. to move from its place: Mt. xxi. 21; Mk. xi. 23, (SpftjTt be thou taken up, removed [B. 52 (45)], sc. from thy place); Mt. xxii. 18 [Rec]; Jn. ii. 16; xi. 39, 41; xx. 1. b. to take off or away what is attached to anythjjigj_Jn. xix. 81, 38 sq.; to tear away, Mt. ix. 16 :/fflk. ii. 2L? to rend away, cut off, Jn. xv. 2. o. to remove: 1 Co. y. 2 (cast out from the church, where apffg should be read for Rec. e'fap0>j);   tropically: faults, Eph. ir. 31; rn»tdaddvoficudpapriav, Jn. i. 29, [86 Lchm. in br.], to remove the guilt and punishment of sin by expiation, or to cause that sin be neither imputed nor punished (a'pciv Apdprtjpa, 1 S. xv. 25; dpoprjpa, 1 S. xxv. 28, i. e. to grant pardon for an offence) ; but in 1 Jn. oil. 5 ras apaprlas tjpav atpciv is to cause our sins to cease, i. e. that we no longer sin, while we enter into fellowship with Christ, who is free from sin, and abide in that fellowship, cf. vs. 6. d. to carry off, carry away with one: Mt. xiv. 12, 20; xv. 87; xx. 14; xxiv. 17 sq.; Mk. vi. 29,43; viii. 8, 19 sq. ; xiii. 15 sq.; Lk. ix. 17; xvii. 81; Jn. xx. 2, 13, 15; Acts xx. 9. e. to appropriate what is taken: Lk. xix. 21 sq.; Mk. xv. 24. f. to take away from another what is his or what is committed to him, to take by force: Lk. vi. 30 ; xi. 52 ; ti diro with gen. of pers., Mt. xiii. 12; xxi. 43; xxv. 28; Lk. viii. 12, 18; xix. 24, 26; [Mt. xxv. 29] ; Mk. iv. (15), 25; Jn. x. 18; xvi. 22; perhaps also with the mere gen. of the pers. from whom anything is taken, Lk. vi. 29 ; xi. 22; Jn. xi. 48, unless one prefer to regard these as possessivegea*—g. to take and apply to any use: Acts xxi. 11; l^Co.^-Ur. h. to take from among the living, either by a natural death, Jn. xvii. 15 (« tov Kocrpov take away from intercourse with the world), or by violence, Mt. xxiv. 39; Lk. xxiii. 18; Jn. xix. 15; Acts xxi. 36; with the addition of airb njs yrjs, Acts xxii. 22 ; aiperai ano rtjs yrjs t) (at) airov, of a bloody death inflicted upon one, Acts viii. 33 (Is. liii. 8). i. of things; to take out of the way, destroy : xelP°VPa<t>0V> Col. ii. 14; cause to cease: n)i» Kpiaiv, Acts viii. 33 (Is. liii. 8). [Comp. : an-, e£-, iw, per-, <rvv-, vrrfp-alpa.]*al(r6dvo|i(u : 2 aor. jj<r06pt)»; [fr. Aeschyl. down] ; depon. mid. to perceive; 1. by the bodily senses; 2. with the mind; to understand : Lk. ix. 45.*aferOrpm, -eas, ft, (altrBdvopai), [fr. Eurip. down], perception, not only by the senses but also by the intellect; cognition, discernment; (in the Sept., Prov. i. 22; ii. 10, etc., i. q. JTJH): Phil. i. 9, of moral discernment, the understanding of ethical matters, as is plain from what is added in vs. 10.*aUr0T)rr)piov, -ov, to, an organ of perception, external sense, [Hippoc.] ; Plat. Ax. 866 a.; Aristot. polit. 4, 3, 9, al.; faculty of the mind for perceiving, understanding, judging, Heb. v. 14, (Jer. iv. 19 alo-dtjr. Trjs KapSias, 4 Mace. ii. 22 [com. text] tcl evhov ala-drjT^pia).*aUrxpoKepSijs, -is, (alo'XfiOi and icipbos; cf. alo~xpoita6f)s in Philo [de mere, meretr. § 4]), eager for base gain, {greedy of filthy lucre]: 1 Tim. iii. 3 Rec., 8; Tit. i. 7. (Hdt. 1, 187; Xen., Plat., al.; [cf. turpilucricupidus, Plaut. Trin. 1, 2, 63].) *attrxpoKepS&s, adv., from eagerness for base gain, [for filthy lucre]: 1 Pet. v. 2, cf. Tit. i. 11. Not found elsewhere.*atcrxpoXo/yCa, -as, r), (fr. alo~xpoKoyos, and this fr. al<rxp6s and \iya>),foul speaking (Tertull. turpiloquium), low and obscene speech, [R. V. shameful speaking] : Col. iii. 8. (Xen., Aristot., Polyb.) [Cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.; Trench § xxxiv.]*17airia -a, -6v, (fr. aioj(os baseness, disgrace), base, dishonorable: 1 Co. xi. 6; xiv. 35; Eph. v. 12; Tit. i. 11.*abrxfxtais, tyros, 7, baseness, dishonor: Eph. v. 4 [A. V.filthiness].    (Plat. Gorg. 525 a.)*aUrxvw), tjs, r), (aurxos [cf. al<rxp6s]); 1. subjectively, the confusion of one who is ashamed of anything, sense of shame: per alo-xvvtjs suffused with shame, Lk. xiv. 9; ra Kpvma rijs alo-xvvns those things which shame conceals, opp. to (pavipaais ttjs d\t)8e!as, 2 Co. iv. 2 (evil arts of which one ought to be ashamed). 2. objectively, ignominy: visited on one by the wicked, Heb. xii. 2; which ought to arise from guilt, Phil. iii. 19 (opp. to d6£a). 3. a thing to be ashamed of: y alo-xvvt) TTJs yvpvoWtfros (gen. of appos.) nakedness to be ashamed of, Rev. iii. 18, cf. xvi. 15; plur. [cf. W. 176 (166)] al alcrxivcu basenesses, disgraces, shameful deeds, Jude 13. [(Aeschyl., Hdt., al.) Stn. see alb&s, fin.] *aio-xvvu: (aurxos [cf- alo~xp<isj) ', 1. to disfigure : TTpdo-amov, Horn. II. 18, 24, and many others. 2. to dishonor: Sept. Prov. xxix. 15. 3. to suffuse with shame, make ashamed: Sir. xiii. 7. In the N. T. only pass., ala-xvpofiai; fut. alo-}(vv6^o-opcu; 1 aor. gcrxvvBriv; to be suffused with shame, be made ashamed, be ashamed: 2 Co. x. 8; Phil. i. 20; 1 Pet. iv. 16; pi) al<rxw6S>pev art airov that we may not in shame shrink from him, 1 Jn. ii. 28 (Sir. xxi. 22 alo-xvv6r)o-fTai and npoawnov [Is. i. 29; Jer. xii. 13 ; cf. B. § 147, 2]); foil, by inf. (on which see W. 346 (325)), Lk. xvi. 3. [Comp. : iv ()         ^ * x^atre'u, -5; fut. alrtjo-a; 1 aor. fjrrjo-a; pf. jfr^ica; Mid., pres. alrovficu; impf. rjrovprp); fut. alrrjcrofMii; 1 aor. rjrqo-dpriv; [fr. Horn, down]; to ask; mid. to ask for one's self, request for one's self; absol.: Jas. i. 6 ; Mt. vii. 7 ; mid., Jas. iv. 3 ; Jn. xvi. 26; Mk. xv. 8 ; <nr«-o-Bai n, Jn. xv. 7; Mt. xiv. 7; Mk. vi. 24 ; x. 38; xi. 24; xv. 43 ; 1 Jn. v. 14 sq.; Lk. xxiii. 52 ; Acts xxv. 3, 15, etc.; aiTflv with ace. of the pers. to whom the request is made: Mt. v. 42 ; vi. 8 ; Lk. vi. 30; alrda-dai with ace. of the pers. asked for — whether to be released, Mt. xxvii. 20 ; Mk. xv. 6 [here T WH Tr mrg. napair. q. v.] ; Lk. xxiii. 25 ; or bestowed as a gift, Acts xiii. 21; aiTeiv n dirS twos, Mt. xx. 20 L Tr txt. WH txt.; [Lk. xii. 20 Tr WH]; 1 Jn. v. 15 L T Tr WH; (so ahe'io-Bai in Plut. Galb. 20) [cf. B. 149 (130)]; t\ irapd nvos, Acts iii. 2; Mt. xx. 20 R G T Tr mrg. WH mrg.; Jas. i. 5; 1 Jn. v. 15 R G; foil, by the inf., Jn. iv. 9; mid., Acts ix. 2; [alreiv ti iv t. ovSpart Xpurrov, Jn. xrv. 13; xvi. 24 (see ovopa, 2 e.) ; ri iv rg irpocrfvxjj, Mt. xxi. 22] ; alretv rwd ti, Mt. vii. 9; Lk. xi. 11 ; Mk. vi. 22 ; Jn. [xiv. 14 T but L WH Tr mrg. br.]; xvi. 23 ; iire'p tivos foil, by iva, Col. i. 9 [cf. B. 237 (204)]; alrei-o-8ax with the ace. and inf., Lk. xxiii. 23 ; Acts iii. 14 ; with inf. only, Acts vii. 46 (ijnjo-aro evpelv he asked that he himself might find; others wrongly translate TJTt)o-aro desired) ; Eph. iii. 13. With the idea_of demanding prominent: airelv ti, Lk. i. 631^ 1 Co. i. 22\-ivd n, Lk. xii. 48 ; 1 Pet. iii. 15.                *v------.___--[The constructions of this word in the Greek Bible, theApost. Fathers, etc., are exhibited in detail by Prof. Ezra Abbot in the No. Am. Key. for Jan. 1872, p. 182 sq. He there shows also (in opposition to Trench, § xl., and others) that it is not " the constant word for the seeking of the inferior from the superior," and so differing from Ipurdte, which has been assumed to imply' a certain equality or familiarity between the parties'; that the distinction between the words does not turn upon the relative dignity of the person asking and the person asked; but that aWtoi signifies to ask for something to be given not done, giving prominence to the thing asked for rather than the person, and hence is rarely used in exhortation. 'Epardw, on the other hand, is to request a person to do (rarely to give) something; referring more directly to the person, it is naturally used in exhortation, etc. The views of Trench are also rejected by Cremer, 4te Aufl. s. v. The latter distinguishes aXriw from similar words as follows: " oiria denotes the request of the will, inSufiiu that of the sensibilities, Sc'opai the asking of need, while ipuria marks the form of the request, as does tSx*<r9<u a^soi which in classic Greek is the proper expression for a request directed to the gods and embodying itself in prayer." "Epuiriu, wriu and S4ofuu are also compared briefly by Green, Critical Notes, etc. (on Jn. xiv. 13, 16), who concludes of ipuriu " it cannot serve to indicate directly any peculiar position, absolute or relative, of the agent.' The use of the word may, therefore, be viewed as having relation to the manner and cast of the request, namely, when carrying a certain freedom of aim and bearing; a thing inseparable from the act of direct interrogation "; cf. further Schmidt ch. 7.   Comp. : 4ir-, *{-, iit-, wap-{-/juu), irpocr-oiT^a]alrt)|j.a, -ros, to1, (airecu), [fr. Plato down], what is or has been asked for: Lk. xxiii. 24; plur. [A. V. requests'], Phil. iv. 6 [cf. Ellic. ad loc] ; things asked for, 1 Jn. v. 15.   [See the preceding word, and Trench § li.] *alrCa, -as, r); 1. cause, reason : Acts x. 21; xxii. 24; xxyiii. 20 ; Kara itaaav alriav for every cause, Mt. xix. 8 ; 8V fjv alr'iavfor which cause, wherefore, Lk. viii. 47 ; 2 Tim. i. 6, 12 ; Tit. i. 18 ; Heb. ii. 11; cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. iv. 28. 2. cause for which one is worthy of punishment; crime of which one is accused: Mt. xxvii. 87 ; Mk. xv. 26 ; Jn. xviii. 88 ; xix. 4, [6 ; Acts xxiii. 28]; atria Savarov [A. V. cause of death] crime deserving the punishment of death, Acts xiii. 28; xxviii. 18. 3. charge of crime, accusation: Acts xxv. 18, 27. (All these signif. in prof. writ, also; [but L. and S. now make signif. 3 the primary].) In Mt. xix. 10 the words ei ovras larXv r) avria tov avdpamov (ifra Trjs yvvaix6s find a simple explanation in a Latinism (causa i. q. res: si ita res $e habet, etc.) if the case of the man with his wife is so.*atrCajMt, -tos, to, see alriiofia.[atTi&o|Mu, -wjxai: to accuse, bring a charge against; jjruuraiieBa is a various reading in Ro. iii. 9 for the irpoyTiacrafuda of the printed texts. (Prov. xix. 8; Sir. xxix. 5; freq. in prof, writ.)    Syn. see Kai-nyopea.*]atrios, -a, -ov, that in which the cause of anything resides, causative, causing. Hence 1. 6 amor the author: crarnpiac, Heb. v. 9 (the same phrase is freq. in prof. writ.; cf. the opp. ai. rrjs awakeias in Bel and the Dragon vs. 41; r£>v kok&v, 2 Mace. xiii. 4; Lcian. Tim. 86 ed. Lips.; rav ayad&v, Isocr. ad Phil. 49 p. 106 a.; cf. Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 2, p. 94 sq.).    2.lg                                                                          MOW,v i. q. t) atria; . cause: Acts xix. 40 [cf. B. 400 (342) n.]. b. crime, offence: Lk. xxiii. 4, 14, 22. (oitios culprit.)    [See alria, 3.]*olrUiia, -rot, ro, (alndo/iat) ; in Acts xxv. 7 the reading of the best codd. adopted by G L T Tr WH for Rec.ifta: accusation, charge of guilt. (A form not found in other writ.; [yet Mey. notes driuxrit for airiao-is, Eustath. p. 1422, 21; see B. 73; WH. App. p. 166].)* aUj>vC8ios, -ov, {dtyvTjS, atyavrjs, &tf>v<a q. v.), unexpected, sudden, unforeseen: Lk. xxi. 34 [here WH tyvih., see their Intr. § 404 and App. p. 151]; 1 Th. v. 3. (Sap. xvii. 14; 2 Mace. xiv. 17 ; 8 Mace. iii. 24; Aeschyl., Thuc. 2, 61 ro altf>vi&iov xat mrpocrSoKijroy, Polyb., Joseph., Plut., Dion. Hal., al.) *atxp.aXucrCa, -as, ij, (oJxf*aXcaToi, q. v.), captivity: Rev. xiii. 10; abstr. for concr. i. q. cu'xfiaXwToi (cf. aSfXtponjr above), Eph. iv. 8 (fr. Ps. lxvii. (lxviii.) 19, [cf. B. 148 (129); W. 225 (211)]) J also « m alxiuiKuuriav tnvaytt (ace. to the common but doubtless corrupt text), Rev. xiii. 10 (as in Num. xxxi. 12, etc.). [Polyb., Diod., Joseph., Plut., al.]*alxH>aXoTevti>; 1 aor. jJx/xaXojTeucra; a later word (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 442; [W. 92 (88)]); to make captive, take captive : 2 Tim. iii. 6 Rec.; freq. in the Sept. aad O. T. Apocr.; to lead captive: Eph. iv. 8 (Ezek. xii. 3; [1 Esdr. vi. 15]).*alxpoXorCJo); 1 fut. pass. ul)yMk<oTUT&T}(ToiMi; a. equiv. to oIx}mKo>tov jtoiS, which the earlier Greeks use. b. to lead away captive : foil, by tls with ace. of place, Lk. xxi. 24, (1 Mace. x. 33; Tob. i. 10). c. fig. to subjugate, bring under control: 2 Co. x. 5 (on which passage see v6r)fia, 2); rim nw, Ro. vii. 23 [yet TTrK etc. insert iv before the dat.]; to take captive one's mind, captivate : yvvaimpia, 2 Tim. iii. 6 [not Rec.], (Judith xvi. 9 t6 KaXXos avTijs ffxitakdrno-e ^wx^" airov). The word is used also in the Sept., Diod., Joseph., Plut., Arr., Heliod.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 442; [W. 91 (87); Ellic. on 2 Tim. 1. c.].*alx|J.-&X»TOs, -ov, (fr. al\fxr) a spear and aWmros, verbal adj. fr. dXwrai, prop, taken by the spear), [fr. Aeschyl. down], captive: Lk. iv. 18 (19).*aUJv, -avos, 6, (as if alev—poet, for aei—&v, so teaches Aristot. de caelo 1, 11, 9, vol. i. p. 279', 27; [so Proclus lib. iv. in Plat. Timaeo p. 241; et al.]; but more probable is the conjecture [cf. Etym. Magn. 41, 11] that alwv is so connected with 3ij/xt to breathe, blow, as to denote properly that which causes life, vital force; cf. Harless on Eph. ii. 2). [But alitv (= alF&v) is now generally connected with alei, del, Skr. evas (aiyas), Lat. aevum, Goth, aivs, Germ, ewig, Eng. aye, ever; cf. Curtius § 585; Fick, Pt. i. p. 27; Vanicek p. 79; Benfey,Wvr-zellex. i. p. 7 sq.; Schleicher, Compend. ed. 2, p. 400; Pott, Etym. Forsch., ed. 2, ii. 2, p. 442 ; Ebeling, Lex. Horn. s. v.; L. and S. s. v. aei; Cremer,edd.2,3,4(although in ed. 1 he agreed with Prof. Grimm); Pott and Fick, however, connect it with Skr. &yus rather than Svas, although both these forms are derived from i to go (see Pott, Schleicher, Fick, Vanic'ek, u. s.).]   In19aiatvGreek authors 1. age (Lat. aevum, which is alav with the Aeolic digamma), a human lifetime (in Horn., Hdt., Pind., Tragic poets), life itself (Horn. II. 5, 685 pi iea\ AiVoi alav etc.). 2. an unbroken age, perpetuity of time, eternity, (Plat. Tim. p. 87 d. 38 a.; Tim. Locr. p. 97d. [quoted below]; Plut, al.). With this signification the Hebrew and Rabbinic idea of the word oVij? (of which in the Sept. alav is the equiv.) combines in the bibl. and eccl. writ. Hence in the N. T. used 1. a. univ.: in the phrases tls tov alava, oSiy'p (Gen. vi. 8), for ever, Jn. vi. 51, 58; xiv. 16; Heb. v. 6 ; vi. 20, etc.; and strengthened fir top alava rov alavos, Heb. i. 8 [fr. Ps. xliv. (xlv.) 7 Alex., cf. W. § 36, 2] (Tob. vi. 18; Ps. lxxxii. (lxxxiii.) 18, etc.); tit alava, Jude 13; tls rjpfpav alavos unto the day which is eternity (gen. of appos.), 2 Pet. iii. 18 [cf. Sir. xviii. 10(9)]; with a negation: never, Jn. iv. 14 [Lchm. in br.] ; viii. 51; x. 28; xi. 26; xiii. 8; 1 Co. viii. 13; or not for ever, not alway.4, Jn. viii. 35; tls mis alavas unto the ages, i. e. as long as time shall be (the plur. denotes the individual ages whose sum is eternity): [Lk. i. 33]; Ro. i. 25 ; ix. 5 ; xi, 36 ; [xvi. 27 R G Tr WH]; 2 Co. xi. 31; Heb. xiii. 8; tls iravras r. alavas, Jude 25; tls tovs alavas rav alavav (in which expression the endless future is divided up into various periods, the shorter of which are comprehended in the longer [cf. W. § 36, 2; among the various phrases to express duration composed of this word with prep, or adjuncts, (which to the number of more than fifteen are to be found in the Sept., cf. Vaughan on Ro. i. 25), this combination of the double plural seems to be peculiar to the K. T.]) : [Ro. xvi. 27 L T]; Gal. i. 5 ; [Phil. iv. 20] ; 1 Tim. i. 17; [2 Tim. iv. 18; 1 Pet. iv. 11]; Rev. i. 6, 18; iv. 9 sq.; v. 13; vii. 12; x. 6; xi. 15; xv. 7; xix. 3; xx. 10; xxii. 5 ; tls alavas alavav, Rev. xiv. 11; 6 alav rav alavav the (whole) age embracing the (shorter) ages, Eph. iii. 21 (cf. Mey. [or Ellic] ad loc.); diro rav alavav from the ages down, from eternity, Col. i. 26 ; Eph. iii. 9 ; irpb Tav alavav before time was, before the foundation of the world, 1 Co. ii. 7; np66to-is rav alavav eternal purpose, Eph. iii. 11. b. in hyperbolic and popular usage: dno tov alavos (oSijra, Gen. vi. 4, cf. Deut. xxxii. 7) from the most ancient time down, (within the memory of man), from of old, Lk. i. 70; Acts iii. 21; xv. 18, (Tob. iv. 12 oi irarepts y/iav djro tov alavos; Longin. 34 tovs air alavos p'rjropas) ; also ix tov alavos, Jn. ix. 32, (1 Esdr. ii. 19, 22 (23); Diod. iv. 83 of the temple of Venus tt)v i£ alavos dpxqv \afiov, 17, 1 tovs e£ aiavos 0a(riXtTs, [excerpt, de legat. xl.] p. 632 rrjv e£ alavos wapade8onevr)v iKev6eplav). 2. by meton. of the container for the contained, ol alaves denotes the worlds, the universe, i. e. the aggregate of things contained in time, [on the plur. cf. W. 176 (166); B. 24 (21)]: Heb. i. 2; xi. 3; and (?) 1 Tim. i. 17; [Rev. xv. 3 WH txt.; cf. Ps. cxliv. (cxlv.) 13; Tob. xiii. 6, 10; Sir. xxxvi. 22; Philo de plant. Noe § 12 bis; de mundo § 7; Joseph, antt. 1, 18, 7; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 61, 2; So, 3 (ttotijp r. a.); 55, 6 (fieos *. a.); Constt. Ap. 7,34 ;see Abbot in Journ. Soc. Bibl. Lit. etc. i. p. 106 n.]. So alav in Sap. xiii. 9; xiv. 6; xviii. 4; the same use occurs in the Talmud, Chaldee, Syriac, Arabic; cf. Bleek, Hebraerbr. ii. 1, p. 86 sqq.; Gesenius, Thesaur. ii. p. 1036; [cf. the use of ol alavts in the Fathers i. q. the world of mankind, e. g. Ignat. ad Eph. 19, 2]. 3. As the Jews distinguished n:jn ohSpri the time before the Messiah, and K3H oStyn the time after the advent of the Messiah (cf. Riehm, Lehrb. d. Hebraerbr. p. 204 sqq.; [Schurer § 29,9]), so most of the N. T. writers distinguish 6 alav ovros this age (also simply 6 alav, Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 19 G L T Tr WH ; 6 evearas alav, Gal. i. 4; o vvv alav, 1 Tim. vi. 17; [2 Tim. iv. 10] ; Tit. ii. 12), the time before the appointed return or truly Messianic advent of Christ (i. e. the irapovcria, q. v.), the period of instability, weakness, impiety, wickedness, calamity, misery, —and alav ptKXav the future age (also 6 alav t<elvos, Lk. xx. 35; o alav 6 cpxoptvos, Lk. xviii. 30; Mk. x. 30; ol alaves oi iirtp\6tuvot, Eph. ii. 7), i. e. the age after the return of Christ in majesty, the period of the consummate establishment of the divine kingdom and all its blessings : Mt. xii. 32; Eph. i. 21; cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. iii. 22 sq. Hence the things of 'this age' are mentioned in the N. T. with censure: 6 alav otros, by meton. men controlled by the thoughts and pursuits of this present time, Ro. xii. 2, the same who are called viol tov al. tWtov in Lk. xvi. 8; xx. 34 ; Kara tov alava rov xoo-pov tovtov conformably to the age to which this (wicked) world belongs, Eph. ii. 2 [cf. Trench § lix. sub fin.]; dyanav tov vvv alava, 2 Tim. iv. 10 (see dyarrda); &p\ovr(s tou al. tovtov, 1 Co. ii. 6 (see Sp\av); <5 dtbs rov al. tovtov the devil, who rules the thoughts and deeds of the men of this age, 2 Co. iv. 4; al ptptpvat tov alavos the anxieties for the things of this age, Mk. iv. 19; nXovmos iv t£ vvv alavi rich in worldly wealth, 1 Tim. vi. 17; o-otpia rov al. tovt. such wisdom as belongs to this age, — full of error, arrogant, hostile to the gospel, 1 Co. ii. 6; o-vfryrtfrris row at. tovt. disputer, sophist, such as we now find him, 1 Co. i. 20; o~uvri\tia tov al. tovt. the end, or rather consummation, of the age preceding Christ's return, with which will be connected the resurrection of the dead, the last judgment, the demolition of this World and its restoration to a more excellent condition [cf. 4 Esdr. vii. 43], Mt. xiii. 89 sq. 49; xxiv. 8; xxviii. 20; it is called avvriXua t&v alavav in Heb. ix. 26 [so Test. xii. Patr., test. Levi 10, test. Benj. 11 (cf. Vorstman p. 133)]; to «Xij tow alavav the ends (last part) of the ages before the return of Christ, 1 Co. x. 11; Svvdftets tov lifWovros alavos powers which present themselves from the future or divine order of things, i. e. the Holy Spirit, Heb. vi. 5; tov alavos tKeivov Tv\tiv to partake of the blessings of the future age, Lk. xx. 35. Among the N. T. writers James does not use the word aia>i>.[On the word in its relation to ie6auot see Trench § lix. Its biblical sense and its relation to D7l>' are discussed by Stuart, Exeget. Essays on '' ords relating to Fut. Punishment, Andover, 1830 (and i'resbyt. Publ. Committee, Phil.); Tayler Lewis in Lange's Com. on Eccl. pp. 44-51; J. W. Hanson, Aion-Aionios, (pp. 174), Chicago, 1880.    See esp20auoviosE. Abbot., Literature of the Doctrine of a Future Life, etc., (NeW York, 1867), Index of subjects si. v. For its meanings in eccl. writ, see Siticer, Thesaur. Eccles. i. col. 140 sqq., cf. it. col. 1609; Huet, Origeniana (App. to vol. iv, of De la Rue's Origen) lib. ii. c. ii. quaest. 11, § 26. Its use in Horn., Hes., Pind.. Aeschyl., Soph., Euri, Aristot., Plato, Tim. Locr., is exhibited in detail by E. S. Goodwin in the Christ. Exam, for March and May, 1831, March and May, 1832. " On alibv as the complete period, either of each particular life or of all existence, see Ariat. cael. 1, 9, 15; on aliv" and XP&vos, cf. Philo [quia rer. div. her. § 34] i. 496, 18 sq.; [de mut. nom. § 47] i. 619,10 sq." L. and S. ed. 6; see also Philo de alleg. leg. iii. 8; quod deus immut. § 6 fin.; de prof. § 11; de praem. et poen. § 15; and (de mund. opif. § 7) esp. J.^G. MuUer, Philo's Lehre v. d. Weltschopfung, p. 168 (BerL 1864). Schmidt (ch. 44) gives the distinction, for substance, as follows : both words denote the abstract idea of time and with Bpecial reference to its extent or duration; \p6vos is the general designation for time, which can be divided up into portions, each of which is in its turn a xp^vos; on the other hand, al&v, which in the concrete and simple language of Homer (Pindar and the Tragedians) denotes the allotted lifetime, even the life, of the individual (H. 4,478 iiivvvBiiios Hot al&v etc.), in Attic proae differs from xf^fos by denoting time unlimited and boundless, which ia not conceived of as divisible into al&ves (contrast here biblical usage and see below), but rather into xptvoi. In philosophical speech it is without beginning also. Cf. Tim. Locr. 97 c. d. xpoVa M to pipta. rdcrSe ras wfpt6Sus \iyovn, as ixdirtirifffv 6 flebs o~iiv K&aiup • oi) yap %v vpb KoV/ua atrrpa • SioVcp obb* iviavrbs oiS' wpav ircpioSot oTs fierpfertu 6 yevvarbs xP^vos otros. clickv S4 ittfi tu a-yivv6.ro> xp^va,tv al&va TroTayopevoiJ.es• &s yap wot' MSiov TrapaSety/xa, rbv ISavtiebv koVjuov, oSe 6 apavbs iyfvvdOr), oSrws its irpbs irapASftyfia, rbv alwva, 88e 6 xpdvos ahv Koarfup 4$antovpyl)9y — after Plato, Timaeus p. 37 d. (where see Stallbaum's note and reff.); Isocr. 8, 34 tows 8e psr' cbaefielas k. Bucauxrivris £uvras (Spa) iv rt rots irapoiin Xpivots aatpahus Sidyovras «al tteo! tow ffipiravTos al&vos riSiovs tos ihirttias ?xo>"ros- The adj. axpovos independent of time, above and beyond all time, is synon. with aldvios ; where time (with ita subdivisions and limitations) ends eternity begins: Nonnus, metaph. evang. Johan. i. 1, &xpovos %v, luclxirros, iv appfa-ip \6yos apxtj. Thoroughly Platonic in cast are the definitions of Gregory of Nazianzus (orat. xxxviii. 8) ai&y yap olhe xP^vos oirt xpoVou ti nepos • o48etoOto -rots ai'Siois aiiiv, to avuwapeKi etv6fievov rots oiaiv ofoV ti xpovlKOV Kivruxa /col SiAo-rijpa (Suicer u. s.). So Clem. Alex, strom. i. 13, p. 756 a. ed. Migne, 'O 7' odv alkv tou Xpivtv to lieWov Kal to ivco-T&is, airrap S)) Kol rb irapyxWKbt &Kapiatas <rvvl(TTr)tTi. Instances from extra-biblical writ, of the use of aliiv in the plural are: tov air' a'uivuv piBov, Anthol. vol. iii. pt. ii. p. 55 ed. Jacobs; eh al&vas, ibid. vol. iv. epigr. 492 ; ix irepiTpoirris ali&ywv, Joseph, b. j. 3, 8, 5; cis a'tuvas Siu/ieWi, Sext. Empir. adv. Phys. i. 62. The discussions which have been raised respecting the word may give interest to additional reff. to its use by Philo and Jo-sephus. Philo : o iras (fiiras, (ri/iiras) or iras (etc.) 6 aliiv: de alleg. leg. iii. § 70; de cherub. § 1 (a noteworthy passage, cf. de congressu erud. § 11 and reff. s. v. Bivaros); de sacrif. Ab. et Caini § 11; quod det. pot. § 48; quod deus immut. § I, § 24; de plantat. § 27 ; de sobrietate § 13 ; de migr. Abr. § 2; de prof. § 9; de mut. nom. § 34; de somn. ii. § 15, § 31, § 38; de legat. ad Gaium § 38; (6) pwtpbs al: de sacrif. Ab. et Caini § 21; de ebrietate § 47; de prof. § 20; 01. ude sobrietate § 5; de prof. § 21; & fartipos al.: de legat. ad Gaium § 11; 6 timpooiev al: de praem. et. poen. § 6 ; al. iro\is: de Abrah. § 46; rts al.: de mere, meretr. § 1; 8t' at. : de cherub. § 26; de plantat. § 27; <=is rbr al.: de gigant. § 5; iv (rtf) al.: de mut. nom. § 2 (bis) (note the restriction); quod deus immut. § 6 ; ii al.: de somn. i. § 3; &r' al.: de plantat. § 12 (bis); de mundo § 7; vpb al.: de mut. nom. § 2; irpbs 01.: de mut. nom. § 11; (6) al.: de prof. § 18; de alleg. leg. iii. § 70; de cherub. § 22; de migr. Abr. § 22; de somn. i. § 18, § 22; de Josepho § 5 ; de vita Moys. ii. § 3 ; de decalogo § 14; de victimis § 3; frag, in Mang. ii. 660 (Richter vi. p. 219); de plantat. § 12 (bis); de mundo § 7. Josephus: (4) iras aiiv: antt. 1, 18, 7; 3,8,10; c. Ap. 2, 11,3; 2, 22, 1; naicpbs ai.: antt. 2, 7, 3; iroKhs al.: c. Ap. 2, 31, 1; ToaovTos al.: c. Ap. 1, 8, 4; ttXtjSos al&vos: antt. prooem. § 3; era-' oi.: b. j. prooem. § 4; Si' ai.: antt. 1,18,8; 4, 6, 4; b. j. 6, 2, 1; «s {rbv) al.: antt. 4, 8,18; 5, 1, 27; 7, 9, 5; 7, 14, 5; i£ oi.: b. j. 5, 10, 5; (0) al: antt. 19, 2, 2; b. j. 1, 21,10; plur. (see above) 3, 8, 5.   See aidmios.]aUiivios, -oi>, and (in 2 Th. ii. 16; Heb. ix. 12; Num. xxv. 13; Plat. Tim. p. 38b. [see below]; Diod. i. 1; [cf. WH. App. p. 157; W. 69 (67); B. 26 (23)]) -os, -a, -ov, (al&v); 1. without beginning or end, that which always has been and always will be: 8tos, Ro. xvi. 26, (6 fwvos al&vios, 2 Mace. i. 25); n-pcv/ui, Heb. ix. 14. 2. without beginning: xpovois cdaviois, Ko. xvi. 25; irph xpi-vav alaviav, 2 Tim. i. 9; Tit. i. 2; cvayyfKiov a gospel whose subject-matter is eternal, i. e. the saving purpose of God adopted from eternity, Rev. xiv. 6. 3. without end, never to cease, everlasting: 2 Co. iv. 18 (opp. to TTpotTKaipos); alaviov avrov, joined to thee forever as a sharer of the same eternal life, Philem. 15; (3dpos 8o£t;s, 2 Co. iv. 17 ; /3a<riXWa, 2 Pet. i. 11; 8o£a, 2 Tim. ii. 10; 1 Pet. v. 10; f<aq (see £a>^, 2 b.); Kkijpovopla, Heb. ix. 15; XvTpatris, Heb. ix. 12; n-apaicXqa-ir, 2 Th. ii. 16; oveijwu, abodes to be occupied forever, Lk. xvi. 9 (the habitations of the blessed in heaven are referred to, cf. Jn. xiv. 2, [also, dabo eis tabernacula aeterna, quae praeparaveram illis, 4 Esdr. (Fritzsche 5 Esdr.) ii. 11]; similarly Hades is called al&vws touos, Tob. iii. 6, cf. Eccl. xii. 5); crarrtjpia, Heb. v. 9; [so Mk. xvi. WH, in the (rejected) 'Shorter Conclusion']. Opposite ideas are: koXcuti?, Mt. xxv. 46; Kpljxa, Heb. vi. 2; Kplcns, Mk. iii. 29 (Rec. [but L T WH Tr txt. &lm(rrrlpAnos; in Acta Thorn. § 47, p. 227 Tdf., iarai<roi tovto eis a<j>e<nv dpapnav Kai Xirrpoi/ alavicov irapairToijiaTmv, it has been plausibly conjectured we should read Xvrpov alaviov (cf. Heb. ix. 12)]); okt6pos [Lchm. txt. oXefyuos], 2 Th. i. 9, (4 Mace. x. 15); irvp, Mt. xxv. 41, (4 Mace. xii. 12 almvia irvpX K. fiaadvois, at els o\ov top alaaia ovk avt]o-ovtri <r,).[Of the examples of aldvios from Philo (with whom it is less common than AfSios, q. v., of which there are some fifty instances) the following are noteworthy: de mut. nom. § 2; de caritate § 17; ici\ao-is oi. frag, in Mang. ii. 667 fin. (Richter vi. 229 mid.) ; cf. de praem. et poen. § 12. Other exx. are de alleg. leg. iii. § 70; de poster. Caini § 35; quod deus immut. § 30; quis rer. div. her. § 58; de congressu quaer. erud. § 19 ; de prof. § 38; de somn. ii. § 43; de Josepho § 24; quod omn. prob. lib. § 4, § 18; de ebrietate § 32; de Abrah. § 10; (aii ai.: de prof. § 15; 8ebs (6) ai.: de plan-a/caffapo-ia21aKaraaratruitat. § 2, § 18 (bis), § 20 (bis); de mundo § 2. Jfrom Jose-phus: antt. 7, 14, 5; 12, 7, 3; 15, 10, 5; b. j. 1, 33, 2; 6, 2, 1; k\4os al.: antt. 4, 6, 5; b. j. 3, 8, 5; /O'Vi? oi.: antt. 1, 13, 4; 6, 14, 4; 10, 11, 7; 15, 11, 1; olieov pity aldviov ?x«j (of God), antt. 8, 4, 2; 4<pvXdx&v t 'lo&vrns Sftr/ioTs aluvlois, b. j. 6, 9, 4.Stn. itSios, aidvios: its. covers the complete philosophic idea—without beginning and without end; also either without beginning or without end; as respects the past, it is applied to what has existed time out of mind, ai&vios (fr. Plato on) gives prominence to the immeasurableness of eternity (while such words as avvexhs continuous, unintermitted, 8<ot«A5jj perpetual, lasting to the end, are not so applicable to an abstract term, like aldyf; aliivios accordingly is esp. adapted to supersensuous things, see the N. T. Cf. Tim. Locr. 96 c. Oebv Se rhv /niv a'u&viov v6os iprj fnivos etc.; Flat. Tim. 37 d. (and Stallbaum ad loc.); 38 b. c.; legg. x. p. 904 a. itvtiAeOpov Si tv yevifievov, iW' ovk atdviov. Cf. also Plato's Siau&vtos (Tim. 38 b.; 39 e.).   Schmidt ch. 45.]dxaSafKrCa, -as, rj, (duddapros), [fr. Hippocr. down], uncleanness; a. physical: Mt. xxiii. 27. b. in a moral sense, the impurity of lustful, luxurious, profligate living: Ko. i. 24; vi. 19; 2 Co. xii. 21; Gal. v. 19; Eph. iv. 19; v. 3; Col. iii. 5; 1 Th. iv. 7; used of impure motives in 1 Th. ii. 3. (Dem. p. 553, 12.) Cf. Tittmanni. p. 150 sq.*AicadiipTijs, -tyros, ij, impurity: Rev. xvii. 4,—not found elsewhere, and the true reading here isra duddapra rrjs*ducdSapros, -ov, (xadalpa), [fr. Soph, down], in the Sept. i. q. NDB, not cleansed, unclean; a. in a ceremonial sense, that which must be abstained from according to the levitical law, lest impurity be contracted: Acts x. 14; xi. 8 (of food); Acts x. 28; 1 Co. vii. 14 (of men); 2 Co. vi. 17 (fr. Is. Iii. 11, of things pertaining to idolatry); Rev. xviii. 2 (of birds). b. in a moral sense, unclean in thought and life (freq; in Plat.) : Eph. v. 5; ra dxdBapra ttjs iropveias, Rev. xvii. 4 (ace. to the true reading); m/d/tara, demons, bad angels, [in twenty-three pass, of the (Jesgels, Acts, Rev.] : Mt. x. 1; xii. 43; Mk. i. 23, 26;Ai. lQbtc.; Lk. iv. 33, 36; vi. 18, etc.; Acts v. 16; vmT"7*fRev. xvi. 13; xviii. 2, (jrvevfuera novnpa in Mt. xii. 45; Lk. vii. 21; viii. 2; xi. 26; Acts xix. 12 sq. 15 sq.).&Kcupc'o|iai, -ov/iai: [impf. ^xaipoviitjv] ; (aicaipos inopportune) ; to lack opportunity, (opp. to eixaipeco ) : Phil, iv. 10. (Phot., Suid., Zonar.; aiccupelv, Diod. excerp. Vat. ed. Mai p. 30 [frag. 1. x. § 7, ed. Dind.].)*axaipas, (ratpos), adv., unseasonably, [A. V. out of season], (opp. to tvicalpas) : 2 Tim. iv. 2 (whether seasonable for men or not). (Sir. xxxv. 4; [Aeschyl. Ag. 808]; Plat, de rep. x. p. 606 b.; Tim. 33 a.; 86 c.; Xen. Eph. 5, 7; Joseph, antt. 6, 7, 2, al.) *<£-kokos, -ov, (micas); a. without guile or fraud, harmless; free from guilt: Heb. vii. 26; [cf. Clement, frag. 8 ed. Jacobson, (Bp. Lghtft. S. Clement of Rome etc. p. 219): Skokos 6 Uarfjp                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                %n v i v f i a   e S c o n e v   S k o k o v ] .   b .   f e a r i n g   n o   e v i l   f r o m   o t h e r s ,   d i s t r u s t i n g   n o   o n e ,   [ c f .   E n g .   g u i l e l e s s ' ] :   R o .   x v i .   1 8 .   ( [ A e s c h y l . , ]   P l a t . ,   D e m . ,   P o l y b . ,   a l . ;   S e p t . )   [ C f .   T r e n c h   §   l v i . ;   T i t t m a n n   i .   p .   2 7   s q . ]   *  a x a v f l a ,   - t ) s ,   i j ,   ( a n a ?   a   p o i n t   [ b u t   s e e   i n   o k ^ J )   ; a. a thom, bramble-bush, brier: Mt. vii. 16; Lk. vi.44; Heb. vi. 8; elsriis wtavtias i. e. among the seeds of thorns, Mt. xiii. 22; ^TJvTtjL mrg. em], 18 [Tdf. eVt']; Lk. viii. 14 (vs. 7 ev /xeaca ran) dicavBav) ', efft ras ax- i. e. upon ground in which seeds of thorns were lying hidden, Mt. xiii. 7. b. a thorny plant: orecJMvov e$ dicavBav, Mt. xxvii. 29; Jn. xix. 2,—for bare thorns might have caused delirium or even death; what species of plant is referred to, is not clear. Some boldly read dicdvfov, from Sxavdos, acanthus, bear's-foot; but the meaning of SxavBa is somewhat comprehensive even in prof. writ.; cf. the class. Grk. Lexx. s. v. [On the "Crown of thorns" see BB.DD. s. v., and for reff. Me. and S.]»oKdvflivos, -ov, (axavda; cf. dfiapcwTivos), thorny, woven out of the twigs of a thorny plant: Mk. xv. 17; Jn. xix. 5.   (Is. xxxiv. 13.)   Cf. the preceding word.*ot-Kapiros, -on, (Kapiros), [fr. Aeschyl. down], without fruit, barren; 1. prop.: dtv8pa, Jude 12. 2. metaph. not yielding what it ought to yield, [A. V. unfruitful]: Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 19; destitute of good deeds, Tit. iii. 14; 2 Pet. i. 8; contributing nothing to the instruction, improvement, comfort, of others, 1 Co. xiv. 14; by litotes pernicious, Eph. v. 11, (Sap. xv. 4; cf. Grimm on Sap. i. 11).*a-Kard-YVciHrros, -ov, (^KarayivixTKa), that cannot be condemned, not to be censured: Tit. ii. 8. (2 Mace. iv. 47, and several times in eccl. writ.) *d-Kara-icdXuirros, -ov, ((cara«aXtJjrT<»), not covered, unveiled : 1 Co. xi. 5,13.  (Polyb. 15, 2 7, 2; [Sept., Philo].) *a-Kard-KpiTos, -ov, (xaraKpiW), uncondemned; punished without being tried: Acts xvi. 37; xxii. 25. (Not found in prof, writ.) *d-KaTd-XvTos, -ov, (xaraXva)), indissoluble; not subject to destruction, [A. V. endless]: faq, Heb. vii. 16. (4 Mace, x. 11; Dion. Hal. 10, 31.)*tiucardirao-ros, -ov,—found only in 2 Pet. ii. 14 in codd. A and B, from which L WH Tr mrg. have adopted it instead of the Rec. dKoranavorovs, q- v. It may be derived fr. irartopai, pf. n-«rao-/xa«, to taste, eat; whence duaTmaaros insatiable. In prof. writ. Karmaaros [which: Bttm. conjectures may have been the original reading] signifies besprinkled, soiled, from Karcmdo-o-a> to besprinkle. For a fuller discussion of this various reading see B. 65 (57), [and WH. App. p. 170].*aKardiraticrros, -ov, {Karairaiat), unable to stop, unceasing ; passively, not quieted, that cannot be quieted; with gen. of thing (on which cf. W. § 30, 4), 2 Pet. ii. 14 [R G T Tr txt.] (eyes not quieted with sin, sc. which they commit with adulterous look). (Polyb., Diod., Joseph., Plut.) *oKarcurrao-Ca, -as, ij, (d/earaoraros), instability, a state of disorder, disturbance, confusion: 1 Co. xiv. 33; Jas. iii. 16; (Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 14,1; [Prov. xxvi. 28; Tob. iv. 13]); plur. disturbances, disorders: of dissensions, 2 Co. xii. 20; of seditions, 2 Co. vi. 5 (cf. Mey. ad loc); of the tumults or commotions of war, Lk. xxi. 9. (Polyb., Dion. Hal.) *22a/covo) -oi/, ((toflionj/ii), unstable, inconstant, restless: Jas. i. 8, and L T Tr WH in iii. 8 also, but less fitly; [cf. Hermae Past. 1. ii. mand. 2, 3 iromjpbv rrvtviia itrnv if xaraXaXtd, ku wcaraaraTov dcupoviov, fuj8e'iroT* elprjvtvov, dXXd etc.]. ([Hippocr. et al.] Polyb. 7, 4, 6, al. [Sept. Is. liv. 11].)*rfrKor&rxcTos, -ov, (icarex*) to restrain, control), that cannot be restrained: Jas. iii. 8B6. (Job xxxi. 11; 3 Mace. vi. 17; Diod. 17, 38 wear. 8dnpva, al.)*'AkcXScihiA, or 'A(ceX8a,*dx (Lchm.), [or "Ak«X8. WH (see their Intr. § 408)], or 'Ax«X8a/«ix (T Tr), fr. Chald. KD1 bpn (field of blood), Akeldama: Acts i. 19; see aifia, 2 a. [B. D. s. v.; esp. Kautzsch, Gram. pp. 8, 173].*<uw'pau>s, -ov, ((cepdwvfu) ;           a. unmixed, pure,  aswine, metals. b. of the mind, without admixture of evil, free from guile, innocent, simple: Mt. x. 16; Ro. xyi. 19; Phil. ii. 15; (and freq. in prof. writ.). [Cf. Ellic. on Phil. 1. c.; Trench § lvi.; Tittmann i. 27 sq.]*okXiv^s,-«, (kXiW), not inclining, firm, unmoved: Heb. x. 23.    (Freq. in prof, writ.) *oK|>Aj>: 1 aor. rJKfiacra; (aKprj); to flourish, come to maturity: Rev. xiv. 18.    (Very freq. in prof, writ.)*aK|rf|, -fjs, fj, (cf. aKTj [on the accent cf. Chandler § 116; but the word is ' a mere figment of the grammarians,' Pape (yet cf. L. and S.) s. v.], alxM, Lat. acies, acuo); among the Greeks a. prop, a point, to prick with (cf. [the classic] aixf")). b. extremity, climax, acme, highest degree. C. the present point of time. Hence accus. [W. 230 (216), 464 (432 sq.); B. 153 (134)] ok^v with adverbial force, i. q. en, even now, even yet: Mt. xv. 16. (Theocr. id. 4, 60; Polyb. 4, 36, 8; Strat. epigr. 3 p. 101 ed. Lips.; Strabo 1. i. [c. 3 prol.] p. 56; Plut. de glor. Athen. 2, 85, al.)    Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 123.*diccWj, -rjs, if, (fr. an assumed pf. form fJKoa, cf. dyopd above [but cf. Epic dicovq; Curtius p. 555]); 1. hearing, by which one perceives sounds; sense of hearing: 1 Co. xii. 17; 2 Pet. ii. 8. Hebraistically, djcojj dxoveiv by hearing to hear i. e. to perceive by hearing, Mt. xiii. 14; Acts xxviii. 26, (Is. vi. 9); cf. W. § 44, 8 Rem. 3 p. 339; § 54, 8 p. 466; [B. 183 sq. (159)]. 2. the organ of hearing, the ear: Mk. vii. 35; Lk. vii. 1; 2 Tun. iv. 3, 4; Acts xvii. 20; Heb. v. 11. 3. thing heard; a. instruction, namely oral; spec, the preaching of the gospel, [A. V. txt. report]: Jn. xii. 38; Ro. x. 16 sq. (ris iixifrrevire rjj anofj rjfxav; fr. Is. liii. 1, Hebr. n^TOE?, which in 2 8. iv. 4, etc., is rendered ayytkla); dicoq jriorews preaching on the necessity of faith, (Germ. Glaubens-predigf), Gal. iii. 2, 5; Xoyor dxoijs i. q. X. dxovcr&ts [cf. W. 531 (494 sq.)]: 1 Th. ii. 13; Heb. iv. 2. b. hearsay, report, rumor; rtvdy. concerning any one: Mt. iv. 24; xiv. 1; xxiv. 6 ; McTiTJ?; xiii. 7. (Freq. in Grk. writ.) *                       •^—^^^ fut. aKo\ov6rj(ra; impf. fjKoKoidovv; 1 aor. ^KoXouftjIraY pf. qxoXovcVa (Mk. x. 28 L T Tr WH) ; (ii. AkAUBVVos, and this fr. a copulative and xe'Xev-6os road, prop, walking the same road) ; 1. to follow one who precedes, join him as his nffrnrfmif, rxtnnwijifliur him'. Mt. iv. 25; viii. 19 ; ix. 19 ; xxvii. 55\Mk. iii/fNv. 24, [37 Lchm.]; xiv. 51 [R G]; Lk. xxii. 39,54; jocHL 27; Jn. i. 37 sq. 43 (44); vi. 2; xviii. 15; xx. 6, etc.; Acts xii. 8; xiii. 43; xxi. 36 ; 1 Co. x. 4; distinguished fr. irpoaytiv in Mt. xxi. 9; Mk. xi. 9; trop. ra epya airr&v dxoXovdet per' avrav, their good deeds will accompany them to the presence of God the judge to be rewarded by him, Rev. xiv. 13; on the other hand, i)Kokov8t]aav avrt}? ai dfxaprt'ai St\pt tov ovpavov, Rev. xviii. 5, but here for qxoXovdi)o-av GLTTr WH have restored cKoWr)6t)<rav; [o~>;/»Ta rot; nurrtvvaaiv a.KoKov6ijuei Tcaira, Mk. xvi. 17 Tr WH txt. (where al. napaKoK. q. v.)]. to follow one in time, succeed one: Rev. xiv. 8 sq. (Hdian. 1, 14, 12 (6) ra yoiiv aKoXovdrjaavra, al.) Since among the ancients disciples were accustomed to accompany their masters on their walks and journeys — [al. derive the usage that follows from the figurative sense of the word directly ; cf. e. g. 2 Mace. viii. 86 to dxoXov&tv roif vofioLs; M. Antonin. 1. vii. § 31 dxoXov-&70-0V 6c<p, and Gataker ad loc], dxoXov&o) denotes 2. to join one as a disciple, become or be his disciple; side with his party, [A. V. follow him]: Mt. iv. 20, 22; ix. 9; xix. 27 sq.; Mk. i. 18; viii. 84; Lk. v. 11, 27, etc.; Jn. viii. 12 (where Jesus likens himself to a torch which the disciple follows); ovk axoXovdei tjimv he is not of our band of thy disciples, Mk. ix. 88. to cleave steadfastly to one, conform wholly to his example, in living and if need be in dying also: Mt. x. 38 ; xvi. 24; Jn. xii. 26 ; xxi. 22. This verb is not found in the Epp. exc. in 1 Co. x. 4. As in the classics, it is joined mostly with a dat. of the obj.; sometimes with nerd rtvos, Lk. ix. 49; Rev. vi. 8 [Treg. mrg. dat.] ; xiv. 13 ; (so also in Grk. writ.; cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 853 sq.; [Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 458 sq.]) ; mricra nvos, Mt. x. 38 ; Mk. viii. 34 (where R L WH Tr mrg. !X0«v), Hebr. ^n "fhs 'in«,cf. 1 K. xix. 21 ; see W. 234 (219) ; [B. 172 (150), cf. wco\. Karcmiv twos, Arstph. Plut. 13. Comp. : «'£-, en-, (tar-, trap-, crvv- <ucoXovdea>].oucovu [on the use of the pres. in a pf. sense cf. W. 274 sq. (258); B. 203 (176)]; impf. ^kovov; fut. (in best Grk. usage) d»covo-oj*at, Jn. v. 25 RGL, 28 RGL; Acts iii. 22; vii. 37 R G; xvii. 32; [xxi. 22] ; xxv. 22; xxviii. 28; [Ro. x. 14 Tdf.], and (a later form) aKovo-o), Mt. xii. 19; xiii. 14, (both fr. the Sept.) ; [Jn. x. 16 ; xvi. 13 Tr WH mrg.; Acts xxviii. 26] ; Ro. x. 14 [R G]; and T Tr WH in Jn. v. 25,28, (cf. W. 82 (79); B. 53 (46) [Veitch s. v.]); [1 aor. tJKovaa, Jn. iii. 32, etc.]; pf. a<fjKoa; Pass., [pres. dxovojxai; 1 fut. dieovo"#>joio/iai]; 1 aor. r)Koi<rdr]v; [fr. Horn, down]; to hear. J. absol. 1. to be endowed with the faculty of hearing (not deaf) : Mk. vii. 37; Lk. vii. 22; Mt. xi. 5. 2. to attend to (use the faculty of hearing), consider what is or has been said. So in exhortations : a/covere, Mk. iv. 3 ; aKoxjarare, Jas. ii. 5 ; 6 t\av Sna dicoveiv aKove'ro), Mt. xi. 15; xiii. 9, [in both T WH om. Tr br. dicoveiv] ; Mk. iv. 23 ; Lk. xiv. 35 (34) ; o exav °$s dKovo-dra, Rev. ii. 7, 11, 17, 29 ; iii. 6, 13, 22, etc.          '3. trop. to understand, perceive the sense ofwhat is said:'Mt. xiii. 15 sq.; Mk. viii. 18 ; 1 Co. xiv. 2.      II. with an object [B. § 132,17; W. 199 (187 sq.)];a/covco""1. aKova n, to hear something; a. to perceive by the ear what is announced in one's presence, (to hear immediately) : rijv <pa>vfjv, Mt. xii. 19 ; Jn. iii. 8 ; Rev. iv. 1; v. 11 ; xviii. 4 ; Acts xxii. 9, etc.; rbv dairaa/juiv, Lk. i. 41 (cf. 44); TdkAalav, the name ' Galilee,'Lk. xxiii. 6 [T WH om. Tr mrg. br. Ta\.; cf. B. 166 (145)]; avdaracnv veKp&v, the phrase ' avdtrr. vexpav,' Acts xvii. 32; top ~Koyov, Mk. v. 36 [E G L] (on this pass, see napar Kova, 2) ; Mt. xix. 22; Jn. v. 24, etc.; tovs Xoyovs, Acts ii. 22; v. 24 ; Mt. vii. 24 ; pqfurra, 2 Co. xii. 4 ; W \iyovo-w, Mt. xxi. 16 ; pass., Mt. ii. 18 ; Kev. xviii. 22 sq.; ri %k twos, 2 Co. xii." 6 [K G]; foil, by Sn [B. 300 (257 sq.)], Acts xxii. 2; Mk. xvi. 11; Jn. iv. 42; xiv. 28. b. to get by hearing, learn (from the mouth of the teacher or narrator): Acts xv. 17; Mt. x. 27 (6 els to ofis axovere, what is taught you in secret) ; Ro. xv. 21 ; Eph. i. 13 ; Col. i. 6 ; Jn. xiv. 24 ; 1 Jn. ii. 7, 24 ; iii. 11; Xpurrov i. e. to become acquainted with Christ from apostolic teaching, Eph. iv. 21 (cf. fiadelv r6vXpio-r6v, vs. 20 [B. 166 (144) note ; W. 199 (187) note]) ; pass., Lk. xii. 3 ; Heb. ii. 1; rJ with gen. of pers. fr. whom one hears, Acts i. 4 ; t\ napa rivos, Jn. viii. 26,40; xv. 15; Acts x. 22; xxviii. 22; 2 Tim. ii. 2, (Thuc. 6, 93 ; Xen. an. 1, 2, 5 [here Dind. om. napa]; Plat. rep. vi. p. 506 d., al.; [B. 166 (145); W. 199 (188)]); [jrapd twos, without an obj. expressed, Jn. i. 40 (41)]; ex twos, Jn. xii. 34 («c tov vofiov, from attendance on its public reading); onto with gen. of pers., 1 Jn. i. 5; with nepinvos added, Acts ix. 13 ; foil, by 8n, Mt. v. 21, 27, 33, 38,43. c. dieova n. a thing comes to one's ears, to find out (by hearsay), learn, (hear [(of)] mediately) : with ace. of thing, to epya, Mt. xi. 2; oo-a inolei, Mk. iii. 8 [Treg. txt. trout] ; rroXcpovs, Lk. xxi. 9 ; Mt. xxiv. 6 ; Mk. xiii. 7; to learn, absol. viz. what has just been mentioned: Mt. ii. 3; xxii. 7 [R L]; Mk. ii. 17; iii. 21; Gal. i. 13; Eph. i. 15; Col. i. 4; Philem. 5, etc. foil, by on, Mt. ii. 22; iv. 12; xx. 30; Mk.'vi. 55; x. 47; Jn. iv. 47; ix. 35; xi. 6; xii. 12; Gal. i. 23; irepi twos, Mk. vii. 25 ; t\ irepi twos, Lk. ix. 9 ; xvi. 2 ; xxiii. 8 [R G L] ; foil, by an ace. with ptcp. [B. 303 (260)] : Lk. iv. 23; Acts vii. 12; 2 Th. iii. 11 ; 3 Jn. 4; foil, by ace. with inf. in two instances [cf. B. 1. c]: Jn. xii. 18; 1 Co. xi. 18. pass.: Acts xi. 22 (r)Kaoo-6ri 6 \6yos fls tci &ra r!js iieK\r)o~las was brought to the ears) ; 1 Co. v. 1 (aKovirai nopveia iv ifuv) ; Mt. xxviii. 14 (iav aKovo-djj tovto em [L Tr WH mrg. virb] tov fiyepo-pos) ; Mk. ii. 1 ; Jn. ix. 32 fjKovo-Ori on. d. to give ear to teaching or teacher: tovs \6yovs, Mt. x. 14; to follow with attentive hearing, tov \6yov, Jn. viii. 43 ; rh pf/para tov 6eov, 47. e. to comprehend, understand, (like Lat. audio) : Mk. iv. 33; Gal. iv. 21 [(Lchm. mrg. dvaywa-o-Kere) yet cf. Mey. ad loc]; (Gen. xi. 7). 2. dicoveiv is not joined with the genitive of the obj. unless one hear the person or thing with his own ears [B. 166 (144)] ; a. with gen. of a person; simply; o. to perceive any one's voice: oS i. e. of Christ, whose voice is heard in the instruction of his messengers (Lk. x. 16), Ro. x. 14, [W. 199 (187) note2j.       0. to give ear to one, listen,hearken, (Germ, ihm zuhdren, ihn anhSren) : Mt. ii. 9 ; Mk. vii. 14; xii. 37; Lk. ii. 46 ; x. 16 ; xv. 1; xix. 48 ; xxi. 38; Acts xvii. 32; xxiv. 24 (in both these pass. twos irepi twos) ; xxv. 22; Jn. vi. 60. y. to yield to, hear and obey, hear to one, (Germ, aufeinen h&ren) : Mt. xvii. 5, (Mk. ix. 7; Lk. ix. 35) ; Jn. iii. 29 ; x. 8 ; Acts iii. 22 sq.; iv. 19 ; vii. 37 [R G]; 1 Jn. iv. 5 sq. Hence 8. its use by John in the sense to listen to, have regard to, of God answering the prayers of men : Jn. ix. 31; xi. 41; 1 Jn. v. 14 sq. (the Sept. render $TW by elcraKovu). t. with gen. of pers. and ptcp. [B. 301 (259)]: Mk. xiv. 58; Lk. xviii. 36; Jn. i. 37; vii. 32; Acts ii. 6, 11; Rev. xvi. 5; jjnovaa roii Qvo-uurrtfpiov Xiyovros, Rev. xvi. 7 G L T [Tr WH cod.Sin.], a poetic personification; cf. De Wette ad loc, W. § 30, 11. b. with gen. of a thing: rrjs f}\ao-<pt)p.tas, Mk. xiv. 64 (Lchm. ti)p /3Xo-a<pt)fuav, as in Mt. xxvi. 65; the ace. merely denotes the object; rrjs 0\ao-<p. is equiv. in sense to airov f$\ao~<prmovv-ros, [cf. B. 166 (145)]) ; t&v Xoya»/, Lk. vi. 47, (Mt. vii. 24 tovs \6yovs) ; Jn. vii. 40 (L T Tr WH cod. Sin., but R Cr tov \ayov, [cf. B. u. s.]) ; o-vfupav(as k. x°P^v> Lk.xv. 25; rod o-Tevayiiov, Acts vii. 84; rfjs anoKoyias, Acts xxii. 1. The frequent phrase axovew rye (pavfjs (i. q. p1?& *7jp3, Ex. xviii. 19) means a. to perceive the distinct words of a voice : Jn. v. 25, 28 ; Acts ix. 7; xi. 7; xxii. 7; Heb. iii. 7, 15 ; iv. 7; Rev. xiv. 13 ; xxi. 3. p. to yield obedience to the voice : Jn. v. 25 (ol aKoio-avrts sc. rrjs (pavfjs) ; x. 16, 27; xviii. 37; Rev. iii. 20. In Jn. xii. 47 ; xviii. 37 ; Lk. vi. 47 ; Acts xxii. 1, it is better to consider the pron. /k>0 which precedes as a possess, gen. rather than, with B. 167 (145 sq.), to assume a double gen. of the object, one of the pers. and one of the thing. The Johannean phrase dxovew vapa tov 6eov, or ti napa 0eov, signifies a. to perceive in the soul the inward communication of God: Jn. vi. 45. b. to be taught by God's inward communication: Jn. viii. 26, 40, (so, too, the simple dicovew in v. 80); to be taught by the devil, ace. to the reading of L T Tr WH, rjicovo-are Traph tov irarpos, in Jn. viii. 38. For the rest cf. B. 165 (144) sqq.; 301 (258) sqq. [Comp. : &-, «V, en-, nap-, rrpo-, vB-aKovo>.]OKpcurCa, -as, % (dxpaT^s), want of self-control, incontinence, intemperance: Mt. xxiii. 25 (Grsb. ddixia); 1 Co. vii. 5.    Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 524 sq.    [(Aristot. on.)] *OKpa-rijs, -is, gen. -eos, -our, (xparos), without self-control, intemperate: 2 Tim. iii. 3. (Freq. in prof. writ. fr. Plato and Xen. down.) *aKpaTOs, -ov, (icepdvvv/u), unmixed, pure : Rev. xiv. 10 (of wine undiluted with water, as freq. in prof. writ, and Jer. xxxii. 1 (xxv. 15)).*oKptffeia, -etas, f), (dxpt^s), exactness, exactest care: Acts xxii. 3 (kotci aKplftaav tov v6fj.ov in accordance with the strictness of the Mosaic law, [cf. Isoc. areop. p. 147 e.]).   [From Thuc. down.] *dKpifXjs, -is, gen. -ovs, exact, careful. The neut. compar. is used adverbially in Acts xviii. 26; xxiii. 15, 20; xxiv. 22; 7 wcpiPeordTri alpeois the straitest sect i. e. the most precise and rigorous in interpreting the Mosaic law, and24akajHacTTpovin observing even the more minute precepts of the law and of tradition, Acts xxvi. 5.   [From Hdt. down.]*dupifWu, S>: 1 aor. 7JKpLj3a><ra; (diept|3^s) ; 1. in prof,                                                                                                                                                                      %w r i t ,   t o   k n o w   a c c u r a t e l y ,   t o   d o   e x a c t l y .   2 .   t o   i n v e s t i  g a t e   d i l i g e n t l y :   M t .   i i .   7 ,   1 6 ,   ( a n p i f i & s   * £ e r d £ t i v ,   v s .   8 ) ;   A r i s t o t .   g e n .   a n i m .   5 ,   1 ;   P h i l o ,   m .   o p i f .   §   2 5   p e r a   n - c u n j s   e £ e r d o - e * > s   a K p i f i a v v r e s .   [ A l .   t o   l e a r n   e x a c t l y ,   a s c e r t a i n ;   c f .   F r i t z ,   o r   M e y .   on Mt. u. s.] *oKpipSs, adv., exactly, accurately, diligently: Mt. ii. 8; Lk. i. 3; Acts xviii. 25; 1 Th. v. 2; aKpt@S>s nepmartiv to live carefully, circumspectly, deviating in no respect from the law of duty, Eph. v. 15.  [Fr. Aeschyl. down.] *cucpCs, -t'8os, ij, [fr. Horn, down], a locust, particularly that species which especially infests oriental countries, stripping fields and trees. Numberless swarms of them almost every spring are carried by the wind from Arabia into Palestine, and having devastated that country migrate to regions farther north, until they perish by falling into the sea. The Orientals are accustomed to feed upon locusts, either raw or roasted and seasoned with salt [or prepared in other ways], and the Israelites also (ace. to Lev. xi. 22) were permitted to eat them; (cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Heuschrecken; Furrer in Schen-kel iii. p. 78 sq.; [BB.DD. s. v.; Tristram, Nat. Hist, of the Bible, p. 313 sqq.]): Mt. iii. 4; Mk. i. 6. A marvellous and infernal kind of locusts is described in Rev. ix. 3, 7, cf. 2, 5 sq. 8-12; see Diisterdieck ad loc*dxpoarfipiov, -ov, to, (axpoaofuu to be a hearer), place of assemblage for hearing, auditorium; like this Lat. word in Roman Law, dxpocrr. in Acts xxv. 23 denotes a place set apart for hearing and deciding cases, [yet cf. Mey. ad loc.]. (Several times in Plut. and other later writers.) *cucpoarfis, -mi, 6, (aKpoaopcu, [see the preceding word]), a hearer: tov v6pav, Ro. ii. 13; tov \6yov , Jas. i. 22 sq. 25.   (Thuc, Isocr., Plat., Dem., Plut.) *ducpofWrCa, -as, ij, (a word unknown to the Greeks, who used f/ aKpanouQla and to aKpim6o~6iav, fr. ir6tr6t) i. e. membrum virile. Accordingly it is likely that ttjv ir6tr6r\v of the Greeks was pronounced rijv j3vonji> by the Alexandrians, and aKpoj3uOTia said instead of dicpoiroo-Bia — i. e. to Sxpov tt)s tt6<t6t)s; cf. the acute remarks of Fritzsche, Com. on Rom. vol. i. 136, together with the opinion which Winer prefers 99 (94), [and Cremer, 3te Aufl. s. v.]), in the Sept. the equiv. of nS")J? the prepuce, the skin covering the glans penis; a. prop.: Acts xi. 3 ; Ro. ii. 25, 26b; 1 Co. vii. 19; Gal. v. 6; vi. 15; Col. iii. 11; (Judith xiv. 10; 1 Mace. i. 15); iv aKpofivarla &v having the foreskin (Tertull. praeputiatus), uncir-cumcised i. e. Gentile, Ro. iv. 10; iv aicp. sc. &v, 1 Co. vii. 18; equiv. to the same is hi d<cpoj3v(m'as, Ro. iv. 11; f] iv tjj d/cpo/3. irfems the faith which one has while he is uncircumcised, Ro. iv. 11 sq. b. by meton. of the abstr. for the concr., having the foreskin is equiv. to o Gentile: Ro. ii. 26 •; iii. 30 ; iv. 9 ; Eph. ii. 11; jj« <pi<Tta>s dxpo/3. one uncircumcised by birth or a Gentile, opp. to a Jew who shows himself aGentile in character, Ro. ii. 27; tlayye-\iov ros&Kpofi- gospel to be preached to the Gentiles, Gal.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                i i .   7 .   c .   i n   a   t r a n s f e r r e d   s e n s e :   r )   d x p o j 3 .   t j j s   o - a p K o s   ( o p p .   t o   t h e   7 i ¬ p n o f i r f   d x « p < w r o i i ) T o s   o r   r e g e n e r a t i o n ,   C o l .   i i .   1 1 ) ,   t h e   c o n d i t i o n   i n   w h i c h   t h e   c o r r u p t   d e s i r e s   r o o t e d   i n   t h e   t r a p g   w e r e   n o t   y e t   e x t i n c t ,   C o l .   i i .   1 3   ( t h e   e x p r e s s i o n   i s   d e r i v e d   f r o m  the circumstance that the foreskin was the sign of impurity and alienation from God, [cf. B. D. s. v. Circumcision]).*oKpo-vwviatos, -at'a, -aiov, a word wholly bibl. and eccl., [W. 99 (94); 236 (221)], (&cpos extreme, and yavia corner, angle), placed at the extreme corner; Xiflos cornerstone ; used of Christ, 1 Pet. ii. 6; Eph. ii. 20; Sept. Is. xxviii. 16 for D3S |3?» For as the corner-stone holds together two walls, so Christ joins together as Christians, into one body dedicated to God, those who were formerly Jews and Gentiles, Eph. ii. 20 [yet cf. Mey. ad loc.] compared with vss. 14, 16-19, 21 sq. And as a corner-stone contributes to sustain the edifice, but nevertheless some fall in going around the corner carelessly; so some are built up by the aid of Christ, while others stumbling at Christ perish, 1 Pet. ii. 6-8; see yavia, a.*axpoOtviov, -wu, to, (fr. atcpos extreme, and 8k, gen. 6u>6s, a heap; extremity, topmost part of a heap), generally in plur. to aitpoOivia the first-fruits, whether of crops or of spoils (among the Greeks customarily selected from the topmost part of the heaps and offered to the gods, Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 85); in the Bible only once: Heb. vii. 4, of booty.   (Pind., Aeschyl., Hdt., Thuc, Plut., al.) *&cpos, -a, -oi», (dicij point [see aKfif)J), [fr. Horn, down], highest, extreme; to axpov the topmost point, the extremity [cf. B. 94 (82)]: Lk. xvi. 24; Heb. xi. 21 [see irpoo-rowffl, a. fin.]; atcpa, cucpov yijs, ovpavov, the farthest bounds, uttermost parts, end, of the earth, of heaven: Mt. xxiv. 31; Mk. xiii. 27 ; cf. Deut. iv. 32; xxviii. 64; Is. xiii. 5; Jer. xii. 12.*'AidiXos, -ov, [but no gen. seems to be extant, see B. 20 (18)], i, Aquila, a Jew of Pontus, a tent-maker, convert to Christ, companion and ally of Paul in propagating the Christian religion: Acts xviii. 2, 18, 26; Ro. xvi. 3; 1 Co. xvi. 19; 2 Tim. iv. 19; [see B. D.].*OKupo'to, -S>; 1 aor. rjKvpaaa; (aievpos without authority, not binding, void ; fr. icCpos force, authority), to render void, deprive of force and authority, (opp. to tcvpoa to confirm, make valid) : ivrokrjv, Mt. xv. 6 [R G; vo>oi<, ibid. T WH mrg.] ; \6yov [ibid. L Tr WH tat.]; Mk. vii. 13, (cf. d&T«o) ; 8«z0j)ki)i/, Gal. iii. 17. ([1 Esdr. vi. 31] ; Diod., Dion. Hal., Plut.)*okwXvtus, adv., (kooXvco), without hindrance: Acts xxviii. 81. [Plato, Epict., Hdian.]*£kuv, aKovcra, &kov, (contr. fr. aciaav, a priv. and ckw willing), not of one's own will, unwilling: 1 Co. ix. 17. (Very freq. among the Greeks.) *[fflio, to, read by Tdf. in Mt. v. 13 ; Mk. ix. 50; Lk. xiv. 34; see SAar.jaXoPaoTpov, -ov, t<5, (in the plur. in Theocr. 15, 114 ; Anth. Pal. 9, 153 ; in other prof. writ. 6 and ij dXdj3a-orpos; [the older and more correct spelling drops the p, cf. Steph. Thesaur. s. v. 1885 d.; L. and S. s. v. <JXo-&ka%ovela25a\eKTopo<f>a>vlafjaorposj), a box made of alabaster, in which unguents are preserved, (Plin. h. n. 13, 2 (3), [al. 13,19,] "unguenta optime servantur in alabastris ") ; with the addition of fivpov (as in Lcian. dial. mer. 14, 2; [Hdt. 3, 20]) : Lk. vii. 37 ; Mt. xxvi. 7 ; Mk. xiv. 3 (where L T adopt top dXd/3., Tr WH [Mey.] ttjv aX.; Mt. and Lk. do not add the article, so that it is not clear in what gender they use the word, [cf. Tdf.'s crit. note ad loc.]). Cf. Win. RWB. [or B. D.] s. v. Alabaster.*riXa^oveCa, and aka&via (which spelling, not uncommon in later Grk., T WH adopt [see I, t]), -as, q, (fr. aKa£o-vevofuu i. e. to act the dXa(d>u, q. v.); a. in prof. writ, [fr. Arstph. down] generally empty, braggart talk, sometimes also empty display in act, swagger. For illustration see Xen. Cyr. 2, 2, 12; mem. 1, 7; Aristot. eth. Me. 4, 13, p. 1127 ed. Bekk.; [also Trench § xxix.]. b. an insolent and empty assurance, which trusts in its own power and resources and shamefully despises and violates divine laws and human rights: 2 Mace. ix. 8; Sap. v. 8. o. an impious and empty presumption which trusts in the stability of earthly things, [R. V. vaunting] : Jas. iv. 16 (where the plur. has reference to the various occasions on which this presumption shows itself; [cf. W. § 27, 3; B. 77 (67)]); tov /3i'ov, display in one's style of living, [R. V. vainglory], 1 Jn. ii. 16.*dXaiJwv, -aims, 6, fj, (SXj) wandering), [fr. Arstph. on], an empty pretender, a boaster: Ro. i. 30; 2 Tim. iii. 2. [Trench §xxix.; Tittmanni.p. 73 sq.; Schmidt ch. 172,2.]*aXoXAgu; [fr. Pind. down]; a. prop, to repeat frequently the cry aXaKd, as soldiers used to do on entering battle. b. univ. to utter a joyful shout: Ps. xlvi. (xlvii.) 2; lxv. (Ixvi.) 2; and in prof. writ. o. to wail,lament: Mk.v. 38, (VVn Jer. iv. 8; xxxii. 20 (xxv. 34)); cf. oXoXvfm, Lat. ululare. [Syn. see xXaiu fin.] d. to ring loudly, to clang: 1 Co. xiii. 1, [cf. iv Kv/jj3aXoif akaKaypov, Ps. cl. 5].*d-X&XrjTOS, -ov, (XaXijros fr. XaXe'o; [cf. W. 23]), not to be uttered, not to be expressed in words: oreray/xoi mute sighs, the expression of which is suppressed by grief, Ro. viii. 26, [al. 'which (from their nature) cannot be uttered'; cf. Mey. ad loc; W. 97 (92)]. (Anth. Pal. 5, 4 vvvioTopa akaKt)T<i>v i. e. of love-secrets.) *o-XaXos, -ov, (XdXoy talking, talkative), [fr. Aeschyl. on], speechless, dumb, wanting the faculty of speech : Mk. vii. 37; irvcv/ia, Mk. ix. 17, 25, because the defects of demoniacs were thought to proceed from the nature and peculiarities of the demons by which they were possessed. (Sept. Ps. xxxvii. (xxxviii.) 14; xxx. (xxxi.) 19; dXdXov koi Kaicov 7rvevfMTOs 7r\f]prj9, Plut. de orac. def. 51 p. 438 b.)*otXas, -aros, t6, (a later form, found in Sept. and N. T. [Aristot. de mirab. ausc. § 138; Plut. qu. conv. iv. 4,3,3], cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 220; dat. SKan Col. iv. 6), and SKs, &\6s, 6, (the classic form [fr. Horn, down]; Sir. xxii. 15 (13) ; xliii. 19; Sap. x. 7; 1 Mace. x. 29, etc.; Mk. ix. 49 dXt dat. [T WH Tr mrg. om. Tr txt. br.], and in vs. 50 L T Tr WH SKa ace. [yet without the art.] with nom. ro SKas), finally, nom. and aca. SXa Tdf.in Mk. ix. 50 [also Mt. v. 13; Lk. xiv. 34 (where see his note)] (similar to ydXa, gen.                                          %y d X a r o r ,   a   f o r m   n o t e d   b y   c e r t a i n   g r a m m a r i a n s ,   s e e   [ W H .   A p p .   p .   1 5 8 ; ]   K i i h n e r   i .   3 5 3   s q . ;   b u t   s e e   w h a t   F r i t z s c h e ,   C o m .   o n   S i r .   ( x x x i x .   2 6 )   p .   2 2 6   s q . ,   s a y s   i n   o p p o s i t i o n )   ;   s a l t ' ,   1 .   S a l t   w i t h   w h i c h   f o o d   i s   s e a s o n e d   a n d   s a c r i f i c e s   a r e   s p r i n k l e d :   M k .   i x .   4 9  R G; cf. dXi£a>. 2. &\as ttjs yrjs, those kinds of saline matter used to fertilize arable land, Mt. v. 13*; here salt as a condiment cannot be understood, since this renders land sterile (Deut. xxix. 23; Zeph. ii. 9; Judg. ix. 45); cf. Grohmann in Kauf-fer's Bibl. Studien, 1844, p. 82 sqq. The meaning is, ' It is your prerogative to impart to mankind (likened to arable land) the influences required for a life of devotion to God.' In the statement immediately following, ihv be SKas kt\., the comparison seems to be drawn from salt as a condiment, so that two figures are blended; [but it is better to adopt this latter meaning throughout the pass., and take -ft to denote the mass of mankind, see s. v. 4 b. and cf. Tholuck et al. ad loc.]. In Mk. ix. 50 * and Lk. xiv. 34 salt is a symbol of that health and vigor of soul which is essential to Christian virtue; [cf. Mey. on the former pass.]. 3. Salt is a symbol of lasting concord, Mk. ix. 50 ', because it protects food from putrefaction and preserves it unchanged. Accordingly, in the solemn ratification of compacts, the Orientals were, and are to this day, accustomed to partake of salt together. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Salz; [BB.DD. s. v. Salt]; Knobel on Leviticus p. 370. 4. Wisdom and grace exhibited in speech: Col.iv. 6 [where see Bp. Lghtft.].*"AXcurca: Acts xxvii. 8 ; cf. Aatram.[a^«v», &,. T WH uniformly for i\ievs, see Tdf.'s note on pk._i. J6j»nd N. T. ed. 7, Proleg. p. 1.; esp. ed. 8, ProlegTpr 82 sq.; WH. App. p. 151.]dXcb|Hi>: impf. rfreKpov; 1 aor. rfku-tya; 1 aor. mid. impv. SKfiyfrai; [allied with Xwr-or grease; cf. Curtius § 340; Vanicek p. 811; Peile p. 407; fr. Horn, down]; to anoint: nvd or ri, Mk. xvi. 1 ; Jn. xii. 3; rtva or ri Tim [W. 227 (213)], as i\at<p, Lk. vii. 46 •; Mk. vi. 13; Jas. v. 14; pvpa, Jn. xi. 2; Lk. vii. 38, 46 b; Mid.: Mt. vi. 17 (lit. ' anoint for thyself thy head,' unge tibi caput tuum; cf. W. 257 (242); B. 192 (166 sq.)). Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Salbe; [B.D. or McC. and S. s. v. Anoint, etc. Syn. :" aXeltpeivis the mundane and pr o f a n e ,   X p L e t - v   t h e   s a c r e d   a n d   r e l i g i o u s ,   w o r d . "   T r e n c h   §   x x x v i i i .   C o M P . :   e ' £ - a \ e i ( p n ] . *  d X . ¬ K T o p o < j x a v C a ,   - a s ,   1 7 ,   ( a k e i c r o a p   a n d   ( p a v r /   [ W .   2 5 ] ) ,   t h e   c r o w i n g   o f   a   c o c k ,   c o c k - c r o w i n g :   A e s o p ,   f a b .   7 9   [ 4 4 ] .   U s e d   o f   t h e   t h i r d   w a t c h   o f   t h e   n i g h t :   M k .   x i i i .   3 5 ; in this passage the watches are enumerated into which the Jews, following the Roman method, divided the night; [cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Nachtwachen; B. D. s. v. Watches of Night; Alex.'s Kitto s. v. Cock-crowing; Wetst. on Mt. xiv. 25; Wieseler, Chron. Syn. p. 406 note]. (For writ, who use this word see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 229, [and add (fr. Soph. Lex. s. v.) Strab. 7, frag. 35 p. 88, 24; Orig. i. 825 b.; Constt. Ap. 5,18; 5, 19; 8, 34].) *26dXcxrup, -opos, 6, a cock, (Lat. gallxts gallinaceus) : Mt. xxvi. 34, 74 sq.; Mk. xiv. 30,68 [Lchm. br.], 72; Lk. xxii. 34,60 sq.; Jn. xiii.38; xviii. 27. Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 229 ; [Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 307; W. 23 ; see also BB.DD. s. v.; Tristram, Nat. Hist, of the Bible, p. 221 sq.; esp. Egli, Zeitschr. f. wiss. Theol., 1879 p. 517 sqq.].*'AXcgavSpevs, -eat, 6, an Alexandrian, a native or aresi-dent of Alexandria (a celebrated city of Egypt) : Acts vi. 9; xviii. 24.    [(Plut. Pomp. 49, 6; al.)]*'AXc|av8piv6s [cf. Tdf.'s note on Acts xxvii. 6 ; G L Tr Cobet, al. -Spivos; Chandler § 397 note], -r\, -6v, Alexandrian : Acts xxvii. 6; xxviii. 11.    [(Polyb. 34, 8, 7.)] *"AXtgavSpos [i. e. defender of men], -ov, 6, Alexander; 1. a son of that Simon of Cyrene who carried the cross of Jesus: Mk. xv. 21. 2. a certain man of the kindred of the high priest: Acts iv. 6. 3. a certain Jew: Acts xix. 33. 4. a certain coppersmith, an opponent of the apostle Paul: 1 Tim. i. 20; 2 Tim. iv. 14; [al. doubt whether both these passages relate to the same man; cf. e. g. Ellic. on the former].*SXtupov, -ov, to, (aKevw to grind), wheaten flour, meal: Mt. xiii. 33; Lk. xiii. 21. Hesych. SKevpa Kvpias to tov v'itov, Skcpira 8e t&v icpiOuv. (Hdt., Xen., Plat., Joseph., al.) *o\^e«o, -as, ij, (dXijdqs), [fr. Horn, down], verity, truth.1.  objectively;       1. univ. what is true in any matter under consideration (opp. to what is feigned, fictitious, false) : Jas. iii. 14; d\rj6eiav Xc'yeiv, ipeiv, Jn. viii. 45 sq.; xvi. 7 ; Rb. ix. 1; 1 Co. xii. 6 ; 1 Tim. ii. 7; tartv avr<p iraa-au tijv dXrjdeiav, everything as it really was, Mk. v. 33, (so in classics); paprvpt'iv tjj ai\r]8ela to testify according to the true state of the case, Jn. v. 33; in a broader sense, XaXciv a\r\6(w.v to speak always according to truth, Eph. iv. 25; [aikrjdeias pr]iiara arrotpBiyyonai, as opp. to the vagaries of madness, Acts xxvi. 25]; dXq&ia iyevero, was shown to be true by the event, 2 Co. vii. 14. iv akr)8eiq in truth, truly, as the case is, according to fact: Mt. xxii. 16; Jn. iv. 23 sq. (as accords with the divine nature);  2 Co. vii. 14; Col. i. 6;   eV a\tjdeias a. truly, in truth, according to truth: Mk. xii. 32; Lk. iv. 25, (Job ix. 2 Sept.; Philo, vit. Moys. i. § 1).   b. of a truth, in reality, in fact, certainly: Mk. xii. 14; Lk. xx. 21;  [xxii. 59];  Acts iv. 27; x. 34, (Clem. Bom. 1 Cor. 23,5 and 47, 3) ; [cf. W. § 51, 2 f.; B. 336 (289)]; Kor  a\r)6eutv in accordance with fact, i. e. (ace. to the context) justly, without partiality: Eo. ii. 2; eire irpo-(pcuret,  tire  akqBeia,   Phil.   i.   18;   iv  fpy<f   k. akrfBeiq, 1 Jn. iii. 18 [Rec. om. iv, so Eph. iv. 21 WH mrg.].2.  In reference to religion, the word denotes what is true in things appertaining to God and the duties of man, (' moral and religious truth') ; and that      a. with the greatest latitude, in the sceptical question n iariv dXij-deia, Jn. xviii. 38;        b. the true notions of God which are open to human reason without his supernatural intervention : Ro. i. 18; also ij dXij#«a 6eov the truth of which God is the author, Ro. i. 25, cf. 19, (ij a\r}6eia tov Xpicrrov, Evang. Nicod. c. 5, 2; accordingly it is not, as many interpret the phrase, the true nature of God [yetsee Mey. ad loc.]); truth, the embodiment of which the Jews sought in the Mosaic law, Ro. ii. 20. c. the truth, as taught in the Christian religion, respecting God and the execution of his purposes through Christ, and respecting the duties of man, opposed alike to the superstitions of the Gentiles and the inventions of the Jews, and to the corrupt opinions and pre c e p t s   o f   f a l s e   t e a c h e r s   e v e n   a m o n g   C h r i s t i a n s :   r )   d \ r ) 6 e i a   t o v   e l a y y .   t h e   t r u t h   w h i c h   i s   t h e   g o s p e l   o r   w h i c h   t h e   g o s p e l   p r e s e n t s ,   G a l .   i i .   5 ,   1 4 ,   [ c f .   W .   §   3 4 ,   3   a . ] ;   a n d   a b s o l .   r )   d X i j & i a   a n d   d k f i $ ¬ i a :   J n .   i .   1 4 ,   1 7 ;   v i i i .   3 2 ,   4 0 ;   [ x v i .   1 3 ]   ;   x v i i .   1 9 ;  1   Jn. i. 8; ii. 4, 21; 2Jn.l-3; Gal. iii. 1 (Rec); v. 7;2  Co. iv. 2; xiii. 8; Eph. iv. 24; 2 Th. ii. 10, 12; 1 Tim. ii. 7 (iv iriara k. d\r)6elq in faith and truth, of which I became a partaker through faith) ; iii. 15 ; iv. 3; vi. 5; 2 Tim. ii. 18; iii. 8; iv. 4; Tit. i. 14; 2 Pet. i. 12 ; [3 Jn. 8, 12] ; 6 Xoyos ttjs aktfitias, Col. i. 5 ; Eph. i. 13; 2 Tim. ii. 15; Xoyos dXr)6(ias, 2 Co. vi. 7; Jas. i. 18; 686s ttjs dX. 2 Pet. ii. 2; moms d\r)8eias, 2 Th. ii. 13 [W. 186 (175)]; wraieoij ttjs dX. 1 Pet. i. 22 ; iwiyva-o-ts ri)s dX. Heb. x. 26 ; 1 Tim. ii. 4; 2 Tim. ii. 25 ; iii. 7; [Tit. i. 1] ; irvcvpji ttjs dX. the Spirit (of God) which is truth (1 Jn. v. 6) and imbues men with the knowledge of the truth, Jn. xiv. 17 ; [xvi. 13]; xv. 26 ; 1 Jn. iv. 6; eya tlfu 17 dKrjdeia I am he in whom the truth is summed up and impersonated, Jn. xiv. 6 ; ij dXrj&td ami [Rec.] (i. e. Qeov) the truth which is in thee and proceeds from thee, Jn. xvii. 17; [ftrriv SKfjBeia XptoroC iv ipoi i. e. controls, actuates, me, 2 C o .   x i .   1 0 ]   ;   e i v a t   4 k   r i j s   a X r j d e i a s   t o   b e   e a g e r   t o   k n o w   t h e   t r u t h ,   J n .   x v i i i .   3 7   ( s e e   « , H .   7 ,   a n d   f l f i i , Y .   3   d . ) ;   t o   p r o c e e d   f r o m   t h e   t r u t h ,   1   J n .   i i .   2 1 ;   t o   b e   p r o m p t e d   a n d   c o n t r o l l e d   b y   t h e   t r u t h ,   1   J n .   i i i .   1 9 ;   p a p T v p e i v   t %   a k r f i .   t o   g i v e   t e s t i m o n y   i n   f a v o r   o f   t h e   t r u t h   i n   o r d e r   t o   e s t a b l i s h   i t s   a u t h o r i t y   a m o n g   m e n ,   J n .   x v i i i .   3 7 ;   d \ r ) 0 ¬ u u >   n o i e l v   t o   e x e m p l i f y   t r u t h   i n   t h e   l i f e ,   t o   e x p r e s s   t h e   f o r m   o f   t r u t h   i n   o n e ' s   h a b i t s   o f   t h o u g h t   a n d   m o d e s   o f   l i v i n g ,   J n .   i i i .   2 1 ;   1   J n .   i .   6 ,   ( T o b .   x i i i .   6 ;   i v .   6 ;   c f. Neh. ix. 33; 686k akrjdtcas alperi£co-8ai, Ps. cxviii. (cxix.) 30) ; so also irepmareiv iv ttj dX. 2 Jn. 4;3 Jn. 3 sq.; dneiBciv Trj d\. is just the opposite, Ro. ii. 8; so also irkavrjdfjvcu dnb ttjs dX. Jas. v. 19.         II. subjectively; truth as a personal excellence; that candor of mind which is free from affectation, pretence, simulation, falsehood, deceit: Jn. viii. 44; sincerity of mind and integrity of character, or a mode of life in harmony with divine truth : 1 Co. v. 8; xiii. 6 (opp. to d8uda); Eph. iv. 21 [see I. 1 b. above]; v. 9; [vi. 14]; 0-0G 9 a\r)8eia the truth as it is discerned in thee, thy habit of thinking and acting in congruity with truth, 3 Jn. 3; r) d\r)6eia tov 6eov which belongs to God, i. e. his holiness [but cf. Trepuro-eva, 1 b. fin.], Ro. iii. 7; spec, veracity (of God in keeping his promises), Ro. xv. 8; iv dXrjdeiq sincerely and truthfully, 2 Jn. 1; 8 Jn. 1.    The word is not found in Rev. ([nor in 1 Thess., Philem., Jude]).    Cf. HSlemann," Bibelstudien ", (Lpz. 1859) lte Abth. p. 8 sqq.; [ Wendt in Stud. u. Krit., 1883,p.511 sqq.]*dXi)8<uiii; in prof. writ. ([Aeschyl.], Xen., Plat., Aristot., al.) to speak the truth;         a. to teach the truth: nvia\r)drj<;27aXKdGal. iv. 16. b. to profess the truth (true doctrine) : Eph. iv. 15.   [R. V. mrg. in both pass, to deal truly.] *aXi^s, -c'f, (a priv. and \{j6a, \adfiv \\av6ava>], ri> \fj6os,— cf. d/iadfjs; lit. not hidden, unconcealed), [fr. Horn, down]; 1. true: Jn. iv. 18; x. 41; xix. 35; 1 Jn. ii. 8, 27; Acts xii. 9 (an actual occurrence, opp. to Spa/ia); Phil. iv. 8; paprvpia, Jn. v. 31 sq.; viii. 13 sq. 17; xxi. 24; 3 Jn. 12; Tit. i. 13; Kplmg, just, Jn. viii. 16 (L T Tr WH 0X17^); irapotpia, 2 Pet. ii. 22; x°Pls> grace which can be trusted, 1 Pet. v. 12. 2. loving the truth, speaking the truth, truthful: Mt. xxii. 16; Mk. xii. 14; Jn. vii. 18; 2 Co. vi. 8 (opp. to irXdvos); of God, Jn. iii. 33; viii. 26; Ro. iii. 4 (opp. to VfftJ(mjf). 3. i. q. a\r)6iv6s, 1: Jn. vi. 55 (L T Tr WH; for Rec. dXij#5s), as in Sap. xii. 27, where aXrjdfjS 6c6s is contrasted with ot>s cSokovv Oeovs. Cf. RUckert, Abendmahl, p. 266 sq. [On the distinction betw. this word and the next, see Trench § viii.; Schmidt ch. 178, 6] *dXt|9iv<Ss, -t), -6v, (freq. in prof. writ. fr. Plato down; [twenty-three times in Jn.'s writ.; only five (ace. to Lchm. six) times in the rest of the N. T.]); 1. " that which has not only the name and semblance, but the real nature corresponding to the name" (Tittmann p. 155; ["particularly applied to express that which is all that it pretends to be, for instance, pure gold as opp. to adulterated metal" Donaldson, New Crat. § 258; see, at length, Trench § viii.]), in every respect corresponding to the idea signified by the name, real and true, genuine; a. opp. to what is fictitious, counterfeit, imaginary, simulated, pretended: 6c6g (npx 'JT^K, 2 Chr. xv. 3), 1 Th. i. 9; Heb. ix. 14 Lchm.; Jn. xvii. 3; 1 Jn. v. 20. (dXrjdivol <f>iKoi, Dem. Phil. 3, p. 113, 27.) b. it contrasts realities with their semblances: aia]v(], Heb. viii. 2; the sanctuary, Heb. ix. 24. (6 tmros contrasted with S iv tt} (IkSvi, Ael. v. h. 2, 3.) o. opp. to what is imperfect, defective, frajl, uncertain: Jn. iv. 23, 37; vii. 28; used without adjunct of Jesus as the true Messiah, Rev. iii. 7; (pat, Jn. i. 9; 1 Jn. ii. 8; Kpitrts, Jn. viii. 16 (L T Tr WH; Is. lix. 4); kPl<tcis, Rev. xvi. 7; xix. 2; fipros, as nourishing the soul unto life everlasting, Jn. vi. 32; a/ijreXor, Jn. xv. 1; fiaprvpla, Jn. xix. 35; paprvs, Rev. iii. 14; 8e<T7r6rris, Rev. vi. 10; 6801, Rev. xv. 3; coupled with ttiotos, Rev. iii. 14; xix. 11; substantively, r6 akq8iv6v the genuine, real good, opp. to external riches, Lk. xvi. 11, ([ols fxlv yap dXijflivos jrXovros iv ovpava, Philo de praem. et poen. § 17, p. 425 ed. Mang.; cf. Wetst. on Lk. 1. c]; dfatfrai, Polyb. 1, 6, 6). 2. i. q. dXi^r, true, veracious, sincere, (often so in Sept.): Kap&la, Heb. x. 22 (fier aK-qddas iv Kapdiq a\rj6ivr), Is. xxxviii. 3) ; Xdyoi, Rev. [xix. 9] ; xxi. 5 ; xxii. 6, (Plut. apoph. p. 184 e.).   [Cf. Cremer 4te Aufl. s. v. dXi;#«a.] *dX^flu; (a com. Grk. form for the Attic a\ea>, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 151); to grind: Mt. xxiv. 41 ; Lk. xvii. 35. It was the custom to send women and female slaves to the mill-houses [?] to turn the hand-mills (Ex. xi. 5), who were called by the Greeks yvvaUes a\erpiSes (Horn. Od. 20, 105); [cf. B. D. s. v. Mill].*d\r|8us, adv., [fr. Aeschyl. down], truly, of a truth, inreality; most certainly: Jn. i. 47 (48) ; iv. 42; vi. 14, 55 Rec.; vii. 26, 40; viii. 31; xvii. 8; Mt. xiv. S3; xxvi. 73; [Mk. xiv. 70; Mt.] xxvii. 54; [Mk. xv. 39]; Lk. ix. 27; xii. 44; xxi. 3; Acts xii. 11; 1 Th. ii. 13; 1 Jn. ii. 5.*dXufc, -iat, 6, (fiks, a\6s, the sea), [fr. Horn, down]; a fisherman, fisher: Mt. iv. 18 sq.(jT^LXl?5q.; Lk. v. 2,—in all which pass. T and WH Have iiXre»r fr. the form SKttvt, q. v.*d\w<«; (dXitw); to fish: Jn. xxi. 3.    [Philo, Plut.]*•JXCJw: (SKs, i\6s, salt); to salt, season with salt, sprinkle with salt; only the fut. pass, is found in the N. T.: iv rivt SXur8f)(rtT<u; by what means can its saltness be restored? Mt. v. 13 ; 6v<ria <5Xt dXto-ftjcrrrai, the sacrifice is sprinkled with salt and thus rendered acceptable to God, Mk. ix. 49 [R G L Tr txt. br.], (Lev. ii. 13; Ezek. xliii. 24; Joseph, antt. 3, 9, 1; cf. Knobel on Lev. p. 369 sq.; Win. RWB. s. v. Salz; [BB.DD. s. v. Salt]); mis irvpl dXta-ftjaercu, every true Christian is rendered ripe for a holy and happy association with God in his kingdom by fire, i. e. by the pain of afflictions and trials, which if endured with constancy tend to purge and strengthen the soul, Mk. ix. 49. But this extremely difficult passage is explained differently by others; [cf. Meyer, who also briefly reviews the history of its exposition]. (Used by the Sept., Aristot., [cf. Soph. Lex.]; Ignat. ad Magnes. 10 [shorter form] SKl-<rdrjTC iv Xparra, iva p.ij 8uup6apfj ns iv ifiiv.) [COMP.: ovv-aM{<o,—but see the word.]*dXteryinxa, -roy, r6, (aKioyew to pollute, which occurs Sir. xl. 29; Dan. i. 8; Mai. i. 7,12; akin to d\iva>, aKivea to besmear [Lat. linere, cf. Lob. Pathol. Element, p. 21; Rhemat. p. 123; Steph., Hesych., Sturz, De Dial. Alex, p. 145]), pollution, contamination: Acts xv. 20 (tov cmixeaQai kt\. to beware of pollution from the use of meats left from the heathen sacrifices, cf. vs. 29). Neither aX«rye<o nor &kioyr)(ta occurs in Grk. writ.*riXXd, an adversative particle, derived from oXXa, neut. of the adj. aXXor, which was originally pronounced d\\6s (cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 1 sq.), hence properly, other things sc. than those just mentioned. It differs from 8f, as the Lat. at and sed from autem, [cf. W. 441 sq. (411)]. 1. But. So related to the preceding words that it serves to introduce 1. an opposition to concessions ; nevertheless, notwithstanding: Mt. xxiv. 6; Mk. xiii. 20; xiv. 28; Jn. xvi. 7, 20; Acts iv. 17; vii. 48; Ro. v. 14 sq.; x. 16; 1 Co. iv. 4; 2 Co. vii. 6; Phil. ii. 27 (dXX' 6 0c6s etc.), etc. 2. an objection: Jn. vii. 27; Ro. x. 18 sq.; 1 Co. xv. 35; Jas. ii. 18. 3. an exception: Lk. xxii. 53; Ro. iv. 2; 1 Co. viii. 7; x. 23. 4. a restriction: Jn. xi. 42; Gal. iv. 8; Mk. xiv. 36. 5. an ascensive transition or gradation, nay rather, yea moreover: Jn. xvi. 2; 2 Co. i. 9; esp. with Kai added, Lk. xii. 7; xvi. 21; xxiv. 22. dXX' otde,' but. . . not even (Germ, ja nicht einmal) : Lk. xxiii. 15; Acts xix. 2; 1 Co. iii. 2 [Rec. o#rc]; cf. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 157. 6. or forms a transition to the cardinal matter, especially before imperatives: Mt. ix. 18; Mk.dX\d28SXKofiaiix. 22; xvi. 7; Lk. vii. 7; Jn. viii. 26; xvi. 4; Acts ix. 6 [not Rec.]; x. 20; xxvi. 16. 7. it is put ellipti-cally: dXX' iva, i. e. d\\a tovto •yf'yovo', tva, Mk. xiv. 49; Jn. xiii. 18; xv. 25; 1 Jn. ii. 19. 8. after a conditional or concessive protasis it signifies, at the beginning of the apodosis, yet [cf. W. 442 (411)] : after ral (I, 2 Co. xiii. 4 [RG]; Mk. xiv. 29 RGL, (2 Mace, viii. 15); after «' koI, Mk. xiv. 29 [T Tr WH]; 2 Co. iv. 16; v. 16; xi. 6; Col. ii. 5, (2 Mace. vi. 26) ; after «', 1 Co. ix. 2; Ro. vi. 5, (1 Mace. ii. 20); after lav, 1 Co. iv. 15; after eimp, 1 Co. viii. 6 [L Tr mrg. WH br. dXX']; cf. Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 93 sq.; Kiihner ii. p. 827, § 535 Anm. 6. 9. after a preceding piv. Mk. ix. 13 [T om. Tr br. /tew]; Acts iv. 16; Ro. xiv. 20; 1 Co. xiv. 17. 10. it is joined to other particles; aKkd ye [Grsb. dXXdye] (twice in the N. T.): yet at least, 1 Co. ix. 2; yet surely {aber freilich), Lk. xxiv. 21 [L T Tr WH add (cm yea and etc.], cf. Bornemann ad loc. In the more elegant Greek writers these particles are not combined without the interposition of the most emphatic word between them; cf. Bornemann 1. c.; Klotz ad Devar. ii. pp. 15 sq. 24 sq.; Ast, Lex. Plat. i. p. 101; [W. 444 (413)]. aXX' rj (arising from the blending of the two statements ov&ev SXXo rj and ovbiv aXXo, ciKkd) save only, except: 1 Co. iii. 5 (where dXX' t) omitted by G L T Tr WH is spurious); Lk. xii. 51, (Sir. xxxvii. 12; xliv. 10); and after SKKa itself," 2 Co. i. 13 [here Lchm. br. dXX' before if]; cf. Klotz u. s. ii. 31 sqq.; Kiihner ii. p. 824 sq. § 535, 6; W. 442 (412); [B. 374 (320)]. dXX' ov but not, yet not: Heb. iii. 16 (if punctuated iraperrUpavav ; dXX' oii) for ' but why do I ask ? did not all,' etc.; cf. Bleek ad loc. [W. 442 (411)]. dXX' ov^i will he not rather t Lk. xvii. 8. II. preceded by a negation: but (Lat. sed, Germ, sondern); 1. owe (jif)) . . . aXkd: Mt. xix. 11; Mk. v. 89; Jn. vii. 16; 1 Co. i. 17; vii. 10, 19 [oi8«V]; 2 Co. vii. 9; 1 Tim. v. 23 [pajKen], etc. By a rhetorical construction owe . . . dXKd sometimes is logically equiv. to not so much . . . as: Mk. ix. 37 (ovk e/ie Several, dXXA tov ajroorci-\avrd fie); Mt. x. 20; Jn. xii. 44; Acts v. 4; 1 Co. xv. 10; 1 Th. iv. 8; by this form of speech the emphasis is laid on the second member; cf. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 773 sqq.; W. § 55, 8 b.; [B. 356 (306)]. ov pnvov . . . dWa Kai not only . . . but also: Jn. v. 18; xi. 52 [dXX' tva Kai, etc.]; Ro. i. 32, and very often. When kcu is omitted (as in the Lat. non solum . . . sed), the gradation is strengthened: Acts xix. 26 [Lchm. adds mi\; 1 Jn. v. 6; aKka 7roXX<j> fiaKKov, Phil. ii. 12; cf. Fritzsche1.  c. p. 786 sqq.; W. 498 (464); [B. 369 sq. (317)].2.  The negation to which aiKka pertains is suppressed, but can  easily be  supplied upon reflection [W. 442 (412)]: Mt. xi. 7-9; Lk. vii. 24-26, (in each passage, before dWd supply' you will say you did not go out into the wilderness for this purpose') ; Acts xix. 2 (we have not received the Holy Spirit, but . . .); Gal. ii. 3 (they said not one word in opposition to me, but. . .) ; 2 Co. vii. 11 (where before dXKd, repeated six times by anaphora, supply ov fiovov with the accus. of the precedingword). It is used in answers to questions having the force of a negation [W. 442 (412)]: Jn. vii. 49; Acts xv. 11; 1 Co. x. 20. dXKa. iva [or dXX1 Iva, cf. W. 40; B. 10] elliptical after a negation [W. 316 sq. (297); 620 (576); Fritzsche on Mt. p. 840 sq.] : Jn. i. 8 (supply dXka rjK8ev, iva) ; ix. 3 (dXka TrKJ>\6s hyevero [or eytv-vt]6ri], iva); Mk. iv. 22 (dXX& rotoCro eyeWo, Iva). [" The best Mss. seem to elide the final a before nouns, but not before verbs" Scrivener, Plain Introduction, etc., p. 14; but see Dr. Gregory's full exhibition of the facts in Tdf. Proleg. p. 93 sq., from which it appears that " elision is commonly or almost always omitted before a, almost always before v, often before c and ij, rarely before o and o>, never before i; and it should be noticed that this coincides with the fact that the familiar words ev, iva, on, ov, wr, prefer the form dXX'"; see also WH. App. p. 146.   Cf. W. § 5, 1 a.; B. p. 10.]dXXdo-o-w: fut. aXkd£a; I aor. ij\\a£a; 2 fut. pass. aXXay^o-ofioi; (aXXor) ; [fr. Aeschyl. down]; to change: to cause one thing to cease and another to take its place, to iB>], Acts vi. 14 ; tijv (j>avt)v to vary the voice, i. e. to speak in a different manner according to the different conditions of minds, to adapt the matter and form of discourse to mental moods, to treat them now severely, now gently, Gal. iv. 20 [but see Meyer ad loosJ~~"*Q exchange one thing for another: ri ev ran, So. i. 23V3 Ton Ps. cv. (cvi.) 20; the Greeks say dX-&u#etvri ru<os [cf. W. 206 (194), 388 (363) ; Vaughan on Rom. 1. c.]). to transform: 1 Co. xv. 51 sq.; Heb. i. 12.    [COMP.: ott-, 81-, (car-, mro-KaT-, iitr-, o~vv-aXXa(ro"ca.] *d\Xa\6fltv, adv., from another place: Jn. x. 1 (i. q. SKXoOev [which the grammarians prefer, Thorn. Mag. ed. Ritschl p. 10, 13; Moeris ed. Piers, p. 11]; cf. iKaarax66ev, iravrax66ev).    [(Antiph., al.)]*dXXaxoO, adv., i. q. aXXotfi, elsewhere, in another place: Mk. i. 38 (T Tr txt. WH Tr mrg. br.). Cf. Bornemann in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1843, p. 127 sq. [Soph., Xen., al.; see Thorn. M. and Moer. as in the preced. word.] *dXAHYOfx'w, -S>: [pres. pass. ptcp. aXXijyopovjuevos]; i. e. SKKo fiAv ayopeva, aXXo &e voito, " aliud verbis, aliud sensu ostendo " (Quint, instt. 8, 6, 44), to speak alle-gorically or in a figure: Gal. iv. 24. (Philo, Joseph., Plut., and gram. writ.; [of. Mey. on Gal. 1. c.].) *dXX^Xovia, [WH. 'AXX. and -a; see Intr. § 408], Hebr. rV-^Sn,praise ye the Lord, Hallelujah: Rev. xix. 1, 3 sq. 6!   [Sept. Pss. passim; Tob. xiii. 18; 3 Mace. vii. 13.] *dXX^Xuv, gen. plur. [no nom. being possible]; dat. -01s, -ais, -01s; ace. -ovs, -as, -a, one another; reciprocally, mutually: Mt. xxiv. 10; Jn. xiii. 35; Acts xxviii. 25; Ro. i. 12; Jas. v. 16; Rev. vi. 4, and often. [Fr. Horn, down.]dXAo-ytvfc, -is, (SXXos and ytvos), sprung from another race, a foreigner, alien: Lk. xvii. 18. (In Sept. [Gen. xvii. 27; Ex. xii. 43, etc.], but nowhere in prof, writ.)*aXXo|icu; impf. lyXXd/njw; aor. fjkdfirjv and ^Xo/xtjc (Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 108; [W. 82 (79); B. 54 (47)]); to leap (Lat. salw): Acts iii. 8; xiv. 10 (Rec. jjXXcrof29GLTTr WHi/Xaro); to spring up, gush up, of water, Jn. iv. 14, (as in Lat. salire, Verg. eel. 5, 47; Suet. Octav. 82).    [Comp.: e'f, i<p-a~XXofiai.]*aXXos, -17, -o, [cf. Lat. alius, Germ, a/te, Eng. else; fr. Horn, down], another, other; a. absol.: Mt. xxvii. 42; xx. 3; Mk. vi. 15; Acts xix. 32; xxi. 34 (oXXot Hip SKKo), and often. b. as an adj.: Mt. ii. 12; iv. 21; Jn. xiv. 16; 1 Co. x. 29 (SXXt) o-vvelSrjms i. e. 17 aw. SKXov raids). c. with the art.: 6 SXXos the other (of two), Mt. v. 39; xii. 13, etc. [cf. B. 32 (28), 122 (107)]; of SXX01 all others, the remainder, the rest: Jn. xxi. 8 ;1  Co. xiv. 29.[Stk. &\\os, irepos: &\. as compared with It. denotes numerical in distinction from qualitative difference; UK. adds ('one besides'), It. distinguishes ('one of two'); every «•. is an &\., but not every &\. is a It.; 4a. generally 'denotes simply distinction of individuals, trepos involves the secondary idea of difference of k i n d'; e. g. 2 Co. xi. 4; Gal. i. 6, 7. See Bp. Lghtft. and Mey. on the latter pass.; Trench § xcv.; Schmidt ch. 198.]AUorpio-nrCo-Koiros (LTTrWH dXXorpteir.), -ov, 6, (dXXdrpios and cWtr/cojror), one who takes the supervision of affairs pertaining to others and in no wise to himself, [a meddler in other men's matters']: 1 Pet. iv. 15 (the writer seems to refer to those who, with holy but intemperate zeal, meddle with the affairs of the Gentiles — whether public or private, civil or sacred—in order to make them conform to the Christian standard). [Hilgenfeld (cf. Einl. ins N. T. p. 630) would make it equiv. to the Lat. delator.] The word is found again only in Dion. Areop. ep. 8 p. 783 (of one who intrudes into another's office), and [Germ, of Const, ep. 2 ad Cypr. c. 9, in] Coteler. Eccl. Graec. Mon. ii. 481 b.; [cf. W. 25, 99 (94)].*dWdrpios, -a, -ov; 1. belongingtoaaothec (opp. to 1810s), not one's own: Heb. ix. 25; Bp^xiv;_4j)xv. 20;2  Co. x. 15 sq.; 1 Tim. v. 22; Jn. x. 5.   in neut., Lk. xvi. 12 (opp. to to vpirepov).       2. foreign, strange: yq, Acts vii. 6; Heb. xi. 9; not of one's own family, alien, Mt. xvii. 25 sq.; an enemy, Heb. xi. 34, (Horn. H. 5, 214; Xen. an. 3, 5, 5).*&XX6<|>vXos, -ov, (SKXos, and (pvXov race), foreign, (in prof. auth. fr. [Aeschyl.,] Thuc. down); when used in Hellenistic Grk. in opp. to a Jew, it signifies o Gentile, [A. V. one of another nation]: Acts x. 28. (Philo, Joseph.)*oXXws, adv., (aXXor), [fr. Horn, down], otherwise: 1 Tim. v. 25 (to SXXas ?xovTa> which are of a different sort i. e. which are not KaXa ipya, [al. which are not irpddrjXa]).*dXodu, -&; (connected with fj SXms or f) dXar), the floor on which grain is trodden or threshed out); to thresh, (Ammon. r6 iifl rfi SXa irareiv xai rplfitiv rhs araxvas): I Co. ix. [9], 10; 1 Tim. v. 18 (Deut. xxv. 4).   In prof. auth. fr. Arstph., Plato down.*a-Xo-yos, -ov, (Xoyos reason) ; 1. destitute of reason, hrute: £u>a, brute animals, Jude 10; 2 Pet. ii. 12, (Sap. xi. 16; Xen. Hier. 7, 8, al.). 2. contrary to reason, absurd: Acts xxv. 27, (Xen. Ages. 11, 1; Thuc. 6, 85; often in Plat., Isocr., al.).*6X6r\ [on the accent see Chandler § 149], -17*, 17, (commonly fuXaXo'17, dydWoxov), Plut., the aloe, aloes: Jn. xix. 39. The name of an aromatic tree which grows in eastern India and Cochin China, and whose soft and bitter wood the Orientals used in fumigation and in embalming the dead (as, ace. to Hdt., the Egyptians did), Hebr. D'^HN and niSriN [see Muhlau and Volck s. w.], Num. xxiv. 6; Ps. xiv. 9; Prov. vii. 17; Cant, iv. 14. Arab. Alluwe; Linn.: Excoecaria Agallochum. Cf Win. RWB. s. v. Aloe [Low § 235; BB.DD].* 0XS1 <5Xo'r, o, see SXas.aXvxrfs, -17, -6v, salt (i. q. dXfivpos): Jas. iii. 12. ([Hippocr., Arstph.,] Plat. Tim. p. 65 e.; Aristot., Theophr., al.) *iSXuiros, -ov, (himj), free from pain or grief: Phil. ii. 28. (Very often in Grk. writ. fr. Soph, and Plat, down.)*aXvo-ts, or as it is com. written SXvo-is [see WH. App. p. 144], -eas, fj, (fr. a priv. and \va, because a chain is SXvtos i. e. not to be loosed [al. fr. r. val, and allied w. etkea to restrain, dikifa to collect, crowd; Curtius § 660; Vanidek p. 898]), a chain, bond, by which the body, or any part of it (the hands, feet), is bound: Mk. v. 8; Acts xxi. S3; xxviii. 20; Eev. xx. 1; iv dXtfcrct in chains, a prisoner, Eph. vi. 20; ovk iirmaxivBri riy*- SX. pav he was not ashamed of my bonds i. e. did not desert me because I was a prisoner, 2 Tim. i. 16. spec, used of a manacle or hand-cuff, the chain by which the hands are bound together [yet cf. Mey. on Mk. u. i.; per contra esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. p. 8]: Mk. v. 4; [Lk. viii. 29]; Acts xii. 6 sq.    (From Hdt. down.)*d-XvorrcXijs, -4s, (XvaiTeXrfS, see XvtnrcXta), unprofitable, (Xen. vectig. 4, 6); by litotes, hurtful, pernicious: Heb. xiii. 17. (From [Hippocr.,] Xen. down.)*                                                                                                                       %  a X < t > a ,   t o ,   i n d e c l . :   R e v .   i .   8 ;   x x i .   6 ;   x x i i .   1 3 .   S e e   A .   " A X + a t o s   [ W H   * A X # . ,   s e e   t h e i r   I n t r .   §   4 0 8 ] ,   - < u ' o i > ,   6 ,   ( ' S ^ n ,   c f .   ' J t i   ' A y y a i o s ,   H a g .   i .   1 ) ,   A l p h m u s j x A l p h e u s ;   1 .   t h e   f a t h e r   o f   L e v i   t h e   p u b l i c a n :   ^ f E T i i .   1 . 4 y f e e e   A t v t ,   4 .   2 .   t h e   f a t h e r   o f   J a m e s   the less, so called, one of the twelve apostles: Mt. x. 3; Mk. iii. 18; Lk. vi. 15; Acts i. 13. He seems to be the same person who in Jn. xix. 25 (cf. Mt. xxvii. 56; Mk. xv. 40) is called KXanas after a different pronunciation of the Hebr. '37n ace. to which n was changed into k, as npj? (pao-eic, 2 Chr. xxx. 1. Cf. 'Idica>/3or, 2; [B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Alphseus; also Bp. Lghtft. Com. on Gal. pp. 256, 267 (Am. ed. pp. 92,103); Wetzel in Stud. u. Krit. for 1883, p. 620 sq.].* aXav, -avos, 17, (in Sept. also 6, cf. Ruth iii. 2; Job xxxix. 12), i. q. 17 SXas, gen. 8Xa>, a ground-plot or threshing-floor, i. e. a place in the field itself, made hard after the harvest by a roller, where the grain was threshed out: Mt. iii. 12; Lk. iii. 17. In both these pass., by meton. of the container for the thing contained, SXav is the heap of grain, the flooring, already indeed threshed out, but still mixed with chaff and straw, like Hebr. Hi, Ruth iii. 2; Job xxxix. 12 (Sept. in each place iX&va) ; [al. adhere to the primary meaning. Used by Aristot. de vent. 3, Opp. ii. 973", 14].* -ems, fj, a fox:  Mt. viii.  20;   Lk. ix. 58.SOMetaph. a sly and crafty man: Lk. xiii. 82; (in the same sense often in the Grk. writ., as Solon in Plut. Sol. 30, 2; Pind. Pyth. 2, 141; Plut. Sulla 28, 5).*oXoxris, tas, fi, (dXoo>, dXicricofKu to be caught), a catching, capture: 2 Pet. ii. 12 tls Skwrw to be taken, [some •would here take the word actively: to take]. (Fr. Pind. and Hdt. down.) *apa [Skr. sa, sama; Eng. same; Lat. simul; Germ. sammt, etc.; Curtius § 443; Vaniflek p. 972. Fr. Horn, down]; 1. adv., at the same time, at once, together: Acts xxiv. 26; xxvii. 40; Col. iv. 3; 1 Tim. v. 13; Philem. 22; all to a man, every one, Ro. iii. 12. 2. prep. [W. 470 (439)], together with, with dat.: Mt. xiii. 29. &pa irpwt early in the morning: Mt. xx. 1, (in Grk. writ. &pa t$ l)\Uf, &jw. w VI">?)• In 1 Th> iv-17 and v. 10, where &pa is foil, by o-iv, Aim is an adv. (at the same time) and must be joined to the verb*[Stn. &it,a, 6fioS: the distinction given by Ammonius (de diff. voc. s. v.) et al., that Spa is temporal, 4/*oC local, seems to hold in the main; yet see Ho. iii. 12, and cf. Hesych.S.V.]0410.8^5, -is, gen. -ovs, (jux»6ava, whence ifuaBov, to pAdos, ci. dXq&ji), unlearned, ignorant: 2 Pet. iii. 16. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.)*dfbopdvrivos, -ov, (fr. apApavros, as pobivos made of roses, fr. po&ov a rose; cf. aKa»6woi), composed of amaranth (a flower, so called because it never withers or fades, and when plucked off revives if moistened with water; hence it is a symbol of perpetuity and immortality, [see Paradise Lost iii. 353 sqq.]; Plin. h. n. 21 (15), 23 [al. 47]): orccpcwos, 1 Pet. v. 4. (Found besides only in Philostr. her. 19, p. 741; [and (conjecturally) in Boeckh, Corp. Inscrr. 155, 39, c. B. C. 840].) *iS|i£pavTo$t-ov, (fr. /uipaiva; cf. dfuairos, cfcpairor, etc.), not fading away, unfading, perennial; Vulg. immarcesci-bilis; (hence the name of the flower, [Diosc. 4, 57, al.]; see apapavTivos) : 1 Pet. i. 4. Found elsewhere only in Sap. vi. 13; [(<or, a/tap. Sibyll. 8, 411; Boeckh, Corp. Inscrr. ii, p. 1124, no. 2942 c, 4; Lcian. Dom. c. 9].*dpapr&vu; fut. d/uzprtjo-a (Mt. xviii. 21; Ro. vi. 15; in the latter pass. LTTrWH give d/uipri)o-<i>p<i> for RG Afiaprrjaoiiev), in class. Grk. &paprri<ropxu.; 1 aor. (later) rjnaprqcra, Mt. xviii. 15; Ro. v. 14, 16 (cf. W. 82 (79); B. 54 (47)); 2 aor. i-fpiproi;; pf. ijpjpnjica; (ace. to a conjecture of Bttm., Lexil. i. p. 137, fr. a priv. and fuipai. ptipopat, jxe'pos, prop, to be without a share in, sc. the mark); prop, to miss the mark, (Horn. H. 8, 811, etc.; with gen. of the thing missed, Horn. H. 10, 372; 4, 491; roil o-Korroi, Plat. Hipp. min. p. 375 a.; rrjs 680S, Arstph. Plut. 961, al.); then to err, be mistaken; lastly to miss or wander from the path of uprightness and honor, to do or go wrong. [" Even the Sept., although the Hebr. NBn also means primarily to miss, endeavor to reserve d/xapr. exclusively for the idea of sin; and where the Hebr. signifies to miss one's aim in the literal sense, they avail themselves of expressive compounds, in particular ifcapapravuv, Judg. xx. 16." Zezschwitz, Profan-graec. u. bibl. Sprachgeist, p. 68 sq.]    In the N. T.afxaprlato wander from the law of God, violate God's law, sin; a. absol.: Mt. xxvii. 4; Jn. v. 14; viii. 11; ix. 2 sq.; 1 Jn. i. 10; ii. 1; iii. 6, 8 sq.; v. 18; Ro. ii. 12; iii. 23; v. 12, 14, 16; vi. 15; 1 Co. vii. 28, 36; xv. 34; Eph. iv. 26; 1 Tim. v. 20; Tit. iii. 11; Heb. iii. 17; x. 26 (cKotKnW); [2 Pet. ii. 4]; of the violation of civil laws, which Christians regard as also the transgression of divine law, 1 Pet. ii. 20. b. dfutprdveti' ifiaprlav to commit (lit. sin) a sin, 1 Jn. v. 16, (p.fyd\r]V ipxipriav, Ex. xxxii. 30 sq. Hebr. nKOt} Ktpn; alo-xpav &p. Soph. Phil. 1249; fityd\a iiuipTtifiara ifiapTavtiv, Plat. Phaedo p. 113 e.); cf. ayairaa, sub fin. ifiapravdv dsTiva [B. 173 (150); W. 238 (219)]: Mt. xviii. 15 (LTWHom.T                                                                                                   r   m r g . b r .   ¬ i s   a t ) ,   2 1 ;   L k .   x v .   1 8 ,   2 1 ;   x v i i .   3   R e c ,   4 ;   1   C o .   v i i i .   1 2 ;   r i   t l s   K a i V a p a ,   A c t s   x x v .   8 ;   s i r   r t >   t b i o v   o a f t a ,   1   C o .   v i .   1 8 ,   ( t l s   a v r o v s   r t   k m   e l s   S X K o v s ,   P l a t .   r e p .   3 ,   p .   8 9 6   a . ;   f l s   r h   & i o v ,   P l a t .   P h a e d r .   p .   2 4 2   c ;   t l s   B t o v s ,   X e n .   H e l l .   1 ,   7 ,   1 9, etc.; [cf. &p. Kvpiu 6t$, Bar. i. 13; ii. 5]); Hebraisti-catty, ivimiov CjaS) nvos [B. § 146,1] in the presence of, before any one, the one wronged by the sinful act being, as it were, present and looking on: Lk. xv. 18, 21, (1 S. vii. 6; Tob. iii. 3, etc.; [cf. tvaarn. nvpiov, Bar. i. 17]). [For reff. see dp-apria.    Comp. : npo-apaprava.]*d|idpTT]|M, -Tor, to, (fr. d/xapTf'to i. q. d/taprdwo), cf. o8t-mj/*a, &\ioyi)pa), a sin, evil deed, [" Differunt t) d/*aprta et t6 dfxdpnjfia ut Latinorum peccat u s et peccat u m. Nam t6 &paprnfia et peccatum proprie malum facinus indicant ; contra f) AiMpria et peccatus primum peccationem, rb peccare, deinde peccatum, rem consequentem, valent." Fritzsche; see dfiapria, fin.; cf. also Trench § lxvi.]: Mk. iii. 28, and (LTTrtxt.WH) 29; iv. 12 (where GTTr txt. WH om. L Tr mrg. br. to. djiapr.); Ro. iii. 25; 1 Co. vi. 18; 2 Pet. i. 9 (R [L WH txt. Tr mrg.] dfiaprtw*). In prof. auth. fr. Soph, and Thuc. down; [of bodily defects, Plato, Gorg. 479 a.; d/i. firnipovuaav, Cic. ad Att. 13, 21; ifi. ypa(piKov, Polyb. 34, 3,11; Stop ptv napaKoyas ^ j3Xdj3i) yivryeai, aTv\r)na • orav bi fit) napakoyas, avev de KaKtas, &juiprr)pxi • orav bi tlbas pev w npoBovKtvaas bi, aSUriixa, Aristot. eth. Nic. 5, 10 p. 1135", 16 sq.].*dpaprCa, -as, fj, (fr. 2 aor. apapTtiv, as airorvxia fr. airoTvxeiv), a failing to hit the mark (see ifiaprava). In Grk. writ. (fr. Aeschyl. and Thuc. down). 1st, an error of the understanding (cf. Ackermann, Das Christl. im Plato, p. 59 Anm. 3 [Eng. trans. (S. R. Asbury, 1861) p. 57 n. 99]). 2d, o bad action, evil deed. In the N. T. always in an ethical sense, and 1. equiv. to t6 iyap-ravetv a sinning, whether it occurs by omission or commission, in thought and feeling or in speech and action (cf. Cic. de fin. 3, 9): Ro. v. 12 sq. 20; v(f> bpapriav ewai held down in sin, Ro. iii. 9; linpJveiv rfj d/napn'9, Ro. vi. 1; airo8vj)O-Ktiv tjj dfi. and pp> ev avrfj, Ro. vi. 2; t}j» dp.. ytvaxTKeiv, Ro. vii. 7; 2 Co. v. 21; vettpbs ttj d/*. Ro. vi. 11; 7rcpl ApapTlas to break the power of sin, Ro. viii. 3 [cf. Mey.]; o-Sjmj rip d)x. the body as the instrument of sin, Ro. vi. 6 ; dn-drij tt/s d/i. the craft by which sin is accustomed to deceive, Heb. iii. 13; avdpamos tijs dfu [dvo/xuic T Tr txt. WH txt.] the man so possessed by sin that he seems unable to exist without it, the man utterly given upa/xapTMto sin, 2 Th. ii. S [W. § 84, 8 Note 8], In this sense f, dpaprla (i. q. ri ipaprdvf ip) as a power exercising dominion over men (sin as a principle and power) is rhetorically represented as an imperial personage in the phrases ij dp. ftao-iKtici, Kvpuvei, KaTtpyd{eTcu, Ro. v. 21; vi. 12, 14; vii. 17, 20; Sov\eveiv rg dp. Ro. vi. 6; 8ov\os rf/s ip. Jn. viii. 34 [WH br. G om. -njt <*/*.]; Ro. vi. 17; v6pm Trfs dp. the dictate of sin or an impulse proceeding from it, Ro. vii. 23; viii. 2; Svvapis rijs ip. 1 Co. xv. 56; (the prosopopoeia occurs in Gen. iv. 7 and, ace. to the reading dpapria, in Sir. xxvii. 10). Thus dpaprla in sense, but not in signification, is the source whence the several evil acts proceed; but it never denotes vitiosity. 2. that which is done wrong, committed or resultant sin, an offence, a violation of the divine law in thought or in act (fi dpapria tariu fj dvopla, 1 Jn. iii. 4); a. generally: Jas i. 15; Jn. viii. 46 (where dpapr. must be taken to mean neither error, nor craft by which Jesus is corrupting the people, but sin viewed generally, as is well shown by Liicke ad loc. and Ullmann in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1842, p. 667 sqq. [cf. his Siindlosigkeit Jesu p. 66 gqq. (Eng.* trans, of 7th ed. p. 71 sq.)]; the thought is,' If any one convicts me of sin, then you may lawfully question the truth and divinity of my doctrine, for sin hinders the perception of truth'); xapls apaprias so that he did not commit sin, Heb. iv. 15; irouiv dpap-rlav and ttjv dp. Jn. viii. 34; 1 Jn. iii. 8; 2 Co. xi. 7; 1 Pet. ii. 22; i\tu> dpaprlav to have sin as though it were one's odious private property, or to have done something needing expiation, i. q. to have committed sin, Jn. ix. 41; xv. 22, 24; xix. 11; 1 Jn. i. 8, (so alfut tx*w, of one who has committed murder, Eur. Or. 514); very often in the plur. dpaprim [in the Synopt. Gospels the sing, occurs but once: Mt. xii. 31]: 1 Th. ii. 16; [Jas. v. 16 LTTrWH]; Rev. xviii. 4 sq., etc.; ir\ij0os apaprwv, Jas. v. 20; 1 Pet. iv. 8; irouiv dpapriat, Jas. v. 15; also in the expressions Scpeais apapriav, d<puvai ras dp., etc. (see cKp'njpt, 1 d.), in which the word does not of itself denote the guilt or penalty of sins, but the sins are conceived of as removed so to speak from God's sight, regarded by him as not having been done, and therefore are not punished, iv dpapr. ov (yewr)drjs oW thou wast covered all over with sins when thou wast born, i. e. didst sin abundantly before thou wast born, Jn. ix. 34; iv rats dp.- diroSirijo-iceiv to die loaded with evil deeds, therefore unreformed, Jn. viii. 24; crt iv dpapriats tlvai still to have one's sins, sc. unexpiated, 1 Co. xv. 17. b. some particular evil deed: ttjv dp. rmkriv, Acts vii. 60; iracra dpaprla, Mt. xii. 31; dpapria npbs Bdvarov, 1 Jn. v. 16 (an offence of such gravity that a Christian lapses from the state of jjmif received from Christ into the state of Bdvaros (cf. 6d.va.ros, 2) in which he was before he became united to Christ by faith; cf. Liicke, DeWette, [esp. Westcott, ad L]).          3. collectively, the complex oraggregate of sins committed either by a single person or by many: atptiv rfjv dp., tov tcoapov, Jn. i. 29 (see aipeo, S c.) ; dnoOvria-Keiv iv rfi ip. Jn. viii. 21 (see 2 a. sub fin.) ; tnpi ipaprias, sc. Bwias [W. 5&3 (542) ; B. 393 (336)],31expiatory sacrifices, Heb. x. 6 (ace. to the usage of the Sept., who sometimes so translate the Hebr. nKOn and nmn, e. g. Lev. v. 11; vii. 2 7 (3 7); Ps. xxxix. '(xl.) 7); \(>>ph dfiaprias having no fellowship with the sin which he is about [?] to expiate, Heb. ix. 28. 4. abstract for the concrete, i. q. ipapraiKos: Ro. vii. 7 (6 vopos dpaprla, opp. to d vopos ayios, vs. 12) ; 2 Co. v. 21 (rbv... dpapriav iitolrjtrtv he treated him, who knew not sin, as a sinner). Cf. Fritzsche on Rom. vol. i. 289 sqq.; [see dpAprrjpa; Trench § lxvi.].apAprvpos, -ov, (paprvs), without witness or testimony, unattested: Acts xiv. 17. (Thua, Dem., Joseph., Plut., Lcian., Hdian.) * -6v, (it. the form dpApra>, as <pt[8a\os from , devoted to sin, a (masc. or fern.) sinner. In the N. T. distinctions are so drawn that one is called d/Mpra\6s who is a. not free from sin. In this sense all men are sinners; as, Mt. ix. 18; Mk. ii. 17; Lk. v. 8, 32; xiii. 2; xviii. 13; Ro. iii. 7; v. [8], 19; 1 Tim. i. 15; Heb. vii. 26. b. pre-eminently sinful, especially wicked; a. univ.: 1 Tim. i. 9; Jude 15; Mk. viii. 38; Lk. vi. 82-34; vii. 37, 39; xv. 7, 10; Jn. ix. 16, 24 sq. 81; Gal. ii. 17; Heb. xii. 3; Jas. iv. 8; v. 20; 1 Pet. iv. 18; dpaprla itself is called dpapraXos, Ro. vii. 18. p. spec, of men stained with certain definite vices or crimes, e. g. the tax-gatherers: Lk. xv. 2; xviii. 13; xix. 7; hence the combination reX&vai Kal dpapraXol, Mt. ix. 10 sq.; xi. 19; Mk. ii. 15 sq.; Lk. v. 30; vii. 34; xv. 1. heathen, called by the Jews sinners kot' i£oxqv (1 Mace. i. 34; ii. 48, 62; Tob. xiii. 6) : Mt. xxvi. 45 [?]; Mk. xiv. 41; Lk. xxiv. 7; Gal. ii. 15. (The word is found often in Sept., as the equiv. of K(?n and j?Eh, and in the O. T. Apocr.; very seldom in Grk. writ., as Aristot. eth. Nic. 2, 9 p. 1109*, 33; Plut. de audiend. poet. 7, p. 25 c.)*£|tax°s> -°v> (l"*xo)t in &&• writ. [fr. Pind. down] commonly not to be withstood, invincible; more rarely abstaining from fighting, (Xen. Cyr. 4, 1, 16; Hell. 4, 4, 9); in the N. T. twice metaph. not contentious: 1 Tim. iii. 3; Tit. iii. 2.*, -a: 1 aor. rjprjoa; (fr. &pa together; hence to gather together, cf. Germ, sammeln; [al. regard the init. a as euphonic and the word as allied to Lat. meto, Eng. mow, thus making the sense of cutting primary, and that of gathering in secondary; cf. Vanicek p. 6 73]); freq. in the Grk. poets, to reap, mow down: ras x<»p<Wi Jas. v. 4.* f, -ov, fj, amethyst, a precious stone of a violet and purple color (Ex. xxviii. 19; ace. to Phavorinus so called &a to direlpyeiv rtjs p.e(h)S [so Plut. quaest. conviv. iii. 1, 3, 6]) : Rev. xxi. 20.    [Cf. B. D. s. v.] *a, -S>; fut. dp.e\ri<Tco; 1 aor. rjp.fkijo'a; (fr. dpfXtjs, and this fr. a priv. and pe\a> to care for) ; very com. in prof. auth.; to be careless of, to neglect: rtvds, Heb. ii. 3; viii. 9; 1 Tim. iv. 14; foil, by inf., 2 Pet. i. 12 R G; without a case, dpLfKrjaavres (not caring for what had just been said [A. V. they made light of if}), Mt. xxii. 5.*a-|M(iirros, -ov, (pcpcpopai to blame), blameless, deserv ing no censure (Tertull. irreprehensibilis'), free from, fault or defect: Lk. i. 6; Phil. ii. 15; iii. 6; 1 Th. iii. 18 [WH32mrg. d/iej*nTCBs]; Heb. viii. 7 (in which nothing is lacking) ; in Sept. i. q. DJJ, Job i. 1, 8 etc. Com. in Grk. writ.    [Cf. Trench § ciii.]*d-lUpin-us, adv., blamelessly, so that there is no cause for censure: 1 Th. ii. 10; [iii. 13 WHmrg.]; v. 23. [Fr. Aeschyl. down.    Cf. Trench § ciii.]*d|«'piK.vos, ^v, (jUpipva), free from anxiety, free from care: Mt. xxviii. 14; 1 Co. vii. 32 (free from earthly cares). (Sap. vi. 16; vii. 23; Hdian. 2, 4, 3; 3, 7,11; Anth. 9, 359, 5; [in pass, sense, Soph. Ajax 1206].) *A.JMT46STOS, -ov, (fieT(m'%u)> not transposed, not to be transferred; fixed, unalterable: Heb. vi. 18; to fyterd0e-tov as subst., immutability, Heb. vi. 17. (3 Mace. v. 1; Polyb., Diod., Plut.) *A-|«Ta-KlvTvros, -ov, QuTaiavioo), not to be moved from its place, unmoved; metaph. firmly persistent, [A. V. unmov-able~\: 1 Co. xv. 58. (Plat. ep. 7, p. 343 a.; Dion. Hal. 8, 74; [Joseph, c. Ap. 2,16, 9; 2, 32, 3; 2, 35,4].) *rir|UTa|U\ivros, -ov, (firrafteXofiai, f«ra/xeX«), not repented of, unregretted: Ro. xi. 29; o-<»Ti}pia, by litotes, salvation affording supreme joy, 2 Co. vii. 10 [al. connect it with ficTavoiai'].    (Plat., Polyb., Plut.) *d|UTav6i)Tos, -ov, (/ieravoeo), q. v.), admitting no change of mind (amendment), unrepentant, impenitent: Ro. ii. 5. (In Lcian. Abdic. 11 [passively], i. q. dficrttyicXtjros, q. v.; [Philo de praem. et poen. § 3].)*tyurpos, -ov, (fierpov a measure), without measure, immense : 2 Co. X. 13, 15 sq. (els tcl cLfifrpa Kavxa<r6ai to boast to an immense extent, i. e. beyond measure, excessively). (Plat., Xen., Anthol. iv. p. 170, and ii. 206, ed. Jacobs.)*d^v, Hebr. |D«; 1. verbal adj. (fr. |D« to prop; Niph. to be farm), firm, metaph. faithful: 6 apr)V, Rev. iii. 14 (where is added 6 imprus 6 nurrbs k. oKtj6iv6s). 2. it came to be used as an adverb by which something is asserted or confirmed: a. at the beginning of a discourse, surely, of a truth, truly; so freq. in the discourses of Christ in Mt. Mk. and Lk.: dpjjv \iyto vp.1v ' I solemnly declare unto you,' e. g. Mt. v. 18; Mk. iii. 28; Lk. iv. 24. The repetition of the word (d^» (iftijv), employed by John alone in his Gospel (twenty-five times), has the force of a superlative, most assuredly: Jn. i. 51 (52); iii. 3. b. at the close of a sentence; so it is, so be it, may it be fulfilled (yevmro, Sept. Num. v. 22; Deut. xxvii. 15, etc.): Ro. i. 25; ix. 5; Gal. i. 5; Eph. iii. 21; Phil. iv. 20; 1 Tim. i. 17 ; Heb. xiii. 21; 1 Pet. iv. 11; Rev. i. 6, and often; cf. Jer. xi. 5; xxxv. (xxviii.) 6; 1 K. i. 30. It was a custom, which passed over from the synagogues into the Christian assemblies, that when he who had read or discoursed had offered up a solemn prayer to God, the others in attendance responded Amen, and thus made the substance of what was uttered their own:1 Co. xiv. 16 (to ajitjv, the well-known response Amen), cf. Num. v. 22; Deut. xxvii. 15 sqq.; Neh. v. 13 ; viii. 6.2 Co. i. 20 at eVayyeXuu . . . rb vai, Kal. . . to api\v, i. •?. had shown themselves most sure.   [Cf. B. D. s. v. Amen.]cqi^Top, -opos, 6, t), (jirynfp), without a mother, motherless; in Grk. writ.       1. born without a mother, e. g.Minerva, Eur. Phoen. 666 sq., al.; God himself, inasmuch as he is without origin, Lact. instt. 4,13, 2. 2. bereft of a mother, Hdt. 4,154, al. 3. born of a base or unknown mother, Eur. Ion 109 cf. 837. 4. unmotherly, unworthy of the name of mother: ftiJTijp ap.iyrap, Soph. El. 1154. Cf. Bleek on Heb. vol. ii. 2, p. 305 sqq. 5. in a signif. unused by the Greeks, 'whose mother is not recorded in the genealogy': of Melchizedek, Heb. vii. 8; (of Sarah by Philo in de temul. § 14, and rer. div. haer. § 12; [cf. Bleek u. s.]) ; cf. the classic dvoXvp.7»ds.*d-|itavros, -ov, (juaiva), not defiled, unsoiled; free from that by which the nature of a thing is deformed and debased, or its force and vigor impaired: tcoinj pure, free from adultery, Heb. xiii. 4; n\r)poi>op.ia (without defect), 1 Pet. i. 4; dprjuKfia, Jas. i. 27 ; pure from sin, Heb. vii. 26. (Also in the Grk. writ.; in an ethical sense, Plat, legg. 6, p. 777 e.;  Plut. Pericl. c. 39 /3i'os xaOapbs lad 6, 3"i3'8y. (servant of the prince, [al. my people are noble; but cf. B. D. s. v.]), [A. V. AminadaV], the prop, name of one of the ancestors of Christ (1 Chr. ii. 10 [A. V. Amminadab]): Mt. i. 4; Lk. iii. 33 [not WH.   See B. D. s. v.].*ttpiios, -ov, f), sand; ace. to a Hebr. comparison #/*. rijs 6aKa<T<rr]s and &p. jrapa to x«^os ttjs 6dk. are used for an innumerable multitude, Ro. ix. 27; Heb. xi. 12 j Rev. xx. 8, equiv. to xii. 18 (xiii. 1). Ace. to the context sandy ground, Mt. vii. 26. (Xen., Plat., Theophr. often, Plut., Sept. often.)*d|iv6s, -ov, 6, [fr. Soph, and Arstph. down], d lamb: Acts viii. 32; 1 Pet. i. 19; tow 6eov, consecrated to God, Jn. i. 29, 36. In these passages Christ is likened to a sacrificial lamb on account of his death, innocently and patiently endured, to expiate sin.    See apviov*dpoifM|, -ijs, f), (fr. dfxcij3<<>, as aKoi<pf) fr. aKei(j)a>, orotj3q fr. oTei/Sia), a very com. word with the Greeks, requital, recompense, in a good and a bad sense (fr. the signif. of the mid. dpeijSofuu to requite, return like for like) : in a good sense, 1 Tim. v. 4.*fynreXos, -ou, f], [fr. Horn, down], a vine: Mt. xxvi. 29; Mk. xiv. 25; Lk. xxii. 18; Jas. iii. 12. In Jn.xv. 1,4 sq. Christ calls himself a vine, because, as the vine imparts to its branches sap and productiveness, so Christ infuses into his followers his own divine strength and life, cfytjr. rrjs yjjs in Rev. xiv. 18 [Rec? om. r^s dp.Tr.], 19, signifies the enemies of Christ, who, ripe for destruction, are likened to clusters of grapes, to be cut off, thrown into the wine-press, and trodden there.*dfursXovpfds, -oC, 6, ij, (fr. 3/xireXos and EPFQ), a vinedresser : Lk. xiii. 7. (Arstph., Plut., Geopon., al.; Sept. for D"O.)*aiiircXi&v, Sivos, 6, a vineyard: Mt. xx. 1 sqq.; xxi. 28, [33], 39 sqq.; Mk. xii. 1 sqq.; Lk. [xiii. 6]; xx. 9 sqq.; 1 Co. ix. 7.    (Sept.; Diod. 4, 6; Plut. pro nobilit. c. 3.)*'A|iir\tas [T "A/MrXiaTos, Tr WH L mrg. 'Ap,jrXiaTos; hence accent 'AftrrXtSs; cf. Lob. Pathol. Proleg. p. 505; Chandler § 32], -ov, 6, Amplias (a contraction from the Lat. Amnliatus, which form appears in some authorities,88cf. W. 102 (97)), a certain Christian at Home: Ko. xvi8.   [See Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. p. 174; cf. The A thenceumfor March 4, 1882, p. 28.9 sq.J*'A|mt\£otos (Tdf.) or more correctly 'AtmXtans (L mrg. Tr WH) i. q. 'A^nXias, q. v.<H«iv«: 1 aor. mid. fovvdmv; [allied w. Lat. munio, moenia, etc., Vanicek p. 731; Curtius § 451J; in Grk. writ. [fr. Horn, down] to ward off, keep off any thing from any one, ri rim, ace. of the thing and dat. of pers.° hence, with a simple dat. of the pers., to aid, assist any one (Thuc. 1, 50; 3, 67, al.). Mid. dpivopai, with ace. of pers., to keep off, ward off, any one from one's self; to defend one's self against any one (so also 2 Mace. x. 17; Sap. xi. 3; Sept. Josh. x. 13) ; to take vengeance on any one (Xen. an. 2, 3, 23; Joseph, antt. 9, 1, 2): Acts vii. 24, where in thought supply r6v abutovvra [cf. B. 194 (168) note; W. 258 (242)].*dfi^i&ia; [fr. diuj>i, lit. to put around]; to put on, clothe: in Lk. xii. 28 L WH dfi<pid£et for Rec. a^umm. (A later Grk. word; Sept. [2 K. xvii. 9 Alex.]; Job xxix. 14; [xxxi. 19]; xl. 5; Ps. lxxii. 6 Symm.; several times in Themist.; cf. Mm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 112; [Veitch s. v.; B. 49 (42 sq.); Steph. s. v. col. 201 c. quotes from Cram. Anecdot. Ox. vol. ii. p. 338, 31 to ptv dn<j>ii(a tori Koivas, to be dfi<f>idC<o AopiKov, oorrep t6 vironiifa kcu \mania£a>\.)    Cf. dfi(pu(a>.*d)i<J>i-P<i\Xu>; to throw around, i. q. irtpifiahXa, of a garment (Horn. Od. 14, 342); tp-east-tajind fro now to one side now to the other: a net, Mk. i. 16j!> L T Tr WH [ace. to T Tr WH used absol.; cf. ol a/i<£t/3oA«r, Is. xix. 8]. (Hab. i. 17.)*dfi<t>£pVi]orTpov, -ov, to, (dfjL<piffaK\a>), in Grk. writ, anything thrown around one to impede his motion, as chains, a garment; spec, a net for fishing, [casting-net]: Mk. i. 16 RGL; Mt.iv. 18. (Sept.; Hes. scut. 215; Hdt. 1, 141; Athen. 10, 72, p. 450.) [Syn. see bUrvov, and cf. Trench § lxiv.; B. D. s. v. net] *a^w'jja, i. q. dp<f>uvn>iu; in Lk. xii. 28 dfj.cpU£ei T Tr. Cf. dn(j>id^a>.dp4>i-lvw|u; pf. pass. rjfupUa-imt; (eim/ii) ; [fr. Horn, down]; to put on, to clothe: Lk. xii. 28 (K G; cf. dpxpiiCa); Mt. vi. 30; iv run. [B. 191 (166)], Lk. vii. 25; Mt. xi. 8.*'A|u|>faro\i$, -tat, fj, Amphipolis, the metropolis of Macedonia Prima [cf. B. D. s. v. Macedonia]; so called, because the Strymon flowed around it [Thuc. 4, 102]; formerly called 'Emu 6&oi (Thuc. 1,100): Acts xvii. 1 [see B. D.].*d|4o8ov, -ov, t6, (dptpi, 686s), prop, a road round anything, a street, [Hesych. S/Kpoba- al piiuu. dyvial- bioboi (al. 8ie£o8ot Siopvy/Mi, al. 17 nXaTela); Lex. in Bekk. An-ecdota i. p. 205, 14 "AfKpoSov • 1? &mrep « rerpayavov biayeypappevri ofio's. For exx. see Soph. Lex.; Wetst. on Mk. 1. c.; cod. D in Acts xix. 28 (where see Tdf.'s note)]: Mk. xi. 4. (Jer. xvii. 27; xxx. 16 (xlix. 27), and in Grk. writ.) *d|M^<S«poi, -at, -a, [fr. Horn, down], both of two, both the one and the other: Mt. ix. 17, etc.; ra dfttpdrcpa, Acts xziii. 8; Eph. ii. 14.i -op, (fito/julofiai), that cannot be censured blameless: Phil. ii. 15 R G (cf. r«ca M4Wra, Deut. xxxii. 5); 2 Pet. iii. 14. (Horn. H. 12, 109; [Hesiod, -Find., al.;] Plut. frat. amor. 18; often in Anthol.)*Sfui>iu>v, -ov, ro, amomum, a fragrant plant of India, having the foliage of the white vine [al. ampeloleuce] and seed, in clusters like grapes, from which ointment was made (Plin. h. n. 12, 13 [28]): Rev. xviii. 13 GL T Tr WH.   [See B. D. Am. ed. a. v.] *&|u»nos, -ov, (p.£>fu>s), without blemish, free from faulti-ness, as a victim without spot or blemish: 1 Pet. i. 19 (Lev. xxii. 21) ; Heb. ix. 14; in both places allusion is made to the sinless life of Christ. Ethically, without blemish, faultless, unblamable: Eph. i. 4; v. 27; CoL i. 22; Phil. ii. 15 LTTrWH; Jude 24; Rev. xiv. 5. (Often in Sept.; [Hesiod,Simon., Iambi.], Hdt. 2, 177; Aeschyl. Pers. f 85; Theocr. 18, 25.) [Stot. see Trench § ciii.; Tittmann i. 29 sq.] * 6, indecl., Amon, (flax artificer [but cf. B. D.]), king of Judah, son of Manasseh, and father of Josiah: Mt. i. 10, [L T Tr WH -^>s.   Cf. B. D.].»'AfuSs, 6, Amos, (|>fDK strong), indecl. prop, name of one of Christ's ancestors: [Mt. i. 10 L T Tr WH]; Lk. iii. 25.* Sv, a particle indicating that something can or could occur on certain conditions, or by the combination of certain fortuitous causes.   In Lat. it has no equivalent ; nor do the Eng. haply, perchance, Germ, wohl (tool), twa, exactly and everywhere correspond to it.    The use of this particle in the N. T., illustrated by copious exx. fr. Grk. writ., is shown by W. § 42; [cf. B. 216 186) sqq.   Its use in classic Grk. is fully exhibited (by Prof. Goodwin) in L. and S. s. v.].It is joined      I. in the apodoses of hypothetical sen-ences       1. with the Impf., where the Lat. uses the mpf. subjunctive, e. g. Lk. vii. 39 (Jylvao-iuv Sv, sciret, he would know) ; Lk. xvii. 6 (iKeycre &v ye would say); Mt. xxiii. 30 (non essemus, we should not have been); Jn. . 46 ; viii. 42; ix. 41; xv. 19; xviii. 36; 1 Co. xi. 31 ; Gal. i. 10; iii. 21 [but WH mrg. br.] ; Heb. iv. 8; viii. 4, 2. with the indie. Aor. (where the Lat. uses the ilpf. subj. like the fut. pf. subj., / would have done it), o express what would have been, if this or that either were (« with the impf. in the protasis preceding), or ad been (el with the aor. or plpf. preceding) : Mt. xi 21 and Lk. x. 13 (&v p,fTtv6r\vav they would have repent     ,   Mt. xi. 23;  xii. 7 (ye would not have condemned) ; Mt. xxiv. 43 (he would have watched), 22 and Mk. xiii. 20 (no one would have been saved, i. e. all even now would have to be regarded as those who had perished; cf. W. 304 (286)) ; Jn. iv. 10 (thou wouldst have asked); xiv. 2 (elwov Sv I would have said so); 28 (ye would have rejoiced) ; Ro. ix. 29 (we should have become) ; 1 Co. ii. 8; Gal. iv. 15 (RG); Acts xviii. 14.    Sometimes the ondition is not expressly stated, but is easily gathered from what is said: Lk. xix. 23 and Mt. xxv. 27 (I should have received it back with interest, sc. if thou hadst given it to the bankers).       3. with the Plupf.: Jn. xi. 21 "R Tr mrg.] (ovk &v in8vqKei [L T Tr txt.&v34avawould not have died, la -wmcn, in 32, the aor, ova &v AiMim) ; Jn. xiv. 7 [n*, Tdf.] («i with the plpf. preceding) ; 1 Jn. ii. 19 {they would have remained with us). Sometimes (as in Grk writ., esp. the later) Sv is omitted,. in order to intimate that the thing wanted but little (impf.) or had wanted but little (plpf. or aor.) of being done, which yet was not done because the condition was not fulfilled (cf. Alex. Bttm. in the Stud. u. Krit. for 1858, p. 489 sqq.; [N. T. Gram. p. 225 (194)]; Fritzsche on Rom. vol. ii. 33; W. § 42, 2 p. 805 (286)), e. g. Jn. viii. 39 (where the iv is spurious); xv. 22, 24; xix. 11; Acts xxvi. 32; Ro. vii. 7; Gal. iv. 15 (iv before ibuKart has been correctly expunged by LTTrWH). II. Joined to relative pronouns, relative adverbs, and adverbs of time and quality, it has the same force as the Lat. cumque or cunque, -ever, -soever, (Germ, irgend, etwa). 1. foil, by apasttenseof the Indicative, when some matter of fact, something certain, is spoken of;                                                                                                                                                                          %w h e r e ,   " w h e n   t h e   t h i n g   i t s e l f   w h i c h   i s   s a i d   t o   h a v e   b e e n   d o n e   i s   c e r t a i n ,   t h e   n o t i o n   o f   u n c e r t a i n t y   i n v o l v e d   i n   i v   b e l o n g s   r a t h e r   t o   t h e   r e l a t i v e ,   w h e t h e r   p r o n o u n   o r   p a r t i c l e   "   ( K l o t z   a d   D e v .   p .   1 4 5 )   [ c f .   W .   §   4 2 ,   3   a . ] ;   o o o i   i v   a s   m a n y   a s :   M k .   v i .   5 6   ( o c roi av tjvtovto \rjt\mvro L txt. T Tr txt. WH] avrou as many as touched him [cf. B. 216 (187)]) ; Mk. xi. 24 (Sea av jrpoo-evxo/*o'oi atTeio [Grsb. om. &], but L txt. T Tr WH have rightly restored &ra wpoirti\f(rde k. aireicrtfe). Ka66n av in so far or so often as, according as, (Germ, je nachdem gerade) : Acts ii. 45; iv. 35. a>s av: 1 Co. xii. 2 (in whatever manner ye were led[cf.B.§139,13; 383(329)sq.]). 2. foll.bya Subjunctive, a. the Present, concerning that which may have been done, or is usually or constantly done (where the Germ, uses mb'gen); tyUa iv whensoever, as often as: 2 Co.iii. 15 LTTrWH; 6s Sv whoever, be he who he may: Mt. xvi. 25 (L T Tr WH idv); [Mk. viii. 35 (where TTrWH fut. indie; see WH. App. p. 172)]; Lk. x. 5 (L T Tr WH aor.), 8; Gal. v. 17 (T Tr WH idv, Lbr. idv); 1 Jn. ii. 5; iii. 17; Ro. ix. 15 (Ex. xxxiii. 19) j xvi. 2; 1 Co. xi. 27, etc. Sorts &v: 1 Co. xvi. 2 [Tr WH idv; WH mrg. aor.]; Col. iii. 17 (L txt. Tr WH idv). Stroi iv: Mt. vii. 12 (TWH idv); xxii. 9 (LTTrWH idv). Siroti av whithersoever: Lk. ix. 57 (L Tr idv); Rev. xiv. 4 (L Tr [T ed. 7 not 8, WH] have adopted iwdyei, defended also by B. 228 (196)); Jas. iii. 4 (RGLTrmrg. in br.). oo-axic iv how often soever: 1 Co. xi. 25 sq. (where LTTrWH iav). as iv in what way soever: 1 Th. ii. 7 ([cf. Elite, ad loc.; B. 232 (200)], L T Tr WH idv). b. the A o r i s t, where the Lat. uses the fut. pf.; 6s &v: Mt. v. 21, 22 (tijiaj whoever, if ever any one shall have said); 31 sq. [in vs. 32 L T Tr WH read nas 6 dno\iav~]; x. 11; xxvi. 48 (Tdf. idv); Mk. iii. 29, 35; ix. 41, etc. ootis iv: Mt. x. 33 [LTrWHtxt.om. 3k]; xii. 50; Jn. xiv. 18[Trmrg.WHpres.]; Acts iii. 23 (Tdf. iav), etc. oo-oi iv: Mt. xxi. 22 (Treg. idv); xxiii. 8 (TWH idv); Mk.iii. 28 (Tr WH idv); Lk. ix. 5 (L T Tr WH pres.); Jn. xi. 22; Acts ii. 39 (Lchm. ovs); iii. 22. Birov Sv: Mk. xiv. 9 (T WH idv); ix. 18 (L T Tr WH idv). &xpis Sv until (donee) : 1 Co. xv. 25 Rec.; Rev. ii. 25.   cms Svuntil (usque dwm): Mt ii. 13; x. 11; xxii. 44; Mk. vi. 10; Lk. xxi. 32 ; 1 Co. iv. 5, etc.   fjvtKa Sv, of fut. time, not until then, when ... or then at length, when ...: 2 Co. iii. 16 (T WH txt. idv) [cf. Kuhner ii. 951; Jelf ii. 565]. us &v as soon as [B. 282 (200)]: 1 Co. xi. 34; Phil. ii. 23.   d<t> oS hv iy*p8ji, Lk. xiii. 25 (from the time, what ever the time is, when he shall have risen up).   But idv (q. v.) is also joined to the pronouns and adverbs mentioned, instead of Sv; and in many places the Mss. and edd. fluctuate between Sv and tew, (exx. of which have already been adduced); [cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96; WH. App. p. 173 " predominantly iv is found after consonants, and idv after vowels"].   Finally, to this head must be referred Orav (i. q. otc iv) with the indie, and much oftener with the subj. (see Srav), and oiras Sv, although this last came to be used as a final conjunction in the sense, that, if it be possible: Lk. ii. 35; Acts iii. 20 (19); xv. 17; Ro. iii. 4; see Siros, II. 1 b.   [Cf. W. 809 (290 sq.); B. 234 (201).]          III. Sv is joined to theOptat. [W. 803 (284); B. 217 (188)]; when a certain condition is laid down, as in wishes, 7 would that etc.: Acts xxvi. 29 (fu£<ujxi)i> [Tdf. ev£d/up>] Sv I could pray, sc. did it depend on me) ; in direct questions [W. 1. c.; B. 254 (219)] : Acts viii. 31 (ttws hv Swaiiufv; i. e. on what condition, by what possibility, could I? cf. Xen. oec. 11, 5); Acts xvii. 18 (re av de'Xoi. . . Xcycu> what would he say 1 it being assumed that he wishes to utter some definite notion or other); Acts ii. 12RG; in dependent sentences and indirect questions in which the narrator introduces another's thought [W. § 42,4; B.l.c] : Lk. i. 62 ; vi. 11; ix. 46; [xv. 26 L br. Tr WH; cf. xviii. 36 Lbr. Trbr.WHmrg.]; Acts V. 24; x. 17; xvii. 20 R G.          IV. Sv is found without a mood in 1 Co. vii. 5(ei pt) rt iv [WH br. iv], except perhaps, sc. yivovro, [but cf. Bttm. as below]), as Sv, adverbially, tanquam (so already the "Vulg.), as if: 2 Co. x. 9 (like &ant p Sv in Grk. writ.; cf. Kiihner ii. 210 [§ 398 Anm. 4; Jelf § 480] ; B. 219 (189); [L. and S. s. v. D. HI.]).4v, contr. from idv, if; foil, by the subjunc.: Jn. xx. 28 [Lchm. idv. Also by the (pres.) indie, in 1 Jn. v. 15 Lchm.; see B. 223 (192); W. 295 (277)]. Further, L T Tr WH have received Sv in Jn. xiii. 20; xvi. 28; [so WH Jn. xii. 32; cf. W. 291 (274); B. 72 (63)].*ivA, prep., prop, upwards, up, (cf. the adv. Sva>, opp. to Kard and kot<b), denoting motion from a lower place to a higher [cf. W. 398 (372) n.]; rare in the N. T. and only with the accus. 1. in the expressions dva. pioav (or jointly dvdptirov [so R" Tr in Rev. vii. 17]) into the midst, in the midst, amidst, among, between,—with gen. of place, Mt. xiii. 25; Mk. vii. 81; Rev. vii. 17 [on this pass^ see fietrot, 2 sub fin.] ; of pers., 1 Co. vi. 5, with which cf. Sir. xxv. 18(17) ava piaov roO (Fritz, t&v) irXijaiov avrov; cf. W. § 27,1 fin. [B. 382 (285)], (Sir. xxvii. 2; 1 Mace. vii. 28; xiii. 40, etc.; in Sept. for ^na, Ex. xxvi. 28; Josh, xvi. 9; xix. 1; Diod. 2,4 dva fUaov t&v \ti\eav [see ficvos, 2]); ava jxepor, (Vulg. per partes), in turn, one after another, in succession: 1 Co. xiv. 27 [where Rec? writes ava-ptpos], (Polyb. 4,20,10 dvh pipos iittv).       2. joined to35avayaiopnumerals, it has a distributive force [W. 398 (372); B. 331 sq. (285)]: Jn. ii. 6 (dva iterprjras 8vo fj Tpeis two or three metretae apiece); Mt. xx. 9 sq. (TKafiov dva 8r)vdpu>v they received each a denarius); Lk. ix. 3 [Tr br. WH om. dva; ix. 14] ; x. 1 (dva dvo [WH dva dio [SvoJ] two by two); Mk. Ti. 40 (L T Tr WH Kara); [Rev. iv. 8]; and very often in Grk. writ.; cf. W. 398 (372). It is used adverbially"in Rev. xxi. 21 {dva els exaaros, like dva re'c-oapes, Plut. Aem. 32; cf. W. 249 (234); [B. 30 (26)J). 3. Prefixed to verbs dva signifies, a. upwards, up, up to, (Lat. ad, Germ, auf), as in dvoKpoveiv, dva^alveiv, dvaf3ak\civ, dvanpa£eiv, etc. b. it corresponds to the Lat. ad (Germ, an), to [indicating the goal], as in dvay ye'Wetv [al. would refer this to d.], dvamew. o. it denotes repetition, renewal, i. q. denuo, anew, over again, as in dvayevvav. d. it corresponds to the Lat. re, retro, back, backwards, as in dvaKapmeiv, dvaxtopeiv, etc. Cf. Win. De verb. comp. Pt. iii. p. 3 sq.*&va-pa0juS$, -ov, 6, (fiadfids, and this fr. fiaiva); 1. an ascent. 2. a means of going up, a flight of steps, a stair: Acts xxi. 35, 40. Exx. fr. Grk. writ, in Lob. ad Phryn. p. 324 sq.*dvo-ftafvo; [impf. dvefiaivov Acts iii. 1; fut. dva$r}<ropMi Ro. x. 6, after Deut. xxx. 12]; pf. dvaffe^ijxa; 2 aor. dveftyv, ptcp. dvaffds, impv. avafia Kev. iv. 1 (dvdPqdi Lchm.), plur. dvdfiare (for RGdvdptjre) Rev. xi. 12 L T Tr [ WH; cf. WH. App. p. 168»]; W. § 14,1 h.; [B. 54 (47) ; fr. Horn, down]; Sept. for n^jj; a. to_gojtg, move to a higher place, ascend: a tree (eiri), Lk. xix. 4; upon the roof of a house (em), Lk. v. 19; into a ship (els), Mk. vi. 51; [Mt. xv. 39 GTrtxt.; Acts xxi. 6 Tdf.]; tis t«J Spos, Mt. v. 1; Lk. ix. 28; Mk. iii. 13; eh rb inrcpmov, Acts i. 13; ftr tov ovpavSv, Ro. x. 6; Rev. xi. 12; els rbvoiip. is omitted, but to be supplied, in Jn. i. 51 (52); vi. 62, and in the phrase dvafi- irpbs tov irarepa, Jn. xx. 17. (It is commonly maintained that those persons are fig. said dvaj3ef3r]Kcvai, els tov ovpavdv, who have penetrated the heavenly mysteries: Jn. iii. 13, cf. Deut. xxx. 12; Prov. xxiv. 27 (xxx. 4) ; Bar. iii. 29. But in these latter pass. also the expression is to be understood literally. And as respeots Jn. iii. 13, it must be remembered that Christ brought his knowledge of the divine counsels with him from heaven, inasmuch as he had dwelt there prior to his incarnation. Now the natural language was ovSAs rfli e'v rip oipavw; but the expression dvafiept)Kev is used because none but Christ could get there except by a free n d i n g. Accordingly el p.i\ refers merely to the idea, involved in dva^e^r/Ktv, ofapastresidencein heaven. Cf. Meyer [or Westcott] ad loc.) Used of travelling to a higher place f «fc 'lepoo-oX. Mt. xx. 17 sq.; Mk. x. 82 sq., etc.; els rbUpdv, Jn. vii. 14; Lk.xviii. 10. Often the place to or into which the ascent is made is not mentioned, but is easily understood from the context: Acts viii. 31 "(into the chariot); Mk. xv. 8 (to the palace of the governor, ace. to the reading avoids restored by L T Tr txt. WH for K G dvafiofjiras), etc.; or the place alone is mentioned from which (<wr<$,«) the ascent is made: Mt. iii. 16 ; Acts viii. 39; Rev. xi. 7.          b. in a wider senseof things rising up, to rise, mount, be borne up, spring «g: of a fish swimming up, Mt. xvii. 27; of smoke rising up, Rev. viii. 4; ix. 2; ofjdani&springing up from the ground, Mt. xiii. 7; ^STiv. ijfrl, (as in Grk. writ.; Theophr. hist, plant. 8/ 3, and Hebr. n'jjj); of things which come up in one's mind (Lat. suboriri) : dvafiaiv. iitl r})v Kapb. or iv tq KapSia, Lk. xxiv. 88; if Co. iLJfjM.cts vii. 23 (dvefiri eiri rf/v k. it came into his mind i.~eThe resolved, foil, by inf.), after the Hebr. J^g n^jf, Jer. iii. 16, etc. [B. 135 (118)]. Of messages", prayers, deeds, brought up or reported to one in a higher place: Acts x. 4; xxi. 81 (tidings came up to the tribune of the cohort, who dwelt in the tower Antonia). [Comp. : npoa-, <rvv-ava/3aiva>.]dvo-p<iU<u: 2 aor. mid. dvepa\6itr)V, 1. to throw or toss up. 2. to put back or off, delay, postpone, (very often in Grk. writ.) ; in this sense also in mid. (prop, to defer for one's self) : nvd, to hold back, delay; in a forensic sense to put off any one (Lat. ampliare, Cic. Verr. act. 2, 1, 9 § 26) i. e. to defer hearing and deciding (adjourn) any one's case: Acts xxiv. 22; cf. Kypke [or Wetst.] ad loc.*dva-{3if3d£<i>: 1 aor. dvt^l^aaa; to cause to go up or ascend, to draw up, (often in Sept. and Grk. writ.) : Mt. xiii. 48, (Xen. Hell. 1, 1, 2 wpbs rijv yffv dvePlpaCe t&s i                   )*dva-|3Mir«; 1 aor. dveff\e^a; [fr. Hdt. down]; 1. to look up: Mk. viii. 24, [25 R GL]; xvi. 4; Lk. xix. 5; xxi. 1; Acts xxii. 13; us nva, ibid.; els rbv aipavov, Mt. xiv. 19; Mk. vi. 41; vii. 84, (Plat. Axioch. p. 370 b.; Xen. Cyr. 6,4, 9). 2. to recover (lost) sight: Mt. xi. 5; xx. 34; Lk. xviii. 41 sqq., etc ([Hdt. 2, 111;] Plat. Phaedrus p. 234 b. irapaxpfiiM dve^Xeijre, Arstph. Plut. 126); used somewhat loosely also of the man blind from birth who was cured by Christ, Jn. ix. 11 (12) (cf. Meyer ad loc), 17 sq. (Paus. 4, 12, 7 (10) awe fin tov 'Otpiovea . . . t6v e'x yeverrjs rvtp\6v dva/3\e'\[rai), Cf. Win. De verb, comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 7 sq.&v&-P\a|n.$, -etos, 7, recovery of sight: Lk. iv. 18 (19), (Sept. Is. Ixi. 1).   [Aristot.]*&va-fSo£o>, -&: 1 aor. dvepAqo-a; [fr. Aeschyl. and Hdt. down]; to raise a cry, to cry out anything, say it shouting : Lk. ix. 88 (L T Tr WH e'poqo-e); Mk. xv. 8 (where read dvaftas, see dvaffalva, a. sub fin.); with the addition of <pa>vjj neyakfl, Mt. xxvii. 46 [Tr WH L mrg. t'/S^o-e], (as Gen. xxvii. 38; Is. xxxvi. 13, etc.). Cf. Win. De verb. comp. Pt. iii. p. 6 sq.; [and see /3oa<o, fin.].*dva-fJoX-rfj, -rjs, ij, (ayaySaXXffl, q. v.), often in Grk. writ.. a putting off, delay: irout<r6ai dva^oXrjv to interpose (lit. make) delay, Acts xxv. 17, (as in Thuc 2,42; Dion. Hal. 11, 38; Plut. Camffl. c. 35).*dviyaiov, -ov, to, (it. dva and yaia i. e. yrj), prop, anything above the ground; hence a room in the upper part of a house: Mk. xiv. 15; Lk. xxii. I i, (in G L T Tr WH). Also written dvaryaiov (which Tdf. formerly adopted; cf. Xen. an. 5, 4, 29 [where Dind. dvaKeiav]), dvwyeov (Rec), dvayewv; on this variety in writing cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 297sq.; [Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 358];36ava&eUwfuFritzsche on Mk. p. 611 sq.; B. 13 (12); [TO. App. p. 151].*4v-ayyt'\X«; impf. dvriyytWov; [fut. avayytkat]; 1 aor. dv^yytiXa; 2 aor. pass. ovqyycXijv, Ro. xv. 21; 1 Pet. i. 12 (several times in Sept.; 1 Mace. ii. 81; W. 82 (78); [Veitch s. v. ayyeXXa]); to announce, make known, [cf. ava, 8 b.]: ri, Acts xix. 18; foil, by ori, Jn. v. 15 [Lmrg. WHtxt.T e&ro>]; Sera ktX. Acts xiv. 27; [Mk. v. 19 R GLmrg.]; [absol. with els, Mk. v. 14 Rec] ; equiv. to disclose: ti ran, Jn. iv. 25*; xvi. 13-15; used of the formal proclamation of the Christian religion: Acts xx. 20; 1 Pet. i. 12; 1 Jn. i. 5; ntpi twos, Ro. xv. 21 (Is. lii. 15); to report, bring back tidings, rehearse, used as in Grk. writers (Aeschyl. Prom. 664 (661); Xen. an. 1, 8, 21; Polyb. 25, 2, 7) of messengers reporting what they have seen or heard, [cf. ava u. s.]: ti, Acts xvi. 88 (where L T Tr WH dmjyy.); 2 Co. vii. 7.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 d . v a - " Y ¬ w 6 w > ,   - 5 > :   1   a o r .   a v e y e w r j e r a ;   p f .   p a s s ,   d v a y e y i v - v r i f u u ;   t o   p r o d u c e   a g a i n ,   b e g e t   a g a i n ,   b e g e t   a n e w ;   m e t a p h . :   r i v a ,   t h o r o u g h l y   t o   c h a n g e   t h e   m i n d   o f   o n e ,   s o   t h a t   h e   l i v e s   a   n e w   l i f e   a n d   o n e   c o n f o r m e d   t o   t h e   w i l l   o f   G o d ,  1   P e t .   i .   3 ;   p a s s i v e l y   I k   t w os, ibid. i. 23.    (In the same sense in eccl. writ. [cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.].   Among prof, auth. used by Joseph, antt. 4, 2, 1 t&v ix toCavrdis dvayewa/ievov [yet Bekker av yevojifvav] which originated.)*dvo-yiviio-Kw; [impf. aveyivaxrKtv Acts viii. 28]; 2 aor. dviyvav, [inf. dvayvavai Lk. iv. 16], ptcp. dvayvois; Pass., [pres. avaywa><TKOfxai\; 1 aor. dveyvi>o~6i\v; in prof. auth. 1. to distinguish between, to recognize, to know accurately, to acknowledge; hence 2. to read, (in this signif. [" first in Pind. O. 10 (11). 1"] fr. [Arstph.,] Thuc. down) : ti, Mt. xxii. 31; Mk. xii. 10; Lk. vi. 8 ; Jn. xix. 20; Acts viii. 30, 32; 2 Co. i. 13; [Gal. iv. 21 Lchm. mrg.]; Rev. i. 3; v. 4 Rec.; nva, one's book, Acts viii. 28, 30; iv with dat. of the book, Mt. xii. 5 ; xxi. 42; Mk. xii. 26; with ellipsis of iv Ttj> vo/wp, Lk. x. 26; foil, by SVi [objective], Mt. xix. 4; [foil, by 6V1 recitative, Mt. xxi. 16]; ti en-oi'ijo-e, Mt. xii. 3; Mk. ii. 25. The obj. not mentioned, but to be understood from what precedes : Mt. xxiv. 15; Mk. xiii. 14; Acts xv. 31; xxiii. 34; Eph. iii. 4; pass. 2 Co. iii. 2.   to read to others, read aloud:2 Co. iii. 15; Acts xv. 21, (in both places M<uuo-i)s i. q. the books of Moses); [Lk. iv. 16; Acts xiii. 27]; 1 Th. v. 27; Col.iv. 16*&va-yic&&<*; [impf. tjvdyicajbv]; 1 aor. rjuayKaaa] 1 aor. pass. rfliayKaadnv; (fr. avayiaf) ; [fr. Soph, down]; to necessitate, compel, drive to, constrain, whether by force, threats, etc., or by persuasion, entreaties, etc., or by other means: tiwx, 2 Co. xii. 11 (by your behavior towards me); nva foil, by inf., Acts xxvi. 11; xxviii. 19; Gal. ii. 3, 14 (by your example); vi. 12; Mt. xiv. •22; Mk. vi. 45 ; Lk. xiv. 23.*dva-yKCuos, -ai'a, -alov, (avayurf), [fr. Horn, down (in various senses)], necessary; a. what one cannot do without, indispensable: 1 Co. xii. 22 (t4 ntKrf); Tit. iii. 14 (xp«at). *>• connected by the bonds of nature or of friendship: Acts x. 24 (dvayxatot [A. V. near] tpikot).c. what ought according to the law of duty to be done, what is required by the condition of things: Phil. i. 24. dvaynaidv cWi foil, by ace. with inf., Acts xiii. 46; Heb. viii. 8. ivdynaiov ijy«io-0ai to deem necessary, foil, by inf., Phil. ii. 25; 2 Co. ix. 5.*4vaf Kao-rfis, adv*., by force or constraint; opp. to ikov <riW, 1 Pet. v. 2.    (Plat. Ax. p. 866 a.)*&V&YIO1, -rjs, fj; 1. necessity, imposed either by the external condition of things, or by the law of duty, regard to one's advantage, custom, argument: kot avayafv perforce (opp. to Kara ckovo-iov), Philem. 14; i£ dvayieijs of necessity, compelled, 2 Co. ix. 7; Heb. vii. 12 {necessarily) ; ?x<* avayKrpi I have (am compelled by) necessity, (also in Grk. writ.): 1 Co. vii. 87; Heb. vii. 27; foil, by inf., Lk. xiv. 18; xxiii. 17 RLbr.; Jude 8; av. fun entKcmu necessity is laid upon me, 1 Co. ix. 16 ; avayicrj (i. q. avuyKalov eWi) foil, by inf.: Mt. xviii. 7; Ro. xiii. 5; Heb. ix. 16, 23, (so Grk. writ.). 2. in a sense rare in the classics (Diod. 4,48), but very common in Hellenistic writ, (also in Joseph, b. j. 5,13, 7, etc.; see W. 80), calamity, distress, straits: Lk. xxi. 23; 1 Co. vii. 26; 1 Th. iii. 7 ; plur. ev dvaymK, 2 Co. vi. 4; xii. 10.*dva--yvwpCJo): 1 aor. pass. dveyvap'urOrp/; to recognize: Acts vii. 18 [Trtxt. WHtxt. fyvapl<j0t)] was recognized by his brethren, cf. Gen. xiv. 1. (Plat, politic, p. 258 a. dvayvcopifctv robs ovyyeveis.)*ivd-vvwo-is, -«<os, f), (dvayiv&o-Kte, q. v.); a. a knowing again, owning. b. reading, [fr. Plato on]: Acts xiii. 15; 2 Co. iii. 14; 1 Tim. iv. 13. (Neh. viii. 8 i.   q .   )  :   2   a o r .   d v r r y a y o v ,   i n f .   d v a y a y t i v ,   [ p t c p .   a v a y a - y & v ] ;   P a s s . ,   [ p r e s .   d v d y o f u u ] ;   1   a o r .   [ c f .   s u b   f i n . ]   d v i j - x d r j v ;   [ f r .   H o r n ,   d o w n ] ;   t o   l e a d   u p ,   t o   l e a d   o r   b r i n g   i n t o   a   h i g h e r   p l a c e ;   f o i l ,   b y   ¬ i s   w i t h   a c e .   o f   t h e   p l a c e :   L k .   i i .   2 2 ;   i v .   5   [ T T r W H o m . L b r .   t h e   c l . ] ;   x x i i .   6 6   [ T   T r W H   c m r i y a y o v ] ;   A c t s   i x .   8 9 ;   x v i .   3 4 ;   M t .   i v .   1   ( e l r   t .   t p r f f u o v ,   s c .   f r .   t h e   l o w   b a n k   o f   t h e   J o r d a n ) ,   r t v h   e x   p c i e p c o v   f r .   t h e   d e a d   i n   t h e   w o r l d   b e l o w ,   t o   t h e   u p p e r   w o r l d ,   H e b .   x i i i .   2 0 ;   R o .   x .   7   ;   n v a   t « j >   X o x g i   t o   b r i n g   o n e   f o r t h who has been detained in prison (a lower place), and set him before the people to be tried, Acts xii. 4; Ovo-'tav t& tlbwktp to offer sacrifice to the idol, because the victim is lifted up on the altar, Acts vii. 41. Navigators are rot' i£o\riv said dvayeo-6at (pass, [or mid.]) when they launch out, set sail, put to sea, (so dvayaryij in Justin. Mart. dial. c. Tr. c. 142 [and in the classics]) : Lk. viii. 22; Acts xiii. 13; xvi. 11; xviii. 21; xx. 3,18; xxi. [1], 2; xxvii. 2, 4, 12, 21; xxviii. 10 sq. (Polyb. 1, 21, 4; 23, 3, etc.)    [Comp. : eVai-dya.] •&va-SclKW|U: 1 aor. dvebetga, [impv. dvabtigov; fr. Soph, down]; to lift up anything on high and exhibit it for all to behold (Germ, aufzeigen); hence to show accurately, clearly, to disclose what was hidden, (2 Mace. ii. 8 cf. 6): Acts i. 24 (show which of these two thou hast chosen). Hence dvab. «i/d to proclaim any one as elected to an office, to announce as appointed (king, general, etc., messenger) : Lk. x. 1, (2 Mace. ix. 14, 23, 25; x. 11; xiv. 12, 26; 1 Esdr. i. 35; viii. 23; Polyb. 4, 48,avao373; 51, 3; Diod. i. 66; 18, 98; Plut. Caes. 37, etc. Hdian. 2, 12, 5 (3), al.). Cf. Win. De verb. comp. Pt iii. p. 12 sq.*dvd-Sti£is, f <w, fj, (ivabtiKWiu, q. v.), a pointing out, public showing forth; raw xpdwoi/, Sir. xliii. 6. a pro-claimina, announcing, inaugurating, of such as are elected to office i^lut. Mar. 8 xmdrav avddci&t [cf. Polyb. 15, 26, 7]): Lk. i. 80 (until the day when he was announced [A. V. of his shelving} to the people as the forerunner of the Messiah; this announcement he himself made at the command of God, Lk. iii. 2 sqq.).*dva-Sc'xo|uu: 1 aor. dvtbt^diajv; fr. Horn, down; to take up, take upon one's self, undertake, assume; hence to receive, entertain any one hospitably: Acts xxviii. 7; to entertain in one's mind: ras inayyiKias, i. e. to embrace them with faith, Heb. xi. 17.*dvarS(8<a)U: 2 aor. ptcp. dvaboit; 1. to give forth, send up, so of the earth producing plants, of plants yielding fruit, etc.; in prof. auth. 2. ace. to the second sense which dvd has in composition [see dvd, 3 b.], to deliver up, hand over: iiturtokriv, Acts xxiii. 33, (the same phrase in Polyb. [29, 10, 7] and Plut.).*dva-tdo), -£>: 1 aor. dvtfyo-a; a word found only in the N. T. and eccl. writ.; to live again, recover life; a. prop., in Kec. of Ro. xiv. 9; Rev. xx. 5. b. trop. one is said dva£ijv who has been veiepos in a trop. sense; «. to be restored to a correct life: of one who returns to a better moral state, Lk. xv. 24 [WH mrg. ffyaep] ([A: V. is alive again], ct. Mey. ad loc), 32 (TTr WH tCn<rt). /3. to revive, regain strength and vigor: Ro. vii. 9; sin is alive, indeed, and vigorous among men ever since the fall of Adam; yet it is destitute of power (vtupd eari) in innocent children ignorant of the law; but when they come to a knowledge of the law, sin recovers its power in them also. Others less aptly explain dvi(j)<re here began to live, sprang into life, (Germ, lebte auf).*dva-gi)T<u,-a>; [impf. dvc£r)rovu]; 1 aor. dvetfirrjo-a; 'to run through with the eyes any series or succession of men or things, and so to seek out, search through, make diligent search, Germ, daran hinsuchen, aufsuchen' (Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 14) : rivd, Lk. ii. 44, (and 45 L txt. T Tr WH) ; Acts xi. 25. (See exx. fr. Grk. writ. Tfr. Plato on] in Win. 1. c.) *Ava-t^vvu|u: to gird up; mid. to gird up one's self or for one's self: dva^axrapevoi ras 6<T(j>vas, 1 Pet. i. 13, i. e. prepared,—a metaphor derived from the practice of the Orientals, who in order to be unimpeded in their movements were accustomed, when about to start on a journey or engage in any work, to bind their long and flowing garments closely around their bodies and fasten them with a leathern girdle; cf. wepiCawv/u. (Sept. Judg. xviii. 16; Prov. xxix. 35 (xxxi. 17); Dio Chrys. or. 72, 2, ed. Emp. p. 729; Didym. ap. Athen. 4, (17) p. 139 d., al.)*dva-loynvpia, S>; (rb £am>pov i. e. a. the remains of a fire, embers; b. that by which the lire is kindled anew or lighted up, a pair of bellows); to kindle anew, rekindle, resuscitate, [yet on the force of dva- cf. Ellic.on 2 Tim. as below]; generally trop., to kindle up, inflame, one's mind, strength, zeal, (Xen. de re equest. 10, 16 of a horse roused to his utmost; Hell. 5, 4, 46; An-tonin. 7, 2 <pavra<riac; Plut. Pericl. 1, 4; Pomp. 41, 2; 49, 5; Plat. Charm, p. 156 d.; etc.) : t6 xapio-fia, 2 Tim. i. 6, i. e. rA mevfta, vs. 7. Intrans. to be enkindled, to gain strength: Gen. xlv. 27; 1 Mace. xiii. 7, and in prof, auth.; dvaCcoirvpTjo-dToi ij niarts, Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 27, 3 [see Gebh. and Harn. ad loc.].*ava-fldXXw: 2 aor. dviOakov, (Ps. xxvii. (xxviii.) 7; Sap. iv. 4; very rare in Grk. writ, and only in the poets, cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 195; [Veitch s. v. 6aKka; W. 87 (83); B. 59 (52)]); to shoot up, sprout again, grow green again, flourish again, (Horn. II. 1, 236; Ael. v. h. 5, 4); trop. of those whose condition and affairs are becoming more prosperous: Phil. iv. 10 dveBaKere ro inep epjov (ppoveiv ye have revived so as to take thought for me [the inf. being the Grk. accus., or accus. of specification, W. 317 (298) ; cf. Ellic. ad loc.]. Others, ace. to a trans, use of the verb found only in the Sept. (Ezek. xvii. 24; Sir. i. 18, etc.), render ye have revived (allowed to revive") your thought for me [the inf. being taken as an object-acc, W. 323 (303); B. 263 (226) ; cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]; against whom see Meyer ad loc.*dvd-6c pa, -ror, to, (i. q. rb dvarcdtiiUvov); 1. prop. a thing set up or laid by in order to be kept; spec, a votive offering, which after being consecrated to a god was hung upon the walls or columns of his temple, or put in some other conspicuous place: 2 Mace. ii. 13, (Plut. Pelop. c. 25); Lk. xxi. 5 in LT, for dvaOrifiaei RGTr WH; for the two forms are sometimes confounded in the codd.; Moeris, dvdOrjfia arnicas, di/aSe/na fWijvuc&s- Cf. fnl6i}fia, kmBtpa, etc., in Lob. ad Phryn. p. 249 [cf. 445; Paral. 417; see also Lipsius, Gram. Unters. p. 41]. 2. Bepa in the Sept. is generally the translation of the Heb. D^n, a thing devoted to God without hope of being redeemed, and, if an animal, to be slain [Lev. xxvii. 28, 29]; therefore a person or thing doomed to destruction, Josh. vi. 17; vii. 12, etc. [W. 32]; a thing abominable and detestable, an accursed thing, Deut. vii. 26. Hence in the N. T. dv                                                                                                                                                                                                                                       d d e i i a   d e n o t e s   a .   a   c u r s e :   d v a B e / i a n d v a - % a r t f "!> ,   A c t s   x x i i i .   1 4   [ W .   4 6 6   ( 4 3 4 ) ;   B .   1 8 4   ( 1 5 9 ) ] .   b .   a   m a n   a c c u r s e d ,   d e v o t e d   t o   t h e   d i r e s t   w o e s   ( i .   q .   « r « - K a r d p a T o s )   :   d p d d e p a   i a r a ,   G a l .   i .   8   s q . ;   1   C o .   x v i .   2 2 ;   d v d d t p a   \ t y e i v   n v d   t o   e x e c r a t e   o n e ,   1   C o .   x i i .   3  (R G, but L T Tr WH have restored dvade/ia 'h)<rovs, sc. ?oti») ; tieiui that diro rov Xpurrov, Ro. ix. 3 (pregnantly i. q. doomed and so separated from Christ). Cf. the full remarks on this word in Fritzscheon Rom. vol. ii. 247 qq.; Wieseler on Gal. p. 39 sqq.; [a trans, of the latter by Prof. Riddle in Schaff's Lange on Rom. p. 802 sqq.; ee also Trench § v.; Bp. Lightfoot on Gal. 1. c.; Elli-ott ibid.; Tholuck on Rom. 1. c.; BB.DD. s. w. Anathema, Excommunication].*aya-0t|iaT(i>; 1 aor. dueSe/tano-a; (dvdOcfia, q-v-); a purely bibl. and eccl. word, to declare anathema at accursed; in the Sept. i. q. D'"inri to devote to destruction, (Josh. vi. 21, etc.; 1 Mace, v.i); tavrov to declare one'savadecopeco38self liable to the severest divine penalties, Acts xxiii. 12, 21; avaBipaTt avaOtiMTifav (Deut. xiii. 15; xx. 17, [W. § 54, 3; B. 184 (159)]) iavr&v foil, by inf., to bind one's self under a curse to do something, Acts xxiii. 14. absol., to asseverate with direful imprecations: Mk. xiv. 71.    [Comp. : icaT-ai/ad«/xaTi'f<B.] *iva-Otufx'w, St; prop.' to survey a series of things from the lowest to the highest, Germ, daran hinsehen, lUngs durchsehen', [to look along up or through], (Win. De verb, comp. Pt. iii. p. 3); hence to look at attentively, to observe accurately, consider well: ri, Acts xvii. 23 ; Heb. xiii. 7. (Diod. Sic. 12, 15 i£ frrnrokrjs piv 6e<opovix.tvos.....ava0tay poip.evot Si fcol fifT* a/cpifieias e£fTa£oj«J'os; 14, 109; 2, 5; Lcian. vit. auct. 2; necyom. 15; Plut. Aem. P. 1 [uncertain]; Cat. min. 14; [adv. Colot. 21, 2].)*dvA-fcina, -Toy, to, (d«iTi%u), a gift consecrated and laid up in a temple, a votive offering (see avaOepa, 1) : Lk. xxi. 5 [RGTrWH]. (3 Mace. iii. 17; cf. Grimm on 2 Mace. iii. 2; K.oo-y.*iv dva6r)iuuri occurs also in 2 Mace, ix. 16; Plato, Alcib. ii. § 12, p. 148 e. avaOrniaai re «-KO<rpJ)icap.ev ra Upa avr&U, Hdt. 1, 183 to fiiv S^ itpbv owtcb «Koo-/i7)Tai • fon 8« mil ?8ia dvadrjp.aTa TroXXd.)*dvaCStm (T WH avcubla; see I, i), -as, fj, (avcuMjg, and this fr. 17 albas a sense of shame); fr. Horn, down; shamelessness, impudence: Lk. xi. 8 (of an importunate man, persisting in his entreaties; [A. V. importunity]').*dv-atptoas, -eo>s, r\, (fr. avatpea, 2, q. v.), a destroying, killing, murder,' taking off': Acts vjii. 1; xxii. 20 Rec. (Sept. only in Num. xi. 15; Judg. xv. 17; Jud. xv. 4; 2 Mace. v. 13.   Xen. Hell. 6, 3, 5; Hdian. 2, 13, 1.)*dv-ttif*«, -«; fut. dwXfi, 2 Th. ii. 8 (L T Tr WH txt. cf. Jud. vii. 13; Dion. Hal. 11,18; Diod. Sic. 2, 25; cf. W. 82 (78) ; [B. 53 (47); Veitch s. v. alpea, " perh. late eX<o "]), for the usual avaipfja-a; 2 aor. dvciXov; 2 aor. mid. avfikofirjv (but aveCKaro Acts vii. 21, avtlKav Acts x. 39, avciXare Acts ii. 23, in G L T Tr WH, after the Alex, form, cf. W. 73 (71) sq.; B. 39 (34) sq. [see alpia]); Pass., pres. dveupovftai; 1 aor. avyptOrjv; 1. to take up, to lift up (from the ground) ; mid. to take up for myself as mine, to own, (an exposed infant) : Acts vii. 21; (so avcupelcrdai, Arstph. nub. 531; Epict. diss. 1, 23, 7; [Plut. Anton. 36, 3; fortuna Rom. 8; fratern. am. 18, etc.]). 2. to take away, abolish; a. ordinances, established customs, (to abrogate) : Heb. x. 9: b. a man, to put out of the way, slay, kill, (often so in Sept. and Grk. writ. fr. [Hdt. 4, 66] Thuc. down) : Mt. ii. 16; Lk. xxii. 2; xxiii. 32; Acts ii. 23; v. 33, 36; vii. 28; ix. 23 sq. 29; x. 39; xii. 2; xiii. 28; xxii. 20; xxiii. 15, 21, 27; xxv. 3; xxvi. 10; 2 Th. ii. 8 L T Tr WH txt.; «Wo»>, to kill one's self, Acts xvi. 27.*dv-aCnos, -ov, (alria) guiltless, innocent: Mt. xii. 5, 7. Often in Grk. writ.; Deut. xxi. 8 sq. i. q. >T>\; Sus. 62.)*dva-Kad-CJw: 1 aor. dvatadura; to raise one's self and sit upright; to sit up, sit erect: Lk. vii. 15 [Lchm. mrg. WH mrg. inaBurtv]; Acts ix. 40. (Xen. cyn. 5, 7, 19; Plut. Alex. c. 14; and often in medical writ.; with iavrov, Plut. Philop. c. 20; mid. in same sense, Plat. Phaedo c. 3 p. 60 b.)*t; (iuuvos) ; to renew, renovate, (cf. Germ. auffrischen) : nva els neravoua/ so to renew that he shall repent, Heb. vi. 6. (Isocr. Areop. 3; Philo, leg. ad Gaium § 11; Joseph, antt. 9, 8, 2; Plut. Marcell. c. 6; Lcian. Philop. c. 12; Sept. Ps.cii. (ciii.) 5; ciii. (civ.) 80, etc.; eccl. writ.)   Cf. Win. De verb. comp. Pt. iii. p. 10.*dva-Kcuviw, S>: [pres. pass. dvaKaivovpai]; a word peculiar to the apostle Paul; prop, to cause to grow up (dra) new, to make new; pass., new strength and vigor is given to me, 2 Co. iv. 16; to be changed into a new kind of life, opposed to the former corrupt state, Col. iii. 10. Cf. Win. De verb. comp. Pt. iii. p. 10 [or Mey. on Col. 1. c.; Test. xii. Patr., test. Levi 16, 17 avaxtuvo-iroiia>.   Cf. Kb'stlin in Herzog ed. 2, i. 477 sq.]*dvo-KaCvwo-ts, -eas, ij, a renewal, renovation, complete change for the better, (cf. dvaKcuvoo): tov w>6s, object, gen., Ro. xii. 2; nvevpaTos iyiov, effected by the Holy Spirit, Tit. iii. 5. (Etym. Magn., Suid.; [Herm. vis. 8, 8, 9; other eccl. writ.]; the simple naivatris is found only in Joseph, antt. 18, 6, 10.)   [Cf. Trench § xviii.]*dvo-KoXvuTu: [Pass., pre s .   p t c p .   d v a K a X x m r o i u v o s ;   p f .   p t c p .   d v a n c K a k v p . p A v o s ~ \ ;                         t o   u n v e i l ,   t o   u n c o v e r   ( b y -  d r a w i n g   b a c k   t h e   v e i l ) ,   ( i .   q .   n S l ,   J o b   x i i .   2 2 ;   P s .   x v i i .   ( x v i i i . )   1 6 ) :   K a K v f i f i a   "    %  "   p )   d v a K a k v m 6 p . ( v o v   t h e   v e i l . . .   n o t   b e i n g   l i f t e d   ( l i t .   u n v e i l e a " )   [ s o   W H   punctuate, see W. 534 (497); but LTAlf. etc. take the ptcp. as a neut. ace. absol. referring to the clause that follows with on: it not being revealed that, etc.; (for avaieak. in this sense see Polyb. 4, 85, 6 ; Tob. xii. 7,11) ; see Meyer ad loc], is used allegor. of a hindrance to the understanding, 2 Co. iii. 14, (dvaKakinrav avyKaXvfifia, Deut. xxii. 30 Alex.); avaKfKakvfifievtp vpoauma with unveiled face, 2 Co. iii. 18, is also used allegor. of a mind not blinded, but disposed to perceive the glorious majesty of Christ. (The word is used by Eur., Xen., [Aristot. de sens. 5, vol. i. p. 444", 25], Polyb., Plut.)*&va-Kd|Mrro>: fut. avaKapAfrw, 1 aor. dveicafi\\ra; to bend back, turn back. In the N. T. (as often in prof. auth.; in Sept. i. q. 3H#) intrans. to return: Mt. ii. 12; Lk. x. 6 (where the meaning is,' your salutation shall return to you, as if not spoken'); Acts xviii. 21; Heb. xi. 15.*dydrKcipai; [impf. 3 pers. sing. di/««To]; depon. mid. to be laid up, laid: Mk. v. 40 R L br. [cf. Eng. to lay out]. In later Grk. to lie at table (on the lectus tricliniaris [cf. B.D. s. v. Meals]; the earlier Greeks used KeiaBai, koto-Ktiadai, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 216 sq.; Fritzsche [or Wetst.] on Mt. ix. 10) : Mt. ix. 10; xxii. 10 sq.; xxvi. 7, 20; Mk. [vi. 26 T Tr WH]; xiv. 18; xvi. 14; Lk. vii. 37 (LTTrWH KaraKfirai) ; xxii. 27; Jn. xii. 2 (Rec. o-vvavaKfi/j..) ; xiii. 23, 28. Generally, to eat together, to dine: Jn. vi. 11.    [Cf. avairiirra, fin.     Comp. :  crvp-avd-K61JLUU.] *dvarK«|>a\iu<ci>, -&: [pres. pass. dnan.etpaKai.ovp.ai; 1 aor. mid. inf. ava.Kf<j>a\ai.i>o-a<r6ai]; (fr. K(cbakcu6<o, q. v., and this fr. Kc(/>aXa(ov, q. v.); to sum up (again), to repeat summarily and so to condense into a summary (as, the substance of a speech; Quintil. 6.1 'rerum repetitio et congregatio, quae graece avaKe<j>a\ma<ns dicitur', [epyovdvaicKlvo)39avakwTKppKrjc . . . dvaKt(pa\aia><ra<r6ai irpbs dvap.vr)(nv, Aristot frag. 123, vol. v. p. 1499', 83]); so in Ro. xiii. 9. In Eph. i. 10 God is said dvaicc(pa\cua>(ra<r d a i   r a    %K a . v r a   i v   r a   X p i o r i j ) ,   t o   b r i n g   t o g e t h e r   a g a i n   f o r   h i m s e l f   ( n o t e   t h e   m i d . )   a l l   t h i n g s   a n d   b e i n g s   ( h i t h e r t o   d i s u n i t e d   b y   s i n )   i n t o   o n e   c o m b i n e d   s t a t e   o f   f e l l o w s h i p   i n   C h r i s t ,   t h e   u n i  v e r s a l   b o n d ,   [ c f .   M e y .   o r   E l l i c .   o n   E p h .   1 .   c ] ;   ( P r o t e v .   J a c .   1 3   els (fie dveite<pdKaia8ri fj l<rropia 'Add/i, where cf. Thilo).*&vo-k\(v<o: fut. dvaicKtva; 1 aor. dve'icKiva; Pass., 1 aor. dveieKiSTjv; fut. dvajcXid^tro/uu; [fr. Horn, down]; to lean against, lean upon; a. to lay down: nvd, Lk. ii. 7 (iv (rfi) tpdrurj). b. to make or bid to recline: Mk. vi. 39 (iirera^ev avrois, sc. the disciples, dvaiMvai [-KkiBrjvai L WH txt.] rrdvras i. e. the people); Lk. ix 15 (T Tr WH KareiiXivav) ; xiii 37. Pass, to lie back, recline, lie down : Mt. xiv. 19 ; of those reclining at table and at feasts, Lk. vii. 36 (RG); xiii. 29; Mt. viii. 11, — in the last two pass, used fig. of participation in future blessedness in* the Messiah's kingdom.*dva-K<5irru : 1 aor. dvexo^a; to beat back, check, (as the course of a ship, Theophr. char. 24 (25), 1 [var.]). rtva foil, by an inf. [A. V. hinder'}, Gal. v. 7 Rec., where the preceding irpe^ere shows that Paul was thinking of an obstructed road; cf. eyuon-ro).*dva-Kp&£<o: 1 aor. [" rare and late," Veitch s. v. Kpdfa; B. 61 (53)] dv(icpa£a; 2 aor. dveKpayov (Lk. xxiii. 18 T Tr txt. WH^^imsis^a cry from the depth of the throat, to cry out ifflk, i. 28pfi. 49; Lk. iv. 33; viii. 28; xxiii. 18. Exx. f rTprof. auth. in Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 6 sq.*ova-Kpfvu; 1 aor. avinpiva; Pass., [pres. dvaicpipopai]', 1 aor. dveKpidtfv; (freq. in Grk. writ., esp. Attic) ; prop. by looking through a series (ava) of objects or particulars to distinguish (icpiva) or search after. Hence a. to investigate, examine, inquire into, scrutinize, sift, question: Acts xvii. 11 (toj ypaxpai); 1 Co. x. 25, 27 (not anxiously questioning, sc. whether the meat set before you be the residue from heathen sacrifices). Spec, in a forensic sense (often also in Grk. writ.) of a judge, to hold an investigation; to interrogate, examine, the accused or the witnesses; absol.: Lk. xxiii. 14; Acts xxiv. 8. Tivd, Actsxii. 19; xxviii. 18; pass., Acts iv. 9. Paul has in mind this judicial use (as his preceding term diroXoyia shows) when in 1 Co. ix. 3 he speaks of rots ip.i dvaKpivovdi, investigating me, whether I am a true apostle. b. univ. to judge of, estimate, determine (the excellence or defects of any person or thing) : W, 1 Co. ii. 15; rivd, 1 Co. iv. 3 sq.; pass., 1 Co. ii. [14], 15 ; xiv. 24. [Cf. Lghtft. Fresh Revision, etc. iv. § 3 (p. 67 sq. Am. ed.).]*dva-Kpicris, -cor, ft, an examination; as a law-term among the Greeks, tne preliminary investigation held for the purpose of gathering evidence for the information of the judges (Meier and Schomann, Att. Process, pp. 27, [622; cf. Diet, of Antiq. s. v.]); this seems to be the sense of the word in Acts xxv. 26.*ova-KvXCu :       1. to roll up.        2. to roll back: aixucc-KvkiiTTM 6 X Wos, Mk. xvi. 4 T Tr WH. (Alexis in Athen. vi. p. 237 c.; Lcian. de luctu 8; Dion. Hal., Plut., al.)* <SvanriirT«: 1 aor. dvtitvtya; to raise or lift one's self up; a. one's body: Lk. xiii. 11; Jn. viii. 7,10; (Xen. de re equ. 7,10, al.; Sept. Job x. 15). b. one's soul; to be elated, exalted: Lk. xxi. 28; (Xen. oec. 11, 5; Joseph, b. j. 6, 8, 5, al.).*wa-\o|ipivu; 2 aor. dve\a&oV, 1 aor. pass. dve\ri<p&r)t> (dvf\^6r,v LTTrWH; cf. W. p. 48 [B. 62 (54); Veitch (s. v. "hafipava); see Xa/t/3ai»a, and s. v. M, /*]); [fr. Hdt. down]; 1. to take up, raise: els rdv ovpav6u, Mk. xvi. 19; Acts i. 11; x. 16, (Sept. 2 K. ii. 11) ; without case, Acts i. 2, 22; 1 Tim. iii. 16 [cf. W. 413 (385)], (Sir. xlviii. 9). 2. to take up (a thing in order to carry or use it) : Acts vii. 43; Eph. vi. 13, 16. to take to one's self: nvd, in order to conduct him, Acts xxiii. 31; or as a companion, 2 Tim. iv. 11; or in Acts xx. IS sq. to take up sc. into the ship.*dvA-Xrpl/is (dvakw^K L T Tr WH; see M, /»), -eas, {,, (dvdKafijidva), [fr. Hippocr. down], a taking up: Lk. ix, 51 (sc. els tov oipav6v of the ascension of Jesus into heaven; [cf. Test. xii. Patr. test. Levi § 18; Suicer, Thesaur. Eccles. s. v.; and Meyer on Lk. 1. c.]).*dp-aXCo-Ku: fr. the pres. dva\6a> [8 pers. sing. draXoi, 2 Th. ii. 8 WHmrg.] come the fut. avaXaxrai; 1 aor. dvrjXuxra and dvaKaxra [see Veitch]; 1 aor. pass. dvrjXa-6tjv ; (the simple verb is found only in the pass. Skia-no/tat to be taken; but a in dXio-xo/iat is short, in dvdklo-Ka long; cf. Bltm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 113; [Veitch s. vv.; "the diff. quantity, the act. form, the trans, sense of the pf., and above all the difference of sense, indicate a diff. origin for the two verbs." L. and S.]); [fr. Pind. down] ; 1. to expend ; to consume, e. g. xpr/furra (to spend money; very often in Xen.). 2. to consume, use up, destroy: Lk. ix. 54; Gal. v. 15; 2 Th. ii. 8 R G WH mrg. (Sept. Jer. xxvii. (1.) 7; Prov. xxiii. 28; Gen. xli. 30, etc.)    [COMP.: tear-, irpoo-avdki<TKa.~] *dvaXo-y£a, -as, q, (dvd\oyos conformable, proportional), proportion: Kara ttjv avakoyiav -rrfs niorecos, i. q- Kara ri pov mare<as received from God, Ro. xii. 6, cf. 3. (Plat., Dem., Aristot., Theophr., al.)*&va-XoyC£o|Ku: 1 aor. dve\oyi<rdfitjv; dep. mid. to think over,ponder, consider: commonly with ace. of the thing, but in Heb. xii. 3 with ace. of the pers. ' to consider by weighing, comparing,' etc. (3 Mace. vii. 7. Often in Grk. writ. fr. Plat, and Xen. down.) *avaXos, -ov, (&\s salt), saltless, unsalted, (aproi tSvaXoi, Aristot. probl. 21, 5, 1 ; apros avakos, Plut. symp. v. quaest. 10 § 1) : SKas avahov salt destitute of pungency, Mk. ix. 50.*[dvaX6a>, see dxaXiWa).]dvd-Xueris, -eat, ij, (avoKva, q. v.); 1. an unloosing (as of things woven), a dissolving (into separate parts). 2. departure, (a metaphor drawn from loosing from moorings preparatory to setting sail, cf. Horn. Od. 15, 548; [or, ace. to others, fr. breaking up an encampment; cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. i. 23]), Germ. Aufbruch: 2 Tim. v. 6 (departure from life; Philo in Flacc. § 21 [p. 544avaXvco40avairavaed. Mang.] fj Ik toC fliov rektwaia ava\v(ris; [Clem. Rom.1 Cor. 44,5 tyKapnov k. rtkeiav evxov rty dvdAvow; Euseb. h. e. 8, 82, 1 fuxprvpla r6v fliov dvaAvcrai, cf. 8, 34}.    Cf. draXtxrts ditb avvova-iat, Joseph, antt. 19, 4, 1).*dva-Xvw: fut. dvd\vo-a>; 1 aor. dvi\vo-a; 1. to unloose, undo again, (as, woven threads). 2. to depart, Germ, aufbrechen, break up (see dvakvo-ts, 2), bo very often in Grk. writ.; to depart from life: Phil. i. 28, (Lcian. Philops. c. 14 okt<ok<u8«(wti/s 4>k (WXwv; add Ael. v. h. 4, 28; [dvt\vo-fv 6 iir'uriamos- TtKartov iv Kvpia, Acta et mart. Matth. § 31.]). to return, ix rav ydpwv, Lk. xii. 36 [B. 145 (127); for exx.] cf. Kuinoel [and Wetstein] ad loc.; Grimm on 2 Mace. viii. 25.*dvo(uipTtiTo$, -oi>, (fr. dv priv. and the form (fyiapTt'w), sinless, both one who has not sinned, and one who cannot sin.   In the former sense in Jn. viii. 7; Deut. xxix. 19;2  Mace. viii. 4; xii. 42;  [Test. xii. Patr. test. Benj. § 3],   On the use of this word fr. Hdt. down, cf. Ull-mann, Sundlosigkeit Jesu, p. 91 sq. [(abridged in) Eng. trans, p. 99; Cremer s. v.].*<iva-|Kvw; [fr. Horn, down]; rivd, to wait for one (Germ, erharren, or rather heranharren [i. e. to await one whose coming is known or foreseen]), with the added notion of patience and trust: 1 Th. i. 10 [cf. El-licott ad loc.]. Good Greek; cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 15 sq.*[ova-lMpos, i. e. dva fUpos, see dva, 1.][dvd-|«<rov, i. e. dva fie&.ov, see dva, 1.]d*tt-(ju.(j.W|o-Kw; fut. avafivrjoui (fr. the form pvaai) ; Pass., [pres. dvafUjivri<TKo]iai\; 1 aor. dve)ivrjo-0r)v; [fr. Horn, down]; to call to remembrance, to remind: nvd « one of a thing [W. § 32, 4 a.], 1 Co. iv. 17; to admonish, nvd . foil, by inf., 2 Tim. i. 6. Pass, to recall to one's own mind, to remember; absol.: Mk. xi. 21. with gen. of the thing, Mk. xiv. 72 Rec. «', Mk. xiv. 72 L T Tr WH; context-ually, to {remember and) weigh well, consider: 2 Co. vii. 15; Heb. x. 32; cf. W. § 30, 10c; [B. § 132, 14]; Matth. ii. p. 820 sq. [Comp. : 4iv-avap.ip.vria-K(o. Syn. see ava/xprjeni fin.] *<iyd|iVT)<ris, -e<os, q, (avafxipvrj<TKa>), a remembering, recollection : eh t. iprjv avafivqcnv to call me (affectionately) to remembrance, Lk. xxii. 19 [WH reject the pass.]; 1 Co. xi. 24 sq. iv avrms (sc. Ovaicus) dvdixvrjais &fiaprtS>v in offering sacrifices there is a remembrance of sins, i. e. the memory of sins committed is revived by the sacrifices, Heb. x. 3.    In Grk. writ. fr. Plat, down.*[Stn. &.vdii.vri<ris, fiir<!jUK7)<m: The distinction between these words as stated by Ammonius et al.—viz. that ivd^v. denotes an unassisted recalling, inr6nv. a remembrance prompted by another, — seems to be not wholly without warrant; note the force of imi (cf. our' SMj-gest'). But even in class. Grk. the words are easily interchangeable. Schmidt ch. 14; Trench § cvii. 6, cf. p. 61 note; Ellie. or Holtzm. on 2 Tim. i. 5.]dvorvciu, -&: to renew, (often in Grk. writ.); Pass. [W. § 89, 3 N. 8; for the mid. has an act. or reciprocal force, cf. 1 Mace. xii. 1 and Grimm ad loc.] dvaveovadcu rep Ttvev\xan to be renewed in mind, i. e. to be spiritually transformed, to take on a new mind [see vovs> 1 b. fin.; .], Eph. iv. 28. Cf. Tittmann i. p. 60; [Trench §§ lx. xviii.], and avaxawoa above.*dva-vf|<|>a): [' in good auth. apparently confined to the pres.'; 1 aor. averred]; to return to soberness («c pe'<V> which is added by Grk. writ.); metaph.: 2 Tun. ii. 26 eic i-ijs toC diafioKov irayibos [W. § 66, 2 d.] to be set free from the snare of the devil and to return to a sound mind ['one's sober senses']. (Philo, legg. alleg. ii. § 16 dva-vr)(f>ei, tovt' fare fitravofi; add Joseph, antt. 6, 11, 10; Ceb. tab. 9; Antonin. 6, 31; Charit. 5, 1.) [See dypv •nvia, fin.]*"AvavCas [WH. 'Avav., see their Intr. § 408], -a [but on the gen. cf. B. 20 (18)], 6, Ananias (Tr^}T\, fr. jjn to be gracious, and FT Jehovah, [cf. Mey. on Acts v. 1]): 1. a certain Christian [at Jerusalem], the husband of Sapphira: Acts v. 1-6. 2. a Christian of Damascus: Acts ix. 10-18; xxii. 12 sqq. 3. a son of Nedebaeus, and high priest of the Jews c. A. t>. 47-59. In the year 66 he was slain by the Sicarii: Acts xxiii. 2 sq.; xxiv. I sq.; Joseph, antt. 20, 5, 2; 6, 2; 9, 2-4; b. j. 2,17,6: 9.    [Cf. B. D. s. v.]*eb^ovTC-ppuros [WH dvavriptjTOf, see P, p], -ov, (a priv., dvri, and pi/Tos fr. PEG to say), not contradicted and not to be contradicted; undeniable, [not to be gainsaid]; in the latter sense, Acts xix. 86. (Occasionally in Grk. writ, fr. Polyb. down.)*dvavTipfrf|To>s [WH dvavnpt)Ta>s, see their App. p. 163, and P, p], adv., without contradiction: Acts x. 29 (I came without gainsaying).   Polyb. 23, 8,11, [al.].*dv-6gio$, -ov, (a priv. and 3£ws), [fr. Soph, down], unworthy Qrw6s) : unfit for a thing, 1 Co. vi. 2.*dv-agCos! adv., [fr. Soph, down], in an unworthy manner : 1 Co. xi. 27, and 29 Rec.    [Cf. W. 468 (481).] •dvtWavo-is, -ea>s, ij, (dwnrauo)), [fr. Mimnerm., Pind. down] ; 1. intermission, cessation, of any motion, business, labor: dvdiravmv ovk exovai Xeyovrts [Rec. Aeyovra] equiv. to ovk dvairavovrai Xe'yovres they incessantly say, Rev. iv. 8. 2. rest, recreation: Mt. xii. 43; Lk. xi. 24; Rev. xiv. 11, (and often in Grk. writ.); blessed tranquillity of soul, Mt. xi. 29, (Sir. vi. [27] 28; Ii. 27; Sap. iv. 7). [The word denotes a temporary rest, a respite, e. g. of soldiers; cf. Schmidt ch. 25; Bp. Lghtft. on Philem. 7; Trench § xii.] *dva-iraio): fut. avanavcra; 1 aor. dviwawra; pf. pass. dvaneiravfuu ; Mid., [pres. dvanavofuu^; fut. avanavcrofuu (Rev. vi. 11 [Lchm. ed. min., Tdf. edd. 2, 7, WH; but GLTTrwith R -o-uvTat]), and in the colloquial speech of inferior Grk. dvawario-opai (Rev. xiv. 13 LTTrWH, cf. Bttm. (57) esp. Eng. trans, p. 64 sq.; Kuhner i. 886; [Tdf. Proleg. p. 123; WH. App. p. 170]; see also in iiravairava) ; 1 aor. avfnauadfajv; (a common verb fr. Horn, down) : to cause or permit one to cease from any movement or labor in order to recover and collect his strength (note the prefix dva and distinguish fr. xara-nava>, [see avemavms, fin.]), to give rest, refresh; mid. to give one's self rest, take rest. So in mid. absol. of rest after travelling, Mk. vi. 31; and for taking sleep, Mt. xxvi. 45; Mk. xiv. 41; of the sweet repose one enjoys afteravcnreiOa41avaaraaistoil, Lk. xii. 19; to keep quiet, of calm and patient expectation, Rev. vi. 11; of the blessed rest of the dead, Rev. xiv. 18 (« r&v Kcmav exempt from toils [cf. B. 158 (138)]; Plat. Critias in.ckfiaxpas 68oC). By a Hebraism (yy_ £1?J, Isa. xi. 2) t6 Trvfvfia i<f>' vitas avcmavtrcu rests upon you, to actuate you, 1 Pet. iv. 14. Act. to refresh, the soul of any one: nva, Mt. xi. 28; rd ttixv/m nms, 1 Co. xvi. 18; to (niKayxya nv6s, Philem. 20. In pass., Philem. 7; 2 Co. vii. 13 (diro irdvrav ifiav from your sight, attentions, intercourse). [Comp. : or-, aw (-/««).]*AvorvtlSo'; to stir up by persuasion (cf. Germ, aufreizen), to solicit, incite: rivd n rroirja-ai, Acts xviii. 13. So also in Hdt., Thuc, Plat., Xen., al.*dvdiriipot, a false spelling (arising from itacism, [cf. Phryn. in Bekker, Anecd. i. p. 9, 22: Sia rov r/ tt)v Tpirriv, oi 8t& rijs ft Supddyyov as oi dfiaffeis]) in some Mss. in Lk. xiv. 18, 21 (and adopted by L Tr WH; [see WH. App. p. 151]) for avdwrjpot, q. v.ava-nV|Mr«: 1 aor. dveTre^a; [fr. Pind. and Aeschyl. down]; 1. to send up; i. e. a. to a higher place; b. to a person higher in office, authority, power, (Plut. Marius c. 17; [Philo de creat. princip. § 8; Joseph, b. j. 2, 20, 5]): nva ttp&s nva, Lk. xxiii. 7, 15 ; Acts xxv. 21 LTTr WH. 2. to send back : nvd, Philem. 12 (11); nva nvi, Lk. xxiii. II.*dva-inr)S<i» : [1 aor ptcp. dvam)l)rjo-as] i (Horn. II. 11, 379; often in Plat., Xen., Dem.); to leap up, spring up, start up: dvatn)8r)cras, Mk. x. 50 L T Tr WH; cf. Fritzsche ad loc. (1 S. xx. 34; Prov. xviii. 4 [Aid. etc.]; Tob. ii. 4; vi. 3; vii. 6.) ) -ox', (prop. m/pSs fr. the lowest part to the highest—dvd; hence Suid. 6 ko0 b/rtpfioKijv ircm/pafievos, [cf. Lob. Path. Elementa i. 195]), disabled in the limbs, maimed, crippled; injured in, or bereft of, some member of the body: Lk. xiv. 13, 21 dvairrjpovs, pfoAour, rv(p\ovs-In both these pass. L Tr WH have adopted with certain Mss. the spelling dvaveipovs — manifestly false, as arising from itacism. (Plat. Crito p. 53 a. xaXol Ka\ Tv<p\ol Kal <?XAot dvdmipoi; Aristot. h. a. 7, 6 [vol. i. p. 585*>, 29 yivovrai i£ dvawrjpav dvdmjpot; Lys. ap. Suid. piva Kal &ra dvdmjpos; 2 Mace. viii. 24 rdis fteXeaiv dvantipovs-J*dytMrhrrw: 2 aor. dveweirov, 3 pers. plur. dviirfoov Mk. vi. 40 (TTrWH dvejreo-av); Jn. vi. 10 (LTTrWH dveirtvav), inf. dvairecrelv, impv. dvdiretre Lk. xiv. 10 (Rec. dvdirea-ov fr. 1 aor. dvewefra, [(Grsb. dvdrreo-ai i. e. 1 aor. mid. impv.)]); Lk. xvii. 7 [R G dvanto-ai, cf. WH. App. p. 164; Tdf. Proleg. p. 123; see iriirro], ptcp. avaireo-av; cf. W. § 13, 1 p. 73 (71); [B. 39 (34) sq, 67 (59); fr. Eur. down]; to lie back, lie down: absol., Mk. vi. 40; Jn. vi. 10, (sc. on the ground); eirl rr\v yrjv, Mt. xv. 35; iirl rijs yrjs, Mk. viii. 6. In later Grk. (cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 216 ; [W. 28 (22)]) for dva«kivo)j,ai to recline at table: Lk. xi. 37; xiv. 10; xvii. 7 ; xxii. 14; Jn. xiii. 12; xxi. 20 [al. refer this to the following signif.]. to lean back, Jn. xiii. 25 L Tr WH. [It denotes an act rather than a state, and in the last pass, differs from dvaieei/uu, vs. 28, by indicating a change of position.]*iva-ir\i\p6a, -co; fut. dvair\jipa<ra; i aor. dvenkr]pai(ra;[pres. pass. dvanXrjpovpMi]; (and to, up to, e. g. to fill a vessel up to the brim; up to the appointed measure or standard, Germ, an fallen); [fr. Eurip. down]; 1. to fill up, make full, e. g. a ditch (Strabo 5, 6 p. 228) ; hence trop. dftaprlas, 1 Th. ii. 16 (to add what is still wanting to complete the number of their sins; on the meaning, cf. Gen. xv. 16; Dan. viii. 23; ix. 24; Mt. xxiii. 82; 2 Mace. vi. 14). dvairktjpovrai 7 irpotprfreia the prophecy is fully satisfied, the event completely corresponds to it, Mt. xiii. 14. r&v v6/iov to fulfil i. e. observe the law perfectly, Gal. vi. 2, (Barn. ep. 21 dvawX. wao-av (vro\rjv); t6v tAttov tu>6s to fill the place of any one, 1 Co. xiv. 16 (after the rabbin. Dfpo vhn to hold the position of any one, [yet cf. Mey. ad loc.]). 2. to supply: rd vartprnia, Phil. ii. 80, (Col. i. 24); 1 Co. xvi. 17 (they by their presence supplied your place in your absence) ; cf. Plat. symp. p. 188 e. aKK' et n e$f\iwov, trhv epyov (sc. tariv) dvawXripacrai. Cf. Win. De verb, comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 11 sq.; [Ellic. on Phil. 1. c, or Mey. on Gal. 1. c.   Comp. : dm-, irpoa-avairkrip6a>~\.*dvairoX<SYTros, -ov, without defence or excuse, Ro. i. 20; also that cannot be defended, inexcusable, Ro. ii. 1. (Polyb., Dion. Hal. antt. 7, 46; Plut. Brut. 46, al.) •cU-a-n-rvo-mo: 1 aor. dvcwrvga; (dvd—cf. the Germ, auf i. q. auseinander, see dvaXva — and 7rrvava> to fold up, roll together); to unroll, [i. e. open for reading]: ro /3(/3Xjop (as in Hdt. 1, 48 and 125), Lk. iv. 17   [ R G T ] ,   ( 2   K .   x i x .   1 4 ) .   T h e   b o o k s   o f   t h e   H e b r e w s   w e r e   r o l l s   ( n i ' ^ J D )   f a s t e n e d   t o   [ o n e   o r ]   t w o   s m o o t h   r o d s   a n d   f u r  n i s h e d   w i t h   h a n d l e s ,   s o   t h a t   t h e y   c o u l d   b e   r o l l e d   u p   a n d   u n r o l l e d ;   [ c f .   B .   D .   s .   v .   W r i t i n g ] . *  W M i i r "!;   1   a o r .   d v i j \ j / a ;   1   a o r .   p a s s .   d v r / Q d t j v ;   t o   l i g h t   u p ,   k i n d l e :   L k .   x i i .   4 9 ;   A c t s   x x v i i i .   2   [ R   G ] ;   J a s .   i i i .   5 .   [ F r o m   H d t .   d o w n . ]   *  d v - a p ( 0 | i i ) T o $ ,   - o v ,   ( a   p r i v .   a n d   d p i d / i e a ) ,   i n n u m e r a b l e :   H e b .   x i .   1 2 .       [ F r o m   P i n d .   d o w n . " ] *  a v o H r t i a ;   1   a o r .   d v f o - e u r a ;   t o   s h a k e   u p ;   t r o p .   t o   s t i r   u p ,   e x c i t e ,   r o u se: t6v 6^Xok, Mk. xv. 11; rbv ~Ka6v, Lk. xxiii. 5. (So in Diod. 13, 91; 14, 10; Dion. Hal. antt. 8, 81.)*dva-o-KfudJo); (<rKevd£a>, fr. (tkcvos a vessel, utensil); 1. to pack up baggage (Lat. vasa colligere) in order to carry it away to another place: Xen. an. 5, 10, (6, 2) 8. Mid. to move one's furniture (when setting out for some other place, Xen. Cyr. 8, 5, 4 otov de dvao-Kevdfavrai, o-uvrldr)tn piv tKairros ro a-Kevrj); hence 2. of an enemy dismantling, plundering, a place (Thuc. 4, 116); to overthrow, ravage, destroy, towns, lands, etc.; trop. y\rvxds, to turn away violently from a right state, to unsettle, subvert: Acts xv. 24.*dva-o-mia, S : dvawiraaa; 1 aor. pass. dveawdo-6ijv; to draw up: Lk. xiv. 5; Acts xi. 10.   [From Horn, down.] *difSroriurtSf tas, r\, (dvianjfii), [fr. Aeschyl. down]; 1. a raising up, rising, (e. g. fr. a seat) : Lk. ii. 34 (opp. to nraais; the meaning is ' It lies [or ' is set' A. V.J like a stone, which some will lay hold of in order to climb; but others will strike against it and fall'). 2. arising from the dead (eccl. Lat. resurrection, [AeschylavewrraTow42avarEum. 648]; a. that o f C h r i s t: Acts i. 22; ii. 81; iv. 33; Ro. vi. 5; Phil. iii. 10; 1 Pet. iii. 21; with the addition of vtKpav, Ro. i. 4 (a generic phrase: the resurrection-of-the-dead, although it has come to pass as yet only in the case of Christ alone; cf. Acts xvii. 32; W. § 30, 2 o. fin.); « vfKpwv, 1 Pet. i. 8. b. that of all men at the end of the present age. This is called simply avaara<ns or Jj dwurraoxr, Mt. xxii. 23, [28], 30; Mk. xii. 18, 28; Lk. xx. 27, 83, 36 ; Jn. xi. 24; Acts xvii. 18; xxiii. 8; 2 Tim. ii. 18; by meton. i. q. the author of resurrection, Jn. xi. 25; with the addition of fi« vcup&v, Lk. xx. 35; Acts iv. 2; or simply of t&v veicp&v [on the distinction which some (e. g. VanHengel on Ro. i. 4; "Van Hengel and Bp. Lghtf t. on Phil. iii. 11; Cremer s. v.) would make between these phrases, see W. 123 (117); B. 89 (78)], Mt. xxii. 81; Acts xvii. 82; xxiii. 6; xxiv. 15 [Bee.], 21; xxvi. 28; 1 Co. xv. 12 sq. 21,42; Heb. vi. 2. avaar. £o>fjs resurrection to life (dv. eis fuqv, 2 Mace. vii. 14 [cf. Dan. xii. 2]), and av. rijs npio-eas resurrection to judgment, Jn. v. 29, (on the genitives cf. W. 188 (177)); the former is fj dvd<TT. tS>v SikchW, Lk. xiv. 14; Kpeimop dvdorains, Heb. xi. 35 (so called in comparison with a continuance of life on earth, which is spoken of as an avaaraais by a kind of license; [cf. W. 460 (429)]). 17 dvaar. % jrpomj in Rev. xx. 5 sq. will be that of true Christians, and at the end of a thousand years will be followed by a second resurrection, that of all the rest of mankind, Rev. xx. 12 sqq. On the question whether and in what sense Paul also believed in two resurrections, separated from each other by a definite space of time, cf. Grimm in the Zeitschr. fur wissenschaftl. Theol., 1873, p. 388 sq. c. the resurrection of certain in ancient Jewish story who were restored to life before burial: Heb. xi. 35.*dvturraTiu, -w; 1 aor. dveordraxra", a verb found nowhere in prof, auth., but [in Dan. vii. 28 Sept.; Deut. xxix. 27 Graec. Venet.] several times in the O. T. fragments of Aquila [e. g. Ps. x. 1] and Symmachus [e. g. Ps. lviii. 11; Is. xxii. 3], and in Eustathius, (fr. avcurraros, driven from one's abode, outcast, or roused up from one's situation; accordingly equiv. to avaararov iroua), to stir up, excite, unsettle; foil, by an ace. a. to excite tumults and seditions in the State: Acts xvii. 6; xxi. 38. b. to upset, unsettle, minds by disseminating religious error: Gal. v. 12.*dra*rrai)p6a>, -£; to raise up upon a cross, crucify, (ava as in drao-KoXomfa)) : Heb. vi. 6, (very often in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down). Cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 9 sq.; [Winer admits that in Heb. 1. c. the meaning to crucify again, or afresh, may also be assigned to this verb legitimately, and that the absence of a precedent in prof. writ, for such a sense is, from the nature of the case, not surprising].*dvo-o-rtvi^d): 1 aor. avi<rriva£a; to draw sighs up from the bottom of the breast, to sigh deeply. Mk. viii. 12. (Lam. i. 4; Sir. xxv. 18 (17) ; 2 Mace. vi. 30, and in Grk. writ. fr. [Aeschyl. choeph. 335,] Hdt. 1,86 down.)*d»>ar<rTpi<t>w: fut. avao-Tptyo; [1 aor. avtarpefya; Pass., pres. avaorpk<$>o\ui{\; 2 aor. avetTrpafyqv;       1. to turnupside down, overturn: tAs Tpairtfas, Jn. ii. 15, (b'uppous, Horn. E. 23, 436). 2. to turn back; intrans. [W. 251 (236)] to return, like the Lat. reverto i. q. revertor, (as in Grk. writ.; in Sept. i. q. 3W): Acts v. 22; xv. 16 (here avacrrptya> tad has not like the Hebr. 3U? the force of an adverb, again, but God in the Messiah's advent returns to his people, whom he is conceived of as having previously abandoned; cf. W. 469 (437)). 3. to turn hither and thither; pass, reflexively, to turn one's self about, sojourn, dwell, iv in a place; a. literally : Mt. xvii. 22, where L T WH Tr txt. avarpe^mixivav, cf. Keim ii. p. 581 [Eng. trans, iv. p. 303]. (Josh. v. 5; Ezek. xix. 6, and in Grk. writ.) b. like the Hebr.' tjSn to walk, of the manner of life and moral character, to conduct one's self, behave one's self, live: 2 Co. i. 12 (iv t$ icoa/Hp); 1 Tim. iii. 15 (iv oueip 6fov); Eph. ii. 3 (iv ols among whom) ; 2 Pet. ii. 18 (iv TrXdvg). simply to conduct or behave one's self,' walk', (Germ, wandeln): 1 Pet. i. 17 ; Heb. x. 33; (koK&s) xiii. 18. [Cf. its use e. g. in Xen. an. 2, 5, 14; Polyb. 1, 9, 7; 74, 13 ; 86, 5 etc., (see avacrrpcxpfi, fin.); Prov. xx. 7 Sept.; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 1, 21, 8; etc.]*dva-crrpo<)>^, -?)$, tj, (fr. the pass. avaarpk^ofuu, see the preceding word), prop. ' walk,' i. e. manner of life, behavior, conduct, (Germ. Lebenswandet): Gal. i. 18; Eph. iv. 22; 1 Tim. iv. 12; Jas. iii. 13; 1 Pet. i. 15,18 ; ii. 12; iii. 1 sq. 16; 2 Pet. ii. 7; plur. &yuu avavrpoipai the ways in which holy living shows itself, 2 Pet. iii. 11. Hence life in so far as it is comprised in conduct, Heb. xiii. 7. (This word, in the senses given, is found in Grk. writ, fr. Polyb. 4, 82,1 down; in the Scriptures first in Tob. iv. 14; 2 Mace. v. 8; add Epict. diss. 1,9,5; 4, 7, 5, [and (fr. Soph. Lex. s. v.) Agatharchides 134, 12; 158, 8; Aristeas 16].)*dvarTcwr<ro(«ti; [1 aor. mid. inf. avarafcacrdai]; (mid. of avaraaaai), to put together in order, arrange, compose: bitjyria-iv, Lk. i. 1 (so to construct [R. V. draw up] a narrative that the sequence of events may be evident. Found besides only in Plut. de sollert. anim. c. 12, where it denotes to go regularly through a thing again, rehearse it; [in Eccl. ii. 20 Aid., and in eccl. writ. e. g. Iren. 3, 21, 2 sub fin.]).*dvorTcXKu; 1 aor. dveretXa; pf. drareraXica; a. trans. to cause to rise: rbv ifkiov, Mt. v. 45, (of the earth bringing forth plants, Gen. iii. 18; of a river producing something, Horn. H. 5, 777). b. intrans. to rise, t light, Mt. iv. 16, (Is. lviii. 10) ; the sun, Mt. xiii. 6;( !Tv7w xvi. 2; Jas. i. 11; the clouds, Lk. xii. 54; pot, 2 Pet. i. 19. trop. to rise from, be descended from, Heb. vii. 14. The earlier Greeks commonly used avar reXXnv of the sun and moon, and emriWeiv of the stars; but Aelian., Paus., Stob. and other later writ, neglect this distinction; see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 124 sq.   [Comp.:dva-TC8ii|jn: 2 aor. mid. av(6ifir)v; [in various senses fr. Horn, down]; in the mid. voi6e to set forth a thing drawn forth, as it were, from some corner (ava), to set forth [in words], declare, [R. V. lay before]: nvi n, ActsdvaroXij43xxv. 14; GaLii. 2, (2 Mace. Hi. 9; [Mic.vii.5]; Artem. oneir. 2, 64 iwl rd Sj/a/>; Diog. Laert. 2, 17, 16 p. 191 ed. Heubn.; Plut. amat. narr. p. 772 d.) Cf. Fritzschio-rum Opuscc. p. 169; [Holsten, Zum Evang. des Paulus u. d. Petrus p. 256 sq. Comp. : 7rpo<r-a»«m%u.] * tovroMf, -rjs, ij, (fr. dvareXXa, q. v.), as in Grk. writ.;1.  a rising (of the sun and stars); light rising i£ v^ovs, Lk. i. 78.       2. the east (the quarter of the sun's rising) : Mt. ii. 2, 9; Eev. xxi. 13 (Grsb. dvarokmv); Hdian.2, 8, 18 (10); 3, 5,1; Joseph, c. Ap. 1,14, 3, [6; 1, 26, 6; Mk. xvi. WH (rejected) ' Shorter Conclusion']; Clem. Rom. I Cor. 5, 6; Ignat. ad Ko. 2, 2; Melito ap. Euseb. h. e. 4, 26,14; with ijXLov added, Eev. vii. 2 [R G T Tr WHtxt,J; Plur. eastern regions, the east, [W. 176 (166)]: Mt. ii. 1; viii. 11; xxiv. 27; Lk. xiii. 29, (Sept., Hdt, Plat., Polyb., Plut., al.; Philo in Flacc. § 7); with the addition of ijkiov, Rev. xvi. 12 [-\tjs T Tr txt. WH txt.; vii. 2 L WH mrg.].*dmtrTpiira; to overthrow, overturn, destroy; ethically, to subvert: oucovs families, Tit. i. 11. trpr nvav trlamv, 2 Tim. ii. 18. (Common in Grk. writ., and in the same sense.): 2 aor. pass. dverpdtpr)v; pf. pass. ptcp. dva-; 1 aor. mid. dv(9pt\\tdp,T)V, to nurse up, nourish up, (Germ, aufntihren, auffttttern) ; prop, of young children and animals nourished to promote their growth (Xen. mem. 4, 3,10, etc.; Sap. vii. 4); to bring up: Lk. iv. 16 T WH mrg.; Acts vii. 20 sq.; with the predominant idea of forming the mind, Acts xxii. 8, (4 Mace. x. 2, and often in Grk. writ.). Cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 4.*(ifa^aCvai: 1 aor. dvecpava, Doric for the more com. dvifava, (Acts xxi. 3 RTWH [with Erasm., Steph., Mill] ; cf. Passow p. 2199; [Veitch, and L. and S., s. v. <jmiva>; W.89 (85); B. 41 (85)]; see emtpalva); Pass., [pres. dvtufialvofiai}; 2 aor. dvecpavtjv; [fr. Horn, down]; to bring to light, hold up to view, show; Pass, to appear, be made apparent: Lk. xix. 11. An unusual phrase is dvafpavfvrcs rip Kvirpov having sighted Cyprus, for dvatpa-veiarjs r])u.v rrjs Kvwpov, Acts xxi. 8; cf. B. 190 (164); W. § 39,1 a. p. 260 (244); here R'» T WH [see above] read avacpewavres ttji> K. after we had rendered Cyprus visible (to us); [R. V. had come in sight of Cyprus.].*dvtujjt fxo; fut. avoiata (Lev. xiv. 20; Num. xiv. 33, etc.); 1 aor. dwjveyica; 2 aor. dtnjveyitov, [see reff. s. v. <pepa>; impf. pass. dve(pep6pr)vi fr. Horn, down]; 1. to carry or bring up, to lead up; men to a higher place: Mt. xvii. 1; Mk. ix. 2; pass., Lk. xxiv. 51 [Tdf. om. WH reject the cl.J. dvatpipttv rat A/taprlas iiri rb £v\ov, 1 Pet. ii. 24 (to bear sins up on the cross, sc. in order to expiate them by suffering death, [cf. W. 428 sq. (399)]). 2. to put upon the altar, to bring to the altar, to offer, (Sept. for rhsjl °f presentation as a priestly act, cf. Kurtz on Hebr. p. 154 sq.), Bvo-las, 8v<riav, etc., (Isa. lvii. 6, etc.): Heb. vii. 27; xiii. 15; 1 Pet. ii. 5; with «ri rb 0wna<rrt)piov added, Jas. ii. 21, (Gen. viii. 20; Lev. xiv. 20; [Bar. i. 10; 1 Mace. iv. 53]); [iavrov, Heb. vii. 27, T Tr mrg. WH mrg. Trpo<reviyKas\.    Cf. Kurtz u. s.      3.to lift up on one's self, to take upon one's self, i. e. to place on one's self anything as a load to be upborne, to sustain: rat d/iaprias i. e. by meton. their punishment, Heb. ix. 28 (Is.liii. 12; n^ nopveiav, Num. xiv, 33); cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 5 sq.*dva-<f»ivf u, -a: 1 aor. dvf<p&vtj<ra; to cry out with a loud voice, call aloud, exclaim: Lk. i. 42. (1 Chr. xv. 28; xvi. 4; [Aristot. de mund. 6, vol. i. p. 400*, 18]; Polyb., often in Plut.)*<b>&xvn«,                                                                                        %« " * >   y >   ( d p a x e a   [ t o   p o u r   f o r t h ] ) ,   r a r e   i n   G r k .   w r i t .   [ S t r a b o ,   P h i l o ,   P l u t . ;   d v .   T l n > x > j s ,   i n   a   g o o d   s e n s e ,   P h i l o   d e   d e c a l .   §   1 0   m i d . ] ;   a n   o v e r f l o w i n g ,   a   p o u r i n g   o u t :   m e t a p h . ,   1   P e t .   i v .   4   d x r a r i a s   d v d x v c i s   t h e   e x c e s s   ( f l o o d )   o f   r i o t   i n   w h i c h   a   d i s s o l u t e   l ife pours itself forth.*<ii/a-x«>pl<o, -to; 1 aor. dvex&pijo-a; (freq. in Grb writ.); 1. to go back, return: Mi. ii. 12 sq. [al. refer this to next head]. 2. to withdraw; a. univ., so as to leave room: Mt. ix. 24. b. of those who through fear seek some other place, or shun sight: Mt. ii. 14,22; iv. 12; xii. 15; xiv. 13; xv. 21; xxvii. 5; (Mk. vLJj* Jn. vi. 15 [Tdf. (ptvytij; Acts xxiii. 19 (Karldtav); xxvi. 31.*dvd-ijaifis, -tas, r]> (dva^jni^a, q. v.), a cooling, refreshing : Acts iii. 20 (19), of the Messianic blessedness to be ushered in by the return of Christ from heaven; Vulg. refrigerium. (Ex. viii. 15; Philo de Abr. § 29; Strabo 10, p. 459; and in eccl. writ.)*dva-i|»vx«: 1 aor. dviy\rv£a; to cool again, to cool off, recover from the effects of heat, (Horn. Od. 4, 568; H. 5, 795; Plut. Aem. P. 25, etc.); trop. to refresh: nvd, one's spirit, by fellowship, consolation, kindnesses, 2 Tim. i. 16. (intrans. to recover breath, take the air, cool off, revive, refresh one's self, in Sept. [Ps. xxxviii. (xxxix.) 14; 2 S. xvi. 14; Ex. xxiii. 12; 1 S. xvi. 23; etc., in] 2 Mace, iv. 46; xiii. 11; and in the later Grk. writ.)*dvSpairoStar^s, -ov, 6, (fr. dv8pairodifa, and this fr. ri dvdpdnodov—fr. dvrfp and irovs—a slave, a man taken in war and sold into slavery), a slave-dealer, kidnapper, man-stealer, i. e. as well one who unjustly reduces free men to slavery, as one who steals the slaves of others and sells them: 1 Tim. i. 10. (Arstph., Xen., Plat., Dem., Isocr., Lys., Polyb.)*'AvSpdas, -ov, 6, Andrew, (a Grk. name [meaning manly; for its occurrence, see Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.; B. D. a. v. Andrew, init.]), a native of Bethsaida in Galilee, brother of Simon Peter, a disciple of John the Baptist, afterwards an apostle of Christ: Jn. i. 40, 44 (41, 45); vi. 8; xii. 22; Mt. iv. 18; x. 2; Mk. i. 16, 29; iii. 18; xiii. 3; Lk.vi. 14; Acts i. 13.*avSpCi>: (dvtjp); to make a man of or make brave, (Xen. oec. 5, 4). Mid. pres. dvSpL&puxi; to show one's self a man, be brave: 1 Co. xvi. 13 [A. V. quit you like men], (Often in Sept.; Sir. xxxiv. 25; 1 Mace. ii. 64; Xen., Plat., App., Plut., al.)*'AvSpdviKos, -ov, 6, Androni'cus, (a Grk. name, [lit. man of victory; for its occurrence see Pape, Eigennamen, s. v.]), a Jewish Christian and a kinsman of Paul: Ro. xvi. 7.*avhpo(f>6vo<;44dv8po-4>6vos, -ov, 6, a manslayer: 1 Tim. i. 9. (2 Mace, ix. 28; Horn., Plat., Dem., al.)   [Cf. qWeifc.] *<W-^k\t|tos, -ov, (a priv. and iynakiu, q. v.), that cannot be called to account, unreprovable, unaccused, blameless : 1 Co. i. 8; Col. i. 22; 1 Tim. iii. 10; Tit. i. 6 sq. (8 Mace. v. 31; Xen., Plat., Dem., Aristot., al.) [Cf. Trench § ciii.] *j&KKStfiYiyoSt -ok, (a priv. and Ubujyiofuxi, q. v.), un-speakable, indescribable: 2 Co. ix. 15 8<opea, to describe and commemorate which words fail. (Only in ecel. writ. [Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 20,5: 49,4; Athenag.,Theoph., al.].)*av-cK-XiXirros, -ov, (a priv. and tKKaKta), unspeakable: 1 Pet. i. 8 (to which words are inadequate). ([Diosc. medicam. p. 93 ed. Kuhn]; Heliod. 6, 15 p. 252 (296); and in eccl. writ.)*dWKKciirros, -ov, (a priv. and iKke'ma to fail), unfailing: Lk. xii. 33. ([Hyperid. p. 58* ed. Teubner]; Diod. 4, 84; 1, 36, cf. 3,16 ; Plut. de orac. defect, p. 438 d., and in eccl. writ.)*dv-cicnfe, -ov, and in later Grk. also -6s, -q, -ov [cf. W. 68 (67); B. 25 (22)], (dvcx<>P<u to Dear> endure); fr. Horn, down; bearable, tolerable: avatxoTtaov eorai the lot will be more tolerable, Mt. x. 15; xi. 22, 24; Mk. vi. 11 RLbr.; Lk. x. 12, 14. (In Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down.)*<iv-«Xff|iuDV, -ov, gen. -ovoi, (a priv. and iKernuuv), without mercy, merciless : Ro. i. 31. ([Aristot. rhet. Alex. 37 p. 1442*, IS]; Prov. v. 9, etc.; Sir. xiii. 12, etc.; Sap. xii. 5; xix. 1.)*riv-eXcos, -ow, without mercy, merciless: Jas. ii. 13 L T TrWH, unusual form for dvi'X«o* RG. The Greeks said avrjkffis and dveXeqc, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 710 sq.; W. 100 (95).*aw|j.U;«: (avf juos); to agitate or drive by the wind; pres. pass. ptcp. avtiu(6fuvos, Jas. i. 6. Besides only in schol. on Horn. Od. 12, 336 tv6a t/v o" K « j r > /   T r p o s   t o   j i i j   a m j i i ^ t a B t u ,   [ H e s y c h .   s .   v .   d v a \ j r v £ a t    %  d v e / i i o - a t ;   J o a n n e s   M o s c h u s   ( i n   P a t r .   G r a e c .   l x x x v i i .   p .   3 0 4 4   a . )   d y t f u f o v r o s   r o v   i r X o i o v   v e l i f i c a n t e   n a v e ] .       T h e   G r e e k s   s a i d   a v t p o a .       C f .   k X v 8 < o -  & v t | M > $ ,   - o v ,   6 ,   ( a m ,   a q f u   t o   b r e a t h e ,   b l o w ,  [but etymologists connect &a> with Skr. va, Grk. m)p, Lat. ventus, Eng. wind, and avefios with Skr. an to breathe, etc.; cf. Curtius §§ 419, 587; Vanic'ek p. 28]), [fr. Horn, down], wind, a violent agitation and stream of air, [cf. (Trench § lxxiii.) irvevna, 1 fin.] : Mt. xi. 7; xiv. 24; Jas. iii. 4, etc.; of a very strong and tempestuous wind: Mt. vii. 25 ; Mk. iv. 89 ; Lk. viii. 24, etc. oi revo-apes avefioi, the four principal or cardinal winds (Jer. xxv. 15 (xlix. 36)), rijs 77)9, Rev. vii. 1; hence the four quarters of the heavens (whence the cardinal winds blow): Mt. xxiv. 81; Mk. xiii. 27; (Ezek. xxxvii. 9; 1 Chr. ix. 24). Metaph. avefios ttjs 8t8a<ricaXtas, variability and emptiness [?] of teaching, Eph. iv. 14.<JWv8«ktos, -ov, (a priv. and cVScktos, and this fr. «v8e-\ofiai, q. v.), that cannot be admitted, inadmissible, unallowable, improper: AvcvScktov «m tov ft^ ikBfiv it cannot be but that they will come, Lk. xvii. 1  [W. 328 (308) ;B. 269 (231)]. (Artem. oneir. 2, 70 6 dptfyos wpoj tov ftiWovra xp6»ov avivSacTos, [Diog. Laert. 7,50], and several times in eccl. and Byzant. writ.) *dve$eprivT|To«,TTrWH -pavwjros [cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 81; B. 58 (50) ; Sturz, De dial. Maced. et Alex. p. 117; see ipavvaa], -ov, (a priv. and i^-eptweuo), that cannot be searched out: Ro. xi. 33. (Symm. Prov. xxv. 3; Jer. xvii. 9.   Dio Cass. 69,14.)*oycgC-Kcucos, -ov, (fr. the fut. of avi\o)iai, and kukov; cf. classic dXegiKOKOs, d^vijo-iieaKos), patient of ills and wrongs, forbearing: 2 Tim. ii. 24. (Lcian. jud. voc. 9; [Justin M. apol. 1, 16 init.; Pollux 5, 138].)*dvclixvCatrros, -ov, (a priv. and e£ixvl<*£a to trace out), that cannot be traced out, that cannot be comprehended, [A. V. unsearchable]: Ro. xi. 33; Eph. iii. 8. (Job v. 9; ix. 10; [xxxiv. 24]; Or. Manass. 6 [see Sept. ed. Tdf., Proleg. § xxix.]; several times in eccl. writ.)*dv-eir-aCo-xwros, -ov, (a priv. and eiraiaxivw), (Vulg. inconfusibilis), having no cause to be ashamed: 2 Tim. ii. 15. ([Joseph, antt. 18, 7,1]; unused in Grk. writ. [W. 236 (221)].)*(Wiri-Xiyirros [L T Tr WH -Xj/jmitos; see M, /i], -ov, (a priv. and cirtXa/i/3dva>), prop, not apprehended, that cannot be laid hold of; hence that cannot be reprehended, not open to censure, irreproachable, [Tittmann i. p. 81; Trench § ciii.] : 1 Tim. iii. 2; v. 7; vi. 14. (Freq. in Grk. writ, fr. [Eur. and] Thuc. down.)*av-f PXO|mu : 2 aor. dvijXdov; [fr. Horn, down]; to go up: Jn. vi. 8; to a higher place; to Jerusalem, Gal. i. 17 [LTrmrg. aTnjXftw], 18;   (1 K. xiii. 12).    [Comp. :px&v-«ri$, -ta>s, ij, (avirjfu to let loose, slacken, anything tense, e. g. a bow), a loosening, relaxing; spoken of a more tolerable condition in captivity: <xcu> °"f OIV *° ^ held in less rigorous confinement [R. V. have indulgence], Acts xxiv. 23, (Joseph, antt. 18, 6,10 <pv\aKri pev yap kcu •njprjo'i.s r\v, pera fieiTot avictas ttjs (Is biavrav), relief, rest, from persecutions, 2 Th. i. 7; from the troubles of poverty, 2 Co. viii. 13; relief from anxiety, quiet, 2 Co. ii. 13 (12); vii. 5. (Sept.; in Grk. writ. fr. Thuc. [Hdt. 5, 28] down.)    [Syk. see avdnavcris, fin.] *dv-tT&tu; pres. pass. dvcTa£b/uu; («rd£&> to examine, test); to investigate, examine; nvd, to examine judicially: Acts xxii. 24, 29. (Judg. vi. 29 cod. Alex.; Sus. [i. e. Dan. (Theod.) init.] 14; [Anaph. Pilati A 6 p. 417 ed. Tdf.].    Not found in prof, auth.)*fivw, prep, with gen., without: 1 Pet. iii. 1; iv. 9. with gen. of the pers. without one's will or inlenention, (often so in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down): Mt. x. 29. [Compared with x«P'f> see Tittm. i. p. 98 sq.; Ellic. on Eph. ii. 12; Green, Crit. Notes, etc. (on Ro. iii. 28).]*ov-tv-St-ros, -ov, not convenient, not commodious, not Jit: Acts xxvii. 12.   (Unused by Grk. writ.; [Moschion 53].)*ov-cvpCo-Ku: 2 aor. dvevpov, 3 pers. plur. avevpav, Lk. ii. 16 (TTrWH; see eiptWo) ; to find out by search: Tivd, Lk. ii. 16; Acts xxi. 4. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.)    Cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 13 sq.*dv-c'x<«>: in the N. T. only in the mid. dve^ojwu; fut.45&vdpal; . 83 (79)); impf. ^veixS/ajv 2 Co. xi. [1 Bee6."], 4 [KecJ (GTTrWHmrg. &*,x6)up, [cf- Moeris ed. Piers, p. 176; (but L WH txt. in vs. 4 dpix.); cf. App. p. 162; W. 72 (70); B. 35 (31)]); 2 aor. f, lujv Acts xviii. 14 (LTTrWH aWo-xd^v, reff. u. s.); to hold up, (e. g. Ke(pa\^u, x"pas, Horn, et al.); hence in mid. to hold one's self erect and firm (against any pers. or thing), to sustain, to bear (with equanimity), to bear with, endure, with a gen. of the pers. (in Grk. writ, the accus. is more com., both of the pers. and of the thing), of his opinions, actions, etc.: Mt.xvii. 17; Mk. ix. 19; Lk. ix. 41; 2 Co. xi. 19; Eph. iv. 2; Col. iii. 13. foil, by gen. of the thing: 2 Th. i. 4 [WHmrg. «**.] (als by attraction for &v, unless & be preferred [B. 161 (140); cf. W. 202 (190)]). folL by fuxpdp n with gen. of both pers. and thing, 2 Co. xi. 1 (ace. to the reading ftov twepSv n a<f>poovm)g [K6" •                                                                                                                                   %«   L   T   T r   W H ] ;   c f .   M e y e r   a d l o c ) .   w i t h o u t   a   c a s e ,   1   C o .   i v .   1 2   ( w e   e n d u r e ) ,   f o i l ,   b y   e l   u s ,   2   C o .   x i .   2 0 .   O w i n g   t o   t h e   c o n t e x t ,   t o   b e a r   w i t h   i .   e .   t o   l i s t e n :   w i t h   g e n .   o f   t h e   p e r s . ,   A c t s   x v i i i .   1 4 ;   o f   t h e   t h i n g ,   2   T i m .   i v .   3 ;   H e b .   x i i i .   2 2 .   [ C o m p .   :   j r p o < r - avix<i>-] *dttifruSs, -ov, 6, [for i-vtTrr-Us con-nepot-ius, cf. Lat. ne-pos, Germ, nichte, Eng. nephew, niece; Curtius § 342], a cousin: Col. iv. 10. (Num. xxxvi. 11; Tob. vii. 2.) [Cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 806; but esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. 1. c; also B. D. Am. ed. s. v. Sister's Son.] *Ivqtov, -ov, rd, dill, anise [(?); cf. BB.DD. s. v.; Tristram, Nat. Hist, of the Bible, p. 419 sq.]: Mt. xxiii. 23. (Arstph. nub. 982; [Aristot., al.]; often in Theophr. hist, pi.) •rfHJKo; [impf. dvrjiccv); in Grk. writ, to have come up to, arrived at, to reach to, pertain to, foil, generally by tts n; hence in later writ, dvqxfi rl rm something appertains to one, is due to him sc. to be rendered or performed by others (1 Mace. x. 42; xi. 85 ; 2 Mace. xiv. 8), and then ethically ro avfjicov what is due, duty, [R. V. befitting"], Philem. 8; rit owe dvr/Kovra unbecoming, discreditable, Eph. v. 4 (L T Tr WH & om dmjtev, W. 486 (452) ; [B. 350 (301)]); impers. as dvfjicc as was fitting, sc. ever since ye were converted to Christ, Col. iii. 18, [W. 270 (254); cf. B. 217 (187) and Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.].*dHjltcpos, -ov (a priv. and tjiupos), not tame, savage, fierce: 2 Tim. iii. 8. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Anacr. 1, 7] Aeschyl. down.)*dvV, dvbpos, 6, a man, Lat. vir. The meanings of this word in the N. T. differ in no respect fr. classic usage; for it is employed 1. with a reference to sex, and so to distinguish a man from a woman ; either a. as a male: Acts viii. 12; xvii. 12; 1 Tim. ii. 12; or b. as a husband: Mt. i. 16; Mk. x. 2; Jn. iv. 16 sqq.; Ko. vii. 2 sqq.; 1 Co. vii. 2 sqq.; Gal. iv. 27; 1 Tim. iii. 2,12; Tit. i. 6, etc.; a betrothed or future husband: Mt. i. 19; Bev. xxi. 2, etc. 2. with a reference to age, and to distinguish an adult man from a boy: Mt. xiv. 21; xv. 38 (where Svbpes, yvvalices and naiSla are discriminated); with the added notion also of intelligence and virtue: 1 Co. xiii. 11 (opp. to wprtor); Eph. iv. 13; Jas. iii. 2, (inthe last two pass. rtXaos dvqp). 3. univ. any male person, a man; so where t\s might have been used: Lk. viii. 41; ix. 88; Acts vi. 11; x. 5, etc. where dvfjp and rls are united : Lk. viii. 27; Actsv. 1; x. 1. or avfjp and & he who, etc.: Ko. iv. 8; Jas. i. 12. where mention is made of something usually done by men, not by women: Lk. xxii. 63; Acts v. 36. where angels or other heavenly beings are said to have borne the forms of men: Lk. ix. 80; xxiv. 4; Acts x. 30. where it is so connected with an adjective as to give the adj. the force of a substantive: dvtip AfiapruXos a sinner, Lk. v. 8; Aorpol avdpes, Lk. xvii. 12; or is j'oined to appellatives: dvr)p (povtvs, Acts iii. 14; dv. irpotfnjnjs, Lk. xxiv. 19, (JOJ tTK, Judg. vi. 8; [cf. W. 30; § 59,1; B. 82 (72); other reff. s. v. avBpairos, 4 a. fin.]); or to gentile names: ivbpts NjwiKrm, Mt. xii. 41; dw)p 'lovSaios, Acts xxii. 8; dv. Aldloyff, Acts viii. 27; dvd. Kinrpioi, Acts xi. 20; esp. in addresses of honor and respect [W. § 65, 5 d.; B. 82 (72)], Acts i. 11; ii. 14; xiii. 16; xvii. 22, etc.; even 3v8pes ddeXtpoi, Acts i. 16; [ii. 29, 37; vii. 2]; xiii. [15], 26, etc. 4. when persons of e i t h e r sex are included, but named after the more important: Mt. xiv. 85; Acts iv. 4; [Meyer seems inclined (see his com. on Acts 1. c.) to dispute even these examples; but al. would refer several other instances (esp. Lk. xi. 31; Jas. i. 20) to the same head].                                                                                                                                                                                                 o v 8 - C o "!r t ) ) u :   p f .   d v B e c m j K a ;   2   a o r .   a v r i t r n p i ,   [ i m p v .   d v   T i a n y r e ] ,   i n f .   d v T i a r r j v a i ;   M i d . ,   p r e s .   d v d i o r a f i a t ;   i m p f .   a v B u r r a f a p / ;   ( a m   a n d   l o ~ n j p x ) ;   t o   s e t   a g a i n s t ;   a s   i n   G r k .   w r i t . ,   i n   t h e   m i d . ,   a n d   i n   t h e   p f .   p l p f .   [ h a v i n g   p r e s .   a n d   i m p f .   f o r c e ,   W .   2 7 4   ( 2 5 7)] and 2 aor. act., to set one's self against, to withstand, resist, oppose: pf. act., Ro. ix. 19; xiii. 2; 2 Tim. iv. 15 [R G]. 2 aor. act., Mt. v. 89; Lk.xxi.15; Actsvi.10; Gal.ii.ll; Eph.vi.13; 2 Tim. iii. 8; [iv. 15 L T Tr WH]. impv., Jas. iv. 7; 1 Pet. v. 9.   Mid.: pres., 2 Tim. iii. 8.    impf., Acts xiii. 8.*dv6-o(K>Xoy«onai, -otfuu: [impf. avdio/iokoyoifuiv]; (ami and 6/ioXoyeojjuu); in Grk. writ. (fr. Dem. down) 1. to reply by professing or by confessing. 2. to agree mutually (in turn), to make a compact. 3. to acknowledge in the presence of (dvri before, over against; cf. f'£o/uoXoyfib-dac ivavTi Kvpiov, 2 Chr. vii. 6) any one, (see Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 19 sq.): rhs dpaprlas to confess sins, Joseph, antt. 8,10, 8 [Bekk. reads avopo-Xoyovpfvovs]; cf. 1 Esdr. viii. 88 (90). rcpl, to declare something in honor of one, to celebrate his praises, give thanks to him, Lk. ii. 88; (for rnfrl in Ps. Ixxviii. (Ixxix.) 13; 3 Mace. vi. 38; [Dan. iv. 31 (84) Sept.; Test. xii. Patr. test. Jud. § 1]).*ovflos, -for, to, [fr. Horn, down]; a flower: Jas. i. 10 sq.; 1 Pet. i. 24.*ovOpaiad [on accent cf. Etym. Magn. 801, 21; Chandler § 95], -ay, fj, a heap of burning coals: Jn. xviii. 18; xxi. 9. (Sir. xi. 32; 4 Mace. ix. 20; Horn. D. 9, 213, etc.)   [Cf. BB.DD. s. v. Coal.] *&>0po£, -aicos, 6, coal, (also, fr. Thuc. and Arstph. down, alive coal), 5v6p. irvp&s a coal of fire i. e. a burning or live coal; Ro. xii. 20 Svdo. nvpbs a-apevav ori tt\v Kt<pdkqvavdptoirdpe<TKO<;46twos, a proverbial expression, fr. Prov. xxv. 22, signifying to call up, by the favors you confer on you* enemy, the memory in him of the wrong he has done you (which shall pain him as if live coals were heaped on his head), that he may the more readily repent. The Arabian's call things that cause very acute mental pain burning coals of the heart and fire tn the liver; cf. Gesenius in Rosenmifller's Bibl.-exeg. Repert. i. p. 140 sq. [or in his Thesaurus i. 280; cf. also BB.DD. s. v. Coal].*avOpwir^fMo-Kos, -ov, (Svflpowros and apeoros agreeable, pleasing, insinuating; cf. evdpeo-Kos, bvtrdptoitos, abr&-peo-Kos in Lob. ad Phryn. p. 621); only in bibL and eccl. writ. [W. 25]: studying to please men, courting the favor of men: Eph. vi. 6; Col. iii. 22. (Ps. lii. (liii.) 6; [Ps. Sal. iv. 8,10].)*dvOp&mvos, -iwj, -tvov, (&v6pamos), [fr. Hdt. down], human; applied to things belonging to men: x*'P«> Acts xvii. 25 LTTrWH; <pv<ris, Jas. iii. 7; or instituted by men: mrUnt, [q. v. 8], 1 Pet. ii. 13; adjusted to the strength of man: ireipa<rp.6s [R. V. a temptation such as man can bear], 1 Co. x. 13 (cf. Neander [and Heinrici] ad loc.; Pollux 3, 27,131 & ovk Sv ns imofiivttev, & ovk &v t« tvkyKrj . . . to $t ivavrlov, teovrpov, cvVpopov, Swrr&v, dv-Opimivov, avtKTov). Opp. to divine things, with the implied idea of defect or weakness: 1 Co. ii. 4 Rec.; 13 (cro</>ia, originating with man); iv. 3 (avBpamivr) i)pipa the judicial day of men, i. e. human judgment), dvdpir invov \iya>, Ro. vi. 19 (I say what is human, speak as is usual among men, who do not always suitably weigh the force of their words; by this expression the apostle apologizes for the use of the phrase dovXu&jvat tt) SiKmocrvinj).*dvSpuiroKrivos, -ov, (jcrtivw to kill), a manslayer, murderer: Jn.viii. 44. contextually, to be deemed equal to a murderer, 1 Jn. iii. 15. (Eur. Iph. T. (382) 889.) [Cf. Trench § lxxxiii. and <povrfs.]*&v8p«iros, -ov, 6, [perh. fr. avr\p and £tjr, i. e. man's face; Curtius § 422; VaniCek p. 9. From Horn, down]; man. It is used 1. univ., with ref. to the genus or nature, without distinction of sex, a human being, whether male or female: Jn. xvi. 21. And in this sense a. with the article, generically, so as to include all human individuals : Mt. iv. 4 (eV Spry tfjo-erat 6 &v6pmroi); Mt. xii. 35 (6 ayaBbs avd. every good person); Mt. xv. 11, 18; Mk. ii. 27 -, vu. 15,18, 20; Lk. iv. 4; Jn. ii. 25 [W. § 18, 8]; vii. 51; Ro.vii. l,etc. b. so that a man is distinguished from beings of a different race or order; a. from animals, plants, etc.: Lk. v. 10; Mt. iv. 19; xii. 12; 2 Pet. ii. 16; Rev. ix. 4, 7, 10, 15,18; xi. 18, etc. p. from God, from Christ as divine, and from angels: Mt. x. 82; xix. 6; Mk. x. 9; Lk. ii. 15 [T WH om., L Trbr.] (opp. to angels); Jn. x. 88; Acts x. 26; xiv. 11; 1 Th. ii. 18; Gal. i. 10,12; 1 Co. iii. 21; vii. 23; Phil.iL 7,7 (8); lTim. ii. 5; Heb. viii. 2; xiii. 6; 1 Pet. ii. 4, etc. c. with the added notion of weakness, by which man is led into mistake or prompted to sin: ov< SvBpvmot (RG o-apiencoi) e'ore; 1 Co. iii. 4; <ro<pia avdpimwv, 1 Co. ii. 5; avBpimav imdvp-iat, 1 Pet. iv. 2; Kara avOpamov irepurarcircye conduct yourselves as men, 1 Co. iii. 8; XaXelv or Xfyciv Kara avdpaitov, to speak according to human modes of thinking, 1 Co. ix. 8; Ro. iii. 5; koto Svdpanov Xcyo, I speak as a man to whom analogies from human affairs present themselves, while I illustrate divine things by an example drawn from ordinary human life, Gal. iii. 15; koto &v6p- 6r\pu>pax*iv, as man is wont to fight, urged on by Ilxe desire of gain, honor and other earthly advantages, 1 Co. xv. 82; owe fort Karh. av8p. is not accommodated to the opinions and desires of men, Gal. i. 11; [for exx. of koto &v8. in prof. auth. see Wetstein on Rom. u. s.]; with the accessory notion of malignity: irpocrexfre dir6 t&v avBpinrav, Mt. x. 17; eis xfy0* av6p&m<av, Mt. xvii. 22; Lk. ix. 44. &. with the adjunct notion of contempt, (as sometimes in Grk. writ.): Jn. v. 12; the address & OvOpamt, or av6p<nmt, is one either of contempt and disdainful pity, Ro. ix. 20 (Plat. Gorg.  p .   4 5 2   b .   < r v   b i . . .   T i s   « ,   &   S a i B p w n f ) ,   o r   o f   g e n t l e   r e b u k e ,   L k .   x x i i .   5 8 ,   6 0 .   T h e   w o r d   s e r v e s   t o   s u g g e s t   c o m m i s e r a t i o n :   i 8 «   [ T   T r   W H   I b o i i ]   6   & v 8 p .   b e h o l d   t h e   m a n   i n   q u e s t i o n ,   m a l  t r e a t e d ,   d e f e n o e l e s s ,   J n .   x i x .   5 .   e .   w i t h   a   r e f e r e n c e   t o   t h e   t w o f o l d   n a t u r e   o f   m a n ,   6   c c r a >   a n d   6   < ? £ a >   a v B p u m o t ,   s o u l   a n d   b o d y :   R o .   v i i .   2 2 ;   E p h .   i i i .   1 6 ;   2   C o .   i v .   1 6 ,   ( P l a t .   r e p .   9 ,   5 8 9   a .   6   i v r b s   & > 8 p a m o t ;   P l o t i n .   E n n .   5 , 1 ,   1 0   o   ¬ i o - a >   & u 8 p . ;   c f .   F r i t z s c h e   o n   R o m .   v o l .   i i .   6 1   s q .   [ M e y .   o n   R o .   1 .   c . ;   E l l i c .   o n   E p h .   1 .   c . ] ) ;   6  Kpvnrits rrjs Kapbias avdp. 1 Pet. iii. 4. f. with a reference to the twofold moral condition of man, 6 iraXaios (the corrupt) and 6 Kaivos (6 vioi) Sv$p. (the truly Christian man, conformed to the nature of God): Ro. vi. 6; Eph. ii. 15; iv. 22, 24; Col. iii. 9 sq. g. with a reference to the sex, (contextually) a male: Jn. vii. 22 sq. 2. indefinitely, without the article, avdpamos, a. some one, a (certain) man, when who he is either is not known or is not important : i. q. rls, Mt. xvii. 14; xxi. 28; xxii. 11; Mk. xii. 1; xiv. 13; Lk. v. 18; xiii. 19, etc. with the addition of tU, Mt. xviii. 12; Lk. x. 80; xiv. 2,16; xv. 11; xvi. 1,19; Jn. v. 5. in address, where the speaker either cannot or will not give the name, Lk. v. 20; or where the writer addresses any and every reader, Ro. ii. 1, 3. b. where what is said holds of every man, so that avdp. is equiv. to the Germ, indef. man, one: Ro. iii. 28; 1 Co. iv. 1; vii. 1; xi. 28; Gal. ii. 16. So also where opp. to domestics, Mt. x. 86; to a wife, Mt. xix. 10; to a father, Mt. x. 85; to the master of a household, Lk. xii. 86 sq.,—in which passages many, confounding sense and signification, incorrectly say that the word &>6p. sigoi&es father of a family, husband, son, servant. 3. in the plur.'ol &/6p. is sometimes (the) people, Germ, die Leute: Mt. v. 13, 16; vi. 5, 18; viii. 27; xvi. 13; Lk. xi. 44; Mk. viii. 24, 27; Jn. iv. 28; ovbels avSpdnrav (nemo homi-num) no one, Mk. xi. 2; 1 Tun. vi. 16. 4. It is joined a. to another substantive,—a quasi-predicate of office, or employment, or characteristic,—the idea of the predicate predominating [W. § 59, 1]: Svdpamos ep-Tropos a merchant (-man), Mt. xiii. 45 [WHtxt.om.SvOp"]; ohm-8*(nr6T»ji, Mt. xiii. 52; xx. 1; xxj. 33; fia<n\tvs, Mt. xviii. 28; xxii. 2; <pdyos, Mt. xi. 19.    (So in Hebr.avdirrrareva)47"AvVCKDHD t?'!* a eunuch, Jer. xxxviiL 7 sq./ ffjj #'{< a priest, Lev. xxi. 9; also in Grk. writ.: av8. oiinjt, Horn. II. 16, 263, al.; cf. Matthiae § 430, 6; [Kruger § 57,1,1]; but in Attic this combination generally has a contemptuous force; cf. Bnhdy. p. 48; in Lat. homo gladiator, Cic. epp. ad diversos 12, 22,' 1). b. to a gentile noun: 3x6. Kvpqvmos, Mt. xxvii. 32; 'lovSaws, Acts xxi. 39; cP<o-fiaios, Acts xvi. 37; xxii. 25, (ace. to the context, a Bo-man citizen). 5. 6 Svdp., with the article, the particular man under consideration, who he is being plain from the context: Mt. xii. 13; xxvi. 72; Mk. iii. 5; Lk. xxiii. 6; Jn. iv. 50. oJtos 6 &v6., Lk. xiv. 30; Jn. ix. 16, 24 [LTrmrg. WH]; xi. 47; 6 ai>6. oSros, Mk. xiv. 71; Lk. xxiii. 4, 14, 47; Jn. ix. 24 [RGTTrtxt.]; xviii. 17; Acts vi. 18; xxii. 26; xxvi. 81, 32. 6 &v6. Utivos, Mt. xii. 45; xxvi. 24; Mk. xiv. 21. 6. Phrases: 6 Sp6. ttjs ipaprias (or with T Tr txt.WH txt. r. dvopias), 2 Th. ii. 3, see dpaprla, 1 p. 80 sq. ivB. tov Oeov a man devoted to the service of God, God's minister: 1 Tim. vi. 11; 2 Tim. iii. 17, (of the evangelists, the associates of the apostles); 2 Pet. i. 21 (of prophets, like DTi^K erK often in the O. T.; cf. Gesenius, Thesaur. i. p. 85). For 6 tiJos rot) avdpamov and viol ruv dv6p., see under vlos.&v6-\nraTt6a>; (dvrl for i. e. in lieu or stead of any one, and {mania to be wraror, to be supreme, to be consul); to be proconsul: Acts xviii. 12 [RG; cf. B. 169 (147)]. (Plut. comp. Dem. c. Cic. c. 8; Hdian. 7, 5, 2.) •Av6-viraTos, -ou, 6, [see the preceding word], proconsul: Acts xiii. 7, 8,12; xviii. 12 L T Tr WH; xix. 88. The emperor Augustus divided the Roman provinces into senatorial and imperial. The former were presided over by proconsuls; the latter were administered by legates of the emperor, sometimes called also propraetors. (Polyb., Dion. H.,Lcian., Plut., and often in Dio Cass.) [B. D. s. v. Proconsul; Alex.'s Kitto s. v. Province; esp. Bp. Lghtft. in The Contemp. Rev. for 1878, p. 289 sq.] *dv-(T||u, [ptcp. plur. dvuvrcs]; 2 aor. subj. dva>, ptcp. plur. avevtcs ; 1 aor. pass, avidrjv; to send back; to relax; contextually, to loosen: rl, Acts xvi. 26, (rois decrp.ovs, Plut. Alex. M. 73); xxvii. 40. trop. r^v dirtcMjv, to give up, omit, calm [?], Eph. vi. 9; (ri)u txGpav, Thuc. 3, 10; trpi opyrjv, Plut. Alex, M. 70). to leave, not to uphold, to let sink: Heb. xiii. 5, (Deut. xxxi. 6).*dv-Ouei*, -aw, gen. -co, (?Xcc»r, Attic for IXaos), without mercy, merciless: Jas. ii. 13 [RG]. Found nowhere else [exc. Hdian. epim. 257].   Cf. dvcXeos.*dviirros, -ov, (yiwna to wash), unwashed: Mt. xv. 20; Mk. vii. 2, and R L mrg. in 5.    (Horn. II. 6, 266, etc.)*cii>-C?TT||u: fut. dvairrf)<ra>; 1 aor. dviarr\<ra; 2 aor. av icrnjv, impv. avaarrfii. and (Acts xii. 7; Eph. v. 14 and L WH txt. in Acts ix. 11) avourra (W. § 14, 1 h.; [B. 47 (40)]); Mid., pres. dvicrrafuu; fut. dvatrn\<ro\uu; [fr. Horn, down]; I. Transitively, in the pres. 1 aor. and fut. act., to cause to rise, raise up, (D'pn); a. prop, of one lying down: Acts ix. 41. b. to raise up from death: Jn. vi. 39 sq. 44, 54; Acts ii. 32; xiii. 34, (so in Grk. writ.).     o.  to raise up, cause to be born:offspring (Gen. xxxviii. 8), Mt. xxii. 24, [cf. W. 88 (82)J; tov XpumSv, Acts ii. 30   R e c .   t o   c a u s e   t o   a p  p e a r ,   b r i n g   f o r w a r d ,   T i v d   n v c   o n e   f o r   a n y   o n e ' s   s u c c o r :    %n p o f y i j r r p i ,   A c t s   i i i .   2 2 ;   v i i .   8 7 ;   t o v   w a i d a   a v r o v ,   A c t s   i i i .   2 6 .   I I .   I n t r a n s i t i v e l y ,   i n   t h e   p f .   p l p f .   a n d   2   a p j c j j g t . ,   a n d   i n   t h e   m i d . ;   1 .   t o   r i s e . .   s t a w L i i p . :   n a t S T   a .   o f   p e r s o n s   l y j p f t   ^ "!» " »   ( " »  %  ^   r f n n h   n y   f r m j ) r - M l i i   i   8 5 j   v . 4 2 ;   L k .   v i i i .   5 5 ;   x i .   7 ;   A c t s   i x .   8 4 ,   4 0 .   o f   p e r  s o n s   l y i n g   o n   t h e   g r o u n d :   M k .   i x .   2 7 ;   L k .   x v i i .   1 9 ;   x x i i . 4 6 ;   A c t s   i x .   6 .   b .   o f   p e r s o n s   s e a t e d :   L k . i v .   1 6   ( d w o n ;   d v a y v u v w )   ;   M t .   x x v i .   6 2 ;   M k .   x i v .   6 0 ;   A c ts xxiii. 9. o. of those who leave a place to go elsewhere: Mt. ix. 9; Mk. ii. 14; [x. 50 R G]; Lk. iv. 88; xxiii. 1; Acts ix. 39. Hence of those who prepare themselves for a journey, (Germ, sich aufmachen) : Mk. vii. 24; x. 1; Lk. i. 39; xv. 18, 20; Acts x. 20; xxii. 10. In the same way the Hebr. Dip (esp. Djri) is put before verbs of going, departing, etc., according to the well known oriental custom to omit nothing contributing to the full pictorial delineation of an action or event; hence formerly DjT) and dvaards were sometimes incorrectly said to be redundant; cf. W. 608 (565). dvao-rrjvcu mr6 to rise up from something, i. e. from what one has been doing while either sitting or prostrate on the ground: Lk. xxii. 45. d. of the dead; 2 aor., with c'k vtupav added: Mt. xvii. 9 R G WH mrg.; Mk. ix. 9 sq.; xii. 25; Lk. xvi. 81; xxiv. 46; Jn. xx. 9; Eph. v. 14 (here fig.); with tK vcko&v omitted: Mk. viii. 81; xvi. 9; Lk. ix. 8, 19, [22 L T Trmrg. WHmrg.]; xxiv. 7; Ro. xiv. 9 Rec.; so (without 4k vcicp.) in the fut. mid. also: Mt. xii. 41; [xvii. 23 L WH mrg.]; xx. 19 [R G L Tr mrg. WH mrg.]; Mk. x. 34; Lk. xi. 82; xviii. 33; Jn. xi. 23 sq.; 1 Th. iv. 16. 2. to arise, appear, stand forth; of kings, prophets, priests, leaders of insurgents: Acts v. 86 sq.; vii. 18. mid., Ro. xv. 12; Heb. vii. 11,15. of those about to enter into conversation or dispute with any one, Lk. x. 25; Acts vi. 9; or to undertake some business, Acts v. 6; or to attempt something against others, Acts v. 17. Hence dvaorijvai «rt riva to rise up against any one: Mk. iii. 26, (iy_ Dip).    [Syn. see eytipa, fin.    Comp. : «r-,'Am [WH'Awa, see their Intr. § 408], -at [on this gen. cf. B. 17 (15); Ph. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. i. p. 138], ij, Anna, (D3I1 grace), the prop, name of a woman (so in 1 S. i. 2 aqq.; ii. 1 Alex.; Tob. i. 9,20, etc.), a prophetess, in other respects unknown : Lk. ii. 86.*"Awas [WH"Awar, see their Intr. § 408], -a (on this gen. cf. W. § 8, 1 p. 60 (59)), 6, (in Joseph. "Avavos; fr. Hebr. Jjn to be gracious), a high-priest of the Jews, elevated to the pontificate by Quirinius the governor of Syria c. A. d. 6 or 7; but afterwards, A. d. 15, deposed by Valerius Gratus, the procurator of Judaea, who put in his place, first Ismael, son of Phabi, and shortly after Eleazar, son of Annas. From the latter, the office passed to Simon; from Simon c. a.d. 18 to Caiaphas, (Joseph, antt. 18, 2, 1 sq.); but Annas, even after he had been put out of office, continued to have great influence : Jn. xviii. 13, 24.   This explains the mistake [butavoi}ros48see refE. below (esp. to Schiirer), and cf. dp\uptvs, 2] by which Luke, in his Gospel ill. 2 (ace. to the true reading dpxiepeas) and in Acts iv. 6, attributes to him the pontificate long after he had been removed from office. Cf. Win. RWB. s. v. Annas; Keim in Schenkel i. p. 135 sq.; Schiirer in the Zeitschr. fur wissensch. Theol. for 1876, p. 580 sq. {also in his Neutest. Zeitgesch. § 23 iv.; and BB.DD. s. v.].*d-vdi)Tos, -op, (vor)Tos fr. voc'a>); 1. not understood, unintelligible; 2. generally active, not understanding, unwise, foolish: Ro. i. 14 (opp. to oo<poi) ; Lk. xxiv. 25; Gal. iii. 1, 3; Tit. ill. 3. emdvplcu dvot;rot, 1 Tim. vi. 9. (Prov. xvii. 28; Ps. xlviii. (xlix.) 13; and often in Attic writ.; [cf. Trench § lxxv.; Ellie. on Gal. iii. 1; Schmidt ch. 147 § 20].)*avoia, -a;, ij, (avovs [i. e. avoos without understand-ing]), want of understanding, folly: 2 Tim. iii. 9. madness expressing itself in rage, Lk. vi. 11, [bio 8' avoids yevt), to piv pnvlav, to be dpndiav, Plato, Tim. p. 86 b.]. ([Theogn. 453]; Hdt. 6,69; Attic writ. fr. Thuc. down.)*dv-otyu ; (avd\ diyw i. e. oiywp*); fut. dvoi£a>; 1 aor. rjvoi£a and (Jn. ix. 14 and as a var. elsewh. also) dvey^a (an earlier form) [and rjvea>t-a WH in Jn. ix. 17, 32 (cf. Gen. viii. 6), so Tr (when corrected), but without iota subscr.; see I, i]; 2 pf. dvemya (to be or stand open; cf. Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 250 sq.; [Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 247; Veitch s. v.]; the Attic writ, give this force mostly to the pf. pass.); Pass., [pres. dvoiyonai Mt. vii. 8 L Trtxt. WHmrg.; Lk. xi. 10 Tr mrg. WH mrg.] ; pf. ptcp. avtaypivog and i\v«gyp.ivos, (rjvoiyp,evos Acts ix. 8 Tdf.); 1 aor. di>ecpxdr)v, h^VX^Vt an<i ^"oi'x&jx, inf. dve-w\6i)vcu. (with double augm. Lk. iii. 21); 2 aor. rjvoiyrjv (the usual later form); 1 fut. dvoi\6r\o-opjau. (Lk. xi. 9 Tdf., 10 LT) ; 2 fut. avoiyijo-oiuu; (on these forms, in the use of which both codd. and edd. differ much, cf. {Tdf. Proleg. p. 121 sq.]; WH. App. pp. 161,170; Bttm. Gram. p. 280 [21st Germ, ed.]; Bttm. N. T. Gr. 63 (55); W. 72 (70) and 83 (79); [Veitch s. v.]); to open: a door, a gate, Acts v. 19; xii. 10, 14; xvi. 26 sq.; Rev. iv. 1; very often in Grk. writ. Metaph., to give entrance into the soul, Rev. iii. 20; to furnish opportunity to do something, Acts xiv. 27; Col. iv. 3; pass., of an opportunity offered, 1 Co. xvi. 9 ; 2 Co. ii. 12; Rev. iii. 8; cf. 6ipa. simply dvoiynv nvi to open (the door [B. 145 (127)]) to one; prop.: Lk.xii. 36; Acts v. 23; xii. 16 ; Jn. x. 3 ; in a proverbial saying, to grant something asked for, Mt. vii. 7 sq.; Lk. xi. 9 sq.; parabolically, to give access to the blessings of God's kingdom, Mt. xxv. 11; Lk. xiii. 25 ; Rev. iii. 7. rovs 6r)<ravpovs, Mt. ii. 11, (Sir. xliii. 14; Eur. Ion 923); t& pvr)p.eia, Mt. xxvii. 52; ratpos, Ro. iii. 13; to (ppeap, Rev. ix. 2. heaven is said to be opened and something to descend f r. it, Mt. iii. 16; Lk. iii. 21;. Jn. i. 51 (52) ; Acts x. 11; or something is said to be seen there, Acts vii. 56 RG; Rev. xi. 19 (6 vaos . . . oivra ovpava) ; [xv. 5] ; xix. 11. dvoiy. to crrdpa: of a fish's mouth, Mt. xvii. 27; Hebraistically, of those who begin to speak [W. 33 (32), 608 (565)], Mt. v. 2 j Acts viii. 32, 35; x. 34; xviii. 14; foil, by els fikavfapiav [-pasLTTrWH], Rev. xiii. 6; iv wapa/SoXeur, i. e. to make use of (A. V. in), Mt. xiii. 35, (Psl lxxvii. (lxxviii.) 2; iv,eiteat Lcian. Philops. § 33) ; np6s nva, 2 Co. vi. 11 (to ordfia fjpmv dveayc itpbs vp.as our mouth is open towards you, i. e. we speak freely to you, we keep nothing back); the mouth of one is said to be opened who recovers the power of speech, Lk. i. 64; of the earth yawning, Rev. xii. 16. dv. dieods nvos i. e. to restore the faculty of hearing, Mk. vii. 35 (L T Tr WH). dv. rois 6(p8cA,wvs [W. 33 (32)], to part the eyelids so as to see, Acts ix. 8,40; tivos, to restore one's sight, Mt. ix. 80; xx. 33; Jn. ix.10,  14, 17, 21, 26, 30, 32 ; x. 21 ; xi. 37; metaph., Acts xxvi. 18 (to open the eyes of one's mind),   dvoiya ttji* a<ppaylba, to unseal, Rev. v. 9; vi. 1, 8,5, 7,9,12; viii. 1; dv. to Pifi\iov, PifiXapLSiov, to unroll, Lk. iv. 17 L Tr WH; Rev. v. 2-5; x. 2, 8; xx. 12.    [Comp. : oVavotyo.] *dv-oiKo-8o|Mio, -a: fut. dvoiKobo/itiaa; to build again, (Vulg. reaedifico): Acts xv. 16. ([Thuc. 1,89,3]; Diod.11,  39; Plut. Them. 19; Cam. 81; Hdian. 8, 2, 12 [5 ed. Bekk.].)*avoigis, -eas, ij, (dvoiya, q. v.), an opening: iv dvoiget row aToiun6s pm> as often as I open my mouth to speak, Eph. vi. 19. (Thuc. 4, 68, 4; t&v irvhav, id. 4, 67, 3; XfiAajj/, Plut. mor. [symp. 1. ix. quaest. 2, 8] p. 738 c.)#oVo|ila, -as, r), (Svopos) ; 1. prop, the condition of one without law,—either because ignorant of it, or because violating it. 2. contempt and violation of law, iniquity, wickedness: Mt. xxiii. 28; xxiv. 12; 2 Th. ii. 3 (TTrtxt. WH txt.; of. apapria, 1 p. 30 sq.), 7 ; Tit. ii. 14; ljnju. 4. opp. to ij biKauxrvvt), 2 Co. vi. 14; Heb. i. 9 [not Tdf.], (Xen. mem. 1, 2, 24 dvofiia pSK\ov ij SiKaioo-vvy xpa/ievoi); and to r) biKaiotrvvq and 6 &yiao~fi6s, Ro. vi. 19 (rjj dvo/iia els ttjv dvop.iav to iniquity—personified—in order to work iniquity); itoie'u/ t^v duop.iav to do iniquity, act wickedly, Mt. xiii. 41; 1 Jn. iii. 4; in the same sense, ipydfco-ffcu ri)v dv. Mt. vii. 23; plur. al dvopiat manifestations of disregard for law, iniquities, evil deeds: Ro. iv. 7 (Ps. xxxi. (xxxii.) 1); Heb. viii. 12 [RGL]; x. 17. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Hdt. 1,96] Thuc. down; often in Sept.) [Syn. cf. Trench § lxvi.; Tittm. i. 48; Ellic. on Tit. ii. 14.] *&-vo|ios, -ov, (vopos); 1. destitute of (the Mosaic) law: used of Gentiles, 1 Co. ix. 21, (without any suggesr tion of • iniquity'; just as in Add. to Esth. iv. 42, where avoy.01 direpiTpr/Tot and dXXdrpiot are used together). 2. departing from the law, a violator of the law, lawless, wicked; (Vulg. iniquus; [also injustusj) : Mk. xv. 28 [R L Tr br.]; Lk. xxii. 37; Acts ii. 23, (so in Grk. writ.); opp. to 6 bUaios, 1 Tim. i. 9; 6 Hvopns (nor* ifcoxvdtne *°-whom all iniquity has as it were fixed its abode, 2 Th. ii. 8; &v. epyov an unlawful deed, 2 Pet. ii. 8; free from law, not subject to law, [Vulg. sine lege"]: /x^ &>v Svojujs Been [B. 169 (147)] (Rec. 6e&), 1 Co. ix."21. (Very often in Sept.)    [Syn. see dvopla, fin.] *dvipusi adv., without the law (see Svopas, 1), without a knowledge of the law: dv. ifiaprdveiv to sin in ignorance of the Mosaic law, Ro. ii. 12; diroWvvdcu to perish, but not by sentence of the Mosaic law, ibid, (dim/ias Cqv tc live ignorant of law and discipline, Isoc. panegyr. c. 10avopdoea49ami§ 89; avAfias air6X\v(r6m to be slain contrary to law, as in wars, seditions, etc., ibid. c. 44 § 168. In Grk. writ, generally unjustly, wickedly, as 2 Mace. viii. 17.)*av-opOtSu, -£>: fut. dvop6i>o-a>; 1 aor. dvi>p6ao-a; 1 aor. pass. &vap$&>8tp> (Lk. xiii. 13; without the aug. dvop8a>6ifv LTTr; cL\_WH. App. p. 161]; B. 34 (30); [W. 73] (70)); 1. to set up, make erect: a crooked person, Lk. xiii. IS (she was made straight, stood erect); drooping hands and relaxed knees (td raise them up by restoring their strength), Heb. xii. 12. 2. to rear again, build anew: o-ki/wjv, Acts xv. 16 (Hdt. 1,19 r&v vtfiv ... rbv tveirpqarav, 8,140; Xen. Hell. 4, 8,12, etc.; in various senses in Sept.).*iv-icrioi, -ok, (a priv. and oo-ios, q. v.), unholy, impious, wicked: 1 Tim. i.,9; 2 Tim. iii. 2. (In Grk. writ. from. [Aeschyl. and] Hdt. down.) *dvoX^i -ijr, rj, (compare dvexopai nvos, s. v. avi\a> p. 45), toleration, forbearance; in this sense only in Ro. ii. 4; iii. 26 (25). (In Grk. writ,                                                                            a   h o l d i n g   b a c k ,   d e l a y i n g ,   f r .   d v ¬ x < o   t o   h o l d   b a c k ,   h i n d e r . )         [ C f .   T r e n c h   §   l i i i . ]   *  a V T - a - y u v t ° l M U '   >   t o   s t r u g g l e ,   f i g h t ;   t r p 6 s   n ,   a g a i n s t   a   t h i n g ,   H e b .   x i i .   4   [ c f .   W .   §   5 2 , 4 , 3 ] .   ( X e n . ,   P l a t . ,   D e m . ,   e t c . ) *    - r o s ,   t 6 ,   ( a m   i n   p l a c e   o f ,   i n   t u r n ,   a n d     s e e   a k \do-o-a), that which is given in place of another thing by way of exchange; what is given either in order to keep or to acquire anything: Mt. xvi. 26; Mk. viii. 37, where the sense is, 'nothing equals in value the soul's salvation.' Christ transfers a proverbial expression respecting the supreme value of the natural life (Hom. II. 9, 401 oil yap cfioi ^vxns dvrd£iov) to the hie eternal. (Ruthiv. 7; Jer. xv. 13; Sir. vi. 15, etc.; Eur. Or. 1157; Joseph, b. j. 1, 18, 8.)*dvr-avorirXiifxSw, •&; (am and dixnrXqpoa, q. v.) ; to fill up in turn: Col. i. 24 (the meaning is, ' what is wanting of the afflictions of Christ to be borne by me, that I supply in order to repay the benefits which Christ conferred on me by filling up the measure of the afflictions laid upon him'); [Mey., Ellic, etc., explain the word (with Wetst.) by'dvri vareprjiujeros succedit dvtmXqpapa'; but see Bp. Lghtft. ad loc, who also quotes the passages where the word occurs]. (Dem. p. 182, 22; Dio Cass. 44, 48; Apollon. Dysc. de constr. orat. i. pp. 14, 1 [cf. Bttm. ad loc.]; 114, 8; 258, 3; 337, 4.)*avT-airo-$£S»(u: fut. dvranobaxTa; 2 aor. inf. dvrairobov-vai; 1 fut. pass. dvrawooo6!jo-nfuu; (dirt for something received, in return, dirobidap-i to give back); to repay, requite; a. in a good sense: Lk. xiv. 14; Ro. xi. 35; evxapicrriav nvl, 1 Th. iii. 9. b. in a bad sense, of penalty and vengeance; absol.: Ro. xii. 19; Heb. x. 30, (Deut. xxxii. 85); 6ktyiv nvi, 2 Th. i. 6. (Very often in the Sept. and Apocr., in both senses; in Grk. writ. fr. [Hdt.] Thuc. down.)*cwT-ewrd-8o|io, -ros, t6, (see dmanroftiowfiC), the thing paid back, requital; a. in a good sense: Lk. xiv. 12. b. in a bad sense: Ro. xi. 9. (In Sept. i. q. Sm}, Judg. ix. 16 [Alex.], etc.; the Greeks say dvraw68oaxs [cf. W. 25].)*avT-amJ-Sooit, tas, f), recompense:  Col. iii. 24.    (In 4Sept. i. q. ^01, Is. lix. 18, etc.; in Grk. writ. fr. Thuc. down.)*a»T-airo-Kptvo|Ku; 1 aor. pass. avrantKpi&qv [see dico-Kpivw, ii.]; to contradict in reply, to answer by contradicting, reply against: re»i irpfc n, Lk. xiv.«; (Sept. Judg. v.29 [Alex.]; Job xvi. 8; xxxii. 12; Afesop. fab. 172 ed. de Furia, [p. 853 ed. Coray]). Hence, i. q. to altercate, dispute: with dat. of pers. Ro. ix. 20. Yin a mathematical sense, to correspond to each other or \e parallel, in Nicomach. arithm. 1,8, 11 p. 77 a. [p. 17 ed\ Hoche].) Cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iii. p. 17.*c*T-«tirov, a 2 aor. used instead of the verb aivi\iydv, to speak against, gainsay; [fr. Aeschyl. down] : Ek. xxi. 15; Acts iv. 14.'   Cf. thov.*mn-i\<o: Mid., [pres. dpr/go/un]; fut. dvOi^Ofim; to hold before or against, hold back, withstand, endure; in the N. T. only in Mid. to keep one's self directly opposite to any one, hold to him firmly, cleave to, paying heed to him: twos, Mt. vi. 24; Lk. xvi. 13; rav do-0evav, to aid them, care for them, 1 Th. v. 14; tov Xoyou, to hold to, hold it fast, Tit. i. 9. (Deut. xxxii. 41; Is. lvi. 4, 6; Prov. iii. 18, etc., and often in Grk. writ.) Cf. Kiihner § 520 b. [2te Aufl. § 416, 2; cf. Jelf § 536]; W. 202 (190); [B. 161 (140)].*Ami [before &u, dvff; elsewhere neglecting elision] a preposition foil, by the gen. (answering to the Lat. ante and the Germ, prefixes ant-, ent-), in the use of which the N. T. writ, coincide with the Greek (W. 364 (841)); 1. prop, it seems to have signified over against, opposite to, before, in a local sense (Bum. Gram. p. 412; [cf. Cur-tius § 204]). Hence 2. indicating exchange, suc-cession,ybr, instead of, in place of (something), a. univ. instead of: dvrl Ix6vos o\piv, Lk. xi. 11; dvri irepifioXalov to serve as a covering, 1 Co. xi. 15; dvrl tov Xiyeiv, Jas. iv. 15, (dvri tov with inf. often in Grk. writ. [W. 329 (809) ; B. 263 (226)]). b. of that for which any thing is given, received, endured: Mt. v. 88; xvii. 27 (to release me and thyself from obligation) ; Heb. xii. 2 (to obtain the joy; cf. Bleek, Liinemann, or Delitzsch ad loc.); of the price of sale (or purchase) : Heb. xii. 16; \vrpov dvri noW&v, Mt. xx. 28; Mk. x. 45. Then o. of recompense : xaiebv dvrl kokov dirodMvm, Ro. xii. 17; 1 Th. v. 15; 1 Pet. iii. 9, (Sap. xi. 16 (15)). avff &v equiv. to dvrl tovtcdp, on for that, because: Lk. i. 20; xix. 44; Acts xii. 23; 2 Th. ii. 10, (also in prof. auth. [exx. in Wetst. on Luke i. 20]; cf. Herm. ad Vig. p. 710; [W. 364 (342), cf. 162 (153); B. 105 (92)]; Hebr. ^* nnn, Deut. xxi. 14; 2 K. xxii. 17). d. of the cause: dvff av wherefore, Lk. xii. 8 ; 'dvrl rovrovfor this cause, Eph. v. 31. e. of succession to the place of another: 'Apx-jSacriXf vet dvrl 'HpatSov in place of   H e r o d ,   M t .   i i .   2 2 ,   ( 1   K .   x i .   4 4 ;   H d t .   1 ,   1 0 8 ;   X e n .   a n .   1 ,   1 ,   4 ) .   x < * P l v   < " "  %*   X ° P ' "   t o s   g r a c e   i n   t h e   p l a c e   o f   g r a c e ,   g r a c e   s u c c e e d i n g   g r a c e   p e r p e t u a l l y ,   i .   e .   t h e   r i c h e s t   a b u n d a n c e   o f   g r a c e ,   J n .   i .   1 6 ,   ( T h e o g n .   v s .   3 4 4   d v r   d v i & v   d v l a s   [ y e t   c f .   t h e   c o n t e x t vs. 842 (vss. 780 and 77,8 ed. Welcker); more appropriate are the reff. to Philo, i. 254 ed. Mang. (de poster. Caini § 43, vol. ii. 89 ed. Richter), and Chrys. de sacer-50dot. 1. vi. c. 18 § 622]). 3. As a prefix, it denotes a. opposite, over against: avnvepav, avnirapep^e<r6ai. b. the mutual efficiency, of two: dvrt^dKKeiv, dvrucaXeu', avnXotSopctv. c. requital: avnyMrOia, avrmrMdapi. d. hostile opposition: dvrixpurros. e. official substitution, instead of: avdviraros*<ivTi-pdXXo); to throw in turn, (prop. Thuc. 7, 25; Flut. Nic. 25) : \6yovs npis dXX^Xovs to exchange words with one another, Lk. xxiv. 17, [cf. 2 Mace. xi. 13].*<5yTi-Sia-Tl9r|(u: [pres. mid. dprt&art&juat]; in mid. to place one's self in opposition, to oppose: of heretics, 2 Tim. ii. 25, cf. De Wette [or Holtzm.] ad loc.; (several times in eccl. writ.; in the act. to dispose in turn, to take in hand in turn: nvd, Diod. exc. p. 602 [vol. v. p. 105, 24 ed. Dind.; absol. to retaliate, PhUo de spec. legg. § 15; de concupisc. § 4]).*ovtISikos, -ok, (8i'inj) 5 as subst. 6 dvrlbiKos a. an opponent in a suit at law: Mt. v. 25; Lk. xii. 58; xviii. 3, (Xen., Plat., often in the Attic orators). b. univ. an adversary, enemy, (Aeschyl. Ag. 41; Sir. xxxiii. 9; 1 S. ii. 10; Is. xli. 11, etc.) : 1 Pet. v. 8 (unless we prefer to regard the devil as here called olvtHSikos because he accuses men before God).*durt-faris, [(t{%u), fr. Plato down], -e<or, ij; a. opposition, b. that which is opposed: 1 Tim. vi. 20 (dv-rt&traf ri)r ^cvtiav. yvaa. the inventions of false knowledge, either mutually oppugnant, or opposed to true Christian doctrine).*4vTv-Ka$-Co~n)|u: 2 aor. d»mcaT«rnji'; [fr. Hdt. down]; in the trans, tenses 1. to put in place of another. 2. to place in opposition, (to dispose troops, set an army in line of battle); in the intrans. tenses, to stand against, resist: Heb. xii. 4, (Thuc. 1, 62. 71).*dvTi-KaXe'u, S>: 1 aor. dvrauikfo-a; to invite in turn: nvd, Lk. xiv. 12.    [Xen. conviv. 1, 15.]*dvr(-Kci)uu; 1. to be set over against, lie opposite to, in a local sense, ([Hippocr. de aere p.. 282 Foes. (191 Chart.); Strab. 7, 7, 5]; Hdian. 6, 2,4 (2 Bekk.); 8,15, 17 (8 Bekk.); [cf. Aristot. decaelo 1,8 p. 277*, 23]). 2. to oppose, be adverse to, withstand: nvi, Lk. xiii. 17; xxi. 15; Gal. v. 17 ; 1 Tim. i. 10. simply (o) dvriKeifitvos, an adversary, [Tittmann ii. 9]: 1 Co. xvi. 9; Phil. i. 28; 2 Th. ii. 4; 1 Tim. v. 14. (Dio Cass. 39, 8. Ex. xxiii. 22; 2 Mace. x. 26, etc.; [see Soph. Lex. s. v.].) *ovtikP» (LTWH avriKpvs [Chandler § 881; Treg. avriKpvs. Cf. Lob. Path. Elementa ii. 283] ; ad Phryn. p. 444; {Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 500 sq.]; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 366), adv. of place, over against, opposite: with gen., Acts xx. 15. (Often in Grk. writ.; Philo de vict. off. § 3; de vit. Moys. iii. § 7 ; in Flacc. § 10.) *QVTi-Xapipavw: Mid., [pres. dvrikafifidvofuu]; 2 aor. avrfka^o^-qv; to take in turn or in return, to receive one thing for another given, to receive instead of; in mid., freq. in Attic prose writ., 1. to lay hold of, holdfast to, an y t h i n g :   n v 6 s .   2 .   t o   t a k e   a   p e r s o n   o r   t h i n g   i n   o r d e r   a s   i t   w e r e   t o   b e   h e l d ,   t o   t a k e   t o ,   e m b r a c e ;   w i t h   a   g e n .   o f   t h e   p e r s . ,   t o   h e l p ,   s u c c o r :   L k .   i .   5 4 ;   A c t s   x x .   3 5 ,   ( D i o d .   1 1 , 1 3 ;   D i o   C a s s .   4 0 ,   2 7 ;   4 6 , 4 5   ;   o f t e n   i n   S e p t . ) .  w i t h   a   g e n .   o f   t h e   t h i n g ,   t o   b e   a   p a r t a k e r ,   p a r t a k e   o f :   T t j s   t v t p y t i r i a s   o f   t h e   b e n e f i t   o f   t h e   s e r v i c e s   r e n d e r e d   b y   t h e   s l a v e s ,   1   T i m .   v i .   2 ;   c f .   D e   W e t t e   a d   l o c .   ( / i i j   e   I o 8 i - a v   i r \ ¬ i 6 t w v   f j d o v & v   d i r i A i j ^ e r c u ,   P o r p h y r .   d e   a b s t i n .   1 ,   4 6   ;   [ c f .   E u s e b .   h .   e .   4 ,   1 5 ,   3 7   a n d   e x x .   i n   F i e l d ,   O t i u m  Norv. pars. iii. ad 1. c.])   [Comp. : trvwavn^appavoiuu.'] *iimrkiyu; [impf. avrtktyov]; to speak against, gainsay, contradict; absol.: Acts xiii. 45 [L Tr WHom.]; xxviii. 19; Tit. i. 9. nvi, Acts xiii. 45. foil, by pi) and ace. with inf.: Lk. xx. 27 [Lmrg.TrWH Xeyoires], (as in Grk. writ.; see Passow [or L. and S.] s. v.; [W. § 65, 2 /3.; B. 355 (305)]). to oppose one's self to one, decline to obey him, declare one's self against him, refuse to have anything to do with him, [cf. W. 23 (22)] : nvi, Jn. xix. 12, (Lcian. dial, inferor. 30, 3); absol., Ro. x. 21 [cf. Meyer]; Tit. ii. 9, (Achill. Tat. 5, 27). Pass. diriXeyo/wu / am disputed, assent or compliance is refused me, (W. § 39,1) : Lk. ii. 34; Acts xxviii. 22.*<5vtC-\ih|>is [L T Tr WH -Xi/^w; see M, /»], -etas, ij, (dvn-Xaixfiavo/iai), in prof. auth. mutual acceptance (Thuc. 1, 120), a laying hold of, apprehension, perception, objection of a disputant, etc. In bibl. speech aid, help, (Ps. xxi. 20 [cf. vs. 1]; 1 Esdr. viii. 27 ; Sir. xi. 12; Ii. 7; 2 Mace, xv. 7, etc.); plur., 1 Co. xii. 28, the ministrations of the deacons, who have care of the poor and the sick.*dvTi\o-yCo,-ar, r), (dvriKoyos, and this fr. dirtXrya), [fr. Hdt. down] ; 1. gainsaying, contradiction: Heb. vii. 7 ; with the added notion of strife, Heb. vi. 16, (Ex. xviii. 16; Deut. xix. 17, etc.). 2. opposition in act, [this sense is disputed by some, e. g. Liin. on Heb. as below, Mey. on Ro. x. 21 (see avrCkiyai); contra cf. Fritzsche on Ro. l.c.]: Heb. xii. 3; rebellion, Jude 11, (Prov. xvii. 11).*djTi-XotSofxw -&: [impf. dvTc\oi&6povi>2 ; to revile in turn, to retort railing: 1 Pet. ii. 23. (Lcian. conviv. 40; Plut. Anton. 42 ; [de inimic. util. § 5].)*dvTt-Xurpov, -ov, t6, what is given in exchange for another as the price of his redemption, ransom: 1 Tim. ii. 6. (An uncert. translator in Ps. xlviii. (xlix.) 9; Orph. lith. 587; [cf. W. 25].)*<uti-|«t|m'id, to: f ut. pass, dvrt/ierpi^o-tyuu; to measure back, measure in return: Mt. vii. 2 Rec.; Lk. vi. 38 [L. mrg. WH mrg. p.erpi'ai], (in a proverbial phrase, i. q. to repay; Lcian. amor. c. 19).*avTi|iicr6Ca, -as, *fj, (avripio-dos remunerating) a reward given in compensation, requital, recompense; a. in a good sense: 2 Co. vi. 13 (rrjv avrrjn iampMrffiav TkarCv-(hfrc Ka\ vp*ls, a concise expression for Be ye also enlarged i. e. enlarge your hearts, just as I have done (vs. 11), that so ye may recompense me,—for to avT<5, o c<mv dvnitureta; cf. W. 530 (493), and § 66, 1 b.; [B. 190 (164); 396 (339)]). b. in a bad sense: Ro. i. 27. (Found besides only in Theoph. Ant.; Clem. Al.; [Clem. Rom. 2 Cor. 1, 3. 5; 9, 7; 11, 6], and otherFathers.)*'AvT«>x«a, -or, fj, Antioch, the name (derived fr. various monarchs) of several Asiatic cities, two of which are mentioned in the N. T.; 1. The most celebrated of all, and the capital of Syria, was situated on the river Oron-tes, founded by Seleucus [I. sometimes (cf. Suidas s. v.51avrXkwg, col. 3277 b. ed. Gaisf.) called] Nicanor [elsewhere (cf. id. col. 2187 b. s. v. KoXcurtracvs) son of Ni-canor; but commonly Nicator (cf. Appian de rebus Syr. § 57; Spanh. de numis. diss. vii, § 8, vol. i. p. 413)], and named in honor of his father Antiochus. Many ''BXXipmmal, Greek-Jews, lived in it; and there those who professed the name of Christ were first called Christians : Actsxi. 19 sqq.; xiii. 1; xiv. 26; XT. 22 sqq.; Gal. ii. 11; cf. Beuss in Schenkel i. 141 sq.; [BB. DD. s. Vt; Conyb. and Howson, St. Paul, i. 121-126; also the latter in the Diet, of Geogr. s. v.; Renan, Les Apdtres, ch. xii.]. 2. A city of Phrygia, but called in Acts xiii. 14 Antioch of Pisidia [or ace. to the crit. texts the Pisidian Antioch (see Hur/dtor)] because it was on the confines of Pisidia, (more exactly 17 irpds Hundia, Strabo 12, p. 577, 8) : Acts xiv. 19, 21; 2 Tim. iii. 11. This was founded also by Seleucus Nicator, [cf. BB. DD. s. v.; Conyb. and Howson, St. Paul, i. 168 sqq.].**Avtiox««s, -tar, 6, an Antiochian, a native of Antioch: Acts vi. 5.*dvnr'irap-lpxoiuu: 2 aor. avraraprjkSov; to pass by opposite to, [A. V. to pass by on the other side]: Lk. x. 31 sq. (where the meaning is, 'he passed by on the side opposite to the wounded man, showing no compassion for him'). (Anthol. Pal. 12, 8; to come to one's assistance against a thing, Sap. xvi. 10. Found besides in eccL and Byzant. writ.) *'Avrhros [Tdf. 'Avrthras, sees.v.«,«],-a(cf. W. §8, 1; [B. 20 (18)]), 6, Antipas (contr. fr. 'Arrhrarpos W. 103 (97)), a Christian of Pergamum who suffered martyrdom, otherwise unknown: Kev. ii. 13. On the absurd interpretations of this name, cf. Dtisterd. [Alf., Lee, al.] ad loc. Fr. GSrres in the Zeitschr. f. wissensch. Theol. for 1878, p. 257 sqq., endeavors to discredit the opinion that he was martyred, but by insufficient arguments.*'Avmrarpfc, -idos, f], Antipatris, a city situated between Joppa and Csesarea, in a very fertile region, not far from the coast; formerly called Xafiapfada [al. Kacpapa-a-j85 (or-<rd/3o)] (Joseph, antt. 13, 15,1), and afterwards rebuilt by Herod the Great and named Antipatris in honor of his father Antipater (Joseph, b. j. 1,21, 9): Acts xxiii. 31. Cf. Robinson, Researches etc. iii. 45 sq.; Later Researches, iii. 138 sq., [also Bib. Sacr. for 1843 pp. 478-498; and for 1853 p. 528 sq.].*dvn-Wpav, or (ace. to the later forms fr. Polyb. down) avriirepa [T WH], ammipa [L Tr; cf. B. 321; Lob. Path. Elem. ii. 206; Chandler § 867], adv. of place, over against, on the opposite shore, on the other side, with a genl: Lk. viii. 26.*dvTMrtirrtt; a. to fall upon, run against, [fr. Aristot. down]; b. to be adverse, oppose, strive against: nvi, Acts vii. 51. (Ex. xxvi. 5; xxxvi. 12 ed. Compl.; Num. xxvii. 14 ; often in Polyb., Plut.)*emvirrpmTtvofuu.; 1. to make a military expedition, or take the field, against any one: Xen. Cyr. 8, 8, 26. 2. to oppose, war against: nvi, Eo. vii. 23. (Aristaenet. 2,1,13.)»imvrimra or -ttod : [pres. mid. avnTaa<rofuu\ ; to rangein battle against; mid. to oppose one's self, resist: ttvi, Ro. xiii. 2; Jas. iv. 6; v. 6; 1 Pet. v. 5; cf. Prov. iii. 34. absol., Acts xviii. 6. (Used by Grk. writ. fr. Aeschyl. down.) *imlrruirot, -ov, (riirra), in Grk. writ. 1. prop. a. actively, repelling a blow, striking back, echoing, reflecting light; resisting, rough, hard. b. passively, struck back, repelled. 2. metaph. rough, harsh, obstinate, hostile. In the N. T. language dvrlrtmov as a subst. means • 1. a thing formed after some pattern (twos [q. v. 4 a.]), (Germ. Abbild): Heb. ix. 24 [R. V. like in pattern]. 2. a thing resembling another, its counterpart; something in the Messianic times which answers to the type (see Twros, 4 y.) prefiguring it in the 0. T. (Germ. Gegenbild, Eng. antitype), as baptism corresponds to the deluge:1  Pet. iii. 21 [R. V. txt. after a true likeness"].* dyrC-xpurros, -ov, 6, (avri against and Xpiaros, likeavrLBcos opposing God, in Fhilo de somn. 1. ii. § 27, etc., Justin, quaest. et resp. p. 463 c. and other Fathers; [see Soph. Lex. s. v., cf. Trench § xxx.]), the adversary of the Messiah, a most pestilent being, to appear just before the Messiah's advent, concerning whom the Jews had conceived diverse opinions, derived partly fr. Dan. xi. 36 sqq.; vii. 25 ; viii. 25, partly fr. Ezek. xxxviii. xxxix. Cf. Eisenmenger, Entdecktes Judenthum, ii. 704 sqq.; Gesenius in Ersch and Gruber's Encycl. ivi 292 sqq. s. v. Antichrist; BShmer, Die Lehre v. Antichrist nach Schneckenburger, in the Jahrbb. f. deutsche Theol. vol. iv. p. 405 sqq. The name 6 avrixpurros was formed perhaps by John, the only writer in the N. T. who uses it, [five times]; he employs it of the corrupt power and influence hostile to Christian interests, especially that which is at work in false teachers who have come from the bosom of the church and are engaged in disseminating error: 1 Jn. ii. 18 (where the meaning is, 'what ye have heard concerning Antichrist, as about ta make his appearance just before the return of Christ, is now fulfilled in the many false teachers, most worthy to be called antichrists,' [on the om. of the art. cf. B. 89 (78)]); 1 Jn. iv. 8; and of the false teachers themselves, 1 Jn. ii. 22; 2 Jn. 7. In Paul and the Rev. the idea but not the name of Antichrist is found; yet the conception differs from that of John. For Paul teaches that Antichrist will be an individual man [cf. B. D. as below], of the very worst character (rbv av6p. rfjs Apaprlas; see iiiapria, 1), instigated by the devil to try to palm himself off as God:2 Th. ii. 3-10.   The author of the Apocalypse discovers the power of Antichrist in the sway of imperial Rome, and his person in the Emperor Nero, soon to return from the dead: Rev. xiii. and xvii.    (Often in eccl. writ.)  [See B. D. s.v. (Am. ed. for additional refif.), also B. D. s. v. Thess. 2d Ep. to the; K&hler in Herzog ed. 2, i. 446 sq.; Westcott, Epp. of St. John, pp. 68, 89.] *dvrXt'w, S>; 1 aor. rjirrfajo-a; pf. rjvrKrjKa \ (fr. 6 avrXos, or t6 SvtXov, bilge-water, [or rather, the place in the hold where it settles, Eustath. com. in Horn. 1728, 58 6 tottos tvda vda>p (rvppiei, t6 re SvaOev <al ck twv ipiutviav])', a. prop, to draw out a ship's bilge-water, to bale or pump52out. b. univ. to draw water: Jn. ii. 8; iv. 15) vbap, Jn. ii. 9; iv. 7. (Gen. xxiv. 13, 20; Ex. ii. 16,19 ; Is. xii. 8.   In Grk, writ. fr. Hdt. down.) *dUrXiuiA, -rot, t6 ; a. prop, what is drawn, (Dioscor. 4, 64). b. the act of drawing water, (Plut. mor. [de solert, an. 21,1] p. 974 e. [but this example belongs rather under c.]). o. a thing to draw with [cf. W. 93 (89)], bucket and rope let down into a well: Jn. iv. 11.*<n>r<>4>taX|uii>, ib ; (avrtydaKpos looking in the eye); 1. prop, to look against or straight at. 2. metaph. to bear up against, withstand: r<j> avt/jno, of a ship, [cf. our ' look the wind in the eye,'' face' (R. V.) the wind]: Acts xxvii. 15.   (Sap. xii. 14; often in Polyb.; in eccl. writ.)*fiwSpos, -op, (a priv. and vbap), without water: ntfyai, 2 Pet. ii. 17; rtferoi, desert places, Mt. xii. 43 ; Lk. xi. 24, (Ji Ambpos the desert, Is. xliii. 19; Hdt. 3,4, etc.; in Sept. often y?j auvbpos), [desert places were believed to be the haunts of demons; see Is. xiii. 21; xxxiv. 14 (in Sept.), and Gesen. or Alex, on the former pass.; cf. further, Bar. iv. 35 ; Tob. viii. 3; 4 Mace, xviii. 8; (Enoch x. 4) ; Rev. xviii. 2; cf. d. Zeitschr. d. deutsch. morgenl. Gesell. xxi. 609] ; vccpeXai, waterless clouds (Verg. georg. 3,197 sq. arida nubila), which promise rain but yield none, Jude 12.,   (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.)*dv-inroKpiTOs, -oi>, (a priv. and vwoKpivo/Mi), unfeigned, undisguised: Ro. xii. 9; 2 Co. vi. 6 ; 1 Tim. i. 5; 2 Tim. i. 5; 1 Pet. i. 22; Jas. iii. 17. (Sap» v. 19; xviii. 16. Not found in prof, auth., except the adv. avinroKpiras in Antonin. 8, 5.)*dwirdroKTOs, -oi>, (a priv. and vnoTacraa) ; 1. [passively] not made subject, unsubjected: Heb. ii. 8, [Artem. oneir. 2, 30]. 2. [actively] that cannot be subjected to control, disobedient, unruly, refractory: 1 Tim. i. 9 ; Tit. i. 6,10, ([Epict. 2,10,1; 4, 1, 161; Philo, quis rer. div. her. § 1]; 8t^yT)o-is awnr. a narrative which the reader cannot classify, i. e. confused, Polyb. 3, 36,4; 3,88,4; 5, 21, 4).*&va, adv., [fr. Horn, down]; a. above, in a higher place, (opp. to xdro)) : Acts ii. 19; with the article, 6, q, tA &vw : Gal. iv. 26 (q &va> *lepovo-dkfm the upper i. e. the heavenly Jerusalem); Phil. iii. 14 (ij 3i>a> liKrjau the calling made in heaven, equiv. to eirovpavios, Heb. iii. 1); the neut. plur. ra &va> as subst., heavenly things, Col. iii. 1 sq.; ex row aW from heaven, Jn. viii. 23. eats ava, Jn. ii. 7 (up to the brim), b. upwards, up, on high: Jn. xi. 41 (atpai) ; Heb. xii. 15 (&va> (j>iei)*dvaryavov and dv&yeov, see under avdyaiov.SunoBtv, (ava), adv.; a. from above, from a higher place: diro &va6ev (W. § 50, 7 N. l)j Mt. xxvii. 51 [Tdf. om. diri] ; Mk. xv. 38 ; « r&v ava>6ev from the upper part, from the top, Jn. xix". 23. Often (also in Grk. writ.) used of things which come from heaven, or from God as dwelling in heaven: Jn. iii. 31; xix. 11; Jas. i. 17 ; iii. 15,17. b. from the first: Lk. i. 3; then,/rom the beginning on, from the very first: Acts xxvi. 5. Hence c. anew, over again, indicating repetition, (a use somewhat rare, but wrongly denied by many [Mey. among them; cf. his comm. on Jn. and Gal. as below]) : Jn. iii. 3,7 ay. ytwrjQr\va<., where others explain it from above, i. e. from heaven. But, ace. to this explanation, Nicodemus ought to have wondered how it was possible for any one to be born from heaven; but this he did not say; [cf. Westcott, Com. on Jn. p. 63]. Of the repetition of physical birth                                                                                         ,   w e   r e a d   i n   A r t e m .   o n e i r .   1 ,   1 3   ( 1 4 )   p .   1 8   [ i .   p .   2 6   e d .   R e i f f ]   ( d v b p l )   ? r i   r ^ i   ¬ \ o v t i   e y i c u o v   y v v a ' u c a   O T j p a L v e t   i r a i b a   a v r a   y e v v f j c r e a S a i   o p o i o v   K a r a   t t a v r a .   o v r a >   y a p   a v < a 6 e v   a v r o t   8 d £ e i e   y e v v a a O a i ;   c f .   J o s e p h ,   a n t t .   1 , 1 8 ,   3   ( p i k l a u   a v a O c v   i r o i c i o S a t ,   where a little before stands rrport pa <j>ikia; add, Martyr. Polyc. 1,1; [also Socrates in Stob. flor. exxiv. 41, iv. 135 ed. Meineke (iii. 438 ed. Gaisf.); Harpocration, Lex. s. w. dvabiKda-atrBai, dvaOi-c$ai, dvarrodi^ofifva, avacrviva^is; Canon, apost. 46 (al. 39, Coteler. patr. apost. opp. i. 444); Pseudo-Basil, de bapt. 1, 2, 7 (iii. 1537) ; Origen in Joann. t. xx. c. 12 (opp. iv. 322 c. DelaRue). See Abbot, Authorship of the Fourth Gospel, etc. (Boston 1880) p. 84 sq.]. jrdXii; 8va6(v (on this combination of synonymous words cf. Ktihner § 534, 1; [Jelf § 777,1]; Grimm on Sap. xix. 5 (6)) : Gal. iv. 9 (again, since ye were in bondage once before).*dvo>repn«5s, -f], -6v, (avarepos), upper: rd avarrepuca p-ipi), Acts xix. 1 (i. e. the part of Asia Minor more remote from the Mediterranean, farther east). (The word is used by [Hippocr. and] Galen.)*dviiTjpos, -4pa, -tpov, (compar. fr. S.va, cf. Karantpos, see W. §11, 2 c; [B. 28 (24 sq.)]), higher. The neut. av&mpov as adv., higher; a. of motion, to a higher place, (up higher) : Lk. xiv. 10. b. of rest, in a higher place, above i. e. in the immediately preceding part of the passage quoted, Heb. x. 8. Similarly Polyb. 8, 1,1 rpi'ri/ avartpov )3i^Xo).    (In Lev. xi. 21, with gen.)*dv-w<|>eXi|s, -is, (a priv. and 5<pekoS) ; fr. Aeschyl. down; unprofitable, useless: Tit. iii. 9. Neut. as subst. in Heb. vii. 18 (8ia rd airtjs dvo><peS.es on account of its unprofitableness).*d|Cvn, -ijr, ij, ([perh. fr.] ayvvfu, int. &£<o, to break), an axe: Lk. iii. 9 ; Mt. iii. 10.    (As old as Horn, and Hdt.)*d|ios, -a, -o», (fr. aya>, 5|u; therefore prop, drawing down the scale; hence) a. weighing, having weight; with a gen. having the weight of (weighing as much as) another thing, of like value, worth as much: (3o6s &£u>s, Horn. H. 23, 885; with gen. of price [W. 206 (194)], as <zf                                                                                                                                                                                                   %  S e ' x a   j j b v c h v ,   c o m m o n   i n   A t t i c   w r i t . ;   v a v   r l f u o v   o v k   3 £ t o i »   a i r i j s   ( a - o < p i a t )   e i m ,   P r o v .   i i i .   1 5 ;   v i i i .   1 1 ;   o i » c   e t r r t   ( r r a B p i i s   w a s   a £ i o s   i y K p a r o v s   y f r v x y S i   S i r .   x x v i .   1 5 ;   o u k   3 | i a   n p h s   r .   8 6 £ a v   a r e   o f   n o   w e i g h t   i n   c o m p a r i s o n   w i t h   t h e   g l o r y ,   i .   e .   a r e   n ot to be put on an equality with the glory, Ro. viii. 18; cf. Fritzsche ad loc. and W. 405 (378); [B. 340 (292)]. b. befitting, congruous, corresponding, nuds, to a thing: r?)s fifravoias, Mt. iii. 8; Lk. iii. 8; Acts xxvi. 20; <U-ia &v iirpa%a(i.tv, Lk. xxiii. 41. a|((Sv io~ri it is befitting: a. it is meet, 2Th. i. 3 (4 Mace. xvii. 8) ; p. it is worth the while, foil, by tov with ace. and inf., 1 Co. xvi. 4;—(in both senses very com. in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, and Hdt. down, and often with tori omitted). o. of one who has merited anything, worthy, — both in a good reference and a bad;df-iowo. in a good sense; with a gen. of the thing: Mt. x. 10; Lk.vii.4; [x.7]; Actsxiii.46; lTim.i.15; iv.9; v. 18; vi. 1. foil, by the aor. inf.: Lk. xv. 19, 21; Acts xiii. 25; Rev. iv. h ; v. 2,4,9,12; foil, by ha: Jn. i. 27 (jam \v<re», a construction somewhat rare; cf. Dem. pro cor. p. 279, 9 d£iovv, ha fHarjdrioTi [(dubious); see s. v. ha, II. 2 init. and c.]); foil, by or with a finite verb (like Lat. dignus, qui): Lk. vii. 4 [B. 229 (198)]. It stands alone, but so that the context makes it plain of what one is said to be worthy: Mt. x. 11 (to lodge with); Mt. x. 13 (sc. rijr elprjvrjt); Mt. xxii. 8 (sc. of the favor of an invitation); Rev. iii. 4 (sc. to walk with me, clothed in white), with a gen. of the person, — worthy of one's fellowship, and of the blessings connected with it: Mt. x. '37 sq.; Heb. xi. 88, (roC 6tov, Sap. iii. 5; Ignat. ad Eph. 2). (3. in a bad sense; with a gen. of the thing: irhfy&v, Lk. xii. 48; Bavdrov, Lk. xxiii. 15 ; Acts [xxiii. 29]; xxv. 11, [25]; xxvi. 31; Ro. i. 32; absol.: Rev. xvi. 6 (sc. to drink blood).*6%u6a, -&; impf. ^iovv; 1 aor. q£iWa; Pass., pf. ti^ia-ftat; 1 fut. d£ia0Tjarofuu; (&£ios) ', as in Grk. writ. a. to think meet, fit, right: foil, by an inf., Acts xv. 38; xxviii. 22. b. to judge worthy, deem deserving: nvd with an inf. of the object, Lk. vii. 7; nvd nvos, 2 Th. i. 11; pass, with gen. of the thing, 1 Tim. v. 17; Heb. iii. 3; x. 29.   [Comp. : Kar-agioa.] *&£(»«, adv., suitably; worthily, in a manner worthy of: with the gen., Ro. xvi. 2; Phil. i. 27; Col. i. 10; 1 Th. ii. 12; Eph. iv. 1; 8 Jn. 6. [From Soph, down.] * ^-&-tfpcm>s, -ov, (6pda>), either, not seen i. e. unseen, or that cannot be seen i. e. invisible. In the latter sense of God in Col. i. 15; 1 Tim. i. 17; Heb. xi. 27; ra aopara avrov his (God's) invisible nature [perfections], Ro. i. 20; ra opara Kal ra dopara, Col. i. 16. (Gen. i. 2; Is. xiv. 3; 2 Mace. ix. 5; Xen., Plat., Polyb., Plut., al.)*i/ir-ayyiKKo; impf. dnrryyeWov; fut. dnayyt\&; 1 aor. dirrjyyeiXa; 2 aor. pass. dnrjyyfXtjV (Lk. viii. 20); [fr. Horn, down]; 1. dn6 nvos to bring tidings (from a person or thing), bring word, report: Jn. iv. 51 [R G L Tr br.]; Acts iv. 23; v. 22; [xv. 27]; with dat. of the pers., Mt. ii. 8; xiv. 12; xxviii. 8, [8 (9) Rec], 10; Mk. xvi. [10], 18; Acts v. 25; xi. 13; [xxiii. 16,19]; nvin, [Mt. xi. 4; xxviii. 11 (here Tdf. dvayy.)]; Mk, [v. 19 (L mrg. R G dvayy.)J; vi. 30; Lk. [vii. 22; ix. 36]; xiv. 21 ; xxiv. 9; Acts xi. 13; [xii. 17; xvi. 38 L T Tr WH; xxiii. 17]; nvi foU. by Sn, Lk. xviii. 37; [Jn. xx. 18 R G; foil, by win, Lk. viii. 36]; n irpds nva, Acts xvi. 86; ra\ wept nvos, Lk. vii. 18; xiii. 1; t! irepi nvos, Acts xxviii. 21; [foil, by Xeyav and direct disc, Acts xxii. 26]; foil, by ace. with inf., Acts xii. 14; tls with ace of place, to carry tidings to a place, Mk. v. 14 (Rec. dvryyy.); Lk. viii. 34; with addition of an ace. of the thing announced, Mt. viii. 38, (Xen. an. 6, 2 (4), 25; Joseph, antt. 5, 11, 3; tls roiis dvdptmovs, Am. iv. 18 Sept.). 2. to proclaim (dir6, because what one announces he openly lays, as it were, off from himself, cf. Germ, abkilndigen), to make known openly, declare: univ., irtpi nvos, 1 Th. i. 9; Iran rrtpl r. Jn.xvi. 25 LT Tr WH]; by teaching, ri, 1 Jn.i. 2 sq.; by teaching and commanding, nvi n, Mt. viii. 33; nvi, with inf., Acts xxvi. 20; [xvii. 80 T WH Tr mrg.]; by avowing and praising, Lk. viii. 47; nv( ^ Heb. ii. 12 (Ps. xxi. (xxii.) 23 [yet Sept. Sujy^a-ofiai]); [Mt. xii. 18]; foil, by Sn, 1 Co. xiv. 25.*dir-dvx<» [cf. Lat. angustus, anxius, Eng. anguish, etc.; Curtius § 166]: 1 aor. mid. dmyy£dfu)v; to throttle, strangle, in order to put out of the way (diro away, cf. dm-KTciva to kill off), Horn. Od. 19, 230; mid. to hang one's self, to end one's life by hanging: Mt. xxvii. 5. (2 S. xvii. 23 ; Tob. iii. 10; in Attic from Aeschyl. down.)*dir-ayu; [impf. anff/ov (Lk. xxiii. 26 Trmrg. WH mrg.)]; 2 aor. djrrryayov; Pass., [_pres. dirdyofuu]; 1 aor. canjx^l"; [fr. Horn, down]; to lead away: Lk.xiii. 15 (sc. dvo rijs tparvtis); Acts xxiii. 10 (Lchm. [ed. min.]); 17 (sc. hence); xxiv. 7 [R G] (away, « rmv xfipav iJ/kbv) ; 1 Co. xii. 2 (led astray irpbs rh eldaXa). Used esp. of those led off to trial, prison, punishment: Mt. xxvi. 57; xxvii. 2, 81; Mk. xiv. 44, 53; xv. 16 ; Lk. xxi. 12 (T Tr WH); [xxii. 66 T Tr WH]; xxiii. 26; Jn. xviii. 13 R G {ijyayov LTTrWH]; xix. 16 Rec; Acts xii. 19; (so also in Grk. writ.). Used of a way leading to a certain end: Mt. vii. 13, 14 (tls rrp> dnaXuay, els t}jv fMijy). [COMP.: oT>v-<mdy<a.~\ *d^raCScvros, -op, (irailSeva), without instruction and discipline, uneducated, ignorant, rude, [W. 96 (92)]: fgrij-aeis, stupid questions, 2 Tim. ii. 23. (In classics fr. [Eurip.,] Xen. down; Sept.; Joseph.)*dhr-a(pa: 1 aor. pass, dtrrjpdriv, to lift off, take or carry away; pass^jwnr-nwK to be taken away from any one: Mt. ix. 13t£*Mk. ii. 2oJ) Lk. v. 35. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.) *dir-aiTeaj, -a; to ask back, demand back, exact something due (Sir. xx. 15 (14) aitfiiepov daveul Kal avpwv ajratr^co): Lk. vi. 30; tt)v 'tyvxh" °~ov oiraiTOvo~iv [Tr WH alrov<nv] thy soul, intrusted to thee by God for a time, is demanded back, Lk. xii. 20, (Sap. xv. 8 to rijs irvxfjs anam/Belseos).    (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.)*air-akyta, -m: [pf. ptcp. djnjKyyKas] i to cease to feel pain or grief; a. to bear troubles with greater equar-nimity, cease to feel pain at: Thuc. 2, 61 etc. b. to> become callous, insensible to pain, apathetic: so those who-have become insensible  t o   t r u t h   a n d   h o n o r   a n d   s h a m e   a r e   c a l l e d   m n ; X y i / K o V «   [ A .   V .   p a s t   f e e l i n g ' ]   i n   E p h .   i v .   1 9 .   ( P o l y b .   1 ,   8 5 ,   5   a m j X y v K v i a s   t y v x "!  d i s p i r i t e d   a n d   u s e l e s s   f o r   w a r ,   [ c f .   P o l y b .   1 6 ,   1 2 ,   7 ] . ) *  d i r - o X X d o - o - a i :   1   a o r .   a i r q W a i - a ;   P a s s . ,   [ p r e s .   d i r a W d c r -  f i a t ]   ;   p f .   i n f. dirrik\dx6ai; (aXAa<rcra> to change; otto, sc. nv6s) ; com. in Grk. writ.; to remove, release; pass. to be removed, to depart: dn air&v ras voo-ovs, Acts xix. 12 (Plat. Eryx. 401 c. « at voo-oi diraWayeirio-av ex r&vfMTaiv); in a transferred and esp. in a legal sense, <wr<$ with gen. of pers., to be set free, the opponent being appeased and withdrawing the suit, to be quit of one: Lk. xii. 58, (so with a simple gen. of pers. Xen. mem. 2, 9, 6). Hence univ. to set free, deliver: nvd, Heb. ii. 15; (in prof .   a u t h .   t h e   g e n .   o f   t h e   t h i n g   f r e e d   f r .   i s   o f t e n   a d d e d ;   c f .   B l e e k   o n   H e b .   v o l .   i i .   1 ,   p .   3 3 9   s q . ) . *  i i r a W o r p i o a  5 4  a v a t  p ,   - a :   p f .   p a s s .   p t c p .   d m j \ X o r p « » / » ¬ » o s ;   t o   a l i e n a t e ,   e s t r a n g e ;   p a s s ,   t o   b e   r e n d e r e d   d X A o V p w s ,   t o   h e   s h u t   o u t   f r o m   o n e ' s   f e l l o w s h i p   a n d   i n t i m a c y :   r u > 6 s ,   E p h .   i i .   1 2 ;   i v .   1 8 ;   s c . t o u   6 e o v ,   C o l .   i .   2 1 ,   ( e q u i v . t o   " i « ,   u s e d   o f   t h o s e   w h o   h a v e   e s t r a n g e d   t h e m s e l v e s   f r .   G o d ,   P s .   l v i i .   ( l v i i i . ) 4 ;   I s .   i .   4   [ A i d .   e t c . ] ;   E z e k .   x i v .   5 ,   7 ;   [ T e s t ,   x i i .   P a t T .   t e s t .   B e n ] .   §   1 0 ] ;   r & v   i r a r p i a v   S o y p a r u v ,   8   M a ce.1.  3; a7raXXorpioBv two toC koX&s Ixovtoi, Clem. Kom. 1 Cor. 14,2).   (In Grk. writ. fr. [Hippocr.,] Plato down.)*diraXos, -fj, -iv, tender: of the branch of a tree, when full of sap, Mt. xxiv. 82; Mk. xiii. 28.   [From Horn, down.]*dnr-wrdw, -a: f ut. anravrfiaa (Mk. xiv. 13; but in better Grk. &navTi\<To\uu, cf. W. 83 (79); [B. 58 (46)]); 1 aor. djrijirijora; to go to meet; in past tenses, to meet: rwi, Mt. xxviii. 9 [T Tr WH wr-]; Mk. v. 2 R G; xiv. 18; Lk. xvii. 12 [L WH om. Tr br. dat.; T WH mrg. read vir-]; Jn. iv. 51R G; Acts xvi. 16 [R G L]. In a military sense of a hostile meeting: Lk. xiv. 31 R G, as in 1 S. xxii. 17; 2 S. i. 15; 1 Mace. xi. 15, 68 and often in Grk. writ.*onrdvnio-is,-«»s, fj, (airavrdco),a meeting; tls cmcam\alv twos or tiki to meet one: Mt. xxv. 1 R G; vs. 6; Acts xxviii. 15; 1 Th. iv. 17. (Polyb. 5, 26,8 ; Diod. 18, 59; very often in Sept. equiv. to nsrfijj [cf. W. 80].) *ftraf, adv., once, one time, [fr. Horn, down]; a. univ.: 2 Co. xi. 25; Heb. ix. 26 sq.; 1 Pet. iii. 20 Rec.; in. anal-, Heb. xii. 26 sq.; ebrag toO ivuwrov, Heb. ix. 7, [Hdt.2, 59, etc.].   b. like Lat. semel, used of what is so done as to be of perpetual validity and never need repetition, once for all: Heb.vi.4; x. 2; 1 Pet. iii. 18 ; Judevss.3, 5.   O. Kai &ra£ Kai bis indicates a definite number [the double ko( emphasizing the repetition, both once and again i. e.] twice: 1 Th. ii. 18; Phil. iv. 16; on the other hand, cfora£ xal bis means [once and again i. e.] several times, repeatedly: Neh. xiii. 20; 1 Mace. iii. 30.   Cf. Schott on 1 Th. ii. 18, p. 86; [Meyer on Phil. 1. c.].*drwopi-Paros, -ov, (irapafiaivw), fr. the phrase irapa/3ai-vttv vdfiov to transgress i. e. to violate, signifying either unviolated, or not to be violated, inviolable: Upmruvt\ unchangeable and therefore not liable to pass to a successor, Heb. vii. 24; cf. Bleek and Delitzsch ad loc. (A later word, cf. Lob. ad Phryn. p. 313 ; in Joseph., Plut., al.)*arirapa-u-Kevcurros, -ov, (jrapaaiaiidfa)), unprepared: 2 Co. ix. 4. (Xen. Cyr. 2, 4, 15; an. 1, 1, 6 [var.]; 2,3, 21; Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 41; Hdian. 3, 9,19 [(11) ed. Bekk.]; adv. mrapatrKtvaurrms, [Aristot. rhet. Alex. 9 p. 1480* 8] ; Clem. horn. 82, 15.)*cbr-apv«'o|iai, -oC/iai: depon. verb; fut. dirapvqo-opat; 1 aor. ain)pvi)o-a/xi)i>; 1 fut. pass. dirapvqdqo'ojuai with a pass. signif. (Lk. xii. 9, as in Soph. Phil. 527, [cf. B. 53 (46)]); to deny (a b nego): nvd, to affirm that one has no acquaintance or connection with him; of Peter denying Christ: Mt. xxvi. 34 sq. 75 ; Mk. xiv. 30 sq. 72; [Lk. xxii. 61]; Jn. xiii. 38 R G L mrg.; more fully air. fit) elbtvai 'irjo-ovv, Lk. xxii. 84 (L Tr WH om. fi.fi, concerning which cf. Kuhner ii. p. 761; [Jelf § 749, 1; W. § 65, 2 /3.; B. 355 (305)]). iavriv to forget one's self, lose sight of one's self and one's own interests: Mt. xvi. 24; Mk. viii. 84; Lk. ix. 23RWHmrg*dir&pn [so Tdf. in Jn., T and Tr in Rev.], or rather air &prt (cf. W. § 5, 2 p. 45, and 422 (393) ; [B. 320 (275) ; LipBius p. 127]; see 3pn)> adv., from now, henceforth: Mt. xxiii. 89 ; xxvi. 29, 64 (in Lk. xxii. 69 curb tov vOv) ; Jn. i. 51 (52) Rec.; xiii. 19; xiv. 7; Rev. xiv. 18 (where connect air' &pn with fuucapioi). In the Grk. of the O.T. it is not found (for the Sept. render nr\J?D by djri rov vvv), and scarcely [yet L. and S. cite Arstph. PI. 888; Plat. Com. 2o(p. 10] in the earlier and more elegant Grk. writ. For the similar term which the classic writ, employ is to be written as one word, and oxytone (viz. airapri), and has a different signif. (viz. completely, exactly) ; cf. Knapp, Scripta var. Arg. i. p. 296; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 20 sq*airaprur|i6$, -ov, 6, (diraprifw to finish, complete), completion : Lk. xiv. 28. Found besides only in Dion. Hal. de comp. verb. c. 24; [Apollon. Dysc. de adv. p. 582, 7, al.; cf. W. p. 24].*dir-apx^i, -ijs, f), (fr. airdpxofuu: a. to offer firstlings or first-fruits; 6. to take away the firstrfruits; cf. air6 in carobcKardai), in Sept. generally equiv. to JVKftO; thefirst-fruits of the productions of the earth (both those in a natural state and those prepared for use by hand), which were offered to God; cf. Win- R W B. s. v. Erstlinge, [BB.DD. s. v. First-fruits] : f\ aitapxf) sc. row (pvpdpanw, the first portion of the dough, from which sacred loaves were to be prepared (Num. xv. 19-21), Ro. xi. 16. Hence, in a transferred use, employed a. of persons consecrated to God, leading the rest in time : air. ttjs 'Axaias the first person in Achaia to enroll himself as a Christian, 1 Co. xvi. 15; with eh XpiordV added, Ro. xvi. 5; with a reference to the moral creation effected by Christianity all the Christians of that age are called mrapxfi r t s (a kind of first-fruits) tS>v tow 6tov Krto-fuiruv, Jas. i. 18 (see Huther ad loc), [noteworthy is ciXoto vims 6 tfeor cmapxqv etc. as Jirst-fruits'] 2 Th. ii. 18 L Tr mrg. WH mrg.; Christ is called air. r&v kckoc^/xcVuv as the first one recalled to life of them that have fallen asleep, 1 Co. xv. 20, 23 (here the phrase seems also to signify that by his case the future resurrection of Christians is guaranteed; because the first-fruits forerun and are, as it were, a pledge and promise of the rest of the harvest) . b. of persons superior in excellence to others of the same class: so in Rev. xiv. 4 of a certain class of Christians sacred and dear to God and Christ beyond all others, (Schol. ad Eur. Or. 96 dn-ap^ «\«-yero ov ji6vov to irp&rov rg rd£«, dXXa ical to irparov ijj ti/ij}). C. oi fyovTes Tqv air- tov jrvev^iaros who have the first-fruits (of future blessings) in the Spirit (tow irv. is gen. of apposition), Ro. viii. 23; cf. what Winer § 59, 8 a. says in opposition to those [e. g. Meyer, but see Weiss in ed. 6] who take row irv. as a partitive gen., so that ot ?x- t. air. row irv. are distinguished from the great multitude who will receive the Spirit subsequently. (In Grk. writ. fr. [Soph.,] Hdt. down.) *&tros, -ao-a, -av, (fr. ifia [or rather a (Skr. sa; cf. a copulative), see Curtius § 598; VanWek p. 9 72] and war; stronger than the simple irai), [fr. Horn, down]; quiteairaovrdfr/uuall, the whole, all together, all; it is either placed before a subst. having the art., as Lk. iii. 21; viii. 37,- xix. 37; or placed after, as Mk. xvi. 15 (tit tAv Koarpov Snavra into all parts of the'world); Lk. iv. 6 (this dominion whole-ly i. e. all parts of this dominion which you see) ; xix. 48. used absolutely,—in the masc, as Mt. xxiv. 39; Lk. iii. 16 [T WH Tr mrg. naaiv]; [iv. 40 WH txt. Tr mrg.]; v. 26 j ix. 15 [WH mrg. irdvras]; Mk. xi. 82 [Lchm. irdvrts]; Jas. iii. 2;—in the neut., as Mt. xxviii. 11; Lk. v. 28 [K G]; Acts ii. 44; iv. 32 [L WH Tr mrg. ndvra] ; x. 8; xi. 10; Eph. vi. 13; once in John viz. iv. 25 T Tr WH; [Snavrts oSroi, Acts ii. 7 L T; Shrams i/xtt, Gal. iii. 28 T Tr; cf. Tras, H. 1 fin. Barely used by Paul; most frequently by Luke. On its occurrence, cf. Alford, Grk. Test. vol. ii. Proleg. p. 81; Ellicott on 1 Tim. i. 16].«iKunr£{o|uu: 1 aor. dmiaircurditnv; to salute on leaving, bid farewell, take leave of: nvd, Acts xxi. 6 L T Tr WH. (Himer. eclog. ex Phot. 11, p. 194.)*iarar&o,-a; 1 aor. pass. rprarri6t)v; (anon/); fr. Horn, down; to cheat, deceive, beguile: rt)p Kapbiav avrov [R T Tr WH mrg., air. G, iavr. L WH txt.], Jas. i. 26; nvd run, one with a thing, Eph. v. 6 ; pass. 1 Tim. ii. 14 (where L T Tr WH('£ajranj&ura),cf. Gen.iii. 13.  [Comp.: t'£-airarda.]*<br&«|, -tjs, r\, [fr. Horn, down], deceit, deceitfulness: Col. ii. 8; tov wKovtov, Mt. xiii. 22; Mk. iv. 19; rijs dduclas, 2 Th. ii. 10; rijs d/xaprias, Heb. iii. 13; at findvfiiai rfjs airdrtjs the lusts excited by deceit, i. e. by deceitful influences seducing to sin, Eph. iv. 22, (others, 'deceitful lusts'; but cf. Mey. ad loc.). Plur. dirdrat: 2 Pet. ii. 13 (where L Tr txt. WH mrg. iv dydirms), by a paragram (or verbal play) applied to the agapae or love-feasts (cf. dyairr), 2), because these were transformed by base men into seductive revels.*Ar&rap, -opos, 6,17, (van/p), a word which has almost the same variety of senses as djujrap, q. v.; [fr. Soph, down]; [without father L e.] whose father is not recorded in the genealogies: Heb. vii. 3.*Aa-avyaayA, -roc, r6, (fr. dnavydfa to emit brightness, and this fr. avyt) brightness; cf. diroa/datr/ui, direi/ccur/ia, diretKovicr/ia, dTrqxrHuO> reflected brightness: Christ is called in Heb. i. 3 diravy. rfjs Sofas tov Beov, inasmuch as he perfectly reflects the majesty of God; so that the same .thing is declared here of Christ metaphysically, which he says of himself in an ethical sense in Jn. xii. 45 (xiv. 9) : 6 Beap&v e'fie Oeapei tov irip^aurd fix. (Sap. vii. 26; Philo, mund. opif. § 51; plant. Noe § 12; de con-cup. §11; and often in eccl. writ.; see more fully in Grimm on Sap. 1. c, p. 161 sq.) [Some interpreters still adhere to the signif. effulgence or radiance (as distinguished from refulgence or reflection), see Kurtz ad loc.; Soph. Lex. s. v.; Cremer s. v.] •mt-«£Sov, (diro and eftor, 2 aor. of obsol. «&»), serves as 2 aor. of d<f>opda, (cf. Germ, absehen); 1. to look away from one thing and at another. 2. to look at from somewhere, either from a distance or from a certain present condition of things; to perceive: &s iv dirlSa (L T Tr WH d(p(8a [see d<ptl&ov]) r& rrepl ifti as soon as I shall have seen what issue my affairs will have f A. V.55airetpcurroshow it will go with me], Phil. ii. 28.   (In Sept., Jon. iT. 5, etc.)*AnlBaa [WH Sia, exc. in Heb. as below (see I,t)],-as, ff, (dntiStts), disobedience, (Jerome, inobedientia), obstinacy, and in the N. T. particularly obstinate opposition to the divine will: Ho. xi. 30, 32; Heb. iv. 6,11; viol r. dirn-deias, those who are animated by this obstinacy (see vior, 2), used of the Gentiles: Eph.-ii. 2; v. 6; Col. iii. 6 [E G L br.]. (Xen. mem. 3, 5, 5; Plut., al.) •AnMa, -m; impf. rpreLtiovv; 1 aor. frirci&jara; to be dmi^s (q. v.); not to allow one's self to be persuaded; not to comply with; a. to refuse or withhold belief (in Christ, in the gospel; opp. to n-«n-fva): rf vly, Jn. iii. 36; if \6y<p, 1 Pet. ii. 8; iii. 1; absol. of those who reject the gospel, [R. V. to be disobedient; cf. b.]: Acts xiv. 2; xvii. 5 [Rec]; xix. 9; Ro. xv. 31; 1 Pet. ii. 7 (T Tr WH dmoTovo-iv). ,b. to refuse belief and obedience: withdat. of thing or of pers., Ro. ii. 8 (tjj d\t)6euf) ; xi. 30 sq. (r£ 6t$); 1 Pet. iv. 17; absol., Ro. x. 21 (Is. lxv. 2); Heb. iii. 18; xi. SI; 1 Pet. iii. 20. (In Sept. com. equiv. to rnp, "00; in Grk. writ, often fr. Aeschyl. Ag. 1049 down; in Horn, et al. dmBeiv.) *oimlWjs, -is, gen. -axis, (ireldopai), impersuasible, uncompliant, contumacious, [A. V. disobedient]: absol., Lk. i. 17; Tit. i. 16; iii. S ; nvi, 2 Tim. iii. 2; Ro. i. 30; Acts xxvi. 19. (Deut. xxi. 18; Num. xx. 10; Is. xxx. 9; Zech. vii. 12; in Grk. writ. fr. Thuc. down; [in Theogn. 1235 actively not persuasive].) *dirruXia, -& : impf. rpre[Kovv; 1 aor. mid. rj-n<Chr)(Ta.fiT)v; to threaten, menace: 1 Pet. ii. 23 ; in mid., ace. to later Grk. usage ([App. bell. civ. 3, 29]; Polyaen. 7, 35, 2), actively [B. 54 (47)]: Acts iv. 17 (dntikfi [L T Tr WH om.] ancikclo-dai, with dat. of pers. foil, by /wj with inf., with sternest threats to forbid one to etc., W. § 54, 3 ; [B. 183 (159)]). (From Horn, down.) [Comp.: trpoa-aireiXea.] *, -?js, f), a threatening, threat: Acts iv. 17 R G (cf. , 29; ix. 1; Eph. vi. 9. (From Horn, down.) * ; (tl/ii to be); [fr. Horn, down]; to be away, be absent: 1 Co. v. 3; 2 Co. x. 1,11; xiii. 2,10; Col. ii. 5; Phil. i. 27; [in all cases exc. Col. 1. c. opp. to irdptifu].*Sur-ayx: impf. 3 pers. plur. dvTJeo-au; (et/u to go); [fr. Horn, down]; to go away, depart: Acts xvii. 10.*dir-«tirov: (tiirov, 2 aor. fr. obsol. tn<a); 1. to speak out, set forth, declare, (Horn. II. 7,416 dyyekiriv dnietatv, 9, 309 t6v pv8ot> dirocureiv). 2. to forbid: 1 K. xi. 2, and in Attic writ. 3. to give up, renounce: with ace. of the thing, Job x. 8 (for DKD), and often in Grk. writ, fr. Horn. down. In the same sense 1 aor. mid. dirfiird/ujv, 2 Co. iv. 2 [see WH. App. p. 164], (cf. aLtrxvvr), 1); so too in Hdt. 1, 59; 5, 56; 7,14, [etc.], and the later writ, fr. Polyb. down.*dmtpurros, -ov, (ireipd{a), as well untempted as un-temptable: dirtlpaaros kok&v that cannot be tempted by evil, not liable to temptation to sin, Jas. i. 13 ; cf. the full remarks on this pass, in W. § 30, 4 [cf. § 16, 3 a.; B. 170 (148)]. (Joseph, b. j. 5, 9,3; 7, 8, 1, and eccL writ The Greeks said dirtiparos, fr. iretpda.) *aireipo<s56foropos, -ov, (weipa trial, experience), inexperienced in, without experience of, with gen. of the thing (as in Grk. writ.) : Heb. v. 18.   [(Pind. and Hdt. down.)] •&TucK*&lxoiMkv                                                                 %  [ i m p f .   d i r c £ c d ¬ x * ) M v 7 1 ' ]   *   a s s i d u o u s l y   a n d   p a t i e n t l y   t o   w a i t   f o r ,   [ c f .   E n g .   w a i t   i t   o u t ] :   a b s o L ^   P « t ^   i i i .   2 0   ( R e c .   « 8 « ' x o f * c u ) ;   r i ,   R o .   v i i i .   1 9 ,   2 3 ,   2 5 ;   ^ p V - ^   7 ;   G a l .   v .   5   ( o n   t h i s   p a s s ,   c f .   i X n i s   s u b   f i n . )   ;   w i t f r - t f a C   a o c .   o f   a   p e r s . ,   C h r i s t   i n   h i s   r eturn from heaven: Phil, iii. 20; Heb. ix. 28.   Cf. C. F. A. Fritzsche in Fritz-scUorum Opuscc. p. 155 sq.; Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iv. p. 14; [Ellic. on Gal. 1. c.].    (Scarcely found out of the N. T.; Heliod. Aeth. 2, 35; 7, 23.)*dnwK-Sionai: 1 aor. dircic8uo'dfit)v; 1. wholly to put off from one's self (dm> denoting separation fr. what is put off) : r6v TraXmov &>0pa»roi<, Col. iii. 9. 2. wholly to strip off for one's self (for one's own advantage), despoil, disarm: tito, Col. ii. 15. Cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iv. p. 14 sq., [esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Col. ii. 15]. (Joseph, antt. 6, 14, 2 d7TEic8vs [but ed. Bekk. fieTcicSvs] t^v^   j)dir-*K-5v<ris, -tat, q, ((Sirnftuo/uu, q. v.), a putting off, laying aside: Col. ii. 11.   (Not found in Grk. writ.) *dir-tXavvw: 1 aor. amjkava; to drive away, drive off: Acts xviii. 16.   (Com. in Grk. writ.)*&ir-c\r«|ita, -ov, 6, (dirtXeyxu to convict, expose, refute; fKcyfios conviction, refutation, in Sept. for ?Xry£ts), censure, repudiation of a thing shown to be worthless: iKBtTiv «s arrtKcyiiov to be proved to be worthless, to be disesteemed, come into contempt [R. V. disrepute], Acts xix. 27.   (Not used by prof, auth.)*6ir-c\tv6epos, -ov, 6,»), a manumitted slave, a freedman, (an-d, cf. Germ, los, [set free from bondage]) : tov xvpi'ov, presented with (spiritual) freedom by the Lord, 1 Co. vii. 22.   (In Grk. writ. fr. Xen. and Plat, down.) *'Air&\i|$ [better -XXijs (so all edd.); see Chandler §§ 59, 60], -ov, 6, Apelles, the prop, name of a certain Christian: Ro. xvi. 10. [Cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Philip, p. 174.]*dir-c\irtj> (Lchm. d$c\7rt£a>, [cf. gram. reff. s. v. d<pcl-8ov]); to despair [W. 24]: j«)8ev dn-eXwi'fovres nothing despairing sc. of the hoped-for recompense from God the requiter, Lk. vi. 35, [T WH mrg, p,i)8eva oTreXir.; if this reading is to be tolerated it may be rendered despairing of no one, or even causing no one to despair (cf. the Jerus. Syriac). Tdf. himself seems half inclined to take prfieva as neut. plur., a form thought to be not wholly unprecedented ; cf. Steph. Thesaur. v. col. 962]. (Is. xxix. 19; 2 Mace. ix. 18; Sir. xxii. 21; [xxvii. 21; Judith ix. 11]; often in Polyb. and Diod. [cf. Soph. Lex. s. v.].)*dar^vavri, adv., with gen. [B. 319 (278)]; 1. over against, opposite: tov ra<f>nv, Mt. xxvii. 61; [tov yafapv-\wdov, Mk. xii. 41 Tr txt. WH mrg.]. 2. in sight of, before : Mt. xxi. 2 R G; xxvii. 24 (here L Tr WH txt. mrivavrt); Acts iii. 16; Ro. iii. 18 (Ps. xxxv. (xxxvi.) 2). 3. in opposition to, against: rdv doypdruv Kai-uapot, Acts xvii. 7. (Common in Sept. and Apocr.; Polyb. 1, 86, 3.)*oura pavros. -ov, (irepauxa to go through, finish; cf. a/t&-pavros), that cannot be passed through, boundless, endless: yevtaXoyiai, protracted interminably, 1 Tim. i. 4. (Job xxxvi. 26; 3 Mace. ii. 9; in Grk. writ. fr. Pind. down.) *dhrtpunnSwrrus, adv., (irtpunraa, q. v.), without distraction, without solicitude: 1 Co. vii. 35. (The adjective occurs in Sap. xvi. 11; Sir. xli. 1; often in Polyb. [the adv. in 2, 20,10; 4,18, 6; 12, 28, 4; cf. W. 463 (431)] andPlut.)*oMTtpC-rnnTos, -ov, (ircpi«fiv<»), uncircumcised; metaph. direpiTfnp-oi tjj napbiq (Jer. ix. 26; Ezek. xliv. 7) ml r. lin-i (Jer. vi. 10) whose heart and ears are covered, i. e. whose soul and senses are closed to divine admonitions, obdurate, Acts vii. 51. (Often in Sept. for Sij?; 1 Mace, i. 48; ii. 46; [Philo de migr. Abr, §39]; Plut. am. prol. 3.)*dir-«pxo|Lai; fut, &ntkev<ropai (Mt. xxv. 46; Ro. xv. 28; W. 86 (82)); 2 aor. djrtjXflov (dirijXfla in Rev. x. 9 [where R G Tr -0ov], dwijX&iv L T Tr WH in Mt. xxii. 22; Rev.xxi. 1,4 [(but here WHtxt. only), etc., and WH in Lk. xxiv. 24]; cf. W. § 13,1; Mullach p. 17 sq. [226]; B. 39 (84); {Soph. Lex. p. 88; Tdf. Proleg. p. 128; WH. App.'p. 164 sq.; Kuenenand Cobet,N.T. p. lxiv.; Scrivener, Introd. p. 562; Collation, etc., p. liv. sq.]); pf. dncXqXuda (Jas. i. 24); plpf. airiKrjKvBtiv (Jn. iv. 8); [fr. Horn, down]; to go away (fr. a place), to depart; 1. properly, a. absol.: Mt. xiii. 25; xix. 22; Mk. v. 20; Lk. viii. 89; xvii. 28; Jn. xvi. 7, etc. Ptcp. arnXBav with indie, or sub], of other verbs in past time to go (away) and etc.: Mt. xiii. 28,46; xviii. 80; xxv. 18,25; xxvi. 86; xxvii. 5; Mk. vi. 27 (28), 87; Lk. v. 14. b. with specification of the place into which, or of the person to whom or from whom one departs: «s with ace. of place, Mt. v. 80 L T Tr WH; xiv. 15; xvi. 21; xxii. 5; Mk. vi. 86; ix. 43; Jn. iv. 8; Ro. xv. 28, etc.; tU 68<W iBvav, Mt. x. 5; els to irepav, Mt. viii. 18; Mk. viii. 18; [8i* ijiaw *fe Moke8. 2 Co. i. 16 Lchm. txt.]; iiri with ace. of place, Lk. [xxiii. 33 R G T]; xxiv. 24; eni with ace. of the business which one goes to attend to: eni (the true reading for R G «s) rqi> timopiav avrov, Mt. xxii. 5; ««, Mt. ii. 22; ?|<a with gen., Acts iv. 15; jrpos ran, Mt. xiv. 25 [Rec]; Rev. x. 9; diro twos, Lk. i. 88; viii. 87. Hebraistically (cf. nnK ^Sn) aaripx- owtVoj tiv6s to go away in order to follow any one, go after him figuratively, i. e. to follow his party, follow him as a leader: Mk. i. 20; Jn. xii. 19; in the same sense aitipx- »p<5s tu/o, Jn. vi. 68; Xen. an. 1, 9, 16 (29); used* also of those who seek any one for vile purposes, Jude 7. Lexicographers (following Suidas, ' amiXOfj • avr\ toO emxvi\6i)') incorrectly ascribe to anipxeo-Oai also the idea of returning, going back, — misled by the fact that a going away is often at the same time a going back. But where this is the case, it is made evident either by the connection, as in Lk. vii. 24, or by some adjunct, as tU rbv oUav avrov, Mt. ix. 7; Mk. vii. 30, (o*ko8«, Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 6); irp&s icarrov [Treg. np. avrov] home, Lk. xxiv. 12 [R G, but L Tr br. T WH reject the vs.]; Jn. xx. 10 [heTe T Tr irpos awrovs, WH it. avr. (see avrov)]; tls to omVtu, Jn. vi. 66 (to return home); xviii. 6 (to draw back, re-57eurotreat). 2. trop.: of departing evils and sufferings, Mk. i. 42; Lk. v. 13 (ij Xetrpa dmfKdtv air avrou) ; Rev. ix. 12; xi. 14; of good things taken away from one, Rev. xviii. 14 [R 6]; of an evanescent state of things, Rev. xxi. 1 (Rec. iraprj\6f) ,   4 ;   o f   a   r e p o r t   g o i n g   f o r t h   o r   s p r e a d   t i s ,   M t .   i v .   2 4   [ T r e g .   m r g .   c £ j j X d c i > ] .  * w ' x « » ;   [ i m p f .   d m l x "!  M t -   x i v -   u   T r   t e t -   W H   t x t > '   p r e a .   m i d .   d i r e x o f t a i ] ;   1 .   t r a n s ,   a .   t o   h o l d   b a c k ,   k e e p   o f f ,   p r e v e n t ,   ( H o r n .   I I .   1 ,   9 7   [ Z e n o d . ] ;   6 ,   9 6 ;   P l a t .   C r a t .   c .   2 3   p .   4 0 7   b . ) .   b .   t o   h a v e   w h o l l y   o r   i n f i d l ,   t o   h a v e   r e c e i v e d   ( w h a t   o n e   h a d   a   r i g h t   t o   e x p e c t   o r   d e  m a n d   ;   c f .   c m o b i b o v a i ,   a n o X a p J ^ a v t a / ,   [   W i n .   D e   v e r b .   c o m p .   e t c .   P t .   i v .   p .   8 ;   G r a m .   2 7 5   ( 2 5 8 ) ;   B .   2 0 3   ( 1 7 6 ) ;   a c e .   t o   B p .   L g h t f t .   ( o n   P h i l .   i v .   1 8 )   d i r o   d e n o t e s   c o r r espondence, i. e. of the contents to the capacity, of the possession to the desire, etc.]) : nvd, Philem. 15 ; pio-dm/, Mt. vi. 2, 5, 16; jrapditXijau', Lk. vi. 24; itdvra, Phil. iv. 18; (often so in Grk. writ. [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on Phil. 1. c.]). Hence o. mrexel> impers., it is enough, sufficient: Mk. xiv. 41, where the explanation is 'ye have slept now long enough'; so that Christ takes away the permission, just given to his disciples, of sleeping longer; cf. Meyer ad loc.; (in the same sense in (Pseudc-) Anacr. in Odar. (15) 28, 33; Cyril Alex, on Hag. ii. 9 [but the true reading here seems to be dire'xo, see P. E. Pusey's ed. Oxon. 1868]). 2. intrans. to be away, absent, distant, [B. 144 (126)]: absol., Lk. xv. 20; diro, Lk. vii. 6; xxiv. 13; Mt. [xiv. 24 Tr txt. WH txt.j; xv. 8; Mk. vii. 6, (Is.xxix. 13). 3. Mid. toholdone's self off, abstain: dim nvos, from any thing, Acts xv. 20 [R6]; 1 Th. iv. 3; v. 22, (Jobi. 1; ii. 3; Ezek. viii. 6) ; nvos, Acts xv. 29; 1 Tim. iv. 3; 1 Pet. ii. 11. (So in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down.) *wrMrrfa, -<5; [impf. i)nurrow~\; 1 aor. rytrio-njo-a; (Sjri-oros); 1. to betray a trust, be unfaithful: 2 Tim. ii. 13 (opp. to mor6s pivti); Ro. iii. 3; [al. deny this sense in the N. T.; cf. Morison or Mey. on Rom. 1. c.; Ellic. on 2 Tim. 1. c.]. 2. to have no belief, disbelieve: in the news of Christ's resurrection, Mk. xvi. 11; Lk. xxiv. 41; with dat. of pers., Lk. xxiv. 11; in the tidings concerning Jesus the Messiah, Mk. xvi. 16 (opp. to m-ot«vo>), [so 1 Pet. ii. 7 T Tr WH]; Acts xxviii. 24. (In Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down.)*dnvrrCo, -as, f), (fr. itrunos), want of faith and trust; 1. unfaithfulness, faithlessness, (of persons betraying a trust): Ro. iii. 3 [cf. reff. s. v. amcrrea, 1]. 2. want of faith, unbelief: shown in withholding belief in the divine power, Mk. xvi. 14, or in the power and promises of God, Ro. iv. 20; Heb. iii.-19 ; in the divine mission of Jesus, Mt. xiii. 58; Mk. vi. 6; by opposition to the gospel, 1 Tim. i. 18; with the added notion of obstinacy, Ro. xi. 20, 23; Heb. iii. 12. contextually, weakness of faith: Mt. xvii. 20 (where LTTrWH okiyomo-rlav); Mk. ix. 24.    (In Grk. writ. fr. Hes. and Hdt. down.)*Sritwrns, -ov, (jmotos), [fr. Horn, down], without faith or trust; 1. unfaithful, faithless, (not to be trusted, perfidious) : Lk. xii. 46; Rev. xxi. 8. 2. incredible, of things:. Acts xxvi. 8;  (Xen. Hiero 1, 9; symp. 4,49; Cyr. 3,1, 26; Plat. Phaedr. 245 c.; Joseph, antt. 6, 10, 2, etc.). 3. unbelieving, incredulous: of Thomas disbelieving the news of the resurrection of Jesus, Jn. xx. 27; of those who refuse belief in the gospel, 1 Co. vi. 6; vii. 12-15; x. 27 ; xiv. 22 sqq.; [1 Tim. t. 8]; with the added idea of impiety and wickedness, 2 Co. iv. 4; vi. 14 sq. of those among the Christians themselves who reject the true faith, Tit. i. 15. without trust (in God), Mt. xvii. 17; Mk. ix. 19; Lk. ix. 41.*airX.Ar<)$, -ijToy, ij, singleness, simplicity, sincerity, mental honesty; the virtue of one who is free from pretence and dissimulation, (so in Grk. writ. fr. Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 3; Hell. 6,1,18, down) : iv dTrXonjri (L T Tr WH dyto-Tifri) mu tiKucpiveiq Btov i. e. infused by God through the Spirit [W. § 36, 3 b.], 2 Co. i. 12; iv &irh. ttjs Kapilas (331? 1#\ 1 Chr. xxix. 17), Col. iii. 22; Eph. vi. 5, (Sap. i. 1) ; tls Xpurrov, sincerity of mind towards Christ, i. e-single-hearted faith in Christ, as opp. to false wisdom in matters pertaining to Christianity, 2 Co. xi. 3; iv 6m\anfn in simplicity, i. e. without self-seeking, Ro. xii. 8. openness of heart manifesting itself by benefactions, liberality, [Joseph, antt. 7, 13, 4; but in opposition see Fritzsche on Rom. vol. iii. 62 sq.] : 2 Co. viii. 2; ix. 11, 13 (ri)s Kotvavlas, manifested by fellowship). Cf. Kling s. v. ' Einfalt' in Herzog iii. p. 723 sq.*oirXoOs, -ij, -ovv, (contr. fr. -oor, -oij, -oov), [fr. Aeschyl. down], simple, single, (in which there is nothing complicated or confused; without folds, [cf. Trench § lvi.]); whole; of the eye, good, fulfilling its office, sound: Mt. vi. 22; Lk. xi. 34, — [al. contend that the moral sense of the word is the only sense lexically warranted; cf. Test. xii. Patr. test. Isach. § 3 ov icareXdXijo-d nvos, etc. Tiopevofievos iv dirXonjTi 6<p8aKp,av, ibid. § 4 iravra 6pa iv cforXdnjTt, pij imhexop^vos 6(p8akp.6is jrowjpias diro tijs n-Xdw/j tov Koo-pmi; yet cf. Fritzsche on Ro. xii. 8].*dirXus, adv., [fr. Aeschyl. down], simply, openly, frankly, sincerely: Jas. i. 5 (led solely by his desire to bless).*dirf, [fr. Horn, down], preposition with the Genitive, (Lat. a, ab, abs, Germ, von, ab, weg, [cf. Eng. of, off]), from, signifying now Separation, now Origin. On its use in the N. T., in which the influence of the Hebr. \D is traceable, cf. W. 364 sq. (342), 369 (346) sqq.; B. 321 (276) sqq. [On the neglect of elision before words beginning with a vowel see T,df. Proleg. p. 94; cf. W. § 5, 1 a.; B. p. 10 sq.; WH. App. p. 146.] In order to avoid repetition we forbear to cite all the examples, but refer the reader to the several verbs followed by this preposition,    djrd, then, is usedI. of Separation; and 1. of local separation, after verbs of motion fr. a place, (of departing, fleeing, removing, expelling, throwing, etc., see atpa, dirtpxoiuu, diroTivao-o-a, diroxapia, dtpiorrjixi, (JKvya, etc.): direo-irdr o8n dii airrav, Lk. xxii. 41; j3dXe djro                                                                                                                                                                                                                                      < r o v ,   M t .   v .   2 9   s q . ;   ¬ < c / 3 d X a   t o   u i f X p o s   a i r b   [ L   T   T r   W H   « c ]   t o v   o < p 6 a \ p o v ,   M t .   v i i .   4 ;   d < f >   [ L   W H   T r   t x t .   t r a p   ( q .   v .   I .   a . ) ]   i j s   « ^ f / 3 X q ( c f t   S a t i i o v i a ,   M k .   x v i .   9 ;   K a d e T k f a i r b   6 p 6 v a v ,   L k .   i .   5 2 .   2 .   o f   t h e   s e p a r a t i o n   o f   a p a r t   f r o m   t h e   w h o l e ;   w h e r e   o f   a   w h ole some part is taken: dxrb tov ijxarlov, Mt. ix. 16;ctiro58airoand fttKiavlov Krjpfov, Lk. xxiv. 42 [R G, but Tr br. the clause]; dnb rav 6\frapla>v, Jn. xxi. 10; to dnb rov ttXo/ov fragments of the ship, Acts xxvii. 44 ; ivoaipiocrro dnb TTjt Ti/j-fjt, Acts v. 2; fV^fto otto rov mpifucros, Acts ii. 17; (K\e£dfifvas air avr&v, Lk. vi. 13 ; rlva dnb r&v bvo, Mt. xxvii. 21; ov iTipr/aavTo dnb vtow 'io-paqX, sc. nvis [R. V. wAom certain of the children of Israel did price (cf. Tit, 2 c.); but al. refer this to II. 2 d. aa. fin. q. v.], Mt. xxvii. 9, (i£rjK6ov dnb rw Upeav, sc. ro>«, 1 Mace. vii. S3); after verbs of eating and drinking (usually joined in Grk. to the simple gen. of the thing [cf. B. 159 (189); W. 198 (186) sq.]) : Mt. xv. 27; Mk. vii. 28; n'wtw <ko, Lk. xxii. 18 (elsewhere in the TS. T. «). 3. of any kind of separation of one thing from another by which the union or fellowship of the two is destroyed;' a. after verbs of averting, loosening, liberating, ransom-*n9> preserving: see dyopafa, dnak\do-<ra>, dnoorpitfxo, Iktv8tp6o, depmreva, Kadapifa, \oiw, Xvrpd<e, Xvu, pvopai, crafa, <pv\do-o-a, etc. b. after verbs of desisting, abstaining, avoiding, etc.: see diri^o, rraia, Karanaia, /3Xc7ro>, npoo-ix", <pv\d<T(rofMi, etc. o. after verbs of concealing and hindering: see Kpvnra, KaiKva, napoKaKvnra. d. Concise constructions, [cf. esp. B. 822 (277)]: dvddcita dnb tov Xpurrov, Ro. ix. 3 (see dvade/ia sub fin.); \ovtw dnb r&v nkijyav to wash away the blood from the stripes, Acts xvi. 83; pcravoeiv dnb rrjs Kcutlas by repentance to turn away from wickedness, Acts viii. 22; dnodfrjo-Ktw dno twos by death to be freed from a thing, Col. ii. 20; (f>8eipco~dai dnb Trjs ankorrfros to be corrupted and thus led away from singleness of heart, 2 Co. xi. 3; do-aKov-<r$fls dnb r. (vkafieLas heard and accordingly delivered from his fear, Heb. v. 7 (al. heard for i. e. on account of his godly fear [cf. II. 2 b. below]). 4. of a state of separation, i. e. of distance; and a. pf distance of Place, — of the local terminus from which: Mt. xxiii. 34; xxiv. 81, etc.; after fuutpav, Mt. viii. 80; Mk. xii. 34; Jn. xxi. 8; after dni\ew, see amx® 2 > *"& 8vo6e» tas Kara, Mk. xv. 88; dnb fuucpoBtv, Mt. xxvii. 55, etc. [cf. B. 70 (62); W. § 65, 2]. Ace. to later Grk. usage it is put before nouns indicating local distance: Jn. xi. 18 (fiv iyyvs £>s dnb oraftiav SeicaTrivTC about fifteen furlongs off) ; Jn. xxi. 8; Rev. xiv. 20, (Diod. i. 51 endvat rijr no\ta>s dnb Sena o~xpiv<ov \ipvt)v &pv£e, [also 1, 97; 4,56 ; 16,46; 17,112; 18 , 4 0 ;   1 9 ,   2 5 ,   e t c . ;   c f .   S o p h .   L e x .   S .   V .   5 ] ;   J o s e p h ,   b .   j .   1 ,   3 ,   5   t o v t o   d ( f > '   i g a K o t r l a v   a r a 8 l a v   i v r t v d i v   t a r i v ,   P l u t .   A e m .   P a u l .   c .   1 8 ,   5   S o r e   r o i s   t r p i r   r o t i r   v e K p o i s   d i r b   b v o i v   a r a d i t a v   K a T c m e a r e i v ,   v i t .   O t h .   c .   1 1 ,   1   K a T « r r p a T o w c S e v < r ¬ v   d n b   T r e v r f f K o v ra orafiiW, vit. Philop. C. 4, 3 rfv yap dypos avr<p dnb aradiav tUoai Ttjs no\eas) ; cf. W. 557 (518) sq.; [B. 153 (183)]. b. of distance of Time,—of the temporal terminus from which, (Lat. inde a) : dnb rrjs &pas (Keivrjs, Mt. ix. 22; xvii. 18; Jn. six. 27; an' « Trjs rjfiepas, Mt. xxii. 46 ; Jn. xi. 53 ; [dnb irparr,! wipcis,] Acts xx. 18; Phil. i. 5 [L T Tr WH -njs jrp. ^/i.]; d<f> rjfiepwv dp-)(aiav, Acts xv. 7; an' irav, Lk. viii. 43; Bo. xv. 23 ; an al&pos and dnb r. ai&vav, Lk. i. 70, etc.; Air dpxfjs, Mt. xix. 4, 8, etc.; dnb KarapoXijs kckt/xov, Mt. xiii. 35 £L T Tr WH om. Koo/t.]> etc.; dnbicSo-fiov, Ro. i. 20; dnb &pe(povs from a child, 2 Tim. iii. 15; dnb Trjs napdivlas, Lk. ii. 36; d<j> fjs (sc. fjpepas) since, Lk. vii. 45; Acts xxiv. 11; 2 Pet. iii. 4; d(p' fjs f/iupas, Col. i. 6, 9; aft ov equiv. to a7ro tovtov ore [cf. B. 82 (71); 105 (92)], Lk. xiii. 25; xxiv. 21; Rev. xvi. 18, (Hdt. 2,44; and in Attic) ; dip' ov after rpla err), Lk. xiii. 7 T Tr WH; otto row vivfrom the present, henceforth, Lk. i. 48; v. 10; xii. 52; xxii. 69; Acts xviii. 6; 2 Co. v. 16; dnb rort, Mt. iv. 17; xvi. 21; xxvi. 16; Lk. xvi. 16; dnb ncpvvi since last year, a year ago, 2 Co. viii. 10; ix. 2; anb npat, Acts xxviii. 23; cf. W. 422 (393) ; [B. 320 (275)]; Lob. ad Phryn. pp. 47, 461. c. of distance of Order or Rank, — of the terminus from which in any succession of things or persons: dnb Hutovs (sc. waitS6s) Kal KaTarripa, Mt. ii. 16, (row Atvtras dnb ftKoaacTovs feat endvio, Num. i. 20; 2 Esdr. iii. 8) ; dnb 'AjSpaa/t eas Aaveid, Mt. i. 17; f^dofxos dnb 'Abd/i, Jude 14; dnb fuxpov ea>s fieya\ov, Acts viii. 10; Heb. viii. 11; &p\ta6ai dn6 twos, Mt. xx. 8; Lk. xxiii. 5; xxiv. 27; Jn. viii. 9; Acts viii. 85; x. 87.II. of Origin; whether of local origin, the place whence; or of c a u s a 1 origin, the cause from which. 1. of the Place whence anything is, comes, befalls, is taken; a. after verbs of coming; see Zpxopai, fJK<a, etc.: dnb [L Tr WH djr'] dyopas SC. i\66vres, Mk. vii. 4; SyyiKos an (row) oipavov, Lk. xxii. 48 [Lbr. WH reject the pass.]; rdi> an ovpav&v sc. XaAoCira, Heb. xii. 25, etc.; of the country, province, town, village, from which any one has originated or proceeded [cf. W. 364 (342); B. 324 (279)]: Mt. ii. 1; iv. 25 ; Jn. i. 44 (45) ; xi. 1 ; pa dwb Spovs 2iva, Gal. iv. 24. Hence 6 or oi dno nvos a native of, a man of, some place: 6 dnb Nafapc'^ the Nazarene, Mt. xxi. 11; 6 dnb 'ApipaSalas, Mk. xv. 48; Jn. xix. 88 [here G L Tr WH om. 6]; oi dnb 'l6mn)S, Acts x. 23; oi dnb 'IroXias the Italians, Heb. xiii. 24 [cf. W. § 66, 6]. A great number of exx. fr. prof. writ, are given by Wieseler, Untersuch. iib. d. Hebraerbr. 2te Halfte, p. 14 sq. b. of the party or society from which one has proceeded, i. e. a member of the sect or society, a disciple or votary of it: oi dnb Trjs (KKkr)o~las, Acts xii. 1; ol dnb rtjs aiptr crfojf tw QapuTaiaiv, Acts xv. 5, (as in Grk. writ.: o< dirb rrjs Sroas, oi dnb rrjs 'AKaSrjpiias, etc.). c. of the material from which a thing is made: dnb rpi\&v KapfjKov, Mt. iii. 4 [W. 370 (347)   ;   B .   8 2 4   ( 2 7 9 ) ] .   a .   t r o p .   o f   t h a t   f r o m   o r   b y   w h i c h   a   t h i n g   i s   k n o w n :   d n b   r a v   K a p n a v   i n i y i v & o - K t i v ,   M t .   v i i .   1 6 ,   2 0   [ h e r e   L c h m .   4 k   t .   k .   e t c . ]   ( L y s .   i n   A n d o c .   §   6 ;   A e s c h i n .   a d v .   T i m .   p .   6 9   e d .   R e i s k e )   ;   t m v 6 d v ¬ i v   d n 6   t w o s   t o   l e a r n   f r o m   t h e   e x a m p l e   o f   a n y   one, Mt. xi 29 ; xxiv. 32; Mk. xiii. 28; but in Gal. iii. 2; Col. i. 7; Heb. v. 8, fvavB. and twos means to learn from one's teaching or training [cf. B. 324 (279) c.; W. 372 (348)]. e. after verbs of seeking, inquiring, demanding: dnatrtiv, Lk. xii. 20 [Tr WH air.]; Cnrcw, 1 Th. ii. 6 (alternating there with & [cf. W. § 50, 2]); (Kfyreiv, Lk. xi. 50 sq.; see mVe'u). 2. of c ausal origin, or the Cause; and a. of the material cause, so called, or of that which supplies the material for the maintenance of the action expressed by the verb: sodiro59diroftatvcaytpl{t<r6ai, go/miff <r&u, nXovrttv, Suucovt'iv card nvos, — see those verbs, b. of the cause on account of which anything is or is done, where commonly it can be rendered for (Lat. prae, Germ, vor): ovk tjdvvaro dnb rov &X\ov, Lk. xix. 3; ovxm lo-^vcran dnb rov nkifdovs, Jn. xxi. 6, (Judith ii. 20); dnb r. &6£tjs row <pmos, Acts xxii. 11; [here many would bring in Heb. v. 7 (W.371 (348); B. 822 (276)), see I. 8 d. above], o. of them o v i n g or impelling cause (Lat. ex,prae; Germ, aus, vor), for, out of: dnb rtjs %apas airov vndyti, Mt. xiii. 44; dnb rov <f>6j3ov for fear, Mt. xiv. 26; xxviii. 4; Lk. xxi. 26. Hebraistically: tpofieio-Bai dn6 nvos (|D KV), Mt. x. 28; Lk. xii. 4; (pdyeiv dno nvos (|D DU ), to flee for fear of one, Jn. x. 5; Mk. xiv. 52 (R G, but L Tr mrg. br. air air&v); Rev. ix. 6; cf. Qtvyn and W. 228 (209 sq.). d. of theefficient cause, viz. of things from the force of which anything proceeds, and of persons from whose will, power, authority, command, favor, order, influence, direction, anything is to be sought; aa. in general: <urd rou vnvov by force of the sleep, Acts xx. 9; dnb crov o-tiiu'tov, Mt. xii. 88; mrb tefrs tls b6£av, 2 Co. iii. 18 (from the glory which we behold for ourselves [cf. W. 254 (238)] in a mirror, goes out a glory in which we share, cf. Meyer ad loc.); dnb icvpiov irvtvparos by the Spirit of the Lord [yet cf. B. 843 (295)], ibid.; KktBpov dirb npoo-inrov rov Kvptov destruction proceeding from the (incensed, wrathful) countenance of the Lord, 2 Th. i. 9 (on this passage, to be explained after Jer. iv. 26 Sept., cf. Ewald); on the other hand, dvdijni^ts dirb wpo-o-anov r. k. Acts iii. 20 (19); dntKrdvBrjo-av anb (Rec. vnd) tov n\rjya>v, Rev. ix. 18. d<p' eavrov, d<j> iavrav, an ipav rov, an expression esp. com. in John, of himself (myself, etc.), from his own disposition or judgment, as distinguished from another's instruction, [cf. W. 872 (348)] : Lk. xii. 57; xxi. 30; Jn. v. 19, 30; xi. 51; xiv. 10; xvi. 13; xviii. 84 [L Tr WH anb <r«ivr.]; 2 Co. iii. 5; x. 7 [T Tr WH f'<p' i. (see eni A. I. 1 c'.)] ; of one's own will and motion, as opp. to the command and authority of another: Jn. vii. 17 sq. 28; viii. 4 2; x. 18, (Num. xvi. 28) ; by one's own power: Jn. xv. 4; by one's power and on one's own judgment: Jn. viii. 28 ; exx. fr. prof..auth. are given in Kypke, Observ. i. p. 391. [Cf. tv\i)v txovrts dtf> (al. e'(j> see nri A. 1.1 f.) iavr&v, Acts xxi. 23 WH txt.] after verbs of learning, knowing, receiving, dno is used of him to whom we are indebted for what we know, receive, possess, [cf. W. 370 (347) n., also De verb. comp. etc. It. ii. p.7 sq.; B. 324 (279) ; Mey. on 1 Co. xi. 23; per Contra Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. i. 12] : dxotW, Acts ix. 13; 1 Jn. i. 5; yivwo-Ktiv, Mk. xv. 45 ; \ap@dvtui, Mt. xvii. 25 sq.; 1 Jn. ii. 27 ; iii. 22 L T Tr WH; tXtiv, 1 Jn. iv. 21; 2 Co. ii. 3, etc.; napaXapfiavtiv, 1 Co. xi. 23 ; Scxeadat, Acts xxviii. 21; respecting pavBaveiv see above, II. 1 d.; Xarptva t<o Bta dnb npoyovav after the manner of the Xarptia received from my forefathers [cf. W. 372 (849); B. 322 (277)], 2 Tim. i. 3. yiverai pot, 1 Co. i. 30; iv. 5; \dpis dnb Btov or toO Btov, from God, the author, bestower, Ro. i. 7; 1 Co. i. 3; Gal. i. 3, and often; xal tovto dnb Btov, Phil. i. 28.  anr6 etc., constituted an apostle by authorityand commission, ete. [cf. W. 418 (390)], Gal. i. 1. after naoxtiv, Mt. xvi. 21; [akin to this, ace. to many, is Mt. xxvii. 9 iv tTinfjO-avro dnb r&v vlav 'lo-pafjK, R. V. mrg. whom they priced on the part of the sons of Israel; but see in I. 2 above], bb. When dno is used after passives (which is rare in the better Grk. auth., cf. Bnhdy. p. 222 sqq.; [B. 325 (280); W. 371 (847 sq.)]), the connection between the cause and the effect is conceived of as looser and more remote than that indicated by vrrd, and may often be expressed by on the part of (Germ, von Seiten), [A. V. generally of~\ : dnb tov Btov ano&tb'fiyiuvov approved (by miracles) according to God's will and appointment, Acts ii. 22 ; dnb Btov ntipafrnai the cause of my temptation is to be sought in God, Jas. i. 13; dne> areprjfxivos [T Tr WH a^vortp.] d0' vpaiv by your fraud, Jas. v. 4; airo&Mn/uifftrdat, Lk. xvii. 25; ySuuitaBij 17 a-o<pia dnb rav reKvav, Lk. vii. 35 ace. to some; see Sutaioa, 2]; ronov fiTotp-acrficvov dnb tov Beov by the will and direction of God, Rev. xii. 6 ; <5^Xov/xf wt djro (Rec. \m6, [see 6\\fa>J) nvtvparav aKoBdpr. Lk. vi. 18 (whose annoyance by diseases [(?) cf. vs. 17] proceeded from unclean spirits [A. V. vexed (troubled) with etc.]); dnb r. o-apxbs eWeXa-pevov by touching the flesh, Jude 23; [add Lk. i. 26 T Tr WH ancorakti 6 SyytXos dnb (R GL vjro) rov 6tov\. As in prof. auth. so also in the N. T. the Mss. sometimes vary between in6 and ino: e. g. in Mk. viii. 31; [Lk. viii. 43] ; Acts iv. 36; [x. 17, 83; xv. 4]; Ro. xiii. 1; [xv. 24]; Rev ix. 18; see W. 370 (347) sq.; B. 325 (280) sq.; [cf. Vincent and Dickson, Mod. Grk. 2d ed. App. § 41].IH. Phrases having a quasi-adverbial force, and indicating the manner or degree in which anything is done or occurs, are the following: dnb r. icapo'iav vpav from your hearts, i. e. willingly and sincerely, Mt. xviii. 35; dnb pipovs in part, 2 Co. i. 14; ii. 5; Ro. xi. 25; xv. 24; curd fitas sc. either (painjs with one voice, or yvap-qs or Tfrvx'is *"•'* one consent, one mind, Lk. xiv. 18 (cf. Kuinoel ad loc.; [W. 423 (394) ; 591 (549 sq.); yet see Lob. Par-alip. p. 863]).IV.  The extraordinary construction dnb 6 t>v (for Rec. dnb rov 6) xa\ 6 f/v k<u 6 ipx6p*vos, Rev. i. 4, finds its explanation in the fact that the writer seems to have used the words 6&>v xrX. as an indeclinable noun, for the purpose of indicating the meaning of the proper name mrr; cf. W. § 10, 2 fin.; [B. 50 (43)].V.  In composition dn-d indicates separation, liberation, cessation, departure, as in dnofiaKKa), dnoKonria, dnonikia, dnoXva, dnoKvrpaxns, dnaKyia, dnipxofuu; finishing and completion, as in dnaprl£a, dirort\e'a>; refers to the pattern from which a copy is taken, as in dnoypdcpeiv, depopov ovv, etc.; or to him from whom the action proceeds, as in dnoSfiKWfu, dnoroKjxaai, etc.diro-f3aCvo>: fut. dno^o-OfMi; 2 aor. dnffir/V, 1. to come down from : a ship (so even in Horn.), dire!, Lk. v. 2 [Tr mrg. br. an' airav]; tls tiji» yrjv, Jn. xxi. 9. 2. trop. to turn out, ' eventuate,' (so fr. Hdt. down) : anofUf-o-trai vp.lv th papripiov it will issue, turn out, Lk. xxi. 13; els o-wnjpiav, Phil. i. 19. (Job xiii. 16; Artem. oneir. 3, 66.) *60diro-pdXXu: 2 aor. vmi&akav \ [fr. Horn, down]; to throw off, cast away: a garment, Mk. x. 50. trop. confidence, Heb. x. 85*diro-piUirca: [impf. dnifSKtmv] ; to turn the eyes away from other things and fix them on some one thing; to look at attentively : eh n (often in Grk. writ.); trop. to look with steadfast mental gaze: tls t. luaBairoboaiav, Heb. xi. 26 [W. § 66, 2 d.].*dirtf-ptarros, -ov, thrown away, to be thrown away, rejected, despised, abominated: as unclean, 1 Tim. iv. 4, (in Hos. ix. 8 Symm. equiv. to KDB unclean; Horn. II. 2, 361; 3, 65; Lcian., Plut.).*<Wo-PoXf|, -qS, f), a throwing away, 1. rejection, repudiation, (dno^aWfa-dai to throw away from one's self, cast off, repudiate) : Ro. xi. 15 (opp. to itp6o-~Kriiv^is avr$>v, objec. gen.). 2. a losing, loss, (fr. oiro/3aXXo> in the sense of lose): Acts xxvii. 22 anofio\r) ^tix5s oiSf/iia eorat «£ vp&v no one of you shall lose his life [W. § 67, 1 e.].    (Plat., Plut., al.) •&iro-^Cvo|uu: [2 aor. cmtyev6)i.r)v\; 1. to be removed from, depart. 2. to die, (often so in Grk. writ, fr. Hdt. down); hence trop. djroy. nvi to die to any thing: rats Aftapriais anoytvofitvoi i. e. become utterly alienated from our sins, 1 Pet. ii. 24 [W. § 52, 4, 1 d.; B. 178 (155)].*dflKKypo^rfj, -fjs, t), (anoypaKpa) ; a. a writing off, transcript (from some pattern), b. an enrolment (or registration) in the public records of persons together with their property and income, as the basis of an dirorifi^o-is (census or valuation), i. e. that it might appear how much tax should be levied upon each one: Lk. ii. 2; Acts v. 37; on the occurrence spoken of in both pass. cf. Schiirer, Ntl. Zeitgesch. § 17, pp. 251, 262-286, and books there mentioned; [McClellan i. 392-399; B. D. s. v. Taxing].*&iro--yp<i4>u>: Mid., [pres. inf. dnoypd<pco-0ai] ; I aor. inf. amoypatyaxrOcu.; [pf. pass. ptcp. anoyeypafifiivos ; fr. Hdt. down] ; a. to write off, copy (from some pattern). b. to enter in a register or records; spec, to enter in the public records the names of men, their property and income, to enroll, (cf. mroypatpri, b.); mid. to have one's selfregistered, to enroll one's self [W.§ 38, 3]: Lk. ii. 1, 8, 5; pass, o! iv oipavols cmoyfypapnivoi, those whose names are inscribed in the heavenly register, Heb. xii. 23 (the reference is to the dead already received into the heavenly city, the figure being drawn from civil communities on earth, whose citizens are enrolled in a register).*dnro-SeCkw|u ; 1 aor. anehei^a; pf. pass. ptcp. atro8c8eiy-fuvoi; (freq. in Grk. writ. fr. Pind. Nem. 6, 80 down); 1. prop, to point away from one's self, to point out, show forth', to expose to view, exhibit, (Hdt. 3, 122 and often) : 1 Co. iv. 9. Hence 2. to declare :nvd, to show, prove what kind of a person any one is, Acts ii. 22 (where cod. D gives the gloss [dedofupjacr/MW); 2 Th. ii. 4 [Lchm. mrg. airoStiyviovra]. to prove by arguments, demonstrate: Acts xxv. 7.    Cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iv. p. 16 sq.*&ir4-S«$i$, tas, ij, (djro8«'<cro/u, q. v.), [fr. Hdt. down]; a. a making manifest, showing forth, b. a demonstration, proof: dn68ei£is vvtifutros Kai bwaptas a proof by the Spirit and power of God, operating in me, and stirring inthe minds of my hearers the most holy emotions and thus persuading them, 1 Co. ii. 4 (contextually opposed to proof by rhetorical arts and philosophic arguments, —the sense in which the Greek philosophers use the word; [see Heinrici, Corinthierbr. i. p. 103 sq.]).*dnro-SocaTtvu, Lk. xviii. 12, for anoSfKarda) q. v.; [cf. WH. App. p. 171].                                                                                        & i r o - 8 ¬ K a T < S i D ,   S > ,   i n f .   p r e s .   d i r o b e i c a T o ' i v ,   H e b .   v i i .   5   T   T r   W H   ( c f .   D e l i t z s c h   a d   l o c . ;   B .   4 4   ( 3 8 ) ;   [ T d f . ' s   n o t e   a d   l o c . ;   W H .   I n t r .   §   4 1 0 ] )   ;   ( S e x m - d a   q .   v . )   ;   a   b i b l .   a n d   e c c L   w o r d ;   S e p t .   f o r   " i f c y ? ;   t o   t i t h e   i .   e .   1 .   w i t h   a c e .   o f   t h e   t h i n g ,   t o   g i v e ,   p ay, a tenth of any thing: Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xi. 42; xviii. 12 where T WH, after codd. K* B only, have adopted dn-odcKarcvw, for which the simple biKarevat is more common in Grk. writ.; (Gen. xxviii. 22; Deut. xiv. 21 (22)). 2. nvd, to exact, receive, a tenth from any one: Heb. vii. 5; (1 S. viii. 15,17).   [B. D. s. v. Tithe.] *dmS-SeKTOs [so L T WH accent (and Bee. in 1 Tim. ii. 8) ; al. tmohcKTos, cf. Lob. Paralip. p. 498; Gb'ttling p. 313 sq.; Chandler § 529 sq.], -ov, (see airodc'xo/iat), a later word, accepted, acceptable, agreeable: 1 Tim. ii. 3; v. 4.*&ifo-8<xo|Mu; depon. mid.; impf. dirc8exdpi;i'; 1 aor. d»re-8e|dp>ji>; 1 aor. pass. direBix^i"'* common in Grk. writ., esp. the Attic, fr. Horn, down; in the N. T. used only by Luke; to accept what is offered from without (dn-d, cf. Lat. exdpio),to accept from, receive: nvd, simply, to give one access to one's self, Lk. ix. 11 L T Tr WH ; Acts xxviii. 30; with emphasis [cf. Tob. vii. 17 and Fritzsche ad loc], to receive with joy, Lk. viii. 40; to receive to hospitality, Acts xxi. 17 L T Tr WH; to grant one access to one's self in the capacity in which he wishes to be regarded, e. g. as the messenger of others, Acts xv. 4 (L T Tr WH naptb(x6r)o-av) ; as a Christian, Acts xviii. 27; metaph. ti, to receive into the mind with assent: to approve, Acts xxiv. 8; to believe, rbvXayov, Acts ii. 41; (so in Grk. writ. esp. Plato; cf. Ast, Lex. Plat. i. p. 232).*diroSt]|W<i>, -a>; 1 aor. an(&rjHJ](ra; (diroSruios, q. v.); to go away to foreign parts, go abroad: Mt. xxi. 33; xxv. 14 sq.; Mk. xii. 1; Lk. xv. 13 (e«s xatpav) ; xx. 9. (In Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. down.) *dird-Sruios, -ov, (fr. <mo and Sf//ios the people), away from one's people, gone abroad: Mk. xiii. 34 [R. V. sojourning in another country"].    [From Pind. down.]*&iro-S(Sa>|u, pres. ptcp. neut. airoSi&ovp (fr. the form -&8da>, Rev. xxii. 2, where T Tr WH mrg. -8i8ois [see WH. App. p. 167]); impf. 8 pers. plur. antdiSovv (for the more com. dmblboo-av, Acts iv. S3; cf. W. § 14,1 c.) ; fut. dnofSucra; 1 aor. awtHaiea; 2 aor. aariiwv, impv. a7roSor, subj. 3 pers. sing. d7ro8<u and in 1 Thess. v. 15 Tdf. diroSol (see Bibapi), opt. 8 pers. sing. diroda>n [or rather, -8<j»i/; for -frig is a subjunctive form] (2 Tim. iv. 14, for dn-oSoiT;, cf. W. § 14,1 g.; B. 46 (40); yet L T Tr WH d7ro8«o-«); Pass., 1 aor. inf. diroHoSfjvai; Mid., 2 aor. dneSofirjv, 3 pers. sing. direfSoro (Heb. xii. 16, where L WH diridero; cf. B. 47 (41); Delitzsch on Hebr. p. 632 note; [_WH. App. p. 167]); a common verb in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down, and the N. T. does not deviate at all from their use of it; prop* to put away by giving, to give up, give over, (Germ.diroSioplga61abgeben, [cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iv. p. 12 sq. who regards ami as denoting to give from some reserved store, or to give over something which might have been retained, or to lay off some burden of debt or duty; cf. Cope on Ariatot. rhet. 1,1, 7]); 1. to deliver, relinquish what is one's own: to trafut rov 'lyo-ov, Mt. xxvii. 58; hence in mid. to give away for one's own profit what is one's own, i e. to sell [W. 253 (238)J: «', Acts v. 8; Heb. xii. 16; Tiva, Acts vii. 9, (often in this sense in Grk. writ., esp. the Attic, fr. Hdt. 1, 70 down; in Sept. for "g 3, Gen. xxv. S3 etc.; Bar. vi. [i. e. Ep. Jer.] 27 (28)). * 2. to pay off, discharge, what is due, (because a debt, like a burden, is thrown off, air6, by being paid) : a debt (Germ. abtragen), Mt. v. 26; xviii. 25-30, 34; Lk. vii. 42; x. 35; xii. 59; wages, Mt. xx. 8; tribute and other dues to the government, Mt. xxii. 21; Mk. xii. 17; Lk. xx. 25; Ro. xiii. 7; produce due, Mt. xxi. 41; Heb. xii. 11; Rev. xxii. 2; opuovs things promised under oath, Mt. v. 33, cf. Num. xxx. 3, (eixrp> a vow, Deut. xxiii. 21, etc.); conjugal duty, 1 Co. vii. 3 ; d/uufids grateful requitals, 1 Tim. v. 4; \6yov to render account: Mt. xii. 36; Lk. xvi. 2; Acts xix. 40; Ro. xiv. 12 L txt. Tr txt.; Heb. xiii. 17; 1 Pet. iv. 5; fiaprvpiov to give testimony (as something officially due), Acts iv. 33. Hence 3. to give back, restore: Lk. iv. 20; [vii. 15 Lchm. mrg.]; ix. 42; xix. 8. 4. to requite, recompense, in a good or a bad sense: Mt. vi. 4, 6, 18; xvi. 27; Ro. ii. 6; 2 Tim. iv. [8], 14; Rev. xviii. 6; xxii. 12; kok6v dvrl kokov, Ro. xii. 17; 1 Th. v. 15; I Pet. iii. 9. [Comp.: dvr-airobiSa/u.]*Aro-Siropga; (btopifa, and this fr. Spos a limit); by drawing boundaries to disjoin, part, separate from another: Jude 19 (01 mrobiapLfavrts iavrovs those who by their wickedness separate themselves from the living fellowship of Christians; if iavr. be dropped, with Rec?* G L T Tr WH, the rendering is making divisions or separations).    (Aristot. pol. 4, 4, 13 [p. 1290", 25].)*(iiro-Soia|id{<i>: (see doiufidfa); 1 aor. dweboKifuura; Pass., 1 aor. arrfboKiftAaOip)', j>£.j>tcp.dirobe8oKtita(rpevos', to disapprove, reject, repudiate: Mt. xxi. 42; Mk. viii. 31; xii. 10; Lk. ix. 22; xvii. 25; xx. 17; 1 Pet. ii. 4, 7; Heb. xii. 17. (Equiv. to DKD in Ps. cxvii. (cxviii.) 22; Jer. viii. 9, etc.; in Grk. writ. fr. Hdt. 6, 130 down.)*diro-Sox^j -$*, q> {airobex°luu> 1- v<)> reception, admission, acceptance, approbation, [A. V. acceptation]: 1 Tim. i. 15; iv. 9. (Polyb. 2, 56,1; 6, 2,18, etc.; 6 \6yos diro-boxfi* rvyxdvei id. 1, 5, 5; Diod. 4, 84 ; Joseph, antt. 6,14, 4; al. [cf. Field, Otium Nbrv. pars iii. p. 124].) *4in5-0«ns, -eas, 17, [airori8r)fu], a putting off or away: 2 Pet. i. 14; 1 Pet. iii. 21. [In various senses fr. Hippoc. and Plato down.] *&iro-(H)io), ijs, ij, (diroridtj/u), a place in which any thing is laid by or up; a storehouse, granary, [A. V. garner, barn]: Mt. iii. 12; vi. 26; xiii. 30; Lk. iii. 17; xii. 18, 24. (Jer. xxvii. (1.) 26; Thuc. 6, 97.)*diro-8i]<ravp£S>; to put away, lay by in store, to treasure away, [seponendo thesaurum colligere, Win. De verb, comp. etc. Pt. iv. p. 10]; to store up abundance for future use: 1 Tim. vi. 19. [Sir. iii. 4; Diod., Joseph., Epict.. aL 1 *; to press on all sides, squeeze, press hard: Lk. viii. 45. (Num. xxii. 25; used also of pressing out grapes and olives, Diod. 8, 62; Joseph, antt. 2, 5, 2; [al.].)*diro-flvfjo-Kco, impf. diriBvrjo-Kov (Lk. viii. 42) ; 2 aor. ditidavov; fut. dnoBavoipcu, Ro. v. 7; Jn. viii. 21, 24, (see Vtnjo-Kn); found in Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down; to die (dir6, so as to be no more; [cf. Lat. emorior; Eng. die off or out, pass away]; Germ, absterben, versterben); I. used properly 1. of the nat ura 1 death of men: Mt. ix. 24 ; xxii. 24; Lk. xvi. 22; Jn. iv. 47 ; Ro. vii. 2, and very often; diroffvyo-Kovrts&vSpamoi subject to death, mortal, Heb. vii. 8 [B. 206 (178)]. 2. of the violent death—both of animals, Mt. viii. 32, and of men, Mt. xxvi. 85; Acts xxi. 13 etc.; 1 Pet iii. 18 L T Tr WH txt.; iv <poi>cj> pxixaipas, Heb. xi. 37; of the punishment of death, Heb. x. 28; often of the violent death which Christ suffered, as Jn. xii. 83; Ro. v. 6, etc. 3. Phrases: &iso6vt\o-k. ex twos to perish by means of something, [cf. Eng. to die of], Rev. viii. 11; iv rg d/iapria, iv rats d/iapnais, fixed in sin, hence to die unreformed, Jn. viii. 21, 24 ; iv r$ 'Abdfi by connection with Adam,1 Co. xv. 22; iv Kvpiq> in fellowship with, and trusting in, the Lord, Rev. xiv. 13; dno6v(\<iK. ti to die a certain death, Ro. vi. 10, (fidvarov /uucpov, Charit. p. 12 ed. D'Or-ville [1. i. c. 8 p. 17, 6 ed. Beck; cf. W. 227 (213); B. 149 (130)]); tj; dpapriif, used of Christ, 'that he might not have to busy himself more with the sin of men,' Ro. vi. 10; eavrtp to become one's own master, independent, by dying, Ro. xiv. 7 [cf. Meyer]; r$ Kvpia> to become subject to the Lord's will by dying, Ro. x i v .   8   [ c f .   M e y . ]   ;   b i d   r i v a   i .   e .   t o   s a v e   o n e ,   1   C o .   v i i i .   1 1 ;   o n   t h e   p h r a s e s   d n o - 6 v r ) f T K .   T r e p i   a n d   v i r e p   t w o s ,   s e e   i r e p i   I .   c .   &  %  a n d   i n t i p   I .  2   a n d   8 .       O r a t o r i c a l l y ,   a l t h o u g h   t h e   p r o p e r   s i g n i f i c a t i o n   o f   t h e   v e r b   i s   r e t a i n e d ,   K a f f   f j i x t p a v   d m i O v r j c n c c o  I meet death daily, live daily in danger of death, 1 Co. xv. 31, cf. 2 Co. vi. 9.       4. of trees which dry up, Jude 12; of seeds, which while being resolved into their elements in the ground seem to perish by rotting, Jn. xii. 24; 1 Co. xv. 36.  H. tropically, in various senses;       1. of eternal death, as it is called, i. e. to be subject to eternal misery, and that, too, already beginning on earth: Ro. viii. 13; Jn. vi. 50; xi. 26.       2. of moral death, in various senses;   a. to be deprived of real life, i. e. esp. of the power of doing right, of confidence in God and the hope of future blessedness, Ro. vii. 10; of the spiritual torpor of those who have fallen from the fellowship of Christ, the fountain of true life, Rev. iii. 2.   b. with dat. of the thing [cf. W. 210 (197); 428 (398); B. 178 (155)], to become wholly alienated from a thing, and freed from all connection with it: r£ voptp, Gal. ii. 19, which must also be supplied with drroBavovres (for so we must read for Rec"!* diro6av6vros) in Ro. vii. 6 [cf. W. 159 (150)]; rjj dfiapria, Ro. vi. 2 (in another sense in vs. 10; see I. 8 above); dir& r&v orot^«W rov icStr/iov so that your relation to etc. has passed away, Col. ii. 20, (dir6 rav iraB&v, Porphyr. de abst. animal. 1,41 [cf. B. 322 (277); W. 870 (34 7)]); true Christians are said simply drtoBavfiv, as having put off all sensibility to worldly things that draw them62airoKapaZoxLaaway from God, Col. iii. 3; since they owe this habit of mind to the death of Christ, they are said also ax o S a v t i v   a b v   X p « r r < p ,   E o .   v i   8 ;   C o L   i i .   2 0 .       [ C o m * .   :   e v v ^ a t o -  i i ,   m r o K o B u r r a a   ( M k .   i x .   1 2   R   G ) ,   a n d   d "!c a 0 i < r r d v « >   ( M k .   i x .   1 2   L   T   T r   [ b u t   W H   a i r o i c a T K T T d w B ,   s e e   t h e i r   A p p .   p .   1 6 8 ] ;   A c t s   i .   6 ;   c f .   W .   7 8   ( 7 5 ) ;   [ B .   4 4   s q .   ( 8 9 ) ] ) ;   f u t .   d i r o K a r c u r r r i a i o ;   2   a o r. &rcKorc(m)i> (with double augm., fcf. Ex. iv. 7; Jer. xxiii. 8], Mk. viii. 25 T Tr WH) ; 1 aor. pass. AwoKarttrrafhiv or, ace. to the better reading, with double augm. ancKarc-ori6r)v, Mt. xii. 18; Mk. iii. 5,; Lk. vi. 10 (Ignat. ad Smyrn. 11; cf.[ WH. App. p. 162]; W. 72 (69 sq.); [B. 85 (81)];  Mullach p. 22); as in Grk. writ, to restore to its former state; 2 aor. act. to be in its former state : used of parts of the body restored to health, Mt. xii. 18; Mk. iii. 5; Lk. vi. 10; of a man cured of blindness, Mk. viii. 25; of the restoration of dominion, Acts i. 6 (1 Mace. xv. 8) ; of the restoration of a disturbed order of affairs, Mt. xvii. 11; Mk. ix. 12; of a man at a distance from his friends and. to be restored to them, Heb. xiii. 19.*&iro-Ka\virra>: fut. diroicaXv\|ra>; 1 aor. dire KaXwfra; [Pass., pres. djroKaXvnrofHu]; 1 aor. antKoKvfpdtjv; 1 fut. djro-KaXu^drja-ofuu; in Grk. writ. fr. [Hdt. and] Plat, down; in Sept. equiv. to nSi; X. prop, to uncover, lay open what has been veiled or covered up; to disclose, make bare: Ex. xx. 26; Lev. xviii. 11 sqq.; Num. v. 18; Sus. 82; rh <rri\to\, Plat. Prot. p. 852 a.; rijv Ke(f>dKr]v, Plut. Crass. 6. 2. metaph, to make known, make manifest, disclose, what before was unknown', a. pass, of any method whatever by which something before unknown becomes evident: Mt. x. 26; Lk. xii. 2. b. pass, of matters which come to light from things done: Lk. ii. 35 [some make the verb mid. here]; Jn. xii. 88 (Is. liii. 1); Ko. i. 18; from the gospel: Ko. i. 17. c. airoKakvirrtiv ri rivi is used of God revealing to men things unknown [Dan. ii. 19 Theod., 22, 28; Ps. xcvii. (xcviii.) 2; 1 S. ii. 27, cf. iii. 21], especially those relating to salvation: — whether by deeds, Mt. xi. 25; xvi,, 17; Lk. x. 21 (by intimacy with Christ, by his words and acts);—or by the Holy Spirit, 1 Co. ii. 10; xiv. 30; Eph. iii. 5; Phil. iii. 15; 1 Pet. i. 12; tov v'ibv airov iv ipoi who, what, how great bis Son is, in my soul, Gal. i. 16. Of Christ teaching men: Mt. xi. 27; Lk. x. 22. d. pass, of things, previously notf-existent, coming into being and to view: as, ij bot-a, Bo. viii. 18 («i fipas to be conferred on us); 1 Pet. v. 1; ij tranjpia, 1 Pet. i. 5; q marts, Gal. iii. 23; the day of judgment, 1 Co. iii. 13. e. pass, of persons, previously concealed, making their appearance in public: of Christ, who will return from heaven where he is now hidden (Col. iii. 3) to the earth, Lk. xvii. 30; of Antichrist, 2 Th. ii. 3, 6, 8.*[On this word (and the Ml.) cf. Westcott, Introd. to the Study of the Gospels, p. 9 sq. (Am. ed. 34 sq.); Liicke, Einl. in d. Offienb. d. Johan. 2d ed. p. 18 sqq.; esp. F. G. B. van Bell, Disput. theolog. de vocabulis Qavepovv et &iroKo\ifarr6ii> in N. T., Lugd. Bat., 1849. <pavtp6a is thought to describe an external manifestation, to the senses and hence open to all, but single or isolated; hroKa\ivro> an internal disclosure, to thebeliever, and abiding. The tarmtJKv^a or unveiling precedes and produces the <t>cu/4pu<ns or manifestation; the former looks toward the object revealed, the latter toward the persons to whom the revelation is made. Others, however, seem to question the possibility of discrimination; see e. g. Friti-sche on Bom. vol. ii. 149.   Cf. 1 Co. iii. 13.]&iro-K&\v^ns, -taw, ij, (dwojcaXwrro), q. v.), an uncovering;1.  prop, a laying bare, making naked (1 S. xx. 30).2.  tropically, in N. T. and eccl. language [see end],   a. a disclosure of truth,  instruction,  concerning divine things before unknown—esp. those relating to the Christian salvation — given to the soul by God himself, or by the ascended Christ, esp. through the operation of the Holy Spirit (1 Co. ii. 10), and so to be distinguished from other methods of instruction; hence, Kara djroitd-Xv^tv yva>pi£(o-6ai, Eph. iii. 3.   7rvevfia diroKakfytats, a spirit received from God disclosing what and how great are the benefits of salvation, Eph. i. 17, cf. 18. with gen. of the obj., toC fiwortjpiov, Ro. xvi. 25.  with gen. of the sub]., Kvpiov, 'Iijo-oB Xptoroii, 2 Co. xii. 1 (revelations by ecstasies and visions, [so 7]) ; Gal. i. 12 ; Rev. i. 1 (revelation of future things relating to the consummation of the divine kingdom) ; kot dtrortdXinfriv, Gal. ii. 2; XaX«t> iv awoK. to speak on the ground of [al. in the form of] a revelation, agreeably to a revelation received, 1 Co. xiv. 6; equiv. to mroKXKakvmiivov, in t                                                                                                                                                                                                h e   p h r a s e   a w o K o - X u i J / w   e \ ¬ i v ,   1   C o .   x i v .   2 6 .       b .   e q u i v .   t o   t 6   d j r o i e a X t ! - i r r e a & u   a s   u s e d   o f   e v e n t s   b y   w h i c h   t h i n g s   o r   s t a t e s   o r   p e r s o n s   h i t h e r t o   w i t h d r a w n   f r o m   v i e w   a r e   m a d e   v i s i b l e   t o   a l l ,   m a n i f e s t a t i o n ,   a p p e a r a n c e ,   c f .   a i r o K c i K i m T a ,   2 ,   d .   a n d   e . :   < f > & s   tls diroitdX. i6vS>v a light to appear to the Gentiles [al. render ' a light for a revelation (of divine truth) to the Gentiles,' and so refer the use to a. above], Lk. ii. 32 ) diroK. dcfcatoKpurtas 6eov, Ro. ii. 5; tS>v vlav toS Btov, the event in which it will appear who and what the sons of God are, by the glory received from God at the last day, Ro. viii. 19 ; rijr 8<5|ijs tov Xpurroi, of the glory clothed with which he will return from heaven, 1 Pet. iv. 13; of this return itself the phrase is used ano-KaKvifns tov nipiov 'I. Xpioroti: 2 Th. i. 7; 1 Co. i. 7; 1 Pet. i. 7, 13.    (Among Grk. writ. Plut. uses the word once, Cat. maj. c. 20, of the denudation of the body, [also in Paul. Aemil. 14 d. vftdrav; in Quomodo adul. ab amic. 82 d. ifuxprias; cf. Sir. xi. 27; xxii. 22 etc.    See Trench § xciv. and reft. s.. v. airoKoKvma, fin.]) *ttiro-KapaSoKta, -as, fj, (ir. airoKapaboKeZv, and this f r. djn>, icdpa the head, and 8ok(Iv in the Ion. dial, to watch; hence Kupa8oite!i> [Hdt. 7. 163, 168; Xen. mem. 3, 5, 6; Eur., al.] to watch with head erect or outstretched, to direct attention to anything, to wait for in suspense; anoKapaboKflv (Polyb. 16, 2, 8; 18, 81, 4; 22, 19, 3; [Plut. parall. p. 310, 43, vol. vii. p. 235 ed. Reiske]; Joseph, b. j. 3, 7, 26, and in Ps. xxxvi. (xxxvii.) 7 Aq. for bVinnn), anxiously [?] to look forth from one's post. But the prefix dire refers also to time (like the Germ. ab in dbwarten, [cf. Eng. wait it out]), so that it signifies constancy in expecting; hence the noun, found in Paul alone and but twice, denotes),anxious\7] and persistent expectation: Ro. viii. 19; Phil. i. 20.   This word is very63fully discussed by C. F. A. Fritzsche in Fritzschiorum Opuscc. p. 150 sqq.; [cf. Ellic. and Lghtft. on Phil. 1. c.].*4iro-KaT-oXXd<r<r<i) or -mo : 1 aor. anoKan)KKa£a.; 2 aor. pass. anoKanj\\dyr)Te (Col. i. 22 (21) L Tr mrg. WH mrg.); to reconcile completely (dn6), [al. to reconcile back again, bring back to a former state of harmony; Ellic. on Eph. ii. 16; Bp. Lghtft. or Bleek on Col. i. 20; Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iv. p. 7 sq.; yet see Mey. on Eph. 1. c.; Fritzsche on Bom. vol. i. p. 2 78; (see card V.)], (cf. kotoK-\dtr<ra>) : Col. i. 22 (21) [cf. Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.]; nva run, Eph. ii. 16; concisely, irdvra th axn6v [better airov with edd.; cf. B. p. Ill (97) and s. v. avrov], to draw to himself by reconciliation, or so to reconcile that they should be devoted to himself, Col. i. 20 [W. 212 (200) but cf. § 49, a. c. 5.]. (Found neither in prof. auth. nor in the Grk. O. T.) *diro-KaT<i-<rra<ris, -tas, f), (aTroKadiarqpi, q. v.), restoration: ran irdvruv, the restoration not only of the true theocracy but also of that more perfect state of (even physical) things which existed before the fall, Acts iii. 21; cf. Meyer ad loc.  (Often in Polyb., Diod., Plut., al.)*[diro-KOT-tordvtt, see ajroKadio~n)fii.]&ir6-K(i|Uu; to be laid away, laid by, reserved, (cm6 as in dirodijaavpifa [q. v.], diroBqio)) ; a. prop.: Lk. xix. 20. b. metaph., with dat. of pers., reserved for one, awaiting him: Col. i. 5 (tXnis hoped-for blessedness); 2 Tim. iv. 8 (arecpavos); Heb. ix. 27 (dirodavtiv, as in 4 Mace. viii. 10).   (In both senses in Grk. writ. fr. Xen. down.)*A*OK<$aXCtu: 1 aor. vmtKt^MSKura; (xe^aXij); to cut off the head, behead, decapitate: Mt. xiv. 10; Mk. vi. 16, 27 (28) ; Lk. ix. 9. .A later Grk. word: [Sept. Ps. fin.] ; Epict. diss. 1, 1, 19; 24; 29; Artem. oneir. 1, 35; cf. Fischer, De vitiis lexx. N. T. p. 690 sqq.; Lob. ad Phryn. p. 341*AmMcXcfo: 1 aor. direicKeura; to shut up : njv dvpav, Lk. xiii. 25. (Gen. xix. 10; 2 S. xiii. 17 sq.; often in Hdt.; in Attic prose writ. fr. Thuc. down.) *Airo-K&nTw: 1 aor. aniKotya; fut. mid. airoKo^rofiai; to cut off, amputate: Mk. ix. 43, [45]; Jn. xviii. 10, 26; Acts xxvii. 82; o(pikov Ka\ diroKoyjrovrat I would that they (who urge the necessity of circumcision would not only circumcise themselves, but) would even mutilate themselves (or cut off their privy parts), Gal. v. 12. diroKo-irrtirOai occurs in this sense in Deut. xxiii. 1; [Philo de alleg. leg. iii. 3 ; devict. off. § 13; cf. despec. legg.i.§7]; Epict. diss. 2, 20,19; Lcian. Eun. 8; [Dion Cass. 79,11; Diod. Sic. 3, 31], and other pass, quoted by Wetst. ad loc. [and Soph. Lex. s. v.]. Others incorrectly: I would that they would cut themselves off from the society of Christians, quit it altogether; [cf. Mey. and Bp. Lghtft. ad loc.].*.dird-Kpi|ia, -to?, t6, (diroieptvoiuu, q. v. in diroKplvw), an answer: 2 Co. i. 9, where the meaning is, ' On asking myself whether I should come out safe from mortal peril, I answered, "I must die.'" (Joseph, antt. 14, 10, 6 of an answer (rescript) of the Roman senate; [similarly in Polyb. exept. Vat. 12, 26", 1].)*diro-tcpCvu: [Pass., 1 aor. cmtKpWrfv; 1 fut. dnoKpt6rj<ro-pat}; i. to part, separate; Pass, to be parted, separated, (1 aor. dfftKpl6t)v was separated, Horn. II. v. 12 ; Thuc. 2, 49 ; [4, 72]; Theoph. de caus. plant. 6, 14, 10; [other exx. in Veitch s. v.]). ii. to give sentence against one, decide that he has lost; hence Mid., [pres. airoK.pivop.ai; 1 aor.3 pers. sing, dirfttpivaro]; (to give forth a decision from myself[W. 258 (288)]), to give answer, to reply; so from Thuc. down (and even in Hdt. 5, 49 [Gaisf.]; 8, 101 [Gaisf., Bekk.], who generally uses £ it OKpivopai).   But the earlier and more elegant Grk. writ, do not give this sense to the pass, tenses dittKpidrjv, anoKpi.6r]crop.at.-    " The example adduced from Plat. Alcib. Secund. p. 149 b.fcf. Stallb. p. 888] is justly discredited by Sturz, De dial. Alex, p. 148, since it is without parallel, the author of the dialogue is uncertain, and, moreover, the common form is sometimes introduced by copyists."  Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 108; [cf. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 186 sq.; Veitch s. v.; W. 28 (22)].   But from Polyb. down diroKptdrjvai and diroKpivao-Bat are used indiscriminately, and in the Bible the pass, forms are by far the more common. In the N. T. the aor. middle dntKpivaro is found only in Mt. xxvii. 12; Mk. xiv. 61; Lk. iii. 16; xxiii. 9; Jn. v. 17, 19; xii. 28 [E G L Tr mrg.]; Acts iii. 12; in the great majority of places dircKpidt) is used; cf. W. § 39, 2; [B. 51(44)].       1. to give an answer to a question proposed, to answer;   a. simply: kolKSis, Mk. xii. 28; vovvfxas, 34; SpB&s, Lk. x. 28; jrpos n, Mt. xxvii. 14.   b. with ace.: \6yov, Mt. xxii. 46; ovdh, Mt. xxvii. 12; Mk. xiv. 61; xv.4 sq.    c. with dat. etc.: ew «aora>, Col. iv. 6; together with the words which the answerer uses, Jn. v. 7j 11; vi. 7, 68, etc.; the dat. omitted: Jn. vii. 46; viii. 19,49, etc. irpos nva, Acts xxv. 16.    joined with <j>dvat, or \tyetu, or tlndv, in the form of a ptcp., as dwoicpiBch fine or etptj or Xryfi: Mt. iv. 4; viii. 8 ; xv. 18 ; Lk. ix. 19 ; xiii. 2; Mk. x. 3, etc.; or direKplBr) \4yav: Mt. xxv. 9, 37,44, Lk. iv. 4 [R G L] ; viii. 50 [R G Tr mrg. br.] ; Jn. i. 26; x. 33 [Rec] ; xii. 23.   But John far more frequently says direiepldt] na\ (he: Jn. i. 48 (49) ; ii. 19; iv. 13 ; vii. 16, 20 [R G], 52, etc.    d. foil, by the inf.: Lk. xx. 7; foil, by the ace. with inf.: Acts xxv. 4; foil, by Sri: Acts xxv. 16. 2.    In imitation of the Hebr. njJJ (Gesenius, Thesaur. ii. p. 1047) to begin to speak, but always where something has preceded (either said or done) to which the remarks refer [W. 19] : Mt. xi. 25; xii. 38; xv. 15; xvii. 4; xxii. 1; xxviii. 5; Mk. ix. 5, [6 T Tr WH]; x. 24; xi. 14; xii. 85; Lk. xiv. 8; Jn. ii. 18; v. 17; Acts iii. 12; Rev. vii. 13.    (Sept. [Deut. xxvi. 5]; Is. xiv. 10; Zech. i. 10; iii. 4, etc.; 1 Mace. ii. 17; viii. 19; 2 Mace. xv. 14.) [Comp. : avr-mroKpivonaiS]diri-Kpuris, -eas, ij, {airoKpii/opai, see dironpivw), a replying, an answer: Lk. ii. 47; xx. 26; Jn. i. 22; xix. 9. (From [Theognis, 1167 ed. Bekk., 345 ed. Welck., and] Hdt. down.) *&iro-Kpvirr<i>: 1 aor. diriKpv^fa; pf. pass. ptcp. luvos; a. to hide: ri, Mt. xxv. 18 (L T Tr WH cK b. Pass, in the sense of concealing, keeping secret: <r<xf>ia, 1 Co. ii. 7; fwarfipiov, Col. i. 26 (opp. to (pavepovadai); with the addition of iv t<5 dap, Eph. iii. 9 ; ri airo twos,64d-rroXkv/uLk. x. 21; Mt. zL 25 (L T Tr WH Upv^ras), in imitation of the Hebr. Jlp, Ps. xxxvii. (xxxviii.) 10; cxviii. (cxix.) 19; Jer. xxxix. (xxxii.) 17; of. Kpimrta, [B. 149 (130); 189 (168); W. 227 (218)]. (In Grk. writ. fr. Horn, down.) *                                                         __------..6.idK9v$at,-av, (anoKpmra), hidden, secreted/QXk. iv.jj; Lk. viii. 17. stored up: Col. ii. 8. (Dan. xi. ^SXTEeod.]; Is. xlv. 8; 1 Mace. i. 28; Xen., Eur.; [cf. Bp. Lghtft. on the word, Col. 1. c.].) *airo-KTcCva>, and Aeol. -KTewa (Mt. x. 28 L T Tr; Mk. xii. 5 G L T Tr ; Lk. xii. 4 L T Tr; 2 Co. iii. 6 T Tr; cf. Fritzsche on Mk. p. 507 sq.; [Tdf. Prolog, p. 79]; W. 83 (79); [B. 61 (54)]), diroierivw (Grsb. in Mt. x. 28; Lk. xii. 4), arroKTaipco (Lchm. in 2 Co. iii. 6; Rev. xiii. 10), airoKTcwvvTtg (Mk. xii. 5 WH); fut. dwoKTeva; 1 aor. arriKTfiva; Pass., pres. inf. dwoKriweo-Oai (Rev. vi. 11 GLTTr WH) ; 1 aor. dirtKravdriv (Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 227; W. L c.; [B. 41 (35 sq.)]) ; [fr. Horn, down]; 1. prop, to kill in any way whatever, (0770 i. e. so as to put out of the way; cf. [Eng. to kill off], Germ, abschlach-ten) : Mt. xvi. 21; xxii. 6; Mk. vi. 19; ix. 81; Jn. v. 18; viii. 22; Acts iii. 15; Rev. ii. 18, and very often; [cotokt. iv 6avdrv, Rev. ii. 23; vi. 8, cf. B. 184 (159); W. 339 (319)]. to destroy (allow to perish) : Mk. iii. 4 [yet al. take it here absol., to kill]- 2. metaph. to extinguish, abolish: tt/v tx^Pav' Eph. ii. 16; to inflict moral death, Ro. vii. 11 (see cmodvt}<TKa>, II. 2) ; to deprive of spiritual life and procure eternal misery, 2 Co. iii. 6 [Lchm. anonralva; see above].dnro-Kw'w, S>, or anoxia, (hence 3 pers. sing. pres. either airoKvei [so WH] or arroidei, Jas. i. 15; cf. W. 88 (84); B. 62 (54)) ; 1 aor. direnvrjcra; (kvco, or xvea, to be pregnant ; cf. eyievoy); to bring forth from the womb, give birth to: nvd, Jas. i. 15; to produce, ibid. 18. (4 Mace. xv. 17; Dion. Hal. 1, 70; Plut., Lcian., Ael. v. h. 5, 4 ; Hdian. 1, 5,13 [5 ed. Bekk.]; 1,4, 2 [1 ed. Bekk.].)*&iro-Kv\Cu: fut. airoKvXiaco; 1 aor. dirtiaSKura; pf. pass. [8 pers. sing. dTroxmiXtcrnu Mk. xvi. 4 R G L but T Tr WH <ii/a(c«.], ptcp. airoKSKu^io-fiAvos; to roll off or away: Mt. xxyiii. 2; Mk. xvi. 3 ; Lk. xxiv. 2. (Gen. xxix. 3, 8, 10; Judith xiii. 9; Joseph, antt. 4, 8, 37; 5, 11, 8; Lcian. rhet. praec. 8.)    But see dvatevkia*&m-\a|LP&vo>; fut. aito\i^roiuu (Col. iii. 24; LTTr WH cmoK^fi^taBt; see \ajxfiava>); 2 aor. cmtkafiov; 2 aor. mid. aTtikafioiujv; fr. Hdt. down; 1. to receive (from another, amo [cf. Mey. on Gal. iv. 5; Ellic. ibid, and Win. De verb. comp. etc. as below]) what is due or promised (cf. anoBidwfii, 2 ) : t. vioBeaiav the adoption promised to believers, Gal. iv. 5; ra ayaOd <rov thy good things," which thou couldst expect and as it were demand, which seemed due tothee" (Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iv. p. 13), Lk. xvi. 25. Hence 2. to take again or back, to recover: Lk. vi. 34 [T Tr txt. WH \afieiv~\; xv. 27; and to receive by way of retribution: Lk. xviii. 80 (L txt. Tr mrg. WH txt. Xd/3jjV, xxiii. 41; Ro. i. 27; 2 Jn. 8; Col. iii. 24. 3. to take from others, take apart or aside; Mid. nva, to take a person with one aside out of the view of others: with the addition of cmb tov S^Xoti kut Ihlav in Mk. vii.88, (Joseph, b. j. 2, 7, 2; and in the Act., 2 Mace. vi. 21; 'YardoTTfa airoXa&av finvvov, Hdt. 1, 209; Arstph. ran. 78; I6ia eva t&v rpuhv arrokafiav, App. b. civ. 5, 40). 4. to receive any one hospitably: 3 Jn. 8, where L T Tr WH have restored viroXapj3di/cu'.*diriXawris, -ear, fj, (fr. cmo\aia> to enjoy), enjoyment (Lat. fructus): 1 Tim. vi. 17 (ds dnoKavaiv to enjoy); Heb. xi. 25 (ipaprias dweSX. pleasure born of sin). (In Grk. writ. fr. [Eur. and] Thuc. down.)*diro-Xtt-irw: [impf. dw(\enrov, WH txt. in 2 Tim. iv. 18, 20;Tit.i.5]; 2aor.d7rcX«7ro>'; [fr.Horn.down]; 1. to leave, leave behind: one in some place, Tit. i. 5 L T Tr WH; 2 Tim. iv. 18, 20. Pass. diroXctWrcu it remains, is reserved: Heb. iv. 9; x. 26; foil, by ace. and inf., Heb. iv. 6.       2. to desert, forsake: a place, Jude 6.*Airo-XeCxo): [impf. dneXeixov]; to lick off, lick up : Lk. xvi. 21 R G; cf. ArtXfi'x<». ([Appllon. Rhod. 4, 478]; Athen. vi. c. 18 p. 250 a.) *d*HSXXv|u and diroXXuo) ([oji-oXXuk Jn. xii. 25 T Tr WH], impv. diroXXue Ro. xiv. 15, [cf. B. 45 (89); WH. App. p. 168 sq.]); fut. diroXc<T<B and (ljCo. i. 19 dno\S> fr. a pass, in the O. iCwhere^often) djroXS (cf. W. 83 (80) ; [B. 64 (56)]); 1 aor. diraXfo-a; to destroy; Mid.,pres. diroX-Xv/xai; [impf. 3 pers. plur. diraXKvvro 1 Co. x. 9 T Tr WH]; fat. diroXoufiai; 2 aor. djra>Xo/ijjv; (2 pf. act. ptcp. dm>Xa>X<&s); [f r. Horn, down]; to perish. 1. to destroy i. e. to put out of the way entirely, abolish, put an end to, ruin: Mk. i. 24; Lk. iv. 84; xvii. 27, 29; Jude 5; i^v <jo<piav render useless, cause its emptiness to be perceived, 1 Co. i. 19 (fr. Sept. of Is. xxix. 14) ; to kill: Mt. ii. 18; xii. 14; Mk. ix. 22; xi. 18; Jn. x. 10, etc.; contextually, to declare that one must be put to death: Mt. xxvii. 20; metaph. to devote or give over to eternal misery: Mt. x. 28; Jas. iv. 12; contextually, by one's conduct to cause another to lose eternal salvation: Ro. xiv. 15. Mid. to perish, to be lost, ruined, destroyed; a. of persons; o. properly : Mt. viii. 25; Lk. xiii. 8, 5, 33 ; Jn. xi. 50; 2 Pet. iii. 6; Jude 11, etc.; dn-oXXvfmi Xifiw, Lk. xv. 17; iv /xaxalpa, Mt. xxvi. 52 ; KaTa/3aXX6pei/ot, dXX' oiie aTroXXu-fievoi, 2 Co. iv. 9. p. tropically, to incur the loss of true or eternal life; to be delivered up to eternal misery: Jn. iii. 15 [R L br.], 16; x. 28; xvii. 12, (it must be borne in mind, that ace. to John's conception eternal life begins on earth, just as soon as one becomes united to Christ by faith); Ro. ii. 12; 1 Co. viii. 11; xv. 18; 2 Pet. iii. 9. Hence 01 <r<o(6nevoi they to whom it belongs to partake of salvation, and oi djroXXvjievot those to whom it belongs to perish or to be consigned to eternal misery, are contrasted by Paul: 1 Co. i. 18; 2 Co. ii. 15; iv. 3; 2 Th. ii. 10, (on these pres. ptcps. cf. W. 342 (821); B. 206 (178)). b. of things; to be blotted out, to vanish away: ij elirpeireta, Jas. i. 11; the heavens, Heb. i. 11 (fr. Ps. ci. (cii.) 27); to perish,—of things which on being thrown away are decomposed, as pe\os tov o-&)mtos, Mt. v. 29 sq.; remnants of bread, Jn. vi. 12; — or which perish in some other way, as ^pauns, Jn. vi. 27; xpverlov, 1 Pet. i. 7; —or which are ruined so that they can no longer subserve the use for which they were designed, as oi do-ieot: Mt.^Avo\K6<ovix. 17;Mk.ii. 22;Lk.v.37.       2. to destroyi. e. to lose;a.  prop.: Mt. x. 42; Mk. ix. 41 (r6v /uaddv avrov); Lk. xv. 4, 8, 9; ix. 25; xvii. 83; Jn. xii. 25; 2 Jn. 8, etc.b.  metaph. Christ is said to lose any one of his followers (whom the Father has drawn to discipleship) if such a one becomes wicked and fails of salvation: Jn. vi. 39, cf. xviii. 9.   Mid. to be lost: 6p\£ ex njs Kt<paXrjs, Lk. xxi. 18; 0. dirb Ttjs KtcpdXrjs, Acts xxvii. 34 (Rec. irto-etrai); t& Xa/itrpa drrwXero diro <rov, Rev. xviii. 14 (Rec. dnrjXBc). Used of sheep, straying from the flock: prop. Lk. xv. 4 (t6 diroXaXos, in Mt. xviii. 12 rd irXava/tevov).   Metaph. in accordance with the O. T. comparison of the people of Israel to a flock (Jer. xxvii. (1.) 6; Ezek. xxxiv. 4, 16), the Jews, neglected by their religious teachers, left to themselves and thereby in danger of losing eternal salvation, wandering about as it were without guidance, are called ra irpofiara ra diroXaXora tov oikov 'lo-paf/X: Mt. x. 6; xv. 24, (Is. liii. 6; 1 Pet. ii. 25); and Christ, reclaiming them from wickedness, is likened to a shepherd and is said {jjreiv Kai o~a>£tiv t6 diroXaXos: Lk. xix. 10; Mt. xviii. 11 Rec.   [Comf. : o-vv-airoXXv/xi.]'AvoXXiav, -OVTOS, 6, (ptcp. fr. diroXXvco), Apollyon (a prop, name, formed by the author of the Apocalypse),1.  e. Destroyer: Rev. ix. 11; cf. 'Afid88a>v, [and B. D. s. v.].*'AiroAXovfa, -ay, 7, Apollonia, a maritime city of Macedonia, about a day's journey [ace. to the Antonine Itinerary 32 Roman miles] from Amphipolis, through which Paul passed on his way to Thessalonica [36 miles further] : Acts xvii. 1.   [See B. D. s. v.] *'AiroWcfe [ace. to some, contr. fr. 'AiroXXuvios, W. 102 (97); acc. to others, the 0 is lengthened, cf. Fick, Griech. Personennamen, p. xxi.], gen. -a (cf. B. 20 (18) sq.; [W. 62 (61)]), accus. -a (Acts xix. 1) and -i>v (1 Co. iv. 6 T Tr WH; Tit. iii. 13 T WH; cf. [WH. App. p. 157]; Kiihner i. p. 315), 6, Apollos, an Alexandrian Jew who became a Christian and a teacher of Christianity, attached to the apostle Paul: Acts xviii. 24; xix. 1; 1 Co. i. 12; iii. 4 sqq. 22; iv. 6; xvi. 12; Tit.iii. 13.*&iro\oyeo|i(u, -ov/iat; impf. direXoyov/irjv (Acts xxvi. 1); 1 aor. direkoyi)ad\ap>; 1 aor. pass. inf. anoXoyqdfivm, in a reflex, sense (Lk. xxi. 14); a depon. mid. verb (fr. Xoyos), prop, to speak so as to absolve (dno) one's self, talk one's self off of a charge etc.; X. to defend one's self, make one's defence: absoL, Lk. xxi. 14; Acts xxvi. 1; foil, by Sri, Acts xxv. 8; r«, to bring forward something in defence of one's self, Lk. xii. 11; Acts xxvi. 24, (often so in Grk. writ, also); rh irtpi t/iavrov air. either I bring forward what contributes to my defence [?], or I plead my own cause [R. V. make my defence], Acts xxiv. 10; irtpi with gen. of the thing and dm with gen. of pers., concerning a thing before one's tribunal, Acts xxvi. 2; with dat. of the person whom by my defence I strive to convince that I am innocent or upright, to defend or justify myself in one's eyes [A. V. unto], Acts xix. 33 ; 2 Co. xii. 19, (Plat. Prot. p. 359 a.; often in Lcian., Plut.; [cf. B. 172 (149)]).2.  to defend a person or a thing (so not infreq. in prof, auth.): Ro. ii. 15 (where acc. to the context the5"                                                              dvoXvcodeeds of men must be understood as defended); ni *tpl c'/tov, Acts xxvi. 2 (but see under 1).*&roXoyfa, -as, f), (see diroXoyeo/uu), verbal defence, speech in defence : Acts xxv. 16; 2 Co. vii. 11; Phil. i. 7, 17 (16); 2 Tim. i v. 16; with a dat. of the pers. who is to hear the defence, to whom one labors to excuse or to make good his cause: 1 Co. ix. 3 ; 1 Pet. iii. 15; in the same sense fj diroX. fj irp6s nva, Acts xxii. 1, (Xen. mem. 4,8,5).*diro-Xovu: to wash off or away; in the N. T. twice in 1 aor. mid. figuratively [cf. Philo de mut. nom. § 6, i. p. 585 ed. Mang.] : drnXovo-curde, 1 Co. vi. 11; pdirno-at Kal dnoXova-M ras d/taprias arov, Acts xxii. 16. For the sinner is unclean, polluted as it were by the filth of his sins. Whoever obtains remission of sins has his sins put, so to speak, out of God's sight,—is cleansed from them in the sight of God. Remission is [represented as] obtained by undergoing baptism; hence those who have gone down into the baptismal bath [lavacrum, cf. Tit. iii. 5; Eph. v. 26] are said diroXotio-ao-Oai to have washed themselves, or ras A/tapr. diroXovo-ao-dai to have washed away their sins, i. e. to have been cleansed from their sins.*dTro-XvTpoxris, -tas, fj, (fr. diroXvrpda signifying a. to redeem one by paying the price, cf. Xvrpov: Plut. Pomp. 24; Sept. Ex. xxi. 8; Zeph. iii. 1; b. to let one go free on receiving the price: Plat. legg. 11 p. 919 a. ; Polyb. 22, 21, 8; [cf.] Diod. 13, 24), a releasing effected by payment of ransom; redemption, deliverance, liberation procured bythe payment of'a ransom;      X. prop.: nSXtav(fiaXwrav, Plut. Pomp. 24 (the only pass, in prof. writ, where the word has as yet been noted; [add, Joseph, antt. 12, 2,3; Diod. frag. 1. xxxvii. 5, 3 p. 149, 6 Dind.; Philo, quod omn. prob. lib. § 17]). 2. everywhere in the Jf. T. metaph., viz. deliverance effected through the death of Christ from the retributive wrath of a holy God and the merited penalty of sin: Ro. iii. 24; Eph. i. 7; Col. i. 1'4, (cf. f£ayopd£a, dyopafa, Xvrpda, etc. [and Trench § Ixxvii.]); dnoXvrp. rw irdpa$do-tav deliverance from the penalty of transgressions, effected through their expiation, Heb. ix. 15, £ci. Delitzsch ad loc. and Fritzsche on Rom. vol. ii. p. 178) ; fjiupa diroXvrpao-tas, the last day, when consummate liberation is experienced from the sin still lingering even in the regenerate, and from all the ills and troubles of this life, Eph. iv. 30; in the same sense the word is apparently to be taken in 1 Co. i. 30 (where Christ himself is «aid to be redemption, i. e. the author of redemption, the one without whom we could have none), and is to be taken in the phrase diro-Xvrp. rijs irepiiroa)o-tas, Eph. i. 14, the redemption which will come to his possession, or to the men who are God's own through Christ, (cf. Meyer ad loc.) ; tov o-a/xaros, deliverance of the body from frailty and mortality, Ro. viii. 23 [W. 187 (176)]; deliverance from the hatred and persecutions of enemies by the return of Christ from heaven, Lk. xxi. 28, cf. xviii. 7 sq.; deliverance or release from torture, Heb. xi. 35.*<nro-Xva); [impf. direXvov]; fut. diroXvo-a; 1 aor. enre-Xvo-a; Pass., pf. diroXeXvpai; 1 aor. dirtXifyv; [fut. diro-ovrrofiacra-to66avoppl/tprto\v6i\ao\uu\; impf. mid. dweXwfyuji' (ActB xxviii. 25); used in the N. T. only in the historical books and in Heb. xiii. 23; to loose from, sever by loosening, undo, [see air6, V.]; 1. to set free : nva nvos (so in Grk. writ, even fr. Horn, down), to liberate one from a thing (as from a bond), Lk. xiii. 12 (dn-oXe'Xwcu [thou hast been loosed i. e.] be thou free from [cf. W. § 40,4] ttjs do-fleveias [L T djr&T. do-fl.]). 2. to let go, dismiss, (to detain no longer) ; nva, a. a suppliant to whom liberty to depart is given by a decisive answer: Mt. xv. 23; Lk. ii. 29 (' me whom thou hadst determined to keep on earth until I had seen the salvation prepared for Israel, cf. vs. 26, thou art now dismissing with my wish accomplished, and this dismission is at the same time dismission also from lif e' — in reference to which cmoKveiv is used in Num. xx. 29; Tob. iii. 6; [cf. Gen. xv. 2; 2 Mace. vii. 9; Plut. consol. ad Apoll. § 13 cf. 11 fin.]); [Acts xxiii. 22]. b. to bid depart, send away: Mt. xiv. 15, 22 sq.; xv. 32, 39; Mk. vi. 36,45; viii. 3, 9; Lk. viii. 38; ix. 12 ; xiv. 4; Acts xiii. 3; xix. 41 (rt)v £kkKi)<7uiii) \ pass. Acts xv. 30, 33. 3. to let go free, to release; a. a captive, i. e. to loose>his bonds and bid him depart, to give him liberty to depart: Lk. xxii. 68 [R G L Tr inbr.]; xxiii. 22; Jn. xix. 10; Acts xvi. 35 sq.; xxvi. 32 (drroXeXvo-ftu iblvaro [might have been set at liberty, cf. B. 217 (187), § 139, 27 c.; W. 305 (286) i. e.] might be free; pf. as in Lk. xiii. 12 [see 1 above, andW. 334 (313)]); Actsxxviii. 18; Heb. xiii. 23; dttoK. nva Tin to release one to one, grant him his liberty: Mt. xxvii. 15,17,21, 26 ; Mk. xv. 6, 9,11,15 ; Lk. xxiii. [16], 17 [R, L inbr.], 18, 20, 25; [Jn. xviii. 39]. b. to acquit one accused of a crime and set him at liberty: Jn. xix. 12; Acts iii. 13. c. indulgently to grant a prisoner leave to depart: Acts iv. 21,23; v. 40; xvii. 9. d. to release a debtor, i. e. not to press one's claim against him, to remit his debt: Mt. xviii. 27 ; metaph. to pardon another his offences against me: Lk. vi. 37, (ttjs dftapri'a; anoKvtvdcu, 2 Mace. xii. 45). 4. used of divorce, as anokvart)v yvvaiKa to dismiss from the house, to repudiate: Mt. i. 19; v. 31 sq.; xix. 3, 7-9; Mk. x. 2, 4, 11; Lk. xvi. 18; [1 Esdr. ix. 36]; and improperly a wife deserting her husband is said rbv Sv&pa andkveiv in Mk. x. 12 [cf. Diod. 12,18] (unless, as is more probable, Mark, contrary to historic accuracy [yet cf. Joseph, antt. 15, 7, 10], makes Jesus speak in accordance with Greek and Roman usage, ace. to which wives also repudiated their husbands [reff. in Mey. adl.]); (cf. nW, Jer. iii. 8; Deut. xxi. 14 ; xxii. 19, 29). S. Mid. diroXvofuu, prop, to send one's self away; to depart [W. 253 (238)]: Acts xxviii. 25 (returned home; Ex. xxxiii. 11).*diro-ij&crcro): (jia<ra-<a to touch with the hands, handle, work with the hands, knead), to wipe off; Mid. diro/xd(r-<rofuu to wipe one's self off, to wipe off for one's self: rbv Kovtoprov iifiiv, Lk. x. 11. (In Grk. writ. fr. Arstph. down.) *&iro-W|u»; (ycfuo to dispense a portion, to distribute), to assign,portion out, (air6 as in airobiiSaiu [q. v., cf. a7r<5,V.]): rivl « viz. Tipt)i>, showing honor, 1 Pet. iii. 7, (bo Hdian. 1, 8, 1; r^v Tifir/i> Km rfjv ei^apurriav, Joseph, antt. 1, 7,1; t§ orwrioSir^ iraaav cvrpwrip, Ignat. ad Magnes,.; 3; first found in [Simon. 97 in Anthol. Pal. 7,253, 2 (vol. i. p. 64 ed. Jacobs)] •, Pind. Isthm. 2, 68; often in Plat., Aristot., Plut., al.).*                                                :iiro-vtirra : to wash off; 1 aor. mid. diren\|'dfxtji>; in mid. to wash one's self off, to wash off for one's self:, ras X«Tpas, Mt. xxvii. 24, cf. Deut. xxi. 6 sq. (The earlier Greeks say dwonfco—but with fut. dirovi\|ro>, 1 aor. dire-viy\ra; the later, as Theophr. char. 25 [30 (17)]; Plut. Phoc. 18; Athen. iv. c. 31 p. 149 c., &voviirr<o, although this is found [but in the mid.] even in Horn. Od. 18, 179.)*                                       vdwo-trlirrw : 2 aor. animaav; [(cf. nlwr<o) ; fr. Horn, down]; to fall off, slip down from: Acts ix. 18 [W. § 52, 4, 1 a.].*&ir<MrXav&tt, -&; 1 aor. pass. anenkavr)6r)v; to cause to go astray, trop. to lead away from the truth to error: nva, Mk. xiii. 22; pass, to go astray, stray away from: cmb tijs mtrrecos, 1 Tim. vi. 10. ([Hippocr.]; Plat. Ax. p. 369 d.; Polyb. 3, 57, 4; Dion. Hal., Plut., al.)*&iro-ir\e<o; 1 aor. djrorXeuaa", [fr.Hom. down]; to sail away, depart by ship, set sail: Acts xiii. 4; xiv. 26; xx. 15; xxvii. 1.*atiro-irXivo: [1 aor. tmiirkvva (?)]; to wash off: Lk. v. 2 (where L Tr TO txt. fa\wov, T WH mrg. -av, for R G careirhwav [possibly an impf. form, cf. B. 40 (35); Soph. Glossary, etc. p. 90]). (Horn. Od. 6, 95; Plat., Plut., and subseq. writ.; Sept. 2 S. xix. 24, [cf. Jer. ii. 22; iv. 14; Ezek. xvi. 9 var.].) *Airo-irvl^w: 1 aor. arttirnga; 2 aor. pass, aireirviyriv; (ano as in amoiereivat q. v. [cf. to choke offj) ; to choke: Mt. xiii. 7 (T WH mrg. envi£av) ; Lk. viii. 7 (of seed overlaid by thorns and killed by them) ; to suffocate with water, to drown, Lk. viii. 33 (as in Dem. 32, 6 [i. e. p. 883, 28 etc.; schol. ad Eur. Or. 812]).*diropco, -co: impf. 3 pers. sing. ryir6pei (Mk. vi. 20 T WH Tr mrg.) ; [pres. mid. aTropoOfiai]", to be foropos (fr. a priv. and ir(5pos a transit, ford, way, revenue, resource), i. e. to be without resources, to be in straits, to be left wanting, to be embarrassed, to be in doubt, not to know which way to turn; [impf. in Mk. vi. 20 (see above) noWh rptooti he was in perplexity about many things or much perplexed (cf. Thuc.5,40,3; Xen. Hell. 6, 1, 4; Hdt.3,4; 4,179; Aristot. meteorolog. 1,1) ; elsewhere] Mid. to be at a loss with one's self, be in doubt; not to know how to decide or what to do, to be perplexed: absol. 2 Co. iv. 8; irepi nvos, Lk. xxiv. 4 L T Tr WH; jrepi rivos ns Xcyet, Jn. xiii. 22 ; airopoviMi iv iyXv I am perplexed about you, I know not how to deal with you, in what style to address you, Gal. iv. 20 ; airopoifievos iy&t els [T Tr WH om. els] rf)v irepl tovtov [tot L T Tr WH] ^tijo-iv I being perplexed how to decide in reference to the inquiry concerning him [or these things'], Acts xxv. 20. (Often in prof. auth. fr. Hdt. down; often also in Sept.)   [Comp. : 8i-, e£-a7rop«».] *diropCa, -as, fj, (airopeu>, q. v.), the state of one who is Swopos, perplexity: Lk. xxi. 25. (Often in Grk. writ. fr. [Pind. and] Hdt. down; Sept.)*dfiro-pplirrw: 1 aor. amppt^ra [T WH write with one p;airop<f>avl£cosee P,p]; [fr. Horn, down]; to throw away, cast down; re-flexively, to cast one's self down: Acts xxvii. 43 [R.V. cast themselves overboard]. (So in Lcian. ver. hist. 1, 30 var. ; [Chariton 3, 5, see D'Orville ad loc]; cf. W. 251 (236); [B. 145 (127)].)*dir-ofxj>avO>>: [1 aor. pass. ptcp. dirop<pano-6eis]; (fr. op(pav6s bereft, and diro sc. twos), to bereave of a parent or parents, (so Aeschyl. choeph. 247 (249)); hence metaph. diropipano-BivTts dip' ifiav bereft of your intercourse and society, 1 Th. ii. 17 [here ReceJ* (by mistake) airtxpavi-67): 1 aor. mid. dmtm.evao-dp.ip>; (<ricevd£a to prepare, provide, fr. oncevos a utensil), to carry off goods and chattels; to pack up and carry off; mid. to carry off one's personal property or provide for its carrying away, (Polyb. 4, 81, 11; Diod. 13, 91; Dion. Hal. 9, 23, etc) : dirocrKevaadfifvoi having collected and removed our baggage, Acts xxi. 15 f but LTTr WH read firio-Ktvatrdfu-*» (q. V.).*diro-o-KCcurpo, -ror, t6, (<mafo>, fr. o-Kia), a shade cast by one object upon another, a shadow, rpoirfjs diroo-Kiao-pa shadow caused by revolution, Jas. i. 17.   Cf. hiravyao-pa.*diro-o-irdw, -a; 1 aor. ajreWacra; 1 aor. pass. direaitcurBrpi; to draw off, tear away: r. p.dxaipav to draw one's sword, Mt. xxvi. 51 (eKoirav r. pax- (or p'opxpaiav), 1 S. xvii. 51 [Alex, etc. J; airav, 1 Chr. xi. 11; Mk. xiv. 47); atroanav roiis fuxBrjTas <wr«ra> iavr&v to draw away the disciples to their own party, Acts xx. 30, (very similarly, Ael. v. h. 13, 32). Pass, reflexively: cmooiraa-Btvres an avratv having torn ourselves from the embrace of our friends, Acts xxi. 1; dire<Tird<r(h) air avrav he parted, tore himself, from them about a stone's cast, Lk. xxii. 41; cf. Meyer ad loc. (In prof. auth. fr. [Pind. and] Hdt. down.) *aarotrratrla, -as, %, (d^w'ora/uat), a falling away, defection, apostasy; in the Bible sc. from the true religion : Acts xxi. 21; 2 Th. ii. 3; ([Josh. xxii. 22; 2 Chr. xxix. 19 ; xxxiii. 19]; Jer. ii. 19; xxxvi. (xxix.) 32 Compl.; 1 Mace, ii. 15). The earlier Greeks say dirdaraa-is; see Lob. ad Phryn. p. 528; [W. 24].*                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                  %f a r o o - r d o - i o v ,   - o v ,   t 6 ,   v e r y   s e l d o m   i n   n a t i v e   G r k .   w r i t . ,   d e f e c t i o n ,   o f   a   f r e e d m a n   f r o m   h i s   p a t r o n ,   D e m .   3 5 ,   4 8   [ 9 4 0 ,   1 6 ]   ;   i n   t h e   B i b l e   1 .   d i v o r c e ,   r e p u d i a t i o n :   M t .   x i x .   7 ;   M k .   x .   4   ( P i f t X i o v   d r r o o r a o - i o v ,   e q u i v .   t o   " 1 | ) D   / W l |   b o o k   o r   b i l l   o f   d i v o r c e ,   D e ut. xxiv. 1, 3; [Is. 1.1; Jer. iii. 8]). 2. a bill of divorce: Mt. v. 31. Grotius ad loc. and Lightfoot, Horae Hebr. ad loc, give a copy of one.*dno-o-rcydgu: 1 aor. aireoreyao-a; (<rreydC<o, fr. ariyrf) ; to uncover, take off the roof: Mk. ii. 4 (Jesus, with his hearers, was in the Urepaov q. v., and it was the roof of this which those who were bringing the sick man to Jesus are said to have ' dug out'; [cf. B. D. s. v. House, p. 1104]).    (Strabo 4, 4, 6, p. 303; 8, 3, 30, p. 542.) *dntHrrlWo; fut. diroorfXa; 1 aor. dirtoreCka; pf. diti-arahta, [3 pers. plur. ditttrrakKav Acts xvi. 36 L T Tr WH (see yivofuu init.); Pass., pres. dn-ooreXAojuat]; pf. dire<rra\-fiat; 2 aor. drrtaraKrjv; [fr. Soph, down]; prop, to send off, send away;      1. to order (one) to go to a place ap-pointed; a. either persona sent with commissions, or thing s intended for some one. So, very frequently, Jesus teaches that God sent him, as Mt. x. 40; Mk. ix. 37; Lk. x. 16; Jn. v. 36, etc. he, too, is said to have sent his apostles, i. e. to have appointed them: Mk. vi. 7; Mt. x. 16 ; Lk. xxii. 35; Jn. xx. 21, etc. messengers are sent: Lk. vii. 3 ; ix. 52; x. 1; servants, Mk. vi. 27 ; xii. 2 ; Mt. xxi. 36; xxii. 3; an embassy, Lk. xiv. 32; xix. 14; angels, Mk. xiii. 27; Mt.xxiv. 31, etc. Things are said to be sent, which are ordered to be led away or conveyed to any one, as Mt. xxi. 3; Mk. xi. 3 ; to Spenavov i. e. reapers, Mk. iv. 29 [al, take dwocrriXKa here of the " putting forth " of the sickle, i. e. of the act of reaping ; cf. Joel (iii. 18) iv. 13; Rev. xiv. 15 (s. r.ire'tma, b.)J; t&v Xoyov, Acts x. 36; xiii. 26 (L T Tr WH i£an«TTakif)! rrfli iirayytKiav (equiv. to to iirriyye\p.evov, i. e. the promised Holy Spirit) icj> bpAs, Lk. xxiv. 49 [T Tr WH i£a-jrooTeAA<o]; rl 8ia \eipos twos, after the Hebr. T|, Acts xi.30. b. The Place of the sending is specified :dnoar. tls riva rairov, Mt. xx. 2; Lk. i. 26; Acts vii. 34; x. 8; xix. 22; 2 Tim. iv. 12; Eev. v. 6, etc. God sent Jesus tit ravKotrpjov: Jn. iii. 17; x. 36; xvii. 18; 1 Jn. iv. 9. tls [unto i.e.] among: Mt. xv. 24; Lk. xi. 49; Acts [xxii. 21 WH mrg.] ; xxvi. 17; [iv (by a pregnant or a Lat. construction) cf. W. § 50, 4; B. 329 (283) : Mt. x. 16; Lk. x. 3; yet see 1 a. above]; cmiaa twos, Lk. xix. 14; epmpo-<r6(v twos, Jn. iii. 28; and np6 itpoo-iaitov twos* after the Hebr. -'jfl1?, before (to precede) one: Mt. xi. 10; Mk. i. 2; Lk. vii. 27; x. 1. jrpds tjwj, to one : Mt. xxi. 34, 37; Mk. xii. 2 sq.; Lk. vii. 3, 20; Jn. v. 33; Acts viii. 14; 2 Co. xii. 17, etc. Whence, or by or from whom, one is sent: imo tov Beov, Lk. i. 26 (T Tr WH djnf); irapa 0eov, Jn. i. 6 (Sir. xv. 9) ; diro with gen. of pers., from the house of any one: Acts x. 17 [T WH Tr mrg. (mi], 21 Rec.; ex with gen. of place: Jn. i. 19. o. The Object of the mission is indicated by an infin. following: Mk. iii. 14; Mt. xxii. 8; Lk. i. 19 ; iv. 18 (Is. lxi. 1, [on the pf^cJjJL£72 (255); B. 197 (171)]); Lk. ix. 2; Jn. iv. 38 yjMDo- i-17jMev. xxii. 6. [foil, by elsfor:. els buiKoviav, HebTI. 14. "foil, by iva: Mk. xii. 2,13; Li-xx. 10, 20 ; Jn. i. 19 ; iii. 17; vii. 32; 1 Jn. iv. 9. [foil, by oiras: Actsix.17.] foil, by an ace. with inf.: Actsv.21. foil, by rwd with a pred. ace.: Acts iii. 26 (evXoyovvra v/ms to confer God's blessing on you [cf. B. 203 (176) sqq.]) ; Acts vii. 35 (Spxovra, to.be a ruler); 1 Jn. iv. 10. d. dn-ooreXKnv by itself, without an ace. [cf. W. 594 (552); B. 146 (128)]: as dTroo-rt'XKew irp6s nva, Jn. v. 33; with the addition of the ptcp. \eymv, \eyovad, At-yovres, to say through a messenger : Mt. xxvii. 19 ; Mk. iii. 31 [here (pavovpres airov R G, KaXovvres air. L T Tr WH]; Jn. xi. 3 ; Acts xiii. 15; [xxi. 25 irtpl t&v iremorev-K&ratv idvwv fifUts ditcoTfikaptv (L Tr txt. WH txt.) Kpi-vavres etc. we sent word, giving judgment, etc.]. When one accomplished anything through a messenger, it is expressed thus: diroo-Tfikas or irtp.i\ras he did so and so; as, dirooTeikas dveZKe, Mt. ii. 16; Mk. vi. 17; Acts vii. 14; Rev. i. 1; (so also the Greeks, as Xen. Cyr. 3,1, 6 ne^at rjpura, Plut. de liber, educ. c 14 irtin\ras dvtiKt rbv Ota-airoiTTepiea68                                                         dirocrwcpywyo?p; and Sept. 2 K. vi. 13 dirooreiXaj \{$ofuu aMv).2.  to send away i. e. to dismiss;   a. to allow one to depart : nva iv d<£e'<ro, that he maybe in a state of liberty, Lk. iv. 18 (19), (Is. lviii. 6).   b. to order one to depart, send off: Mk. viii. 26; nva *ev6v, Mk. xii. 3.   c. to drive away: Mk. v. 10. [Comp. : eg-, <rui»-a7rooT«XXa>. Syn. see Trc/iTTCD, fin.]dnro-orept'io, S>; 1 aor. dn-eorepijo-a; [Pass., pres. djro-(tt«poifiai]; pf. ptcp. direoTepi)/ievor; to defraud, rob, despoil : absol., Mk. x. 19; 1 Co. vi. 8; dXXqXovs to withhold themselves from one another, of those who mutually deny themselves cohabitation, 1 Co. vii. 5. Mid. to allow one's self to be defrauded [W. § 38, S]: 1 Co. vi. 7; nvd twos (as in Grk. writ.), to deprive one of a thing; pass. dire<rrcpr|fMxoi i-ijs dXij&ias, 1 Tim. vi. 5 [W. 196 (185); B. 158 (138)]; ti to defraud of a thing, to withdraw or keep back a thing by fraud: pass, fucrdos direorepripfvos, Jas. v. 4 (T Tr WH a^ni<rrtpi\y.ivos, see a<\niarepia>; [cf. also dm5, H. 2 d. bb. p. 59"]), (Deut. xxiv. 14 [(16) Alex.]; Mai. iii. 5).*diro-<rToVf|, -rjs, ij, (dffooT«XXo>); 1. a sending away: Tt/ioXeWos «s SuceXi'ai', Plut. Timol. 1, etc.; of the sending off of a fleet, Thuc. 8,9; also of consuls with an army, i. e. of an expedition, Polyb. 26, 7,1. 2. a sending away i. e. dismission, release: Sept. Eccl. viii.  8.3.  a thing sent, esp of gifts: 1 K. ix. 16 [Alex.]; 1 Mace, ii. 18 etc. cf. Grimm ad loc.       4. in the N. T. the office and dignity of the apostles of Christ, (Vulg. apostolatus), apostolate, apostleship: Acts i. 25; Ro. i. 5; 1 Co. ix. 2 ; Gal. ii. 8.*AircSoroXos, -ov, 6;       1. a tjAegaje^ messenger, one sent ^V            K    i ,   ;          jg^       g,fj^&JS&XCSss, (Hdt. 1, 21; 5, 3^forrjV?srin 1 K. xiv. 6 [Alex.]; rabbin. Tyhvi) : Jn. xiii. 16 (where 6 av6or. and 6 irefi\\/as aiirdv are contrasted) ; foil, by &, gen., as twv ck-kXijo-i&v, 2 Co. viii. 23 ; Phil. ii. 25; dirdor. rqs 6>oXoyias fjix&v the apostle whom we confess, of Christ, God's chief messenger, who has brought the kXtjo-i? nrovpdvjos, as compared with Moses, whom the Jews confess, Heb- iii. 1. 2. Specially appliedto the twelyajtijaj jtes whom Chrkt jeJ.efilgd,.gBt oFSe^^fltit^ejrf hisj^herents^to be his constant companions and the heralds to proclaim to men the kingdom of God: Mt. x. 1-4; Lk. vi. 13; Acts i. 26; Rev. xxi. 14, and often, but nowhere in the Gospel and Epistles of John; [" the word dirdoToXos occurs 79 times, in the N. T.. and of these 68 instances"lijTin"git,. Lflkfcand St. Paul." Bp. Lghtft-1- *Wiffi*EEese~apostle3 Paul claimed equality, because through a heavenly intervention Tie had been appointed by the ascended Christ himaelfjo preach the gospel among the Gentiles, and owed his knowledge of the way of salvation not to man's instruction but to direct revelation from Christ himself, and moreover had evinced his apostolic qualifications by many signal proofs: Gal. i. 1, 11 sq.; ii. 8 ; 1 Co. i. 17; ix. 1 sq.; xv. 8-10; 2 Co. iii. 2 sqq.; xii. 12 ; 1 Tim. ii. 7; 2 Tim. i. 11, cf. Acts xxvi. 12-20. According to Paul, apostles surpassed as well the various other orders of Christian teachers (cf. $1800x0X0?, eiayyeXurnjs, ttoo-W)  as also *h° rest of those on whom the specialgifts (cf. xdpitrpa) of the Holy Spirit had been bestowed, by receiving a richer and more copious conferment of the Spirit: 1 Co. xii. 28 sq.; Eph. iv. 11. Certain false teachers are rated sharply for arrogating to themselves the name and authority of apostles of Christ: 2 Co. xi. 5,13; Rev. ii. 2. 3. In a broader sense the name is transferred to other eminent~Christian teachersY~as Sarnabas, Acts~xiv7l4, and perEapsalso Timothy and Silvanus, 1 Th. ii. 7 (6), cf. too .Ro. xvi. 7 (?). But in Lk. xi. 49; Eph. iii. 5; Rev. xviii. 20,' apostles' is to be taken in the narrower sense. [On the application of the term see esp. Bp. Lghtft. on Gal. pp. 92-101; Har-naek on 'Teaching' etc. 11, 3; cf BB.DD. s. v.]dirooTOiuvrl^w; (oToj*aTi£<»—not extant—from otojki) ; prop, to speak dir& orojiciTos, (cf. airoarqBi^w); 1. to recite from memory: Themist. or. 20 p. 288 ed. Hard.; to repeat to a pupil (anything) for him to commit to memory: Plat. Euthyd. p. 276 c, 277 a.; used of a Sibyl prophesying, Plut. Thes. 24. 2. to ply with questions, catechize, and so to entice to [ofi-hand] answers: nva, Lk. xi. 53*airo-cn-p^w; fut. airoorptyn; 1 aor. mriorpetya; 2 aor. pass. d7reorpd<pi)v; [pres. mid. diroarpe(pofuu; fr. Horn, down]; 1. to turn away: nva or ti an6 twos, 2 Tim. iv. 4 (tJji> aKorjv anb Tijs dXijdetas); to remove anything from any one, Ro. xi. 26 (Is. lix. 20); diroorpctptiv Tivd simply, to turn him away from allegiance to any one, tempt to defection, [A. V. pervert], Lk. xxiii. 14. 2. to turn back, return, bring back: Mt. xxvi. 52 (put back thy sword into its sheath); Mt. xxvii. 8, of Judas bringing back the shekels, where T Tr WH torpetye, [cf. Test. xii. Patr. test. Jos. § 17]. (In the same sense for 3't»n, Gen. xiv. 16; xxviii. 15; xliii. 11 (12), 20 (21), etc.; Bar. i. 8; ii. 34, etc.) 3. intrans. to turn one's self away, turn back, return : cmb t&v irovripiav, Acts iii. 26, cf. 19, (airb Afiaprias, Sir. viii. 5; xvii. 21 [26 Tdf.]; to return from a place, Gen. xviii. 83; 1 Mace. xi. 54, etc.; [see Kneucker on Bar. i. 18]; Xen. Hell. 3, 4,12) ; cf. Meyer on Acts 1. c.; [al. (with A. V.) take it actively here: in turning away every one of you, etc.]. 4. Mid., with 2 aor. pass., to turn one's self away from, with ace. of the obj. (cf. [Jelf § 548 obs. 1; Kriig. § 47, 28,1]; B. 192 (166)); to reject, refuse : nvd, Mt. v. 42; Heb. xii. 25; ri]v dXq-6(tav, Tit. i. 14; in the sense of deserting, nvd, 2 Tim. i. 15.*o/iro-oTvy^w, -S>; to dislike, abhor, have a horror of: Ro. xii. 9; (Hdt. 2, 47; 6, 129; Soph., Eur., al.). The word is fully discussed by Fritzsche ad loc. [who takes the d»ro- as expressive of separation (cf. Lat. refor-midare), al. regard it as intensive; (see djr<5,V.)].*dirooTrvdfw^oS) 'ovi (.o-uvayayfi, q. v.), excluded from the sacred assemblies of the Israelites; excommunicated, [A. V. put out of the synagogue']: Jn. ix. 22; xii. 42; xvi. 2. Whether it denotes also exclusion f r. all intercourse with Israelites (2 Esdr. x. 8), must apparently be left in doubt; cf. Win. [or Riehrn] R W B. s. v. Bann; Wie,seler on Gal. i. 8, p. 45 sqq. [reproduced by Prof. Riddle In Schaff's Lange's Romans pp. 304-806; cf. B. D. s. v. Excommunication].   (Not found in prof- auth.)*dTrord&tradarorio-o-a: to set apart, to separate; in the N. T. only in Mid. djroraWo/uu; 1 aor. <nrfra£d/xi;v; 1. prop, to separate one's self, withdraw one's self horn any one, i. e. to take leave of, bid farewell to, (Vulg. valefacio [etc.]) : rivi, Mk. vi. 46; Lk. ix. 61; Acts xviii. 18,21 [here L T Tr om. the dat.]; 2 Co. ii. 13. (That the early Grk. •writ, never so used the word, but said doTtd{eo6aL nva, is shown by Lobeck ad Phryn. p. 28 sq.; [cf. W. 23 (22); B. 179 (156)].) 2. trop. to renounce, forsake: nvi, Lk. xiv. 33. (So also Joseph, antt. 11, 6,8; Phil, alleg. iii. § 48; rals tov fKov (ppovr'un, Euseb. h. e. 2,17, 5; [r£ /%, Ignat. ad Philadelph. 11, 1; cf. Herm. mand. 6, 2, a; Clem. Bom. 2 Cor. 6, 4 and 5 where see Gebh. and Harn. for other exx., also Soph. Lex., s. v.].) *miimiW*,-a; [1 aor. pass. ptcp.arroreXe<r$us]; toper-feet; to bring quite to an end: Hunts, accomplish, Lk. xiii. 32 (L T Tr WH for R G <WA<5); (j dpa/trta dnoreXe-vOt'ura having come to maturity, Jas. i 15. (Hdt., Xen., Plat., and subseq. writ.) *oiro-T£6r|(ti: 2 aor. mid. diredepTjv; [fr. Horn, down]; to put off or aside; in the N. T. only mid. to put off from one's self: ra l/idna, Acts vii. 58 ; [to lay up or away, ev rfi <j>v\aKJj (i. e. put), Mt. xiv. 3 L T Tr WH (so els <Pv\a-ki\v, Lev. xxiv. 12; Num. xv. 34; 2 Chr. xviii. 26; Polyb. 24, 8, 8; Diod. 4, 49, etc.)]; trop. those things are said to be put off or away which any one gives up, renounces: as to. epya tov (tkotovs, Ro. xiii. 12; — Eph. iv. 22 [cf. W. 347 (325); B. 274 (236)], 25; Col. iii. 8; Jas. i. 21; 1 Pet. ii. 1; Heb. xii. 1; (rrjv opyf/v, Plut. Coriol. 19; tov w\ov-tov, -rip) naKwtiav, etc. Luc. dial. mort. 10, 8; r. ikevBepiav K. napprjcrlav, ibid. 9, etc.).*curo-nviio-o-u; 1 aor. direriva£a; [1 aor. mid. ptcp. diro-nva£antvos, Acts xxviii. 5 Tr mrg.] ; to shake off: Lk. ix. 5; Acts xxviii. 5. (1 S. x. 2; Lam. ii. 7; Eur. Bacch. 253; [airarivaxOij, Galen 6, 821 ed. Kuhn].) *diro-rivo) and diro-riat '                                                                        %  i n t .   a n o r i t r a ;   ( m o   a s   i n   d i r o b i - S a / u   [ c f .   a l s o   d v o ,   V . ] ) ,   t o   p a y   o f f ,   r e p a y :   P h i l e m .   1 9 .   ( O f t e n   i n   S e p t .   f o r   D   W ;   i n   p r o f .   a u t h .   f r .   H o r n ,   d o w n . )   *   d i r o - r o \ | j u £ c o ,   S > ;   p r o p ,   t o   b e   b o l d   o f   o n e ' s   s e l f   ( d w o   [ q .   v .   V . ] ) ,   i .   e .   t o   a s s u m e   b o l d n e s s ,   m a k e   b o l d :   Ro. x. 20; cf. Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iv. p. 15. (Occasionally in Thuc, Plat., Aeschin., Polyb., Diod., Plut.) *diroTopCa, -ay, fj, (the nature of that which is diroTopos, cut off, abrupt, precipitous like a cliff, rough; fr. diro-Tffipa), prop, sharpness, (differing fr. dirorofit) a cutting off, a segment); severity, roughness, rigor: Ro. xi. 22 (where opp. to xpio-t6tt]s, as in Plut. de lib. educ. c. 18 to wpaorrjs, in Dion. Hal. 8, 61 to to emeuces, and in Diod. p. 591 [exept. lxxxiii. (frag.L 82, 27, 3Dind.)] to q/ic-69airor6|u>s, adv., (cf. dworofiia) ; a. abruptly, precipitously, b. trop. sharply, severely, [cf. our curtly] : Tit. i. 13; 2 Co. xiii. 10. On the adj. diroro/ios cf. Grimm on Sap. p. 121 [who in illustration of its use in Sap. v. 20, 22; vi. 5, 11; xi. 10; xii. 9; xviii. 15, refers to the similar metaph. use in Diod. 2, 57; Longin. de sublim. 27; and the use of the Lat. abscisus in Yal. Max. 2, 7, 14, etc.; see also Polb. 17,11, 2; Polyc. ad Phil. 6,1].*axnrrptira: [fr. Horn, down]; to turn away; Mid. [pres. diroTpeirofuu, impv. dirorpewov] to turn one's self away from, to shun, avoid: nvd or r< (see diroarpe<pa> sub fin.), 2 Tim. iii. 5. (4 Mace. i. 33; Aeschyl. Sept. 1060; Eur. Iph. Aul. 336; [Aristot. plant. 1, 1 p. 815", 18; Polyb. l])» -as, 7, (aireivtu), absence: Phil. ii. 12. [From Aeschyl. down.] *diro-<JK'pw: 1 aor. dmjveyKa; 2 aor. inf. dntvfyiceiv; Pass., [pres. inf. dirocpepto-Oai]; 1 aor. inf. dmI'c^rat; [fr. Horn, down]; to carry off, take away: nva, with the idea of violence included, Mk. xv. 1; «r toitov nva, Rev. xvii. 3; xxi. 10; pass. Lk. xvi. 22. to carry or bring away (Lat. defero): t\ eh with ace. of place, 1 Co. xvi. 3; t* ditd twos eitl nva, with pass., Acts xix. 12 (L T Tr WH for Rec. em<f>epeo~6ai).*diro-+eiY» [ptcp- in 2 Pet. ii. 18 L T Tr WH; W. 342 (321)]; 2 aor. dire<j>vyop; [fr. (Horn.) batrach. 42, 47 down]; to flee from, escape; with ace, 2 Pet. ii. 18 (where L T wrongly put a comma after diro<f>. [W. 529 (492)]), 20; with gen., by virtue of the pre p .   [ B .   1 5 8   ( 1 3 8 ) ;   W .   §   5 2 ,   4 ,   1   c ] ,   2   P e t .   i .   4 . *  d i r o - < | > e ¬ y y o | i a i ;   1   a o r .   d v e ^ B e y ^ d i u j v ;   t o   s p e a k   o u t ,   s p e a k   f o r t h ,   p r o n o u n c e ,   n o t   a   w o r d   o f   e v e r y - d a y   s p e e c h ,   b u t   o n e   "   b e l o n g i n g   t o   d i g n i f i e d   a n d   e l e v a t e d   d i s c o u r s e ,   l i k e   t h e   L a t .   p r o f a r i ,   p r o n u n t i a r e ;   p r o p e r l y   i t   h a s   t h e   f o r c e   o f   t o   u t t e r   o r   d e c l a r e   o n e ' s   s e l f ,   g i v e   o n e ' s   o p i n i o n ,   ( e i n e n   A u s s p r u c h   t h u n ) ,   a n d   i s   u s e d   n o t   o n l y   o f   p r o p h e t s   ( s e e   K y p k e   o n   A c t s   i i .   4 ,    a d d i n g   f r o m   t h e   S e p t .   E z e k .   x y i .   9 ;   M i c .   v .   1 2 ;   1   C h r .   x x v .   1 ) ,   b u t   a l s o   o f   w i s e   m e n   a n d   p h i losophers (Diog. Laert. 1, 63; 73; 79; whose pointed sayings the Greeks call diroffleyiMra, Cic. off. 1, 29) "; [see ^>6iyyo/j.ai}- Accordingly, " it is used of the utterances of the Christians, and esp. Peter, on that illustrious day of Pentecost after they had been fired by the Holy Spirit, Acts ii. 4, 14; and also of the disclosures made by Paul to [before] king Agrippa concerning the v^is xvpiov that had been given him, Acts xxvi. 25."    Win. De verb. comp. etc. Pt. iv. p. 16.*<£iro-<|>opTl£o|uu; (<poprl(co to load; tpopros a load), to disburden one's self; W, to lay down a load, unlade, discharge